« 
E HI Gf IIS H- RUSSIAN 



GRAMMAR 



WORKS BY THE SAME AUTHOR. 



PARALLEL DICTIONARIES OF THE RUSSIAN, FRENCH, GERMAN AND ENGLISH 
LANGUAGES, based on the Dictionaries of the Russian Academy, French Aca- 
demy, Adelung, Heinsius, Johnson, Webster and other Lexicographers. Second 
edition, Carlsruhe i852 — 53, h parts, gr. in-16. 
Part. I. PyccK0-4>paHgy3CK0-H*MegK0-AHr^iHCKiH C-ioBapB. 
Part. II. Dictionnaire fran<jais-russe-allemand et anglais. 
Part. III. Seutfdj^atuffifcfj^g-ranjbftf^^iJnQrii'die^ 2Borterbud). 
Part. IV. English-Russian-French and German Dictionary. 
Each Dictionary is sold separately. Price 8 shillings or 2 rbls 50 cop. s. 

3THM0Jl0rH»IECKIH IEKCHKOK h PYCCKArO H3WKA hjh PyccKo-QpaHuyscKiu-Cjioeapb, 
b-b KOTopoMTb PyccKia ciosa pacnojioMjeHH no npoHcxosKaeHiio. 2 parts in-8°. 
St-Pet. 1835 — 1836. This Lexicon was honoured with the great Demidof price 
by the Imperial Academy of Sciences of St-Petersburg. — Price 20 sh. 

GRAMMAIRE RAISONNEE DE LA LANGUE RUSSE, precedee d'une Introduction sur I'his- 
toire de cet idiome, de son alphabet et de sa Grammaire. 2 vol. in-8°. St-Pet. 
1829. This work is a translation of the Russian Grammar of Mr Gretsch: npo- 
dpaHHaa rpasiMaTHKa, and is written with special application to the French lan- 
guage. — Price, 12 sh. 

RECHERCHES SUR LES RACINES DES IDIOCIES SLAVONS, comparers avec celles des 
langues etrangeres, pour servir a l'etude comparative des langues. 1 part. in-8°, 
St-Pet. 1832. This book is an extract from the work: H3c^t40BaHia o KopHaxt 
CjaBaHCKHX'b Haptqia, by Admiral Shishhof. 

GRAMMAIRE FRANCAISE-RUSSE, ou Principes de la Langue russe a l'usage des Francois, 
avec des tableaux synoptiques pour les declipaisons et les conjugaisons, des 
Themes ou Exercices gradues pour l'application des differentes regies de la Gram- 
maire, le Corrige de ces exercices et l'accentuation de tous les mots russes. 
Deuxieme edition, Carlsruhe, 1853. — Price, 38 pence or 4 fr. 

$>eutf<hstufftfd)e <2prad)Ieljre, ober @runbfa£e ber rufpfcfjen <&pxa$t jum @ebraud)e fiir £>eutfd)e, mtt 
ii&erfid)tnd)en Sahetten ix6er bte ©eclinationen unb (Sonjugattonen, ne&jt ftufenmafngen 
iifeungSGufgciben jut 2ditvenbiuig ber eevfd)iebenen grammcittfcften 9Jegeln, forote ber ridjtigen 
U&evfe^ung btefer 2(ufga6en unb ber Setonung after rufpfdjen SBUrter, Uartdrulje, 1853. — 
$ret« 1 2#tr, 2 9tgt. ob. 38 pence. 



CARLSRUHE. — PRINTED RY W. HASPER, PRINTER TO THE COURT. 




ENGLISH -RUSSIAN 

GRAMMAR, 

OR 

PRINCIPLES 

OF THE 

RUSSIAN LANGUAGE 
FOR THE USE OF ENGLISHMEN, 

WITH SYNOPTICAL TABLES FOR THE DECLENSIONS AND CONJUGATIONS, GRADUATED 
THEMES OR EXERCISES FOR THE APPLICATION OF THE GRAMMATICAL RULES, THE 
CORRECT CONSTRUCTION OF THESE EXERCISES AND THE ACCENTUATION OF ALL THE 

RUSSIAN WORDS, 

RY 

CHARLES PHILIP MIFF, 

Knight of the Russian Order of St-Anne and of the Order of the Zaehringen Lion of Baden. — 

Author of the Etymological Dictionary of the Russian Language and of the Parallel Dictionaries of 

the Russian, French, German and English Languages. 









Pen de regies, beaucoup de re'rlexions, et encore 
plus d'usage. 

Du Marsais. 



SECOND EDITION, COMPLETELY REMODELLED 




CABLSRUHE. LEIPZIG. 

PRINTED FOR THE AUTHOR. K. F. KOHLER , Bookseller. 

1853. 



.1?* 



PREFACE 

TO THE SECOND EDITION. 



The first edition of this Grammar was published at St-Petersburg in 
1821, in French, under the title of Grammaire russe a Image des etrangers 
qui desirent connaitre a fond les principes de cette langue*~). Up to that 
period all the elementary books, relating to the study of the Russian lan- 
guage, had been formed on the model of the Latin, which without any suf- 
ficient reason had been considered the type, according to which all other 
tongues must be regulated. Since that time the works of the Russian gram- 
marians Gretsch and Vostokof**^), the philological Researches of Pavsky 
on the formation of the Russian language and the Essay on the com- 
parative grammar of the Russian language by Davtjdof***). and other 



*) This Grammar has been translated into Polish by A. B. Hlebowicz under the 
title of Grammatyka Rossyyska dla uzytku cudzoziemcow napisana, przelozona z fran- 
cuskiego jezyka i potrzebnemi dodatkami do uzytku Polakow zastosouana, Wilna 1823. 

**) The following is a list of the various Grammars published by Mr Gretsch: 
1) IJpocmpaHHaH PyccKaa rpaMMamuKa, St- Pet. 1827. 2) npaummecKan Pyccnaa 
TpaMMamuKa, St-Pet. 1827 and 1834. 3) UmaAbHun IJpaeuAa PyccKoa rpaMjiiamurcu, 
St-Pet. 1828, the 10th edition of which appeared in 1847. 4 J IJpaKmmechie YpoKu 
PyccKoil rpaMMamuKu, St-Pet. 1832. 5) Pyh'06odcm60 kz usyumw PyccKoil TpaM- 
MamuKU, St-Pet. 1843. 6) Yie6Haa PyccKan TpaMMamuKa, St-Pet. 1851, and *l~)Py- 
Koeodcm60 kz npenoda6aHifo no }\e6HOU PyccKoii FpaMMamuKU, St-Pet. 1851. — 
Mr Vostokof has also published a graduated Russian Grammar, which has been re- 
printed several times. 

***) The title of the former work is : <PuAOA02imecKifi Ha6AfodeHiH nadz cocma- 
eoMzPyccKmoH3biKa HpvmoiepeH r. Haech'azo, St-Pet. 1841— 1850; and that of the 
latter: Oimmz o6w / ecpa6HumeAbHou TpaMMamuKu Pyccnazo H3bina, u3daHmiu Bmo- 
pbiMZ OmdwAenieMo MMnepamopcKou AKademiu Haynz, St-Pet. 1852. 



VI PREFACE. 

works on the same subject, have solved many grammatical difficulties and 
definitely fixed the principles of the language. 

The above works I have carefully consulted in writing the new edition 
of my Russian Grammar for the use of strangers. This edition, completely 
remodelled, consists of two parts. The first is the Grammar properly so 
called, in which I have endeavoured to give the rules with a clearness and 
precision which may render their retention by the memory easy. The se- 
cond part consists of Themes or graduated Exercises on each particular rule, 
where I have placed the Russian words below the English, to serve as 
vocabulary. The solution or correct construction of these Exercises will 
be found at the end of the Grammar. 

In order to render the work as extensively useful as possible to for- 
eigners , I have published it simultaneously in three languages, French, 
English and German. Philologists who may wish to see the subject treated 
more in detail, can consult my French translation of the Russian Grammar 
of Mr Gretsch, under the title of Grammaire raisonnee de la Langue russe, 
precedee d'une Introduction sur Vhistoire de cet idiome ) de son alphabet 
et de sa Grammaire, and published at St-Petersburg in 1829. 

Carlsruhe, April 1853. 

The Author. 



TABLE OF CONTENTS. 



Division of the Grammar . . . 

FIRST PART. 

• LEXICOLOGY. 

Sounds or letters ... 

Alphabet • • • 

Division of the letters .... 
Pronunciation of the letters . . 

Vowels 

Semi-vowels 

Consonants 

Syllables and words .... 

Tonic accent 

Reading-Exercise 

Elements of speech .... 

Division of words 

Roots of words 

Inflections of words .... 
Metaplasms of words .... 
Permutation of letters .... 
Epenthesis and prosthesis . . 
Apocope and Syncope .... 

The Substantive 

Division of substantives . . . 
Properties of nouns .... 

Genders 

Aspects 

Numbers 

Cases 

Declension of substantives . . 

Regulars nouns 

Rules of the declensions . . . 

General rules 

Special rules 

Paradigms of the declensions of 

substantives 

First declension 

Second declension 

Third declension 

Irregular nouns ...... 

Exercises on the declension of 
substantices 



3 ag'0 






Page 


1 


The Adjective 


49 




Division of the adjectives 


ib. 




Qualifying adjectives . . . 


ib. 




Possessive adjectives . . . 


. ib. 


ib. 


Properties of adjectives . . 


51 


2 


Gender, number, case . . . 


. ib. 


4 


Apocope of the termination . 


ib. 


5 


Degrees of signification . . 


52 


ib. 


Declension of adjectives . . 


57 


8 


Paradigms of the declensions o 


r 


9 


adjectives 


. ib. 


12 


First declension 


60 


ib. 


Second declension .... 


61 


13 


Third declension 


63 


16 


Exercises on the adjectives . 


64 


17 


The Numerals 


67 


ib. 


Division of numerals . . . 


. ib. 


18 


Cardinal and ordinal numerals 


. 68 


ib. 


Declension of the numerals . 


. 69 


19 


Paradigms of the declension o 


f 


20 


the numerals 


. 70 


ib. 


Special rules of the numerals 


73 


21 


Exercises on the numerals . 


74 


ib. 


The pronoun ... 


. 77 


ib. 


Division of the pronouns . . 


. ib. 


ib. 


Declension of the pronouns . 


79 


25 


Paradigms of the declension o 


r 


26 


the pronouns 


80 


27 


Exercises on the pronouns . 


81 


28 


The Verb . 


. 85 


29 


Division of verbs 




ib. 


30 


Inflections of the verb 




86 


ib 


Tenses 




. ib. 


31 


Aspects 




ib. 




Moods .... 




88 


ib. 


Persons, numbers and genders 


89 


34 


Forms derived from the verb 


. ib. 


36 


Conjugation 


90 


38 


Regular verbs 


. ib. 


40 


Formation of the inflections of verb 
Paradigms of the conjugations o 


3 94 


44 


the regular verbs 


. . 


95 



virr 



TABLE OF CONTENTS. 



Page 

First conjugation 98 

Second conjugation 100 

Third conjugation 104 

Irregular verbs 105 

Conjugation of irregular verbs . 106 

Delineation of verbs .... 109 

Simple verbs 110 

Prepositional verbs 114 

Exercises on the verbs . . . 125 

The participle 130 

Division of the participles . . ib. 

Active and neuter participles . ib. 

Passive participles 131 

Declension of the participles . 132 

Passive verbs '. ib. 

Exercises on the participles . . ib. 

The Adverb and the Gerund . . 134 

Formation of the adverbs . . ib. 

Degrees of comparison ... 135 

Gerunds ib. 

Exercises on the adverbs and the 

gerunds 136 

The Preposition 137 

Division of the prepositions . . ib. 

Government of the prepositions 138 

Exercises on the prepositions . 139 

The Conjunction 140 

Exercises on the conjunctions . 141 

The Interjection ib. 

SECOND PART. 

SYNTAX. 

Division of syntax 141 

Concord of words 142 

Exercises on the concord of words 144 

Dependence of words .... ib. 

Nominative 146 

Vocative ib. 

Accusative .146 



Page 

Dative . 146 

Instrumental 147 

Genitive 148 

Prepositional 149 

Exercises on the dependence . 150 

Construction 157 

THIRD PART. 

ORTHOGRAPHY. 

Use of the letters 158 

Vowels ib. 

Semi- vowels 160 

Consonants ib. 

Doubling of consonants ... 162 

Capital letters 163 

Division of words into syllables ib. 

Orthography of isolated words 164 

Russian words ib. 

Foreign words . . . . . . 166 

Orthographic signs . . . . , . 168 

Marks of punctuation .... 169 

FOURTH PART. 

PROSODY. 

Division of prosody 170 

Orthoepy ib. 

Prosodical or tonic accent . . ib. 

Place of the accent .... ib. 

Versification m 

Tonic versification ib. 

Foot or metre ib. 

Denomination of the verses . . 172 

Caesura 176 

Termination of the verses . . 177 

Rhyme ib. 

Stanza or strophe ib. 

Poetic licenses 178 

SOLUTION OF THE EXERCISES . 179 



FOR THE USE OF ENGLISHMEN. 



1 . — JL his Russian Grammar is divided into four parts, viz : Division. 

I. Lexicology (c^oBonpoii3BeAeHie), or words considered 
as sounds of the human voice and as the elements 
of speech. 

II. St/rcte(c./iOBOCOHHHeHie) J or agreement and construction 
of words in sentences. 

III. Orthography (npaBomicaHie), or the proper use of letters 
to represent words. 

IV. Pro5^/y(cjioroyAapeHie)orOrM^j3yCnpaBop'BHie), i e. 
the manner of uttering words with regard to their ac- 
centuation. 



LEXICOLOGY. 

2. — It being the especial province of this science to explain sounds 
every thing concerning the knowledge of words, it considers 
these first of all as mere sounds , and afterwards as the ele- 
ments of speech. In respect then to mere sounds, words are 
composed of letters (6yKBw); and a collection of these letters 
or signs representing the particular sounds of which the words 
of a language are composed, is called Alphabet (a36yKa), 

Rei/f Russian Grammar. 1 



2 RUSSIAN GRAMMAR. 

Alphabet. 3. — The Russian Alphabet now in use contains 36 letters, 

the roman and italic types of which, as used in printing, also 
the caligraphic characters or hand-writing, with their modern 
and ancient appellation, and their corresponding value of 
sound, are represented in the following table. 

The Russian Alphabet is borrowed from the ecclesiastical Slavonic, 
which besides contains the following eight letters: A 

s, %, c5, jk, CD, a, §, \\f, 

called 3U.J6, vkt., on,, wcb, o, a, kch, ncn, for which now are 
substituted 3, y, ot, ro, o, a, kc, nc. 

The letter ft has hitherto not been comprised among the number of 
the letters of the Alphabet; for which reason it is placed at the end 
of it. — Russian printers have for some time now pretty generally substituted 
the small capital t for the common m, and this t we have made use of, 
both in this Grammar and in our Dictionary. 







RUSSIAN ALPHABET. 


1 


Types 

roman. 

1. A a 


: 
italic. 

A a 


Caligraphic 


characters. 

Round-hand. 


Appellation. 

ancient, modern. 

a3t a 


Value. 

Proper Accidental 
sound. sound. 

2 2 i 

a e o 


Running -hand. 


2. B 6 


E 6 


: S 


35 $ 


6yKH 6e 


b 


P 


3. B b 


B 6 


Jf * 


oJi I 


bbah Be 


V 


f 


4. T r 


T z 


JT* 


sr i 


rjaro-at re 


g,gh 


%yi,kh,v 


5. A A 


Ad 


&2* 


CD ^ a 


Ao6po Ae 


d 


f 


6. E e 


E e 


e 


a 


ecTB e 


i i 
ya,a 


yo,o 


7. }Kjk 


Mow 


Mgosc 


tJPO oic 


acHBeie me 


zh 


sh 


8. 3 3 


3 3 


3 $> & 


3 3 


3eMJa 3e 


z 


s 


9. Hh 


E u 


d\s 11 lU 


liate h 


1 2 

e, i 


ye 


10. I i 


1 i 


Cf * 


3 '; 


1 (decnmepuuHoe) 


1 2 

e, i 




11. K K 


K K 


<M A 


4€ L 


K&KO K'd 


k 


gh,kh 


12. A a 


A A 


t^/& u 


JL ji 


A10W 3Ab 


1,11 








U-t^fijU^n r> t/t^rr^faKCj^x/''^ — t 'l\ 







;//,». ///?/,„/•,/. 






/^/y, jA'.Z/vs/' 




\ / / / / 7 I 



r //ma "6 f yy/yz% yyy , ryfyy/uy ///y/yyya y.<y/; // b y y//// vol 



/ 

*U€M/& y/ yvkw&ZMfi ^ //yyrry//yy; y/y y/ t ///ys/<v ,'/?/■, 

otc&ms //yy///y ( y//i6y;/y sc6C/t/b m> yyy y/t>, /r//r/rr/s//y> 



sy /yY/y<y/;/yjrf///yy c$ , yyy<y'yyy, /y/y , 'yjyyy>yy,/y/y. 



first part. Lexicology. 



Types: 

roman. italic. 


Caligraphic 

Running-hand. 


characters. 

Round-hand. 


Appellation. 

ancient. modern. 


Val 


ue. 


Proper 4 
sound. 


iccidental 
sound. 


13. M m Mm 


^/W? Jt 


tAL M> 


MwcjeTe sara 


m 




14. H h H n 


M* 


cHj n 


HaiIIT> 3HT> 


n 




15. o o 


& o 


e o 


0H1. 


i 




2 

a 


16. n n n n 


w * 


Jl ii 


noKOil ne 


P. 




17. P p P p 


J^ 5 / 


* t 


puM api. 


r 




18. C c C c 


<& c 


G o 


C.J0B0 3CT> 


s, ss 


z 


19. Ttiti T m 


&7£-*n 


ujC wi 


TBepAo Te 


t 


d 


20. y y y y 


yi 


sr r 


y y 


2 3 

0, u 




21. $ $ # $ 


sn y 


» | 


*epTT> 3*1. 


f, ph 




22. X x X x 


<?& <K 


Jo cc 


xtpi xa 


kh,c& 




23. I( u tf ^ 


cy <ty 


oj; „ 


ULi ue 


ts 




24. q m *I % 


r * 


^ * 


nepBb ne 


ch,tsh 


sh 


25. IUm Mm 


JllI-^u 


JL1X nt 


ma 


sh 




26. lUm ^/^ 


JuA<ic& 


J-li^ m, 


ma 


sh-tsh 


sh 


27. !>!, is 


26 *. 


JO 6W 


"Bpi. 


e mute 




28. Mm A/m 


J6/„ 


cb'L t>t 


■fcpw 


e thick 


we 


29. h h b b 


3 « 


ob t» io 


■Bpt 


y mule 




30. r B u £ 7b 


&> ** 


12? • 


flTfc 


ya, a 


yo 


31. 3 a" 9 a 


3 a 


9 . 


3 


e 




32. K)io i0w 


CnD so. 


30 *> 


H) 


yo, u 


UFr. 


33. H a H a 


kS& Jl 


«/L .a 


a 


ya 


ye, e 


34. 9 e 


& m 


© . 


eirra 


f 




35. V v V v 


2> * 


V p 


iiHciiua 


e, i 




36. fl ft II u 


tf& <u 


<?C it iu 


H CT. KpaTKOU 


y mute 





l 2 3 4 121 2 12 34 1 23 

Fate, far, fall, fat. Me, met. Pine, pin. No, move, nor, not. Tube, tub, bull. 



RUSSIAN GRAMMAR. 



Division of 4 _ The 36 letters of the R ussian alphabet contain 12 vowels 

tnc letters. 

(r^iacHBia), viz: a, e, h, i, o, y, bi, £, 3, w, a, r, of which the 
following five: e, *, a, bo, m, may be called diphthongs (abv- 
macHLm); 3 semi-vowels (no-ayoacHBia): t>, b, ft, and 21 cofl- 
sonants (cor./iacHBia), viz: 6, b, r, #, ;k, 3, k, j, m, h, n, p, c, t, 
*, x, ii, % in, m, e. 

5. — The vowels and semi-vowels, with regard to theirsounds, 
are hard, soft or moderate; and the consonants, according to 
their degree of intensity, are strong, feeble or liquid, viz : 

I. Towels. III. Consonants. 



/. Hard. 
a . 

3 . 
M 
, 

y. 



and those cor- 
responding : 



2 Soft: 



3. Moderate 



e 

H, i 

eCio) 

K) 



II. Semi-vowels, 



. r _ | and those cor- ) rt _ A 

I. Hard: \ responding: \ 2. Soft: 



T>, H 



. a I and those cor- , 

l.Strong:] r flS nnndina: \ 2. Feeble 



responding 



T (glut J 

T(\llal.) 

JK 

4 

.......... 3 

U (TC) (A3 I These three 

in, (uTMlJ. . . .(JK4JK J their own. 
3 Liquid: 

A, M, H, p. 

6. — According to the particular organ of speech which 
gives utterance to the consonants, they are divided into: 

1. Gutturals (ropTaHHBia), pronounced in the throat: r, k, x. 

2. Palatals (no/i,He6HBia), uttered by the palate: ji, h, p. 

3. Dentals (syoHBia) , sounded by the aid of and against 
the teeth: #, t. 

4. Lingual (a3BiHHaa), articulated by means of applying 
the tongue closely to the upper teeth: u. 

5. Labials (ryfiHtia), produced between the lips: 6, b, m, ii, $. 

6. Lispings (nienejieBaTBia), produced by a whistling of the 
tongue against the palate : 3, c. 

7. Hissings (nmnamia), sounded by a whistling of the 
tongue against the roots of the lower teeth: tk, h, m, m. 

The vowel v and the consonant e have not been included in the divisions, 
being found only in a few words taken from the Greek, and the former, with 
regard to pronunciation , being identical with h, and the latter with <*>. 



first part. Lexicology. 5 

7. — In the foregoing table of the letters we have pointed *™ n ™ c ^~ e 
out their proper and accidental sounds, the proper sound being letters. 
the one they usually have, or when used separately, whereas 

they receive their accidental sound from a particular situa- 
tion. This accidental sound , and more especially with regard 
to the vowels, depends upon the tonic accent (y/japeBie), of 
which more hereafter (§ 12). 

The rules we are about to give of the pronunciation of the Russian 
letters, are taken from the dialect of Great-Russia, such as it is spoken 
at the Court, among the polished and literary world. Other dialects of 
the Russian tongue are those of Little-Russia, White-Russia, Novgorod, 
Soozdal and that of Olonetz; all of which however differ not more 
materially from the Moscovite dialect, than by their pronunciation and 
the use of some particular expressions. 

8. — The vowels, in the Russian language, are differently vowels. 
pronounced according to the place they occupy in a word, or 

as they are accented or not. 

/Proper sound, a .- a36yKa, alphabet; Kama, oat-meal. 

A > a# ! * j . . , 1 g •" y*act, dread; nacti, watch; AowaAb. horse. 

| Accidental sound, j , tinM . . , , , ' 

\ ' I o: oo-ifcinaro, great; xy^aro, bad. 

This vowel a is pronounced as « or «; but: 1) It has the 
sound of e after the hissing consonants (m, h, in, m) in the 
middle of a word, when not accented; at the end of words 
however, whether accented or not, it retains its proper sound. 
— 2) In the termination azo of the genitive of adjectives, 
when accented, it has the sound of b. Thus the above words 
are pronounced: azbuka, kasha, uzhls, isheSe, loshed, balshbva, 
khudhva. 

(Proper sound, ya: aMa, ditch; Maco, meat; 3e]VMa, earth. 
' [ Accidental sound, ye, 8 : a^po, kernel; AeBaTt, nine. 

The vowel n, when accented, has the sound of the diphthong 
yd (yhma, myasb, zemhja); but if not accented, it is pro- 
nounced ye at the beginning of words and syllables, and I 
after a consonant (jedrb, davet). At the end of words, 
whether accented or not, it preserves its proper sound; thus 
3apa, dawn; BpeMa, time, are pronounced zbrya, vr a m ya . The 
pronoun ea, of her, is pronounced yeyb , and the syllable ca 
of pronominal verbs is pronounced sa, as: CTapartca, to 
exert one's self (starat sa) . 

Fate, lar, fall, fat. Me, met. Pine, pin. No, move, nor, not. Tube, tub, bull. 



6 RUSSIAN GRAMMAR. 

E (Proper sound, y&, &: e/jHHT,, owe; cie, this; cepAue, heart. 
'(Accidental sound, y6, 6: depeaa, birch-tree; JKe.iTi>M, yellow- 

At the beginning of words and syllables the vowel e is pro- 
nounced y a, but after a consonant purely as a or e; the above 
words therefore are pronounced yaden, seye, s a rtse. This 
vowel, when accented, sounds like yb, or, after a hissing and 
the lingual consonant (jk, h, in, ni, n)> like b, in the following 
cases, viz: 1) when standing before a consonant followed by 
one of the hard vowels, a, o, y, u, s\ 2) at the end of words; 
3) in the termination ew or eft of the instrumental singular 
case of feminine nouns; 4) before the gutturals (r, k, x) or 
the simple hissing sounds (jk, m), which do not allow of a 
hard vowel after them; 5) in the present tense of verbs ; 
although followed by a soft vowel. Thus the words e^Ka, fir; 
a/ie3i>i, tears; JieA'B, ice; jkhtlc, life, Moe, my; 3eMjeio, by the 
earth; WJieKm, distant; Hecenit, thou earnest; HeceTe, you carry; 
mcflKt, silk; jmu,e, face; flyineio, with the soul, are pronounced 
yblka, slyoZe, lybtt, zhetyo, mayo, Zemlybyu, dalybke, fleSybsh, 
rieSybte, shblk, letsb, doshbyu. It is this pronunciation yb or b 
that it is customary now to point out by a diaeresis over the 
vowel e: 6epe3a, jKejiTtin, e^Ka, etc., and in this manner it 
has been distinguished throughout this Grammar. This vowel 
e serves besides to give the French pronunciation of eu, as 
in MoHTecKte C^r- MontesquieuJ. 



*£, «. 



Proper sound, yi, &: 'SM'B, / eat; Bipa, faith. 
Accidental sound, y&: rim^a, nests; 3b:b3ah, stars. 



This vowel n> at the beginning of words and syllables sounds 
like ya\ but after a consonant like a or l (yjam, vara). Ho- 
wever after the consonant h the diphthongal sound is felt 
rather stronger; thus h^tt>, no; hemoh, dumb, are pronounced 
nyett, mjembl. When accented, this vowel has the sound of 
yb only in the words nm/u, nests; 3Bi>3AM, stars; ciA^a, 
saddles; \\b%at>, he flourished; o6p%A r b, he found; also in their 
derivatives and compounds, as: 3Bi3Aowa, little star; mi- 
3AwmK0, little nest] pasiiB-i/TB, it bloomed; which are pro- 
nounced gnybzda, ZVybzde, Sybdla , tSVybll, abrybll, ZVyoZ- 
dbtshka, gnybzdlshkb, rhstsvybll. 



o. 



first part. Lexicology, 

Proper sound, 6: AOMa, at home; noci^, after. 
Accidental sound, a: xopomo, well; KO.iOKO.ia, bells. 



The vowel o, when accented, keeps its proper sound; but 
if unaccented , it takes the sound of h; wherefore the above 
words are pronounced dbma, pbsle, fyarhshb, kalakala. It must 
be observed however, that after an accented syllable, the 
sound- of that vowel is extremely short; thus the word kqao- 
kojtl, bell, is pronounced kblokbl or koVkl. 

j Proper sound, e : htth, to go; MnpT>, peace. 
9 H * ( Accidental sound, ye : hmt>, to them; cTaTtu, articles. 

The vowel u, at the beginning of the various inflections of 
the pronoun of the third person (hmx, hxx, hmh), and after 
the semi-vowel o, is pronounced as a diphthong, gem, ylme, 
y\§, statye. But in every other instance it preserves its proper 
sound, only that after a preposition terminating with the semi- 
vowel 5, it takes the thick sound of u, thus the words b-l 
M36i, in the room; cl HBanoMh, with John; npeAXHAyiniH, 
precedent, are pronounced as if written 6bi3oib, cbiednoMd, 
npedbidyaijiu. 

j Proper sound, e thick: clihi., sow; .JtCTeiiM, flatterers. 
9 ' 1 Accidental sound, we >. rpoow, mushrooms; mm. we. 

The sound of this vowel m is a thick utterance of e, 
and to get any thing like a perfect idea of this sound, it is 
necessary to hear it from the mouth of a Russian. After the 
labials (6, b, m, n, $) it sounds very nearly like we pro- 
nounced very short; thus the words rpnCti, mushrooms; bbi, 
you; M&i, we; CHonBi, sheaves; m.Ka$Bi, cupboards, are pro- 
nounced grlbwe, vwe, mwe, snap we, sh'kafwe. The Polish lan- 
guage represents this sound by the letter y. 

W1 (Proper sound, yfi, u: K)n>, south; jk>6jk), / love. 
'(Accidental sound, u French: Epibccejifc, Brussels. 

This vowel 10 has properly the diphthongal sound yb or «; 
wherefore the pronunciation of the above words is ybk, lubl u . 
In foreign words only it takes the place of the French u, as 
in the word Bpibcce^iB, Brussels (Fr. BruxellesJ 

I, i. y, y. 3,3. v, v. — These four vowels, whether ac- 
cented or n ot, always keep their proper sound, as in the 

1 234 121 2 12 341 23 

Fate, far, fall, fat. Me, met. Pjne, pin. No, move, nor, not. Tube, tub, bull. 



8 RUSSIAN GAMMAR. 

words iepeft, priest; aiipi, the world; y^Hx, supper; narytfa, 
loss; BTOTTb, this; Mvpo, holy chrism, which are pronounced 
Ike 1 , mk, uzhln, pagWa, etbt, mkb. For the use of i and v 
(instead of uj see Orthography. 

vowds ^' — ■ rlie semi ~ vowe ^ s C*; h i h), which are placed, the two 
first after the consonants, and the last after the vowels, are 
only half uttered vowels, 5 being half of the vowel 0, and & 
or u half of the vowel u, 

1, *. I», 1.. — The hard semi-vowel s entails on the con- 
sonant that precedes it, a strong and harsh sound, as though 
that letter was double, and has even the effect of causing a 
feeble consonant to be pronounced like its strong corresponding 
sound ; thus the words : CTam,, shape; Bfl3T>, elm-tree; inecT'B, 
perch; KpoB'L, roof; ctoxb, table; 6paTi., brother; ntMi., 
flame; rycap'B, hussar; q6t>, from; r^a/r^, hunger; ceMx, this; 
irBnx, flail, are pronounced stann, vyass, shest, krbff, still, 
brat, pwel, gushrr, bpp, glatt, s%mm, tslpp. On the other hand, 
the soft semi- vowel & confers a liquifying (Fr. mouille) and 
slender sound on the preceding consonant; thus the words: 
CTaHt, become, bh3b, marsh; inecTB, six; KpoBB, blood; ctojib, 
so much; 6paTB, to take; nhuh, dust; rycapB, goose-herd; 
06b, the Obi; rjiaAB, smoth road; ceMB, seven; itbhb, chain, 
are pronounced start (like gn in the French AllemagneJ, Vy a z { , 
shest 1 , krbv*\ sfol 1 , brat, pwel 1 , gushr, W, glad*, slm 1 , tslp*, by 
causing the i to be slightly vibrated and to expire, as it were, 
within the mouth; the sound and the mechanism for producing 
it, being closely allied to what is heard in the French words 
peril, soleil, campagne, cigogne, ligne. After the hissing con- 
sonants (jk, h, in, m) the sounds of the semi-vowels 5 and & 
are the same and differ in nothing from each other; thus the 
words hohcb, knife, and pojkb, rye-, Me^B, sword, and cb*ib, 
to cut; KaMBini'B, reed, and mb'iuib, mouse; toibvb, fasting, and 
hoihb, night, are pronounced nhsh and rhsh, mltsh and setsh, 
kamwesh and mwesh, thsKtsh and nbsKtsh. 

ft, ft. — The soft semi-vowel u is pronounced very rapidly 
and short along with the vowel that precedes it, and with 
which it formes but one syllable; thus the words flan, give; 



first part. Lexicology. 9 

new, drink; moh, my; acyfi, chew; bm, blow; napm, brown- 
bay, are pronounced </«»' or #, pfr, mb l , zhii, vti, kM 1 , giving 
utterance to a short \ after the vowel. 

10. — The consonants, in the Russian language, as will be consonants. 
seen below, have also various sounds, viz : 

B, 6, \"o7 6."gV p: 6a6a, o/rf woman; 6o6t, 6ea«; 6a6Ka, cockle. 
15, n. il\ z;:|\ /": bohi, away, pobt,, ditch; BTopHHin>, Tuesday. 
JS, 9 a. \2\ d: 2\ t: 4H0 > bottom > P ^' kind; B OARa, brandy. 
aK,aB.l&.)zA:|M: W, J w«fr myjki, husband: JOJKKa, sj90on. 
3 3, j£ f js/sf s; 3bohi., soa/jc?; i\ia3t, ei/e'; CKa3Ka, sfon/. 

The feeble consonants 6, e, d, wc, 3, retain their proper 
sound before the vowels, before the liquid and other feeble 
consonants, observing that ow (French jj is now represented in 
English by zh. But before the strong consonants and at the end 
of words terminating in the hard semi-vowel (Y), they assume 
the utterance of their corresponding strong letters (n, $>, t, uj, 
c). Thus the above words are pronounced baba, bbpp, bapkh, 
vbnn, rbff, ftbmlk, dnb, rbtt, vbtka, zKdu, mush, Ibskhh, zvbnn, 
glass, sMska. In words where 3d is followed by u, the letter 
d is silent; thus no3AHO, late; npa3AHHK-L, feast, are pronounced 
pbzno, praznek. The word aojkahk'b, m m, i s pronounced 
dbzKzhek. 

Proper sound, g gh: ropa mountain; nonide^b, perdition, 
k: 4pyn>, friend; MoruiiH, who could. 



r ' r ' ^Accidental sound,] h: ?*»*»• I f ( j ; B6ra J °f f od - 
' kh, d): Bori>, God; Aermu, light. 



v : KpacHaro, red; ero, of him. 
In the beginning and in the middle of words the consonant 
z preserves its proper sound, being articulated with a slight 
vocalized aspiration, something like the Hibernian g when 
pronounced hard) ghhxa, plghWel). The accidental sound 
takes place in the following cases: 1) At the end of words 
and before the consonant m, it takes the hard utterance of a; 
(dr u k, mbkshe). — 2) In the words TocnoAfc, Lord; 6^iaro, 
well, and the various inflections of the noun Bori., God (Bora, 
Eory, EoroMt) it is an aspirated h (hbspbd, blahb-, bbha, 
bbhu, bbhbmmj. — 3) In the words Eon>, God, and y66rB, 
poor; before a strong consonant, as jerKin, light; Jierne 

123* 1212 12 34 1 23 

Fate, far, fall, fat. Me, met. Pine, pin. No, move, nor, not. Tube, tub, bull. 
Eeiff Russian Grammar. 1 



10 RUSSIAN GRAMMAR. 

lighter; Horm, the nails, and in the foreign words ending in 
pzz, as IleTep6ypr r B, Petersburg; KeHHre6eprt, Konigsbcrg, it 
takes the hard guttural sound of x (Germ, d), bud), iMd), 
lyofyke, lafytshe, nbfytb , phtlrburfy , kaiilgsblrfy). — 4) In 
inflections #20, /Z20, 020, 020, of adjectives and pronouns, it is pro- 
nounced as v (krlsnava, ylvbl. — 5) In words derived from 
foreign languages, it is pronounced either g or aspirated h, 
according to the original sound which it is intended to supply, 
as in the words reorpa*ia, geography; ry6epma, government, 
rep on, hero; rocnnTa^t, hospital. 

/Proper sound, k: Kpecn,, cross; 3epKa.io, mirror. 
K ' K ] Accidental sound, ( & : K1> B6ry > to God; K1> 3eM ^' to the eartL 



kh, $: kto, who; kt> komy, to whom. 
The consonant k when placed before the feeble consonants 
6, r, a, >k, 3, takes the sound of its corresponding feeble z 
(gti bbhu, gK z a mll), and before the strong consonants k, t, 
h, it takes the articulation of x (tf)tb } dfkamlQ. In every other 
instance it preserves its proper sound (Vest, zbrkUbJ. 

fi ( Proper sound, s: cecipa, sister; cocanie, suction. 
' " ( Accidental sound, z: CT>B6roMx, with God; c3LiRaTB, to invite. 

j Proper sound, t: TeTima, bow-string; TeTKa, aunt. 
' * j Accidental sound, d: OTAaib, to give back; JKenuTbGa, marriage. 

The strong consonants c and m before the feebles 6, r, a 7 
sk, 3, assume the articulation of their corresponding feeble con- 
sonants 3 and d; thus the words above are pronounced slstra, 
SaSafllye, z'bbhbm , ZZeVat 1 , teteVa, tybtka, addat 1 , zhlnldba. 
When cm is followed by «, the consonant m is not at all 
sounded, as in the words iiocthlih, of lent; nacTHMH, partial, 
pronounced pbsne, tshasne. The consonant 0, before the 
strong hissing sounds w and %, takes the utterance of m\ 
thus ciiiHBaTt, to sew; cnacTie, happiness, are pronounced 

sKsheVaP, sh'tshaStiye. 



H,n. 



Proper sound, ch or tsh; iaci>, hour; leniHKt, a cap. 
Accidental sound, sh; ito, what; napoiHO, on purpose. 



The compound consonant n (tui), which is pronounced the 
same as the English digraph ch, takes the simple sound of m, 
or English sh, in the word hto, and before the consonant n; 
thus we pronounce the above words tshas, tshlptshek, sh%. 



first part. Lexicology. 11 

n&hshrio. However the word tohho, precisely, is pronounced 
thtshnl, to distinguish it from toihho, / feel sick, which is 
pronounced tbshnb. The Poles represent this letter by cz. 
(Proper sound, shtsh: miiTi,, shield; oboutb, fruit 
MR* IS» j Accidental sound, sh: obouihoh, of fruit; noMomHHK'b, helper. 

The compound consonant w, (uitui), which has the three 
distinct sounds of sh-t-sh or s-t-sh, and which the Poles re- 
present by szcz, has the simple sound of w before the con- 
sonant n ; the above words consequently are pronounced sKtshltt 
or stchltt, bvbsKtsh, and aVashnm, phmbshnlk. 

H, it. \ [p: naB.iuHT,, pea-cock; ctojih, column. 

4p 9 «*. 1 ifouph: <*>OHapi>, lantern; ckv4>bh, scullcap. 

X, x. f p , ] kh, Germ, #: xpaart, temple; Ayxt, odour. 

Ill, ra. | '° per S ' j sh, Fr ch, Germ, f#, Pol. sz : ma.iaun,, cotf^e. 

I|, i|. 1 fte, Germ. 3: nap&, Amy; nepem>, pepper. 

0,o. / , . \f : eeaTpT>, theatre; Aoiihbi. Athens. 

These six strong consonants keep their proper sound, and 
consequently the above words are pronounced pavlen. stblp, 
fanar, skbfya, tf)r a mm, dud), shhlash, tsar, phrets, feat'r, afene, 
observing that x is pronounced as in the Scotch loch or 
German $)ctd), %a&). For the use of the consonant e, which 
is pronounced the same as 0, see Orthography. 



•I, .i* 
m, m. 
11. 11. 

F, p. 



1: .la/rt, accord; .mjxh, ill-luck. 

,m: bcbmt., to all; BOceMb, eight 

Proper sound, { ' , , 

1 ' j m: TpoHi), throne; TpoHB, touch. 

: pa4t, glad; paAt, rank. 

The liquid consonants preserve their proper sound, being 
strong or soft in their utterance according to the vowel or 
semi-vowel that follows; consequently the above words are 
pronounced \ a tt and lyatt , vshmm and vbsem; trbnn and trbn; 
r a tt and ryatt. It is necessary to observe here that the Russian 
consonant ji, before the hard vowels and strong consonants, 
by no means resembles the usual English I, in as much as in 
that situation it is pronounced with much greater force, and 
which is obtained by a strong pressure of the tongue against 
the upper teeth. The Poles represent this sound by / with 
a bar (t). The other three sounds correspond with those 
of the English language, only that the p has a stronger trill, 
partaking more of the Irish utterance of this letter. 

1 234 12 ! 212 34 1 23 

Fate, lar, fall, fat. Me, met. Pine, pin. No, move, nor, not. Tube, tub, bull. 



12 RUSSI4N GRAMMAR. 

syllables H. — A vowel, either by itself, or joined to one or more 

and words. ; 

consonants, with or without a semi-vowel, forms, in the 
Russian language, a syllable (c,aqtt>, CKiaAx); and one or 
several of these, used to represent a thought or sensation, 
form a word (o/iobo). Words consequently may be monosyl- 
lables (oahoc.i6}khe,ih) or polysyllables (Mnoroc/iojKHBijf), ac- 
cording to their being compounded of one or more syllables, 
as: h, and; a, /; oht», he; an, ah; cefi, this; ABa, two; 
CTpaxx, fright; 3H-Ma, winter; /jo-po-ra, road; AO-opo-Ai- 
Te^it, virtue; Ao-6po-A'£-Te./LB-HBM, virtuous, etc. 

The Russian language contains a few words that have no vowel at 
all, or whose vowel has changed into a semi-vowel; such are the par- 
ticles bt>, kt>, ct, 6t>, jkt., Jib (instead of eo, ko, co, 6bi ) o/ce, jiuJ. 
These words, called assxjllabics (6e3c.j6;KHi>ifl), are joined to the syllables 
of the preceding or following word, as: bt> aomT), in the house, Kb OKHy, 
towards the window; ci> to66io, with thee; ecia 6t>, if; OAHaKO ;kt>, 
however; tohho Ah, is it right so? 

Tonic 12. — In polysyllabic words there is always one syllable 
accent. ^ eX p er j ences a g rea ter stress of the voice than the rest; 
thus in the words Ma/io, little; totobo, ready; roBopHTe, speak, 
the syllables Ma, mo, pu, are more discernably audible than the 
syllables jio, zo, so, me. This modification of the voice is in 
fact what is meant by tonic accent (y/japeme), and is indi- 
cated by a little mark over the vowel. The accented syllable 
is called long Q&oatHi), the others short (KopoTKie). 

The accent is no longer printed in Russian books, except to distinguish 
some homonymous words and grammatical inflections of similar forms, 
as 3aMOKt, castle, and 3aM0Ki>, lock; cflOBa, of the word (gen. sing.), 
and ciOBa, words (nomin. plur.), as will be seen in Part IV, Prosody. 
It is here the place to observe that in the Russian language there is no 
rule by which to determine the accent, and that in one and the same 
word is it frequently shifted from one syllable to another; for which 
reason all the words used in this Grammar are printed with the accent 
they ought to have. 

The following reading-exercise, in which the reading of the Russian 
text is facilitated by an imitation of the sounds according to English ut- 
terance, and an interlinear literal translation added, it is confidentially 
hoped, will materially assist the learner to make himself master of the 
rules we have given on the pronunciation of the letters and words of 
the Russian language. 



.first part. Lexicology. 13 



READING-EXERCISE. 

Biepa BtuiecTb <mcoBT> yrpa noixa.ia mm BepxoMT. 

Ftshera f shest tshes&ff utr& payadjal* mwe vard)6mm 

Yesterday at six o'clock of the morning went we on horseback 

vb II6TC4aMT». Hiiierd hutt, cKyinie 3Toa 4oporn: Be3AT> 

r Potsdam. NetshevS nyett skSshnaye atoi daroghe : vezde 

to Potsdam. Nothing there is duller than this road: every where 
rjiy6oKiH hccokt,, h hh KaKrixt 3aH0ivtaTe-ibHbix'b npe4MeT0BT, bt> i\ia3a 

glSboke pesok e ne kaked) zanematelned) predmatoff v' glaza 

a deep sand, and not any interesting object to the eyes 

He nona/iaeTCH. ' Ho bh4t> IloTCAaMa, a oco6.ihbo Caffb-Cycu, 
ne papadayetsa. Ho vett Potsdama, a asablevo San-SSse, 

not itself presents. But the sight of Potsdam, and above all of Sans-Souci, 

OieHB XOPOIITB. MlI OCTaHOBHJHCb BT> TpaKTlipfc, He 40'£3)Kafl 40 
otshen d)6rosh. Mwe astinavells f traktere, ne dayezh'zhaya da 
(is)very fine. We stopped at the hotel, not arriving to 

ropOACKIIXT) BOpOTT,. OTAOXHyBt H 3aKa3aBT> o6'E4'b, MM 

garadsked) varott. addad)n6f e zakazaf abat, mwe 

the city - gates. Having rested ourselves and ordered a dinner, we 

noiu^i'i bt. ropo4i>. Y Boporb 3anncaju Haina uaieHa. Ha 

pAshle v' gorot. u varott zapesall nashe emena. Na 

went into the town- At the gates one wrote our names. On the 

napaAHOMi. Micro npoTHBT. 4Bopua, yqiuacb rBap4ia: npe- 
paradnom maste protef dvar$t& fitshelas gvardiya: pre- 

parade- place opposite the palace, exercised the guards : very 

KpacHbie JI04H, npeKpacHbie myhahph! Bh4T» 4Bopua co 

krasneye lude, prekrasneye mundire! Vett dwartsd. sa 

fine men, superb uniforms! The sight of the palace from 

CTopoHbi ca4a 6<ieHb xopomi. r6po4T>, Boodme npeKpacHo 

starane sadA otshen djarosh. Ghorot vaapstshe prekrasno 

the side of the garden (isjvery fine. The town in general 00 w ^ 

BbICTpoeHT»;BT.60JbHl6fi y-IHH.'B MHOrO BeJHKO^nHMXT. 40M0BT,, 

vwestrSyen; v' balshoi iiletse mnogo velikalapned) damof. 

tbuilt; in the great street (there are~) many of magnificent houses, 

OrpOMH'BHUIHX'b piIMCKHX'b 
agromnaished) remskld) 

of the vastest Roman 

12 3 4 12 1 212 34 123 

Fate, far, fall, fat. Me, met. Pine, pin. No, move, nor, not. Tube, tub, bull. 



CTpoeHHblXT. 


OTiaCTH 


no 


o6pa3uy 


stroyenned) 


attshaste 


pa 


Abrastsu 


built 


partly 


on 


the model 



14 


RUSSIAN 


GRAMMAR. 




imarL h Ha 


c66cTBeHHbia 


AeHLrH 


noKOHHaro KopoM: oht> 


palat e nk 


sopstvanneya 


danghl 


pak51nava karalya: on 


palaces and at 


the own 


expences 


0/ #*e /ate king: he 


AapH^i. nxt, 


KOMy XOTBJI'B. 


Tenepb 


ciii orpoMHtm 34ama 


darel yed)> 


k^mu djatall. 


Teper 


seye agromneya zdaneya 


#az;e them, to whom he chose. 


Now 


fAe z;<25^ edifices 



nyciLi, hM 3aHHMaH)Tca co^aTaMH 

puste, ele, zanemayStsa saldatame. 

(are)empty, or are occupied by soldiers. 

ecTb pyccKaa uepicoBB 0041. HaA3HpaHieMi. 
yfest russkaya tsark&y pat nadzeraneyem 

there is a Russian church under the care 



— Bt> IIoTCztaMfc 

- F' PotsdamS 

— At Potsdam 

craparo pyccKaro 

starava russkava 

of an old Russian 



co^aia, KoiopMH jKHBeTt TaMi> co BpeMeHt uapcTBOBaHia 

saldata, katore zhevyott tarn sa vremin tsarstvovaneya 

soldier, who lives there since the times of the reign 



HMnepaTpiiuBi Ahhbi. Mbi Hacii.iy MorjiH cbiCKaTB ero. ^Axamvl 

Imperatretse anne. Mwe naselu maghle seskat yfev6. Dryad)le 

of the empress Anne. We with difficulty could find him. The decrepit 



CTapiIK-L CIIATUT. Ha 60AbUlll\'b 
starek sedall na balshed) 

old man was sitting in a large 



Kpec.flaxT>, h ycflBiuiaB-b, 4to 

kreslad), e usleshaf slito 

arm chair, and having heard that 



11 



mbi PyccKie, npoTany.iB kt> HaMT> 

mwe russkil, pratenul k' nam 

weQare)Russians, he extended towards us the hands, and with a trembling 



pyKH, 

ruke, 



ApoJKatmiarB 

drazhastshem 



roJOCOMi> CKa3a.n>: Cjidea Eozyl C^dea Eoiy ! Oht> xot"£\ii> 

gholosom skazall : slava Bohu ! slava Bohu ! on c&atall 

voice he said: Glory to God! Glory to God! He wanted 

roBopiiTB cnepBa ci Haani no-pyccKii: ho mbi ct> TpyAOMT> Morjii 

gavarlt sperva s' name pa-russke : no mwe s' trudom magle 

to speak at first with us in Russian ; but we with difficulty could 



pasyM-BTb .apyrB 4pyra. HaMi. Ha/peHia^o 

razumat driik druga. Nam nadlezhalo 

understand each other. To us it was obliged to 
KajK^oe oiobo. „IIoii4eMTe bt> uepKOBB 

kazhdoye slovo. „Paldyomte f tsarkov 

each 



noBTopaTB noira 

paftaryat patshte 

repeat almost 

Eotfriio, CKasa^i'L owb, 

Bozheyu, skazall on, 

word. „ Let us go into the church of God, said he, 



H nOMOJIIMCa BMECT-B, XOTfl HBIHH II HfcTt npa3£H0Ka. 

e pamolemsa vmastS, d)atya nen& e nyett prazneka." 

and let us pray together, although to-day even there is not any holiday. u 



first part. Lexicology. 



45 



CepAne Moe 

Sartse m&y6 

Heart my 



Hano^HHJocb 6^aroroBiHieMt, Kor^a oTBopitaacB 

napolnelos blahagavaneyem , kaghda atvarelas 

pled itself with devotion, when opened itself 



4Bepi, bt, uepnoBB, Yjxh ctojbko BpeMeHH napcTByeTi, rjiy66Koe 

dvar f tsarkov, gdya stolko vramene tsarstvuyett glubokoye 

the door into the church where so much of time reigns a profound 



MO^qaHie, e/jBa nepeptmaeMoe ciadbiMH B3xoaaMH 

maltshaneyfe, y£dva p6rerevayemoy§ slabweme vzdodjame 



II 



TUXHMt 
ted)&m 



silence, hardly interrupted by the feeble groans and the soft 

BOCKpeCeHBHMT> npHXOAHTT. TyAa 
vaskres&nyam pred)odet tuda 

the Sundays comes there 
nparoTOB-flaiomyK) ero kt> (uajKemioH 

pregatavlyayfistshuyii yevo k' blazhenno! 

preparing him to the happy 



rcuoco&TB crapna, 


KOTOpBIH 


no 


gholdsom startsa, 


katore 


P a 


voice of old man, 


who 


on 



HHTaTB CBaTBHIDyK) II3T> KHHTT), 

tshetat svyatelshiiyu is knelt; 

to read the most holy of the books. 



b&ihocth. Bt> IiepKBH BCe hi'icto. IJepKOBHBia KHIiril h yTBapb 

vatshnoste. F' tsarkvi fsy3 tshesto. Tsarkovneya kneghe e utvar 

eternity. In the church all (is) clean. Church- books and ornaments 
xpaHiiTca bt, cyH4yKB. Ott, BpeMemi #o BpeMeHH CTapiiKt 

djranyalsa f siinduke. at vrimenl do vr&meni starek 

are kept in a trunk. From time to time the old man 

nepe6npaeTT> hxt> cb mo^htboio. „ t IacTO ott> Bcero cep4Ha, cica3ajr& 

pereblr^yett yed) s 1 maletvoyu. Tshasto att fsevo sartsa, skazall 

arranges them with prayer. „Often from all the heart, said 

oht>, coKpymaiocb a tomt>, ito no CMepTH Moefi, KOTopaa 
on, sakrushayiis ya a torn, shto pa smarte mayei, katoraya 

he, griefmyself I of that, that after death my, which 

y?Ke ne a^aqko, He KOMy dy^eTi. 
Szhfe ne dalyoko, na kam6 budett 

from me certainly already not (is) far, no person will 

CMOTpiTB 3a nepKOBbio." — Ct no.maca np66bMH mbi b% cewb 
smatrat za tsarkovyu. — S' pultskasa prabwele mwe f sem 

watch over the church. u — During half an hour remained we in this 

CBameHHOMT. MBCTU, npOCTIMHCB CT. nOITeHHBlMl. CTapHKOMt, 
svyastshennom maste, prasteles s' patshtennem starekom, 

holy spot, bade farewell with the venerable old man, 



OTT. MeHa KOIieiHO 
att menya kanashno 



h uomeAaiAii 

e pazhelale 

and wished 



eMy 

yemu 
him 



Tiixoft CMepTH. 

ted)51 smarte. 

an easy death. 



KapaM3um. 
Karamzln. 



123 4 121 2 12 3*1 23 

Fate, far, fall, fat. Me, met. Pine, pin. No, move, nor, not. Tube, tub, bull. 



16 RUSSIAN GRAMMAR. 

of IpwS! 13 * ~* Words 5 when considered as the elements of speech, 
are either denominative (3HaMeHaTe^itH&ia) or auxiliary (cjiy- 
HcedHbia). The former express the idea of objects, of their 
qualities or actions; the latter merely design the connexion 
that exists among the denominative words; thus in this phrase: 
Hthum jieTaiOT-B no B03Ayxy, a pwdti HtHByT'L Bt boa-e, birds 
fly in the air, and fishes live in water, the denominative words 
are: nmui^bi, Jiemdwms, eo3dyxy, pu6bi, owueymz, eodib, and 
the auxiliary words are: no, a, 63. The former are called 
the farts (nacTH), and the latter the particles of speech 
(qacTini&i piin). The parts and particles of speech, in the 
Russian language, may be brought under nine different heads ; 
namely : 

I. Par ts of speech : II. Particles of speech : 

l.The^^^^g(HMflcyurecTBHTejiBHoe). 7 .The preposition Qn\)WJi6r r b). 

2. The adjective (hms npn^araTejbHoe). 8. The conjunction (coK)3t). 

3. The pronoun (muct ohm erne). 9.Theinterjection(Mem/i,OMGTie). 

4. The verb (rjarojix). 

5. The participle (npirqacTiej. 

6. The adverb (Haptiie) and the gerund (AuenpireacTie). 

Certain languages, such as the French, German, English and others, 
make use of a distinctive word before a common noun, whenever em- 
ployed in speech, unless the same be sufficiently determined by the 
accompanying word; thus the French say: le chapeau, la plume; the 
German: ber £mt, bte §eber, and the English: the hat, the pen. If 
the common noun, however, be taken in an indeterminate sense, it is 
then preceded by another word; as: un chapeau, une plume; etn £>ut, 
etne $eber; a hat, a pen. This kind of word is called article (i.iein>), 
and distinguished in those tongues by the definite and indefinite article, 
In French the articles are: le, la, les, and un, une, des; in German: 
ber, bte, ba$, bte, and etn, etne; in English: the and a or an. The 
Russian language has no articles, it being left to the sense of the sen- 
tence to indicate whether the common noun is taken in a determinate 
or indeterminate sense. This deficiency is sometimes also supplied by 
other words, such as tott>, this, to indicate a determinate, and hbko- 
TopLiii, certain, to indicate an indeterminate sense; as: Toms hciobbkv 
o kot6p©mt» bli roBopinre, npninejrB ko mh^, the man of whom you 
speak, is come to me; Hibfcomopbiu le-ioBBKi) npHine.n> ko mh-b, a man 
is come to me. 



first part. Lexicology. 17 

14 __ All words , whether parts of speech or particles, are Division 
either primitive or derivative, simple or compound. Theprimi- of wor(ls - 
fives (nepBoo6pa3HBia) are such as are not formed from 
other words; e.g. ca/rx, garden; mens, woman; 61/imh, white ] 
jkhtl, to live. The derivatives (npoii3BOAHwa) are such as 
are formed from words already existing in the language ; e. g. 
caAOBBiiKt, gardener; HceHCKifi, womanly; ,6i>./iii3Ha , white- 
ness; nepejKim, to over-live. Compounds (o/iojKHBia) are 
formed of two denominative words ; e. g. caAOBOACTBO, horti- 
culture, from caAi. , garden (lat. hortusj, and boahtb, cultivate; 
TpyAOJii56ie, love of work, from Tpy/rB, work, and jho6htb, 
to love. All other words, whether primitive or derivative, are 
simple (npocTBia). 

15. — Every word , whether primitive or derivative , simple Roots 
or compound , is formed from roots (Kopmi) , or from radical ° 
syllables and letters, which become words by the junction 
of other roots. Thus in the words : 3pm, I see, 3piHie, the 
sight; 3piBiBiH, visible; 3opKiil, sharp-sighted; o6o3piTB, to 
examine, the root is the syllable 3op or the mixed conso- 
nant 3P, which becomes significant by the addition of the 
syllables K), nuie, UMbiu, uiu, ooo, etc. — The roots maybe 
divided into principal and secondary. 1) The principal roots 
(rjiaBHBie) are such as serve to form denominative words, or 
parts of speech; such are the roots una, ok, pjk, whence 
the words bii/tb, sight; oko, eye; pyna, hand, are formed. 
2) The secondary roots (npHflaTOHHwe) are those from which, 
in the first place, auxiliary words or particles are formed, 
e. g. hs'b, of; bt>, in; cb, with; and which afterwards serve 
to form words by being united with the principal roots; e.g. 
BiiAHbiii, visible; ohkii, spectacles; nopyniiTB, to commit. Thus 
the secondary roots are : a) initial (npeA^HAymie), placed at 
the beginning of words, and called prefixes or prepositions 
e. g. j-xoa'b, departure; om-Kkzi*, refusal; and bj final (uo- 
cxB/iyiomie) ) which form the terminations of words , and are 
called affixes , e. g. boa-« ; water ; zm-M, earth; Kpac-www, 
red; &iji-anib , to do. 

In order to trace Russian words properly so called, that is to say 
Slavonian words , to their roots , the learner will do well to proceed in 

Reiff Russian Grammar. 2 



18 



RUSSIAN GRAMMAR. 



the following manner. Let us take as examples the words ngeH36biToqe- 
CTBOBaTt, to super abound, and 3acBHA'£Te^&CTB0BaHie , attestation. After 
- taking away the initial secondary roots npe and 3a, and the finals 6anib 
and eame, there remain the words n^biwvecTBo, abundance, and cbh- 
ABTe^bCTBo , testimony, which are derived from ii36bitokt>, superfluity 
and CBHAiieJL (in Slavonian c6TbdrbmeAbJ , witness. These last mentioned 
are themselves derived from h36bitl, to abound, and CBiA^Tb, to know ; 
words which are formed of the prepositions U3Z and cs, joined to the 
simple verbs 6mtb, to be, and bi^te or bwtb, to know, from whence 
if we take away the terminations of the infinitive , there remain 6m and 
end. We thus see the root of the word npeii36b'iTO<iecTBOBaTb is em ; 
the steps of its formation being apparent : 6biTb, H36biTb ; H36b'iTOKT> ; 
H36biTOHecTBO , H36biToiecTBOBaTb , npen36b'iTOHecTBOBaTb ; the word 3a- 
CBHAiTcabCTBOBaHie has b-b/j for its root , whence are derived : BiA^Tb 
or B^AaTb, CB'EA'fcTb, cB'BA'BTe^b (in Russian C6udwmejibj, CBHA'BTejbCTBO, 

CBIIA'BTe.flbCTBOBaTb , 3aCBIIA'BTe.lbCTBOBaTb , SaCBIIA'&Te./IbCTBOBaHie. 

Every Russian word of Slavonian origin may be submitted to the same 
process of dissection, and the learner will find the following words ap- 
propriate as an exercise : He3aBHCiiM0CTb, independence; HeH3iYr£pHMbiii, 
immensurable ; npeAC^AaTe^bCTBOBaTb , to preside; cocipaAanie, compas- 
sion; n3o6p r £TaTe^bHOCTb, invention, inventive faculty; BcnoMoraie.flbHbiit, 
auxiliary; lecTO-iMie, ambition; yAOBJeTBopikejibHbiu, satisfactory; ny- 
TemecTBeHHHK'b , traveller; 3aK0H0Aaie.ibCTB0 , legislation; 3emAeA%Jib- 
lecKitt , agricultural; uapeABopeni) , courtier. 

inflections 16. — The parts of speech, or denominative words, are 
of words, distinguished from the particles , or auxiliary words , by being 
subject to sundry inflections Qmrnmenia) , which are usually 
of two kinds : constant (nocTOHHHtra) and accidental (ciy- 
MaifflBia). — 1) The constant inflections are met with in the 
structure of derivative and compound words. This is what is 
called the formation (o6pa30Bame) of a word; e.g.iiap&jA-m^; 
uapz^fl, queen; napctf/w, royal; n,k^cmeo, kingdom; M^cmeen- 
miu, of the kingdom; n^cmeoeamb , to reign; vfycmeoeauie, 
reigning. — 2) The accidental inflections are the different ter- 
minations and prepositions which a word takes, and which 
without changing its nature serve to express some circumstance 
connected with the idea designated by the word ; e* g. pyK«, 
the hand; pyKow, with the hand; pyKw , the hands; \mmy, I 
see; beauum, thou seest; 6%Jibiu, white; 6%mumiu, whiter; 
no6njiibe, a little whiter, etc. 
jietapiasms 17. — The different inflections of which words are suscep- 
tible , undergo , in order to facilitate the pronunciation, 



first part. Lexicology. 19 

metaplasms (nepeMiHti), which at times change even the final 
letters of the radical word. These metaplasms or alterations 
consist in the permutation (3aMiHa) of one letter for another; 
in the epenthesis (BCTaBKa) and prosthesis (npncTaBKa} of 
some letters, and in the apocope (ycfcqeme) and syncope 
(H3taTie) of others. 

18. — The permutation of letters, in the Russian language, 
arises from the circumstance that some vowels cannot be 
placed in juxta-position with certain consonants ; thus the 
hissing, guttural and lingual consonants (jk,h, m, irj ; r, k, 
x; n) cannot be joined with some vowels; the vowels a, e, 
w, and the semi-vowel &, never admit immediately before them 
either the^ guttural consonants (r, k, x) , in any inflection, 
or sometimes the dental and lisping consonants (/i, t; 3, c) • 
and further the vowel u, in the derivation of words, never 
admits before it either the gutturals or the lingual (r, k, x; 
u) , which are then changed for the hissing consonants (?k, u? 
m, m) , as is seen below. 

Permutation of letters. 

1. The consonants r , 4 , 3 , \ / change into jk. 

2. The consonants k , t , n , I , change into h. 
o rru I before n, e, 11, ro, b, { . ° . 

3. The consonants x, c, | ■-.. I change into m. 

4. The consonants ck, ct, ' I change into in. 

5. The vowel a, ( / changes into a. 
b. The vowel 10 , | ' ' ' ' ' ' ^ ' M ' j changes into y. 

7. The vowel u, after r,K,x;jK,q,in,m, .. changes into n. 

8. The vowel 0, after jk, i, in, in; n, changes into e. 

9. The vowel ■£, after the vowel i, changes into 11. 

10. The semi-vowel b, alter a vowel, changes into ft. 

11. The semi-vowels t and ft, before a consonant with t>, change into e. 

12. The semi-vowel t> , before two consonants , . . changes into 0. 
Examples: 1) c.iyauiTb, to serve; Buaty, I see; p'BJKb, cut, from 

cjiyzd , servant ; 6udibnib , to see ; prb3amb , to cut ; 2) MyiriTL , to tor- 
ment; CBMa, candle; OTenecTBo, native land, from mfna, torment; 
ceibmz, light; omeu,^ father; 3) Tiime, slower; npoineme, petition, horn 
muxz , slow ; npociinib , to ask ; 4) imry , / seek ; iiime , purer , from 
ucKdnib, to seek; uucrm , pure; 5) c.iyjKa (for cjiyoicR) , serving; 6) 
Boaty (for 600/cw) , I lead ; 7) pyKii , the hands ; Myaai , the men (for 
pfKbi , MfoicbiJ ; 8) na-ibueMi. (for ndjib^OM-b), with the finger ; 9) bt> 
Pocciii (for es PoccinJ, in Russia; 10) He/M, week, has for its geni- 
tive plural HeA-iib; whilst mea , the neck, has men; 11) cy/ibda, destiny; 



Permutation 
of letters. 



20 



RUSSIAN GRAMMAR. 



KoniiiKa, copeck, have in the genitive plural cy^ed-L, KonieKt (for cydb6d, 
KonrbuKS); 12) bo mmi, in me; co bcsmi., with all (for es mhw, czecibMZ). 
These permutations are subject to certain exceptions. The dental con- 
sonants {a , t) sometimes preserve the Slavonian permutation jka and ni, 
as rpa^^aHiiHT. , citizen; minia, aliment, from zpadz, city; numdmb, to 
nourish. When the accented vowel e is pronounced o (after jk, q, ui, 
m , n) , the vowel o may be used , as xoporno , well; n.aeq6, shoulder ; 
aimo , e^r. It still remains to be observed that in words where r, k, x, 
11, are changed before h and k, asHoaoca, a little foot; Bimubm, eternal; 
nacTyinKa , shepherdess ; •MqiiLift , personal (from nozd , foot ; enKZ , an 
age ; nacmyxn, shepherd ; Auu,e, individual), the change is not required 
by the letters h and k, but arises from the circumstance that formerly 
the semi-vowel b , before which the consonants r, k, x, ii, change into 
a, q, m, was employed before those consonants OtooicbKa, embHbiu, 
etc.) , but has been suppressed in modern orthography. 
Epcnthesis 19. — Epenthesis , or the insertion of a letter in the middle 
andprost esis.^ a fptfi&j and prosthesis , or the addition of a letter at the 
beginning of a word , take place both to facilitate the pronun- 
ciation j and to unite letters which cannot be placed in juxta- 
position. The vowels o and e are inserted between two con- 
sonants at the end of words , and thus serve as a connect- 
ing link between the two roots of a compound word; e. g. 
oro'HB, fire; B r BT£p r L ; wind (instead of the Slavonian ozub, 
emmps), 3aKono/i,aTe.flB , legislator; 3eivo£omicaHie, geography. 
The consonant ji is inserted also after the labials (6, b, m, n ; 
*)' when they ought to be followed by 10 or e; } e. g. aw6aw, 
I love; /ieineByze , cheaper (from Aw6umb , to love , demeeo, 
cheap). The consonant u is also epenthetic in B/jymaTB, to 
suggest; no/jMHiviaTB , to take up; Ha «ero ; against him. The 
consonant e is sometimes added at the beginning of a word, 
before the vowel o; e. g. eocemb, eight (instead of the Sla- 
vonian ocbMbJ; tfocTpBiH, sharp ; tfOTHUHa, patrimony (used 
familiarly for ocmpuu, ommma). [The same is the case with 
the vowel o in opjKaHofi , of rye (for powaudiij. 
Apocope 20. — Apocope , or the cutting off a letter at the end of 
and S yncope. a worc ^ an( j S y nc0 p^ r the elision of a letter in the middle 
of a word j are employed to facilitate or soften the pro- 
nunciation, e. g. co mhoh, with me; ^to6b ; in order that; 
ABHHyTB, to move; oG^maTB, to promise, 6,iecHyTB , to shine: 
nojTopa j one and a half (instead of co mhqio, mno6b\ deuz- 
nymb, o6eMu s dmb 1 oAecmuymb, noAemopd). 



Lexicology. — the substantive. 21 



THE SUBSTANTIVE. 

21. — The substantives (cymecTBHTejiBHBia HMeHa) in the Division of 
Russian language are of two kinds : common nouns or ap- 
pellatives (HapnuaTejifcHBia) , as: qe./iOB'EK'L , man; ropo/vt, 
town; pma, river; and individual or proper nouns (c66cTBeH- 
HBia), as : B./ia/uiMip^ Vladimir; MocKBa, Moscow; B6./ira, the 
Volga. — Among the common nouns we distinguish a class 
called collective (co6npaTe.iBHBia), such are: Hap6/ri>, people; 
CTa/jo, herd; awt>, forest; also material nouns (BemecTBen- 
Hbia), such are : MyKa, flour; Macao, oil; 36./10TO, gold. — The 
proper names of men are of three kinds : a) christian names 
(xpncTiaHCKia) , as : AieKcaHApt , Alexander; yleB-L, Leon; 
OAbTdi , Olga\ Aw6oBb, Amy; b J patronymic names (oT*ie- 
CTBeHHtia), as : AjieKcaHApoBimT. and A./ieKcaHApoBHa, son and 
daughter of Alexander ; ./Ibbobhtb and ./iBBOBHa, son and 
daughter of Leon ; and cj family names (np63Binn;HBia , $a- 
Mn^BHtia), as: J^zymhrniwh, Berzhavin\ Op^OBB, Orlof\ /J,oji- 
ropyKin, Dolgorooky ; Tojictoh, Tolstoi. 

22. — The properties of substantives in the Russian language Properties 
are, the gender (poA'B), the aspect (biiat>), the number ofnouns - 
(hhcjio) and the case (naAeacB). The two former are constant 
inflections, belonging to the formation of nouns ; the two latter 

are accidental inflections , employed in the declension. 

23. — In the Russian language there are three genders : the Genders. 
masculine (MyacecKiif) , the feminine (sKeHCKiii) and the neuter 
(cpeflHiii). The genders of nouns are known , in the names 

of animate beings, by their signification } and in the names 
of inanimate and abstract objects , by their termination. 

1. The masculine gender comprehends the names of ani- 
mate beings of the male sex 5 e. g. OTeivB, the father; repoii, 
the hero; napt, the king; icHoma, a young man; Aa/ja, an 
uncle; M^mi/io, a money-changer ; noAMacrepBe, a foreman; 
and also , such names of inanimate and abstract objects ter- 
minating in i», it, and some which end in b , e. g. AOMt, the 
house ; noKoii , repose ; Kopa6./iB , a vessel. t 



22 RUSSIAN GRAMMAR. 

2. The feminine gender comprehends the names of animate 
beings of the female sex; e. g. cecTpa, the sister; Hana, a 
nurse ; aohb , the daughter; EjincaBeTi. , Elizabeth ; Kilo, 
Clio; also the names of inanimate and abstract objects ter- 
minating in a, a, and some which end in b; e. g. KHnra, 
a book; ujae , a ball; Ao6po/VBTe./iB , virtue. 

3. The neuter gender comprehends the names of animate 
beings where the distinction of sex is not evident , as : ahth 
and naAO ? a child; nyAOBHiiie, a monster; and also the names 
of inanimate and abstract objects terminating in o , e and ma, 
e. g. 3ojioto , gold; nope, the sea; Bpeivia, the time. 

As regards the rules relating to the genders, the following observa- 
vations are of importance : 

1. The nouns which designate any particular species of animals, form 
an exception to the rule which declares the gender of nouns designat- 
ing animate beings to be determined by their signification. These 
nouns are , according to their termination , either masculine , as : wao- 
bbkb, a man; Hocoport, a rhinoceros; coko-ib, a falcon; okvhb, a 
perch; or feminine, as: o6e3taHa, an ape; codaKa, a dog; JomaAB, a 
horse ; myKa , a pike. 

2. To determine the gender of nouns terminating in b, the following 
rules may be given: 

1) Besides such nouns as designate animate beings of the male sex, 
the following are masculine: a) The names of the months, as: RHBapt, 
January ; ikmb , July ; AenadpB, December , etc. bj The names of active 
objects, or agents, although inanimate, terminating in mejib, as : hhcm- 
Te^B, the numerator; MEomineAb, the multiplier, etc. c) The common 
nouns designating animate beings, as : rycB, a goose; Jiocb, an elk; 
etc. , with the exception of some names of animals which are feminine, 
such as : ^oma^B, a horse; ccib^b, a herring; bohib, a louse; mbiuib, 
a mouse; *opwB , the trout , and some others, d) The names of towns? 
lakes and places, whether Russian or foreign, as : Hpoc^aB^B, Yaroslav; 
CeBacTono.«> , Sebastopol; Epibcce.M>, Bruxelles , with the exception of 
Ka3am>, Kazan; AcTpaxaHB, Astrachan ; TBepB, Tvair ; BepceLflB , Ver- 
sailles ; By^oHB , Boulogne] Mapcwt., Marseilles) HcnaraHB, Ispahan; 
3piiBaiiB , Erivan. 

2) The following are feminine : a) All the names of abstract objects, 
e. g. JKH3HB, life; iecTB, honour, etc., with the ^exception of AeHB, 
the day; nepeneHB, an extract; boual , cries; BiixpB , a whirlwind' 
and foreign words , such as: Kompo^B, control; napo^B, parole; cneK- 
TaMB , spectacle ; ctimb , style, b) The names of rivers and countries ; 
e. g. 06b , the Obi ; CudiipB , Siberia , etc. , except AHa/jb'ipB , Anadir, 
c) The common names of inanimate objects ; e. g. dpoBB , the eyebrow ; 



Lexicology. — the substantive. 



BtTBb, a branch; uepKOBb, a church, etc., except the following which 



are masculine: 

ajKOro^ib, alcohol. 

a^Tapi., an altar. 

fieMOJib, B-flat. 

fieniMeTt, Tartar under tunic 

f>H3aHF>, mizzen-sail. 

rfa.ib, a billiard ball. 

(uampb, massicot. 
6paMcejb, top-gallant sail. 
6pe/te'Hb,a drag-net. 
6yKBapb, ABC-book. 
6K).ueTeHb, a bulletin. 
B eKcejib, bill of exchange. 
BeH3e.ib, a monogram. 
Bo.uwpb, a tubercle. 
rB03Ab, a nail, 
rjarojib, a crane, 
ropdiijib, a sleeve-board. 
rocnHTajib, a hospital. 
rpetfeHb, a comb. 
rpa*e^b, a slate-pencil. 
rpy3jb, a fungus, 
fleroib, tar. 
/IHHapb, denarius. 
flOJKAb, rain, 
flariub, angelica, 
ace-iy/ib, an acorn. 
JKOHKiMb, the jonquille. 
30^0TeHb, golden-rod. 
3y6apb, a toothed plane. 
HBepeHb, a splinter. 
EHfiripb, ginger. 
KaapHJb, a quadrille. 
Ka.ieHAapb, almanach. 
KaMeHb, a stone. 
Kapi6*ejib, potatoes. 
Kaiucjb, a cough. 
Kerejb, a skittle. 
KepBejb, chervil. 
KHJb, the keel (of a ship). 
KHneHb, hot-spring. 
KHcejb, a sourish jelly. 



KOCThiJb, a crutch-stick. 
Koienb, a head of cabbage. 
KpeMe'Hb, a flint. 
KpeM.ib, citadel, castle. 
KpeH/iejib, a cracknel. 
Kydapb, a top. 
KyAepb, curly hair. 
KyKOJib, corn-cockle. 
Ky^b, a mat-sack, 
jiarepb, a camp. 
jianoTb, a bast-shoe, 
jiapb, a large chest. 
jieiKeHb, foundation beam. 
jiOKOTb, the elbow. 
jioaioTb, a slice. 
Mapccib, top-sail. 
Meprejb, marl. 
MHH/iajib, almonds. 
MHTKa.ib, calico. 
MOHacTbipb, a convent. 
My*e.ib,a muffle. 
HamaTbipb,sal ammoniac. 
HiiKO.ib, nickel. 
Horoib, a finger-nail. 
Hy^b, a cipher, zero. 
ordHb, fire, 
opapb, the stole. 
nanribipb, coat of mail. 
neHb, a stump. 
nepejiHSTb, chalcedony. 
nepncTHJb, a peristyle, 
nepuajb, shirting calico. 
nepcTeHb, a ring. 
nncTo^b, a pistole. 
n.iaiaeHb, flame. 
n^acTupb, a plaster. 
n^exe'Hb, wattled hedge. 
nopT*ejb, a portfolio. 



peMe'Hb, a strap, 
pyd-flb, a rooble. 
py^b, the helm. 
cdnxeHb, honey-tea. 
cepa.ib, a seraglio. 
CK^aAeHb, a necklace. 
cjH3eHb, the slug. 
cjOBapb, a dictionary, 
cpocjienb, double branch. 
cTaBeHb, a window-shutter. 
ciaKce^b, stay-sail. 
cTane^b, stocks, launch. 
CTe6eJib, a stalk. 
CTepiKeHb, core (of a boil). 
CTHxapb, the surplice, 
cy/iapb, a winding-sheet, 
cyxapb, a rusk, biscuit. 
Tonojib, the poplar. 
TpeH3e.Jb, the curb. 
Tpib*ejb, a truffle. 
Ty*ejb, a slipper, 
yrojib, charcoal. 
ypoBeHb, a level. 
*HTH^b, a match. 
*jurejib,a vfingC of a house) . 
*OHapb, a lantern. 
*yxTejib, flat side of asword. 
xMtJb, the hop. 
xo/ieHb,an object in motion. 
xpycTMb, crystal. 
gHpKyjib,pair of compasses. 
goKO-ab, the socle. 
qeKMeHb,cosack upper-coat. 
qepHOTa^b, bay-leaved wil- 
iHxupb, new wine. [low 
nie^iyAB, the scab. 
me*ejb, a bushel, [coach). 
niKBopeHB, pole-bolt (of a 
iunnjb, a capstan. 



nopnieHb, a piston, [lying 

npo^eaceHb, place chafed by nrreMncib, a stamp 

npoiHBeHb, dripping-pan. niTHJb, a calm. 



KHCTeHb,bulIettiedto a string. npo*Hjib, a profile. 



KoroTb, a claw. 
K03bipb, a trump. 
Ko.ioAe3b, a well. 
KonuTeHb, wild nard. 
Kopafi.ib, a ship. 
Kopenb, a root. 
Kocapb, chopping knife. 



ny3b'ipb, a bladder, 
nynupb, a pimple. 
nycTbipb, a vacant space. 
nyTb, the road. 
nBHH3b, money. 
paniKyjib, blue-black. 
peBe'Hb, the rhubarb. 



niaBe^b, sorrel. 
gjeo'eHb, rubbish. 
■Epb, the letter B. 
3Jb, the letter A. 
HKopb, an anker. 
aHTapb, sea-amber. 
aceHb, the ash-tree. 
aiMem., barley. 



24 



RUSSIAN GRAMMAR. 



3. Words taken from foreign languages and ending in u , y , w , as : 
kojh6ph, a humming bird; KanaAy, the kakatoo; peBib, the review, are 
masculine, when they signify an animate being, and neuter when 
signifying an inanimate object. The other parts of speech, used as sub- 
stantives , are neuter; e. g. rpoMKoe ypa, a noisy hurrah; nepBoe h^tt,, 
the first no ; HecHocHoe a , an insupportable I. 

4. Some nouns, terminating in a and a, and designating animate 
beings, with some quality attached, are of the common gender (ofimifi), 
being both masculine and feminine. The following are examples: 

6po/ura, a vagabond (man or woman). oGacopa, a glutton (man or teoman) . 

6pK)3ra, a grumbler. njaieca, a weeper. 

uopojKea, a fortune-teller. nopyna, a surety. 

BucKOiKa, an upstart. nyctoMejia, a chatterer. 

B-BTpeHHga, a volatile person. - nbaHHga, a drunkard. 

ryjaKa, a lazy person. pa3HHa, a loiterer. 

40Ka, a clever fellow. poBHa, a person of the same 'age, etc. 

3a6iana, a squabbler. py6aica, a slasher. 

3auKa, a stutterer. caMoyqica, a self-taught person. 

3tBaKa, a ninny, a cockney. cBaToma, a bigoted person. 

KpuBomea, a wryneck. cnpoTa, an orphan. 

jiaKOMKa, a dainty person. Te3Ka, a namesake. 

jlBma, a left-handed person. y6iftga, a murderer or murderess. 

MOTura, a prodigal.person. yaraaga, a clever person. 

HeB-isJKAa, an ignorant person. xaHSKa, a hypocrite. 

5. The genders of words signifying relationship , as also the names 
of animals , are distinguished in various ways. Sometimes by the em- 
ployment of different words; e g. 0TenT>, the father, and MaTt, the 
mother ; ctmt , the son , and Aom> , the daughter ; dpan. , the brother, 
and cedpa, the sister; 6mki>, the bull, and KopoBa, the cow; ufcTyxt, 
the cock, and Kypima, the hen; 6apaffL, the ram, and OBEja, the sheep, etc. 
Sometimes the same word and the same gender are applied to both 
sexes; e. g./jpyra, a friend; Bpan>, an enemy; TOBapnnxL, a companion; 
4HTji T , a child (male and female}; oc66a. a person; occasionally the 
same word is used but with common gender, as has already been said. 
Usually however masculine nouns, if used to designate feminine objects, 
change their termination. In these , which are called movable nouns 
(abi'ijkhm&ih) , for the masculine ending are substituted the feminine ter- 
minations: a, r, Ka, oeh'a, uxa, uu,a, miu,a, uhh, ma, and some others, 
the preceding consonant being at the same time often changed .as is 
seen in the following examples: 

Kyw-B, godfather ; nyjia, godmother. aryaieH-b, an abbot; aryaieHba, an abbess. 

naB^HHi., peacock ; naBa, peahen. JiryHT> ; JiryHta, a liar m. and f. 

rocno/tHHt, master; rocnoata, mistress. cocifl'B; cociflKa, a neighbour m. and/". 

TecTb, father in law ; -renja, mother in law. ciyra; man-servant; -JKamca,maid-servant. 

flypaKt ; flypa, a fool m. and f. nacxyxi , shepherd ; -ymnia, shepherdess. 

K03eA'B, a he-goat; K03a, a she-goat. KpecTtaHHH'B; KpecibaHica, peasant m. and/". 

toctb; rocTBfl, a guest m. and f. caaieg'B, a male; caMKa, a female. 



Lexicology. — the substantive. 25 

xoaaHffB, host ; xo3ifiKa, hostess. kha3b, prince ; khathh/i, princess. 

jKHATfr, a Jew; JKBAOBKa, a Jewess. repofi, hero; repoaHfl, heroine. 

"JHacb, siskin; qnJKeBKa, hen-siskin. dor's, a god; Gorans, a goddess, 

gero^b, a beau; njerojnxa, a belle. rpa*t, count; rpa*HHa, countess. 

noBap'b, a cook; noBapuxa, a cook-maid. oneKym.; oneKyHnia, a guardian m. and f. 
niyTt ; myioBKa, a buffoon m. and f. Be-mKaHt, giant ; BciHKaHnia, giantess. 

•leBX, a lion; jibBHga, a lioness. Kopo^b, king; KopojeBa, queen. 

HMnepaxopTS, emperor ;-paTpmja, empress. 6apoH-b, baron; 6apoHecca, baroness, 
mpest, priest; wpnga, priestess. rocyaapb,rocyAapHHa, sovereign m. and/". 

Kap.ia ; Kapjmga, a dwarf m. and f. CTapnK'B,anoldman;cTapyxa,an old woman. 

aciiTeJib ; JKHTe-itHHsa, inhabitant m. and f. niBeg'b, sempster ; niBea, sempstress, [law. 
MOHax'L, a monk; MOHaxHHa, a nun. cBeKopt, father in law; CBeupoBB, mother in 

It remains to be observed that in professional names the Russian 
language makes a distinction between the name of the wife of a pro- 
fessional man, and the name of a woman who, herself, exercises a 
profession ; e. g. micneKTpiica , inspectress , and micneKTopina , wife of 
an inspector; ^eKapna, a woman who practices medicine, and .leKapina, 
wife of a doctor; ABopmma, a female doorkeeper, and ABopmniixa, wife 
of a doorkeeper ; y<niTe.flbHnna , schoolmistress ; and yniTe.ibuia , wife of 
a schoolmaster (from UHcnenmopz , Mnapb, deopHUKt and yiumejib). 

24. — Objects may present themselves to us in different Aspects. 
forms , as greater or less , prettier or uglier , than ordinary ; 
and the Russian language has different inflections to express 
these aspects. 

1 . The augmentative nouns (jBejimineAbUhm), which terminate 
in the masculine in uuufi, una; in the neuter in \mifi } and in the 
feminine in uii^a , represent the object in a magnified form , at 
the same time adding the idea of ugliness or deformity ; e. g. 
MyjKH<nnne ; a great clownish peasant; flypaHiraa, a great 
blockhead; Awmmjd , great face ; cannula , a great paw (from 
MyotcuKo , dypdm , jump and AdnaJ. 

2. The diminutive nouns (yMeHBimiTejiBHBia), which present 
the object diminished in size , end , in the masculine in urn, 
om, em, eup, rks; in the neuter in no, up, and in the femi- 
nine in ua, uu^a, e. g. ctojuik-l, little table; MepBarrL, little 
worm; 3aB6/jeivL, little manufactory; /jepeBiio, little tree; 
pynna, little hand; Benniiia, little thing (from cmojiz, uepeb, 
3aeod5, depeeo, pym and eeuipj. From these diminutives others 
again are formed, as : CTOJuneKT., qepBaneicB, pyue^Ka, BeuiHHKa. 

Besides these diminutives , which lessen the force of the 
primitives, and which may be termed physical diminutives, 
there are further : a) diminutives of tenderness, friendship, or 

Reiff Russian Grammar. 3 



26 



RUSSIAN GRAMMAR. 



in one word, of feeling, which terminate in ymm, wium, 
emna, as : GaTioniKa, dear father; MaTyimca, dear mother ; 
MaMeHtKa, dear mamma (from 6dm r, Mamb and MdjnaJ ; 
and bj diminutives of contempt or slight , presenting the ob- 
ject in an unfavourable point of view ; these terminate in 
uwuo, mum, euua, e. g. aomiiuiko, a miserable little house; 
•/loina/jeHKa , a miserable little horse. 

Christian names admit also diminutives, both in a favourable 
and unfavourable sense ; thus HBam., John; HeTp'L, Peter; 
CepM, Sergius, become as diminutives of feeling Bamr, neia, 
Cepema , and as diminutives of contempt Bam>Ka , IleTtKa, 
CepesKKa. These diminutives, by which the primitive nouns 
are limited and changed ; can only be learned by practice. 

The diminutives properly so called , which indicate the mallness of 
objects , are very commonly employed in Russian , while diminutives of 
feeling and contempt are seldom used except in familial- language. The 
same remark applies equally to the augmentatives. 
Numbers. 25. — In Russian, as in English, there are two numbers ; the 
singular (eflHHCTBemioe hhcjio), as : ctojtb, the table; Knnra, 
a book; okho, the window ; and the plural (MHOJKecTBeHHoe), 
as : cm/iti, the tables; khhth, books; OKHa, the windows. 

The Slavonian , like the Greek , has a third number, the dual (aboiI- 
CTBeimoe) , which has been retained in certain Russian inflections , as 
will subsequently be seen. 

Some substantives are only used in the singular ; such are most proper 
names , and the names of material and abstract objects ; e. g. cepe6po, 
silver; hchoctl , evidence; AV)6oBb, love. Others are only used in the 
plural; the following are of this class. 
Masculine gender. Neuter gender. Feminine gender. 

KBacgM, alum. 6-fc^H^a, white lead. 6upK)jibK0, the needle game. 

.aib/HEr, people. BopoTa, yard-gate. hmhhhhm, a name-day. 

o66h, tapestry. ApoBa, fire-wood. hojkhhum, scissors. 

onHJiKH, saw-dust. Kpecaa, an arm-chair. okobh, fetters, chains. 

OTiKH, spectacles. nepH-ia, a balustrade. 0Tpy6H, bran. 

nporoHbi, post-fare. nHCBMena, letters. poahhh, delivery. 

najibSM, a sewing-frame. panieHa, shoulders. puJii, a hurdy-gurdy. 

cyAKH, a cruet stand. ycTa, mouth. cam, sledge. 

thckh, a press. qepHHja, ink. cyMepKH, dawn, 

npngb'i, snuffers. ipecaa, the loins. cyTKH, day (24 hours). 

Some names of towns are only used in the plural ; such are : E'B.ilum, 
Rh3hhkii , KpecTUM , of the masculine gender , and BpoHHHUM , Xo^mo- 
ropu, and the foreign names: AeiiHH, Athens; flcc&i, I assy ; 0hbm, 
Thebes , of the feminine gender. 



Lexicology. — the substantive. 27 

36. — The cases are different inflections which nouns assume Cases 
to indicate the mutual relation of objects. The English language 
has strictly speaking but one case, the genitive; the mutual 
relation of words being indicated either by a preposition or 
by the position of words in a phrase. In the Russian language 
there are seven cases, which may be known, in the names of 
animate beings, by putting the questions Kino, kozo, komj, 
kozo , KibM5, oicoMd? and in the names of inanimate objects by 
the questions %mo, nezo, neMf, umo, mm, oueMd? These are: 

1. The nominative (HMeHHTejiBHtin na/jeacB) , which gives 
the name of an object in a phrase in answer to the question 
Kmo or nmo? e. g. 

Kmo ywrca? YveHUKt. Who studies? The scholar. 

T lmo npe/ri> hhm'b Avxsm>1 Knuza. What is before him? A book. 

2. The genitive (poahtcjibhlih), which indicates possession, 
and which answers to the question kozo or nezo ? and also %eu, 
nbR, Hbe? In English this case is expressed by the preposition 
of, or by an apostrophic s; e. g. 

Xo3aiiHT> (nezo ?) doMa. The master (of what ?} of the house. 

4omt> (ueu ?) cocibda. The house (of whom ?) of the neighbour. 

CUyinafica (kozo?) Mdmepu. Obey (whom?) thy mother. 

3. The dative (flaTejiLHBifi), which designates the person or 
thing to which an object relates, and answers to the question 
KOMf or uemf? In English the dative is usually indicated by 
the preposition to; e. g. 

Komj c.iiAyeTT. cia Harpa^a ? Yue- To whom does this recompense come? 

HUKf. To the scholar. 

Uemf tli o6pa40Ba.ica ? Khuzw. With what were you delighted ? With 

a book. 

4. The accusative (BimHTe^LHtiii) , which commonly called 
in English grammars the objective , answers to the question 
kozo or nmo ? e. g. 

Kozo Tti xBliimib? YienuKd. Whom do you praise? The scholar. 

Vmo tli Kyniu-L ? Knuzy. What have you bought ? A book. 

5. The vocative (3BaTe.M&iH) , which expresses the name 
of the person or object addressed ; e. g. 

YiemiK5 , 6va& npiueHteHt ! Scholar , be attentive ! 

E6o/ce, cnacn IJapa! God, save the Emperor! 

3. 



28 RUSSIAN GRAMMAR. 

6. The instrumental (tbophtc.z[bhbm) or causative, which 
designates the means or cause, and answers to the question 
KJbM5 or uibM5 ? In English the prepositions with and by are 
commonly used for this purpose ; e. g. 

Krbjrn 40B0.1&HLI? yueHUKOMZ. With whom is one satisfied? With 

the scholar. 

UibMz oht. 3a6aB^aeTca ? Kmzom. With what does he amuses himself? 

With a book. 

7. The prepositional (npeA^ojKHwif) or locative, which an- 
swers to the questions o koms or o uej\i5? es kom5 or ez ueM5? etc. 
This case, which in ecclesiastical Slavonian is called narrative 
(cKa3aTejn>Hbiil) , is termed in Russian prepositional, because 
it is always accompanied by one of the prepositions b-b , in; 
Ha, on; o or 06^, of; no, after; npn, near to; e. g. 

komz roBopaTt? 06z yuenuKib. Of whom do they speak? Of the scholar. 
2?5v£M5TMHax6AHHn>yAOB6.jBCTBie? In what do you find pleasure ? In a 
Bz KHUzm. book. 

Two of these seven casual inflections , the nominative and 
vocative, are called direct cases (npaMBie), because the simply 
give the name of the object; the remaining five are timed 
oblique (KOCBeHHbie). 
Declension of 37. — The change of the inflections in nouns , showing the 
numbers and cases , is called declension (cimoHeme) , and 
substantives are divided, according to the manner in which 
they are declined, into regular and irregular. 

Regular as. — Regular substantives , according to their termination, 
have three declensions : the first for nouns with the masculine 
termination , c*> fi, 10 ; the second for those with the neuter 
termination (O, e, am), and the third for those with the femi- 
nine termination ca, a, b). Each of these declensions has three 
inflections , one hard, and two soft, as exhibited in the table 
below. The two following observations relative to this subject 
are important. 

4. The vocative is always like the nominative, except in 
the words Bor-B , God; rocno/jB, Lord; IneycB, Jesus; Xpn- 
ctocb, Christ; OTeiri*, Father, which, in an invocation of the 
Deity , preserve the Slavonian inflection : Eowce, rdcnodu, la- 
cy ce, Xpucme, Omue. 



Lexicology. — the substantive. 



29 



2. The accusative , singular of masculine nouns in the two 
first declensions , and plural in all three , is like the nomina- 
tive when the noun designates an inanimate or abstract object, 
and like the genitive in the names of animate beings. 

Masculine nouns , ending in amejib and umejib , and designating inani- 
mate agents , such as 3HaMeHaTe^L , the denominator ; a-B-jhtcib , the 
divisor' (in arithmetic) , are declined like the names of animate beings, 
and consequently their accusative is like the genitive. The same is the 
case with the names of inanimate objects which have been borrowed 
from animate , as : cnyTHino. , a satellite (of a planet). The word hao.it>, 
idol, has its accusatve like the genitive, whilst in its synonymes KVMiipT> 
and HCTVKani., the accusative is like the nominative. The word .Jnue, sig- 
nifying the face and an individual, is used in both its meanings like the 
name of an inanimate object , its accusative being always the same as 
the nominative. 

The collective nouns are always declined like the names of inanimate 
objects, though signifying a collection of animate beings, such as napoAt, 
a nation ; bohcko , an army ; CTa^o , a herd. 



DECLENSIONS OF REGULAR SUBSTANTIVES. 



FIRST. 

MASCULINE TERMINATION. 

Hard infl. Soft inflections. 



SECOND. 

NEUTER TERMINATION. 
Hard infl. Soft inflections. 



MR 
eHH 

emi 



like the Nominative or the Genitive. . . 
like the Nominative 




THIRD. 

FEMININE TERMINATION. 

Hard infl. Soft inflections. 



H b 

II II 

U (ll) H 

H) b 



u n 

OBT>(eii) eBt 

aMT. HMt 



oio (oii) ero(eu) iK)(bio) 

$ £ (ll) H 



h a a jweHa 

eft t> eu(H,iu) ent 

HMT) aMT. HMt eHaMT> 

like the Nominative or the Genitive 
like the N ominativ e 

HMH 
flXT> 



LI H II 

t> (efi) b (it, iii) eft 

aMT, HMT. AMI. 





30 RUSSIAN GRAMMAR. 

Rules of the 29. — In declining the regular nouns , certain rules are to 
declensions. j )e Q^ggj-yg^ some of which are general, being common to 
all the three declensions, while others are special, being con- 
fined to one of the declensions or one of the inflections. 

General rules . !• According to what has already been observed (§ 18) relative to 
the permutation of letters, a) the vowel u, of the genitive singular and 
nominative plural, is changed for u after the guttural and hissing con- 
sonants (r, k, x ; m, % m, ni) ; b) the vowel o , when without accent , of 
the instrumental singular and genitive plural, is changed for e after 
the lingual and hissing consonants (n; m, % m, m) , observing however 
that after the lingual (u) the vowel o may be used if it is accented ; 
c) the vowel n of the dative and prepositional singular is changed for 
u after the vowel i (in nouns in m , ie and in). (See the paradigms 2, 
3, 8, 16, 20, 21, 26.) 

2. A great number of nouns elide in the other cases (excepting in the 
instrumental singular of feminine nouns in b) the vowel e or o, inserted 
in the termination of the nominative singular ; but we must observe that 
in this elision the vowel e is changed for & after the consonant ji, and 
for u after a vowel. (See paradigms 2, 4, 10, 28.) 

3. In such nouns of the II and III declension as have two con- 
sonants before the final vowel , the vowel o or e is usually inserted 
between the two consonants in the genitive plural; in such cases how- 
ever the e is always substituted for the semi-vowels & and w. (See pa- 
radigms 12, 13, 20, 23.) 

4. The genitive plural has some particular inflections : the inflection 
eii (instead of 06Z and 5} is peculiar to nouns in oicz, hz, mz, wp, w,a, 
to those in o/ca, ua, ma, preceded by another consonant, and to those 
in be and in &/z ; the inflection u to nouns in e and a preceded by a 
vowel , and the inflection iu to nouns in be and bR , contracted from ie 
and in. (See paradigms 3, 16, 21, 24, 25, 26.) 

5. Such nouns as are only used in the plural, are declined accord- 
ing to the paradigm to which, by their termination, they belong. Thus 
among the masculine nouns , xopoMBi , edifice , is declined according to 
the 1st paradigm (3aKOHw) ; innnuLi , snuffers , according to the 2d 
(otul'i) ; o66h , tapestry , according to the 6th (repou) ; .iib/ru , men 
(instr. JiWAbmi), according to the 9th(Kopo.iii); among the neuter nouns, 
ApoBa, firewood, according to the 11th (c^OBa) ; Kpecaa,, arm-chair 
(gen.KyeceA-b), according to the 12th (cieiua); nncbMeHa, letters, ac- 
cording to the 18th (BpeMeHa) ; among the feminine nouns, okobbi, chains, 
according to the 19th (kopobli) ; hoci'ukii, a hand-barrow Cgen. hoci'i- 
jiowb) , according to the 20th (mAKu) ; cam , a sledge , and ptui , a 
hurdy-gurdy , according to the 27th (cTpacra). 

6. Foreign nouns, whether common or proper, ending in s, it, &; 
a, R,b, are declined like Russian nouns with the same terminations, 
whilst those in e , u, o,/ and w, are indeclinable. The same is the 



Lexicology. — the substantive. 31 

case with family names of females , whatever may be their termination. 
Thus 6MHii6ycT>, an omnibus; A6eaort> , London, are declined accord- 
ing to the 1st paradigm (3aK6Fb); kohboh, a convoy; Eapiu&fi, Barclay, 
according to the 6th (repoii) ; BOAeBiwb , a vaudeville ; Bpwccejib, Bru- 
xelles , according to the 9th (kopojeb); nieca, a piece (of music, etc); 
IleTpapKa, Petrarch, according to the 19th (Kopcma) ; KO.ioma, a colony, 
according to the 26th (M6.wm) ; raBam> f, a haven, according to the 
27th (cTpacTt). But KO*e , coffee; KOJin6pii, a humming-bird; Aeno, de- 
pot (military) ; paH/ieBy } a rendez-vous; peBib , a review ; KacTC/ibpe, 
Castlereagh; Mopo, Moreau , are indeclinable. The same is the case with 
the feminine family names ; as ^Karuiicb , CTa^b j etc. ; thus we say : 
y TocnoHdi jRaiuiucz , at the house of Mrs Genlis; coiniieHie rocnoam 
Cmajib, the work of Mrs Stael. 

1. Nouns ending in euoKz , signifying the young ones of animals, are Special rules, 
masculine in the singular; but in the plural they preserve the Slavonian 
inflection nma or ama , and are neuter. (See paradigm 4.) 

2. Nouns ending in rhuhz or anum and in npum or apmz , have 
peculiar inflections in the plural. (See paradigm 5.) 

3. In the instrumental singular of the III declension , oro is con- 
tracted in oil j eto in eii , and ifo in bfo ; thus we say : pyKoro or pybofi, 
with the hand; 3eM.iew or seioefi, by the earth. (See paradigm 28.) In 
the same manner the instrumental plural hmii of some feminine nouns in 
b is contracted in bMU , the accent being in such cases placed on the 
last syllable ; thus we say : ABepbMii , by gates; JioinaAbMii , with horses 
(and not deep Amu, jiouiadAmiQ. 

4 The genitive singular of masculine nouns in z , b , u, signifying di- 
visible matter , often takes , especially in familiar language , the inflec- 
tion y and w of the dative (instead of a and n) ; thus we say : ^ynr-b 
cdxapy, a pound of sugar ; .lOJKKa dezmro , a spoonful of tar ; nauiKa 
udfo , a cup of tea. The same inflection (instead of n>) is also found in 
the prepositional singular , accompanied with the prepositions es or Ha, 
in some nouns in 5 and it , an in such cases takes the tonic accent ; 
thus we say : bt> eddy , in the garden ; Ha Kpaib, on the brink. 

5. In compound substantives , the first word is also declined , if in its 
junction with the second it has preserved the termination of its nomina- 
tive singular ; thus IJapbrpa/j-b , Constantinople , is declined according to 
the 9th and the 1st paradigm: G. IJaparpaAa, D. IJaprorpaAy, /. Llapeivrb 
-rpaAOMTb , P. o D,ap'Brpa4'B. With respect to the names of towns com- 
pounded of the adjectives hogo and 6ibjio , as HoBropoAi. , Et\io63epo, 
and to the common nouns formed of the numeral nojio, the half; as : 
no.iAeHb, midday; no.iroAa, half a year, we refer the student to our 
remarks on that subject in the declension of the adjectives and numerals. 

30. — By observing the above general and special rules we Paradigms 
shall be able to decline all the regular nouns of the Russian sions e e f C sub- 
language according to the following 28 paradigms. stances 



32 



RUSSIAN GRAMMAR. 



PARADIGMS OF THE THREE DECLEM 



Nominative and Vocative. 



Genitive. 



1. 

2. 
3. 
4. 
5. 
6. 
7. 
8. 
9. 
10. 



itia 



11. 
12. 
13. 
14. 
15. 
16. 
17. 
18. 



3aKOH5, the law. ..... 3aK0H-a . 

OTeirt, the father om-a . . 

wsLA&iuz , a cabin ma^am-a . 

TeAeuoK5, a calf Tcieim-a 

ABop^«t/«5, a gentleman . abopahhh- 

repow, the hero repo-a . . 

coJOBew, a nightingale . . coAOB-bA. 

rem'S, a genius reHi-a . . 

Kop6.«>, the king Kopo-i-a . 

ordiib , the fire oni-a . . 

caobo, a word c^oB-a . . 

CTexjio, the glass] cTeiu-a . 

KOAeuKo , small ring .... KO-aeiK-a 

Mope , the sea Mop-a . . 

pyac&e, a gun py;K-6a . 

MHime, an opinion .... MHiiii-a . 
A±Tuiu,e, n. a great child. Aimm-a . 
Bpe.w/z, the time BpeM-emi 

KOpOBfl, a COW KOpOB-M . 

mjiKa , a stick mAK-n . . 

Bowed, a bridle bo3)k-h . 

ueA-hjifi , the week .... He/ti^-n . 

whcna, a song uicn-u . 

cb«/? , a pile CBa-n . . 

cy/t&zz, the judge.' cy^-Lii . 

m.oAui/1, a lightning .... Mcum-H . 

CTpacT& 5 a passion CTpacT-u 

AOKb , the lie . . ak-e . . 



S I N G U 



Dative. Accusative. 



y 
y 

y 

y 
y 

K) 

tib 

H) 

ib 

K> 



y 
y 
y 

K) 
BIO 
10 

y 

emi 



s s 



.§ "-a 



S3 
i— i 

pa 



19. 
20. 
21. 
22. 
23. 
24. 
25. 
26. 
27. 
28. 



hi . 

H . 
II . 




With respect to the use of the tonic accent in the declensions, the following rules are to be observed. 

1. Nouns of the 1st declension commonly preserve through all the cases both of the singular 
and plural, the accent of the nominative singular. But most polysyllabic nouns, the termination 
of which is accented, transfer the accent to the inflection of the genitive, and keep it on this 
syllable through all the other cases. Several monosyllables follow the same rule. Other mono- 
syllables preserve the nominative accent in the singular, but in the plural they transfer it to 
the inflections of the cases, some in all the cases, others from the genitive downwards. 

2. In the lid declension , the accent serves to distinguish the nominative plural from the 
genitive singular. On this account, those nouns which in singular have the accent on the first 



Lexicology. — the substantive. 



33 



SIONS OF REGULAR 


SUBSTANTIVES. 






L A 


R. 


1 


P L U R 


A, L. 






lustrum. 


Prepos. 


Nomin. and Voc 


. Genitive. Dative. 


Accus. 


Instrum. 


Prepos. 


. . OMt. 


...£.. 


3aKOH-BI . . 


. . OBI) . . . aan> . 




. . aMii . 


. axT>. 


. . eSTL . 


. . . "B . . 


OTII-BI . . . 


. . eBT. . . . aM-B . 




. . aura . 


. ax'b. 


. . ewb . 


. . . i . . 


ina.iam-ii '. . 


. . eft. . . . aM"B . 




. . aMn . . 


. ax'b. 


. . OMT> . 


. . . £ . . 


Te.iaT-a . . 


. . T> .... aJVIT) . 




. . aivin . . 


. axT>. 


. . OMt . 


. . . £ . . 


4BopaH-e . . 


. . t> .... aan. . 




. aaiu . . 


. axT>, 


. eait . 


...$.. 


repo-ii . . . 


. . eBT> . . . HMT> . 




. HMO 




. . bewb 


. . . bi . 


CO.IOB-BU . . 


. . Be'BT> . . BflMT.. 


en 

fee 
.5 


. bflMII. . 


. bAx-b. 


. . eMt . 


. . . u . . 


reHi-n . . . 


. . eBT> . . . flMT> . 


. . AMU . . 


. ax'b. 


. . eMi> . 


. . . £ . . 


Kopo.i-ii . . 


. . eft . . . . flMT> . 




. AMU . . 


. ax'b. 


. . eivrL . 


...%.. 


om-ii . . . 


. . eft . . . . flMT> . 


' inanimat 
niinatc be 


. HMII . . 


. AXT>. 


. . OMT> . 


...£.. 


ciOB-a. . . . 


. . T> .... aMi> . 


. aura . . 


. ax'b. 


. . OMt . 


. . . E . . 


CTeiu-a . . . 


CTe'KO.I-T) . . aMi> . 


© ra 


. ainii . . 


. ax'b. 


. . OM'B . 


. . . "B . . 


KO-ieiK-H . . 


KO.ieieK-'B . ajvii) . 


S ° 
s 2 


. asm . . 


. axi. 


. . earL . 


...%.. 


Mop-a. . . . 


. . eft. . . . a3n. . 


c s 

c 2 


. flMII . . 


. AXT>. 


. . besn. 


. . . B-B . 


py)K-Ba . . . 


. . eft. . . . BflMT). 


*" as 


. bflMH . 


. baxT>. 


. . eM-B . 


. . . II . . 


MHEHl-fl. . . 


. . ft . ' . . flM-B . 


.s — 


. HMII . . 


. flXT>. 


. . eM-B . 


. . -B . . 


aiTnm-n • • 


. . T> . . . . aMi» . 


•5 


. aMii . . 


. ax'b. 


. . eHeait 


. . emi . 


Bpen-eHa. . 


. . eH-B . . . eHaaiT, 


2 » 

© © 

J3 J3 


. eHajiu . 


. eHaxi). 


. . OK). . 
. . OH) . 


. . . -b . . 
. . . £ . , 


KOpOB-BI . . 

na\iK-n. . . . 


na.ioK-i. . . aMi> . 


. asm . . 
. aMn . . 


. ax'b. 
. ax'b. 


. . eio. . 


...%.. 


B03VK-II. . . 


. . eft . . . . aai-B . 


as 


. asm . . 


. axi. 


. . eio. . 


. . . ■B . . 


He4'B.i-n . • 


. . b . . . . am . 




. hmii . . 


. ax'b. 


. . eio . 


. . . £ . . 


nicH-n . . . 


. nicen-b . . hmt. . 




. flMII . . 


. flXT>. 


. . eio . 


. . 'B . . 


CBa-n .... 


.ft .... AMI, . 




. AMn . . 


. AX"b. 


. . tew . 


. . b%. . 


cyj-Bn . . . 


. . eft . . . . BHivrB. 




. bHMn . 


. bRXT>. 


. . eio . 


. . . n . . 


Mo.mi-n . . 


. . ft .... flMT> . 




. AMn . . 


. AXT). 


. . iio . . 


. . II . . 


crpacT-n . . 


. . eft . . . . AMI) • 




. AMII . . 


. Ax'b. 


. . AOTKblO 


. . AIRE. 


.i;K-n .... 


. . eft . . . . aMi> . 




. aMn . . 


. ax'b. 



syllable, transfer it in the plural to the last; while, on the contrary, those which in the sin- 
gular have the accent on the last syllable, transfer it in the plural to the first, and keep it on 
that syllable through all the cases , both of the singular and plural. 

3. In the Hid declension a distinction between the genitive singular and nominative plural only 
takes place in such nouns in a and n, as have the accent on the termination. These nouns transfer 
the accent to the first syllable in the nominative plural, resuming in all the other cases the accent of 
the singular. Some of these nouns have also in the accusative singular the accent on the first syllable. 
Among the nouns in &, there are several which transfer the accent to the inflections on the cases, 
from the genitive plural downwards. — The examples to these different rules here follow. 



34 



RUSSIAN GRAMMAR. 



First 
declension, 



According to the 1st paradigm (saKorn,) are declined nouns in 5 (with 
the exception of those which belong to the 4 folloAving paradigms) , re- 
merbering however to change u into u after the gutturals (r, k, x), and o 
into e after the lingual (n), and observing further, that several nouns 
of the 1st declension throw the accent on the inflections of the cases, some 
commencing with the genitive singular, others with the nominative plu- 
ral , and others again with the genitive plural. Such are : 



Eapam., the ram, G. 6apaHa. 
BepTent, the cavern, BepTena. 
KyMHp'B, an idol, KVMapa. 
BoaxBt, the magician, BCixBa. 
Bpart, the enemy, Bpara. 
fl3MK'B, the tongue, H3biKa. 
ITBTyxTb, a cock, nBTyxa. 
M'Bcflg'B, a month, Mficnga. 
Ky3Hen,t, the blacksmith, Ky3Hega. 



Aap-B, the gift, 6?. Aapa; N pi. Aapii. 
^oart, the debt, AOjra; AO^rn. 
^HHt, a rank, iHHa; iHHbi. 
Hlapt, a ball, mapa ; niapw. 
Bor^, a god; JV. pi. Corn, G. doroBTb. 
Bop's, a robber; Bopw, BopoB'B. 
Tpod-B, a coffin; rp66w, rpodoB-b. 
4y6i>, an oak; Aydbi, AydoB-B. 
Boak'B, the wolf; bo^kh, bojikob'B. 



According to the 2d paradigm (oTen>) are declined the nouns in 
which the vowel e or o of the nominative is elided in the other cases, 
observing at the same time the change of e into b after the consonant ji, 
and into it after a vowel. Such are : 
OpeJit, an eagle, G. opjia. 
KoBept, a carpet, KOBpa. 



Earop'B, a hook, G. darpa. 
Bioco.i'B, an ambassador, nocaa. 
•/Todi), the forehead, .ida. 
IIcajoM-B, a psalm, ncajiMa. 
Poit, the mouth, pTa. 
YqacTOKt, a portion, yqacTica. 
CohT), sleep, cHa. 
Yroj-b, an angle, yr^ia. 
SainoicB, a castle, 3aMKa. 
3aM6icb, a lock, 3aMKa. 



Kproqeio., a hook, KpioqKa. 
Aewb, a lion, .aBBa. 
KyjieK'B, a sack, Ky.5bKa. 
HjienrB, the elm-tree, nvibMa. 
KoHeKii, a skate, KOHbKa. 
Boeg-B, a wrestler, dofiga. 
Saeg-B (and saagt), a hare, 3afiga. 
OnoeK-b, a calf's skin, onofiica. 

According to the 3d paradigm (ma^amt) are declined such nouns in 
s with a hissing consonant (m, % m, in) , as form the genitive plural 
in eii ; such are : 



JTaAeHCB, the case, G. naAeJKa. 
ILiaieiK'b, the payment, n^aTeaca. 
MopJKt, a walrus, MopsKa. 
EHttj'a hedgehog, esKa. 
Kjroq'B, the key, Kjnoia. 
•/lyq-b, a ray, ayqa. 
Rnpnaqt, a brick, Kapnuqa. 
Meqt, a sword, sieqa. 



Ila^am'b, the sabre, G. na^aiua. 
^iaHAbim-b, the mayflower, jiaHAbinia. 
KapaHAamt, a pencil, KapaHAama. 
Topraurb, the mercer, Toprama. 
n^anjt, a mantle, njianja. 
.ZlenrB, the bream, jiegja. 
ToBapHnjT., a comrade, TOBapanja. 
OBonj-b, a fruit, oBonja. 



According to the 4th paradigm (Te^eiiOKT.) are declined the names of the 
young of animals, ending in mom, which, having retained in the plural 
the Slavonian inflection ama for ama after oic and u) , are neuter and 
consequently belong, in the singular to the 1st declension, and in the 
plural to the 2d. Some of these nouns however form their plural re- 
gularly in emeu. Such are : 



Lexicology. — the substantive. 35 

HmeHOK-b, a Iamb ; N. pi. aniaxa. OcjeHOKx,, a young ass ; N. pi. ocjaxa. 

/KepedeHOK-B, a foal; acepedaxa. BojiieHOK-B, a wolfs cub; BO.iqaxa. 

Ithiu.ieHOK-b, a pullet; gHUjiflxa. MeAB'EHieHOK'B, a bear's cub; MeABBacaxa. 

IIopoceHOK'B, a little pig; nopocaxa. AbBenoKT>, a lion's whelp ; N. pi, JiBBfeHKH. 

KoxeHOK-B, a kitten; Koxaxa. rajqeaoKB, a young awl; ra.iieHKH. 

PedeHOin., a child ; pedaxa. MwuieHOK-B, a young mouse ; MtimeHKe. 

Also meHOKi, , a pup j G memta , N. pi. meHHTa and memti'i. 

According to the 5th paradigm (4BopammT>) are declined nouns in 
mum ■, aHum , Rpum and apum , which in the plural change uho 
into e , 5 , aMZ , etc. ; such are : 

CejiHHHH-B, a villager; N.pl. cci/me. rpaauaHHH'Bj'a citizen; N.pl. rpaauaHe. 

KpecxBHHHH-B, a peasant; KpecxtaHe. MBnjaHHHT., a burgher; MBnjaHe. 

MipaHHHB, a layman; MipaHe. OrHiinjaHHH'B, a freeman; orniinjane. 

noce^aHaH-B, a husbandman; uoce-iane. XpncxiaHUH-B, a Christian; xpecxiane. 
CeMtaHHH-B, the head of a family; cembaHe. EospnH'B, a lord; doape. 
PocciaHHHT., a Russian; Pocci/me. Eo-irapHirB, a Bulgarian; Eo.irape. 

According to the 6th paradigm (repou) are declined the nouns in m, 
with the exception of those in iii and of some in eu, which belong to 
the two following paradigms. Such are : 

IIokoh, a room, G. noKoa. .Inuiaa, a scab, G. jianiaa. 

3.104BH, a wretch, 3.104BH. riau, a part, naa. 

Ka.3HaieH, a treasurer, Ka3Haiea. Bofi, the combat, G. 66a ; N.pl. doii. 

Capafi, a coach-house, capaa. Pofi, a swarm, poa; poii. 

Ciyqafi, the occasion, c.iyqaa. Cxpofl, the rank, cxpoa; expos. 

Ha-iOH, a desk, Ha.ioa. tlafi, the tea, qaa; iau. 

According to the 7th paradigm (co.ioBefi) are declined eight nouns in 
eii , as change the e of the nominative into b in all the other cases. 
Some Christian names in iu , in familiar language , are declined in the 
same manner. Such are : 

Bopoden, a sparrow, G. BopodBa.' ^upefi, a furuncle, G. inpba. 

MypaBea, an ant, MypaBBa. Bacnjiii, Basil, Baca.iBa. 

Pyiefi, a brook, pyiBa. rpnropin, Gregory, TparopBa. 

PeneS, a little ribbon, penBa. .leBOHxiii, Leontius, .IeBoHXBa. 

y.iefi, a bee-hive, yjBa. TIpoK6*iu, Procopius, HpoK6*BH. 

/Kepedefi, the lot, JKepedBa. Hmaxifi, Ignatius, HrHaxBa. 

According to the 8th paradigm (renin) are declined such nouns in w3f, 
as take the inflection u (instead of Tb) in the prepositional singular; 
such are: 

BuKapifl, a vicar, G. BDKapia. BaHoqepniii, a cup-bearer, G. BHHOqepnia. 

IlHBeHxapin, an inventory, HHBeHxapia. MepKypifi, Mercury, Mepicypia. 
KoMMeHxapiS, a commentary, -MeHTapia. Ceprin, Sergius, Cepria. 

Some substantives in ii, as nopTHoil, a tailor; KopaiiiS, the pilot, 
which are only adjectives used as substantives, are declined like the 
adjectives (§. 40). 

According to the 9th paradigm (Kop6.it) are declined the masculine 
nouns in b, with the exception of those which belong to the following 
paradigm. Such are : 



36 



RUSSIAN GRAMMAR. 



JKeayAb, an acorn, G. weAyw. IJapb, a king, G. gapa. 

Ko^i64e3b, a well, K040Ae3a. Kopad-ib, a vessel, Kopad./ia. 

yqaiejiB, the master, ygaTC/ia. 4>aHapb, a lantern, *aHapa. 

C66oAh, a sable, co6ojiA. ^hthjib, a match, shthju. 

Ciecapb, a lock -smith, ciecapa. TycB, a goose ; N.pl. ryca, G. rycefi. 

TocyAapb, a sovereign, rocyaapa. rojydb, a pigeon; ro-jyda, rcaydefi. 

O^ieHb, a stag, OAeHa. 3Btpb, a beast; 3Bipn, 3pfcpeH. 

Me/tBliAb, a bear, MeAB-fcAH. *IepBB, a worm; gepBH, qepBea. 

According to the 10th paradigm (oroHt) are declined such masculine 

nouns in 6, as elide the vowel e or o in all the other cases ; such are : 

KaMeHb, a stone, G. KaMHa. KopeHB, the root; N.pl. Koprni, G. Kopnea. 

CTeCejib, a stem, CTedjia. Yropb, an eel; yrpn, yrpeg. 

.lanoTb, a bast shoe, Jiama. HoroTb, a nail; HorTH, HoneS. 

PeMeHb, a thong, peiraa. Korofb, a claw; Kona, KorTefl. 

KpeMeHb, a flint, Kpeflraa. IlepcTeHb, a ring; nepcnm, nepciHefl. 

^IOMOTb, a slice, AOMTa. .ZIoKOTb, the elbow; jiokth, aoktch. 

In the list of masculine nouns in 6, given in § 23, which elide the vowel e or o 
of the nominative, this vowel is printed in italics. 

Second According to the 11th paradigm (oiobo) are declined the nouns in o, 

and those in u,e, o/ce, ne and u^e (with the exception of such as belong 
to the following paradigm , of the diminutives in ko and u,e and augmen- 
tatives in ui^e), observing however the change of o into e after the his- 
sing consonants and the lingual (m, h, m, u), and remarking that several 
nouns of the Hd declension transfer in the plural the accent from the 
first syllable to the last, and vice versa. Such are: 
Tkjio, the body, G. TMa; N.pl. Tivia. ./[age, the face, G. .laga; N.pl. jiaga. 
da/io, a herd, cxaAa; CTaaa. flnge, an egg, saga; aaga (G. aag-b). 

3epKa^o, a mirror, 3epKa^a; 3epKa.ia. ILieie, the shoulder, n^eia; n\aeqaf 
03epo, a lake, 03epa; 03epa. A6w.e, the couch, G. and N.pl. jioJKa. 

Bbho, the wine, BHHa; BHHa. Biie, an assembly, Biia. 

Ce^o, a village, cejia; ce.ia. 5KH.iHgje, a dwelling, jKB-flanja. 

KoAeco, a wheel, Koaeca; KOJieca. 3pijHg|e, a spectacle, 3pi\aHnja. 

4o^ox6, a chisel, AO-ioia; Ao;idTa. CoKpoBagje, a treasure, coKpoBania. 

Hsiao, n. a child, G. and N.pl. qaAa. ryjbdanje, a promenade, ryabdanja. 

CbIithjo, a star, cBlTHAa. yqa^Egje, a school, yqajiajga. 

Mishhjio, m. a changer, MlHajia. • KjaAdHnje, a cemetery, iciaAdnnja. 

According to the 12th paradigm (cieoo) are declined those nouns 
in o and e, preceded by two consonants , which usually insert the vowel 
e or o in the genitive plural, observing at the same time that the 
nouns in u,e take the vowel e, and that the semi-vowel 6 between the 
two consonants is changed into e. Such are : 

Pedpo, a rib; N.pl. pedpa, G. pedep'b. IIhcbmo, a letter ; N.pl. nacbina, G. naceMi. 
HaTHO, a spot; naTHa, nareH'b. Hojiotho, linen; nojioiHa, no.aoTeH'b. 

3epH0, a grain; 3et)Ha, sepeH'b. Cl>A.fl6, a saddle; cBA^a, CBAeJTB. 

HJeMJid, a vice; njeM.ia, njemej'b. , Iacji6,anumber;qBCjia,qHcej'b(and qac^i'b). 

Cvkho, cloth; cyKHa, cyKon-b. CepAge, the heart; cepAga, cepAeg-b. 

Okho, the window; oKHa, okoh-b. Kcibge, a ring; KOAbga, KOAegi. 

BpeBHo, abeam, dpeBHa, dpeoem.. KpbMBge, a step ; Kpb'ubga, Kphijegt. 



Lexicology. — the substantive. 37 

It is necessary to observe that in nouns in 3do , cmo , cko and cmeo, 
the genitive plural is formed without the insertion of any letter ; e. g. 
m^AO , a nest; mbcto , a place; boAcko , an army ; HyBCTBO , the feeling, 
—gen. plur. rK&SAi, mect^', boucki, ivbctb'b. 

According to the 13th paradigm (KO-ierao) are declined the diminu- 
tives in no and u,e , which form their nominative plural in u (for those 
in Koy or in u (for those in u i e~) , inserting the vowel e in the genitive 
plural. Such are: 

CepaeuKO, little heart jp^.cepAeqKHj-.^eieKt. /JoHije, little bottom; pi. aohijm, /joHes-B. 
MtcxeiRO, little place ; MUcieqKB, -xeieicb. Ayjibu,e, mouth piece ; fly-ibgbi, ayjiea'B. 
KpbMhiniKO, little wing ; KpbLibiniKH,-.ibinieK'b. Pbi-ibije, little snout ; pHJibSM,phues , B. 
4omhiuko, little house; ,uoManiKH,-MBnieK'B. BiojioxeHge, a towel;- xeHgbi,-xeHes , b. 

According to the 14th paradigm (nope) are declined those nouns in 
Jie and pe, which form their genitive plural in eii; e. g. 

Ilojie, the field; G. no.ia, N.pl. nojia, G. nojiea. 
Tope, chagrin; ropa (not used in the plural). 

According to the 15th paradigm (pyatbe) are declined those nouns in 
be and in ee , which change in the genitive plural , be and ee into eii, 
and be , a contraction of ie , into iu. Such are : 

/Ka.ibe, a floor ; N.pl. JKa./iba, G. JKH-ieft. n.iaxbe, a coat, G.pl. n./iaxe3. 

Konbe, a lance; Konba, Konea. BepxoBbe, a spring, BepxoBefi. 

IlHTbe, a beverage; naxba, naxei. Bece^be, an enjoyment, Becedifi. 

.Ie3Bee, the edge; Jie3Bea, Jie3Befl. BocKpeceHbe, Sunday, BOCKpeceHifi. 

Ocxpee, the point, edge; ocxpea, ocxpefi. IIoBEpbe, a belief, noBipifi. 

The following nouns in be form their genitive plural in bees : noAMa- 
CTepLe m, the journeyman; KymaHBe, a dish; noMbCTbe, a domain; 
ycTBe , mouth (of a river) ; BapeiiBe , a preserve. 

According to the 16th paradigm (MHime) are declined nouns in ie, 
which form their genitive plural in iu , and which in the prepositional 
singular take the inflection u (instead of /&)• In these nouns the accent 
of the nominative plural is the same as that of the genitive singular. 
Such are : 

3aaHie, an edifice, G. and N pi. 3jaHia. OpyiKie, an arm, G. a.n&Npl. opyaoa. 

3HaHie, knowledge, 3Hama. HBjieme, an apparition, HBJema. 

JKe-iame, the desire, atejiama. OGnjeme, a communication, odnjema. 

BoHaxie, an idea, noHaxia. CounrBHie, the doubt, coMHSHia. 

CofipaHie, an assembly, co(5pama. B^aABHie, the possession, B^ia/i-BHia. 

PacxeHie, a plant, pacxeHia. Co3BB3Aie, a constellation, co3BE3/ua. 

According to the 17th paradigm (Airame) are declined the augmen- 
tative nouns , which form their plural in u , eii, etc. ; e. g. 

4oMHnje, great house ; pi. AOMHnjH,-njeH. CiOJanje, great table ; pi. cxojuinjE, -njea. 
4Bopanje, great court; ABopanja. Ko3jame, m. great he-goat ; ko3.ibu2h. 

MyjKHqarge, m. big peasant , MyiKHianja. noKoarge, great room ; noKoanjn. 

Some substantives in oe, as miBOTHoe , an animal; MoponceHoe, ice- 
creams, which are only adjectives used as substantives, are declined 
like the adjectives (§ 40). 



38 



RUSSIAN GRAMMAR. 



According to the 18th paradigm (Bpeaia) are declined nouns in mr. 
In the plural the accent is transferred to the last syllable. Such are : 

Epema, the burden, N.pl. opeaieHa. TlAema, the race, N.pl. mieaieHa. 

BiiMa, an udder, BWMeHa. dpeMa, the stirrup, cTpenieHa. 

Hmh, the name, HMeHa. Tbmh, the sinciput, TBMena. 

n^aMa, the flame (no plural). 3aa.ma, the flag, 3HaMena and 3HaMeHa. 

By the same paradigm is declined ci>mh , seed , plur. cuMeHa , which 
however has retained in the genitive plural the Slavonian inflection 
cuMaHt (instead of ceMeuz) , to be distinguished from the proper name 
CeMeHt, Simeon. 

dedensfn According to [the 19th paradigm (nopoBa) are declined the nouns in a 
("excepting such as belong to the two following paradigms). It is neces- 
sary to observe the change of u into u after the guttural and hissing 
consonants (r, k, x ; m, i, m) , and of o into e after the hissings and 
the lingual (m, % m ; ii) , and also to remark that several nouns of the 
Hid declension in a and h transfer the accent in the nominative plural, 
and some of them also in the accusative singular , from the last syllable 
to the first. Such are : 

Pbifia, the fish, G. and N.pl. phiou. BaoBa, a widow, G. baobm; N.pl. baobbi. 

IILaana, a hat, Dx/umti. 3BB3Aa, a star, 3BB3AM; 3BB3ah. 

IIo6'B/ia, victory, nod'BAH. )KeHa, the wife, JKeHb'i; ateHu. 

P63a, a rose, po3w. Ciyra, a servant, cayrH; CJiyrn. 

KHura, a book, khhth. PBica, a river, pbkh; pbkh. 

CodaKa, a doy, codaKH BoAa, water, G. boam, A. BOAy ; N.pl. boam. 

Myxa, a fly, Myxn. 3nMa, winter, 3HMW, 3HMy ; 3hmh. 

Roma, the skin, kojkh. Pyi<a, the hand, pyicH, pyicy; pynn. 

Tyia, the cloud, Tyqa. TojiOBa, the head, tojiobh, ro-JOBy; to^obm. 

Tpyma, a pear, rpynm. CicoBopoAa, a frying pan, cKOBopoAy,-poAH. 

According to the 20th paradigm (na^Ka) are declined most nouns in 
a preceded by two consonants, or by one consonant and & or u, which 
insert the vowel e or o in the genitive plural, & and ii then changing 
into e. Such are: 

./loJKKa, the spoon; G.pl. JioJKeKB. Kofiaia, the hem; G.pl. Koearb. 

CocHa, the fir; coceH-b. KonBHKa, a copeck; KonBeifb. 

CKa3Ka, a tale; CKasoKt. PagHa, a ship's yard; paeHt. 

Hlanica, a cap; manoicb. CBaAbda, the marriage; cBaAed*. 

YxKa, a duck; yTOKB. CyAbda, fate; N.pl. cyAbdw, G. cyAed"b. 

OBga, a sheep; A. OBgy, G.pl. OBegB. Tiopbiwra, the prison, TibptMbi, xibpeMB. 

/Jocica, a plank; Aocny, aocok'b. Cepbra, an ear-ring; cepBrn, ceperB. 

The vowels o or e are inserted solely to facilitate the pronunciation; 
for if the two or three consonants in juxta-position can be articulated 
without difficulty, the insertion does not take place. Thus: npocbda, the 
demand; CTapocia , a bailiff; Bepcia, a werst; JKepTBa, a victim, form 
their genitive plural: npocbdt, ciapocrB, BepcrL, JKepTBT>. The genitive 
plural of Boima , war , is bohht. , and that of Tanna , a sacrament , is 

TaHHt. 



Lexicology. — the substantive. 



39 



According to the 21th paradigm (B03Hta) are declined nouns in oica, 
ua, ma, preceded by a consonant, as also those in ut,a, which form 
their genitive plural in eii. Such are : 

XaHata, a bigot; G.pl. xaHJKeH. .IfcBiua, a left-handed person; G.pl.JitKmea 

Ilapqa, brocade; napiea. BeKiua, a squirrel; BeKmefi. 

IIpHTqa, a proverb; npnTqeii Ponja, a grove; ponjefi. 

KajiaHia, a belfry; KajamjeH. T6.inja, the thickness; To.iigeH. 

In the same manner are declined ib-HOina, young man, and nama, 
a pacha , G. pi. lOHomeil and namefi. 

According to the 22th paradigm (Hezti.ia) are declined nouns in n, 
preceded by a consonant, which form their genitive plural in 6, with 
the exception of some which form it in eu, and others in & and eu. 
Such are: 

EaHH, the bath; G.pl. 6am.. 4«/M, the uncle; G.pl. fla/jen. 

Uyjia, a ball; nyjib. EpoHa, a cuirass; 6poHen. 

Eypa, a tempest; 6ypb. IleHfl, a fine; neHen. 

rnpa, a weight; mpb. Ho3/ipa, a nostril; H03Ape6. 

4biHa, a melon; auhb. CTe3a, a footpath; cie3eH. 

BornHH, a goddess; Gorem. 46-ia, a portion; AOAea. and aoju>. 

nycTMHH, a desert; nycTMHb. 3apa, the dawn; 3apeg and 3apb. 

IIoTepfl, a loss; noiepb. ToHa, fishing-net; TOHea and TOHb. 

According to the 23th paradigm (nicHa) are declined the nouns in Jin 
and un , preceded by another consonant, by & or by u, which insert 
in the genitive plural the vowel e (one single noun takes the vowel o), 
or change & and it into e. Such are : 

Cafijia, a sabre; G.pl. ca(5ejib.« 06b/vhh, the mass; G.pl. oSiueHb. 

EacHH, a fable; 6acem>. KyxHH, the kitchen; KyxOHb. 

BaniHH, a tower; OanieHb. CnajibHH, a dormitory; cnajeHb, 

4epeBHH, a village; AepeBeHb. Eo-raAB.ibHa, an almshouse; doraflisjieHb. 

KpoBja, a roof; KpoBe.ib. HlBajbHa, a sewing room; niBEueHb. 

HeT.ia, a running-knot; neTCflb. EofiHa, a slaughterhouse; 66eHb. 

3eaua, the earth; 3eiue.ib (A. s. 3eM.iio). Boaohohhh, a horse-pond; BO/ionoeHb. 

The substantive 3eai^a takes, in the prepositional singular with Ha, the Slavonian 
inflection Ha 3eM.iH, on the earth, to be distinguished for Ha 3eM.rB, on the ground. 

According to the 24th paradigm (cBaa) are declined those nouns in n 
preceded by a vowel (with the exception of those in in) , which form 
their genitive plural in u ; such are : 

Bbia, the neck; G.pl. Bbifi. The names of foreign towns, ending in oa 

4aABea, the hip; JiaABeu. and ya, are declined in the same manner, 

Opya, a current; cxpyfi. except in the accusative, which they form 

Bepea, a post; Bepeft. in y (and not mm); e. g. 

Ulea, the neck; men. TeHya, Genoa, A. TeHyy. 

3.Ml3a, a serpent; sMtfi. j» MaHTya, Mantua, MaHxyy. 

Coa, the jay; coh. Ha/iya, Padua, UaAyy. 

Cdpya, an armour; c<5pyB. Toa, Goa, Toy. 

Some nouns in an and nn , as: Kja^oBaa, a storehouse; nepe^Haa, 
an antichamber , which are only adjectives used as substantives , are 
declined like adjectives (§ 40). 



40 



RUSSIAN GRAMMAR. 



According to the 25th paradigm (cy/ita) are declined the nouns in bH, 
which in the genitive plural change this termination into eu, and if it 
is contracted from in , into iii. Such are : 

JLaAbA, a boat; G.pl. jiaflefi. rdcTba, a female guest; G.pl. rocxefi. 

CuaMBH, a bench; CKaMefi. Arynhn, a female liar; ^ryHefi. 

Cxaxba, an article ; cxaxefi. CBaxba, a female relation ; cBaxeS. 

CBHHbfl, a pig; CBHHeft. KeJiba, a cell; Kejiifi. 

CeMbfl, the family; ceMefi. HryMeHba, an abbess; aryMeHia. 

According to the 26th paradigm (Mo^nia) are declined the nouns in in, 
which in the dative and prepositional singular take the inflection u (in- 
stead of ib) , and which form their genitive plural in iu. Such are : 

ApMia, an army, D. apiwia ; G.pl. apMia. Cxaxia, an element, D. cxaxia ; G.pl. cxaxia. 

Konia, a copy, Konia; Konia. KoMe/ua, a comedy, KOMe/ua; KOMeAia. 

AaAia, a lily, aeaib. ; jihjuh. Tpareaia, a tragedy, xpareaia ; xpareaia. 

Aania, a line, AAma ; Aims. Baxia, an orator, Baxia ; bbtIh. 

According to the 27th paradigm (cTpacn.) are declined the feminine 
nouns in b , observing at the same time the change of n into a after 
the hissing consonants (jk, % in, m), and remarking that several of these 
nouns transfer in the plural the accent to the casual inflections , from 
the genitive plural downwards. Such are : 

TicaHb, a tissue ; G.pl. XKaHea. BpoBb, an eyebrow ; N.pl. 6poBB, G. CpoBefi. 

neqaxb, a seal ; neqaxefi. Kacib, a tuft ; khcth, khctch. 

KpoBaib, a bedstead; KpOBaxeft. BtxBb, a branch; bbtbb, BixBefi. 

Ejb, a fir ; eAea. /teepb, the door ; ABepea (I. ABepbMa). 

CBapijib, a pipe; cBap-B-iea. .floniaAb, a horse; .lonia/tea (I. jioniaflbMB) 

./laflOHb, the palm of the hand; AaAonen. HaeTb, a whip ; njiexea CI. njexbMa). 

OceHb, the autumn ; oceHefi. Hoqb, the night, Hoqea ; D. Hoqanrb. 

Meqeib, a mosque; Meieiefi. neqb, a stove, neqea; neqaia'B. 
BojiisHb, a malady; 6o.di3HeH. • Munib, a mouse, Muniea; MHuiaurb. 

4o6po4'Bxejb, virtue; AO(5po/rfcxe.iea. Benjb, a thing, Benjea; Beujanrfc. 

According to the 28th paradigm (jojKb) are declined five nouns in &, 
which elide the vowel o of the nominative in the other cases , except 
in the instrumental singular ; these are : 

Bomb, a louse, G. biuh, J. BonibK). Aw66hh, love, G. jh)6bh, 7. jio6oBbio. 

Pojkb, rye, paca, poacbio. UepKOBb, the church, gepKBH, gepKOBbio. 

The noun uepKOBt takes , in the dative , instrumental and prepositio- 
nal plural , the hard inflection ajnz , omu , aces : nepKBaMt , uepKBaMH, 
o uepKBaxt. Jro6d6b, used as a Christian name, retains the vowel through 
all the cases, G. JIw66bu, etc. 
irregular 3L — The irregular nouns are such as take in some cases an 
inflection different to what they ought to have, according to 
the termination of their nominative singular ; or such as form 
their plural in a particular manner* 

1. Several nouns in 5 and 6 take in the nominative plural the inflec- 
tion a , A , with the tonic accent (instead of u , u) , while the genitive 
remains in 065, eez , eii , and the other cases regular. Such are: 



nouns. 



Lexicology. — the substantive. 



4i 



EeperB, the shore, pi. Gepera, <5eperoBB. riorpefiB, a cellar, p/.norpefi^norpefioB-b. 



Eoicb, the flank, <5oKa. 
BeiepB, the evening, Beiepa. 
Tojiocb, the voice, ro.ioca. 
rdpo/VB, the town, ropo/ja. 
46KTopt, a doctor, AOKiopa. 
HiepHOB'B, a millstone, JKepHOBa. 
KaTep-B, a cutter, KaTepa. 
KHBep-B, a shako, KHBepa. 
Kojokoji'B, a bell, KOJiOKO^a. 
KyqepB, a coachman, Kyiepa. 
~iyrB, a meadow, .ayra. 
Atci,, a forest, Jitca. 
MacxepB, a master, MacTepa. 
MnqMaHt, a midshipman, MHiMana. 
OdpoBt, an island, ocTpoBa. 
IlapycB, a sail, uapyca. 
IIoBapi., a cook, noBapa. 



Ilojort, a curtain, no^iora. 
IIpo*eccopi., a professor, npo*eccopa. 
PyKaBT., a sleeve, pyicaBa. 
«i>jiH)rep'b, a weather-cock, *JiH)repa.. 
Ifloainoji'B, a ramrod, uiOMUOJia. 
Xjteb'b, a stall, xjitsa. 
Xojioab, the cold, xo.io,4a. 
CxopoJK'B, a guard, cTopoJKa,-JKeH. 
BeKcejb, a bill of exchange, BeKcejia, -Aea. 
BeH3ejib, a monogram, BeH3e.fla. 
ErepB, a hunter, erepa. 
KpeHAe^b, a cracknel, KpeHAejia. 
./IeKapb, a surgeon, JieKapa. 
rJucapB, a writer, nncapa. 
^jiure^b, wing of a house, *^nre^a. 
IJlTeMne^b, a stamp, uneMnejia. 



Hnopb, an anker, aicopa. 
In the same manner TeTepeB'b, a grouse, has in N. pi. TeTepeBa; but in the 
genitive TeTepeBefi (instead of memepeedec). 

2. Some nouns in 5 ; b, o, form their plural in bn, bees, b/iM5, etc., 
changing the gutturals z and k before b into oic and u. Such are : 

EpaiB, the brother, pi. GpaTba, <5paTbeBB. npyTB, a twig, pi. npyTba, upyxbeBB. 



EpycB, a balk, dpycba. 
Kjihh'b, a wedge, KJiriHba. 
Kjokt., a lock, KJioqr.a. 
Ko^ocb, an ear, KOJiocba. 
KojTB, a stake, Ko.iba. 
Komb, a heap, KOMba. 
KonbUB, a sledge-bar, KonbMba. 
KoqaHB, a head of cabbage, KoqaHba. 
Ay6T>, a sheet of bark, .iy6ba. 



116.103^, a slide, nojio3ba. 
CTyji-b, a chair, cryjiba. 
3aTb, son-in-law, saxba. 
3Beno, a link, 3Bem>a. 
Kpbi.16, a wing, Kphuba. 
Oepo, a feather, nepba. 
noaiiHO, a billet of wood, no-iima. 
IIoMejio, a malkin, noMejba. 
IIIh^o, an awl, niiuba. 



3. Some nouns in s have their genitive plural like the nominative 
singular (instead of oesj) , e. g. 

Ajixmhb, three copecks; ;>J.a.iXbiHbi,a.ixbiH'B. GanorB, a boot; pi. canorii, canor-B. 
ApuiHHt, an ell; apniHHbi, apniHH-b. Co.wax'B, a soldier; ccaaaxbi, cojiAarb. 

Tpena/iep'b, a grenadier; rpeHaaepbi,-ep-b. Typoicb, a Turk; TypKH, TypoK-B. 
/SpryH'b, a dragoon; aparyHbi, /iparyHt. Y.aaH'B, a hulan; yjiaHbi, yjiaH-B. 
nya-B, a pood ; uy/tb'i, ny/VB. IlbiraH-B, a gipsy ; iibiranbi, ijbiraH'B. 

Pa3-B, a time; pa3M, pa3T>. l IyjioKB, a stocking; uvjkh, qyjoKB. 

PenpyT-B, a recruit; peKpyibi, peKpyi-B. rpy3HHB, a Georgian; rpy3iiHw,-3iiHB. 

We can however say regularly naTb nydoez, five poods; H-i.CKO.ibKO penpymoez, 
some recruits. The substantive qe^OBiiCB, man, has also the genitive plural like the 
nominative singular, but only in junction with a numeral, as naTB ne&oeibKo , five 
men; in all other cases it is regular; e. g. /ipy3ba uejioewKoeo, the friends of the 
men. — The substantive caaceHb, a toise, has likewise in the genitive plural caJKeHB, 
the a'ccent being transposed; and AeHb, the day, in familiar language, takes the 
same inflection when in junction with a numeral; e. g. ceMb dem, seven days (in- 
stead of ceMb dneii). 

Rciff Russian Grammar. A 



42 RUSSIAN GRAMMAR. 

4. The following nouns form their plural in different ways : 

YAWb, the eye, j have a,z, aim, etc.: r.ia3a,r.ja3X,rjia3aM'B; BOJioca, BOAoCb,Bo- 
Bojocb, a hair, ( jiocaarB (and also regularly: bojiocu). 

EapaHB, a lord, 1 change um into a,z, aim, aww, ass: dapa, dap-B, dapaarr 

FocnoAHHB, master, | rocnoAa , rocnoA'B , rocnoAaarB ; Taiapa (and TaxapM), Ta- 
TaiapHHT., a Tartar, ( T ap-B, Taxapawb, etc. 

Xo3jiHirb, a housekeeper, plur. xo3aeBa, xosaeBTi, x03aeBa»TB, etc. 

UlypaHB, a brother-in-law, plur. mypta, niypbeB-B, niypBanrB, etc. 

ApyrB, a friend, / have their P lural in *>a, eu, s/wts, etc. (Apyr-B changes 1 into 3) : Apy3Ba\ 

Khh3B, a prince, j Apy3efi, Apy3baMB;KHH3Ba,KHa3eH; MyjKba, MyjKeir, etc. The latter. 

Myac-B, a husband, I in the sense f maWj is re g U lar: MyJKH, MyaceH, MywaurB, etc. 

KyM-b, a godfather, ( form tfteir plural in the same way by inserting the syllable oe : 

CBarB, a kinsman, | KyMOBBa, KyMOBeft; CBaTOBBa, cBaTOBea; chhobbh, cuHOBefl, etc. 

h-b, the son ' ( Cuh-b, with a figurative meaning, is regular: chhm, chhob'b, etc- 

Cocba'b, a neighbour ( ta ' ie i n tne plural the soft inflection u, eii, hmz, etc.: cocbah, co- 
XoAoa-b, a bondman, J cBAea,cocBAaMB (and also regular: cocbah, cocBAOBt) : xo^ona, 
lepT-B, the devil, ( x<u 6 nefl ; qepTH, qepiea, qep-raM-B, etc. 

n . ., /take the masculine termination: w, eez, aim, or u, oes, ams y 

Co^Hiie, the sun, ( ' ' ' ' ' y 

OQjizko a cloud 'etc.: co^hjjm, cd-iHgeBB; 6d4aKH, odjiaKOBB (and also regu- 

OqKo, a pip, point, i lar : od.iaKa , 66a&kt>); oikh, oqKOBB; yniKH, yniKOB'B, 

Yumo, a handle, I yuiKa MB, etc. 

Bbko, the eyelid, (form their plural in u, z, ante, etc.: bbkh, bBkb, BBKaMB: 
H6aoko, an apple, ( adjiOKH, A6jiokt> (and ad.iOKOB'B), adjOKaMB, etc. 

( have in the plural: Hedeca , Hedec-B , HedecawB; qyAeca, qyAecb* 
»r jio* a^ aV flnd i q J r/ " ecaM ' b 5 etc - HM° > in the sense of palate, has no plural, and 
' ' ^jdo , signifying a monster, is regular : qyAa, qyA"B, qyAaarB, etc. 

form their plural in u, eii, aim, with the permutation of the consonant: 
Oko, the eye, I dqa, oqefi, oqaarB, oqaMH; yum, ymea, yiuaBTB, yniBMH (instead of 
Yxo, the ear, j ywdmu). This inflection is properly the Slavonian dual ; the plural, which 
* is sometimes used in poetry, is : oqeca, ynieca. 

which in the singular has preserved the Slavonian* declension: G. D. 
Antfl, a child, and P. ahtath, J. AHTaTeMT> and AHTaTeio, has in plural: IV. aim 

fir. and A. ABTea, D. abthmb, /. abtbmh, P. abtaxt*. 
Kypnjja, a hen, plur. Kypbi, Kyp"B, KypaMB, etc. 
Caiohvl, the slaver, plur. caiohh, cooHefi, chohjimb, etc., with the soft inflection. 

5. Some nouns have a double inflection in the plural, the one re- 
gular, the other irregular. 

a) Some have two inflections in the nominative only, and without 
any difference in the meaning of the word ; such are : , 

Bbkb, an age, pi. bbkh and BBKa, bbkobb. IIoacB, girdle, pi. noacBiandnoaca,-coBB. 
Toab, a year, toam and roAa, toaobb. Port, a horn, porn and pora, poroB-B. 

4om*b, a house, aomm and AOMa, aomobb. CHBr'B, snow, CH'Brn and CHtra, CHBroBB. 
K6pnycB,body,KopnyctiandKopnyca,-c6BB. dor-B, a stack, cTora and crora, cioroBB. 
KynojiB, cupola, Kyno^uandKyno.iaj-.ioBB. CTpyrx,a bark.cxpyraand cTpyra,-r6BB^ 
MeA-B, honey, MeAbi and MeAa, mgaobb. TepeM r B,aroom,TepeMuandTepeMa,-MOB'B, 
0KppoKB. a ham,6KopoKuandoKopoKa,-6BB.Kpai1, the brink, Kpaa and Kpaa, KpaeBB; 



Lexicology. — the substantive:. 43 

b) Others have two inflections through all the cases , the irregular 
inflection being used where the substantive has a collective meaning ; 
such are : 

EaTor"B, a stick, pi. Gaxorii, daToroBt, and 6axo>Kba, GaxoiKbeBT., etc. 

BHyiCB, the grandson; bhjkh, BHyKOBt, and Bnyqaxa, Biiyqaxt, etc. 

KpjOK-b,.a hook; kpiokh, KpiOKOBi>, and Kpibqba, KpK>'jbeBT>. 

Oo"oa"&, a felloe; oSoah, oooaob-b, and oGoAba, oooabcbti. 

.locKyrb, a shred; .ziocKyxbi, JocKyxoBT., and jiocKyxba, jiocKyxbeBi. 

Ctpynt, a scurf; cxpynu, cxpynoB-B, and cxpynba, cxpyubeB-b. 

CyicB, a branch; cyKH, cyKOBT., and cyqsa, cyqbeB-b. 

Hepent, a potsherd; qepena, qepenoBt, and qepenba, qepenbeBTi. 

Bo.iAupb, m. a tubercle; Bo^Abipa, BOJiAbipeii, and Bo.iAMpba, BOJiAwpbeB-b. 

KaitreHb, m. a stone; KaMira, jcaMHeii, and KasieHba, KameHbeB'b. 

KopeHb, in. a root; kophh, KopHeu, and KopeHba, KopeHbeBT>. 

Ily3bipb, m. a bladder; ny3bipa, ny3upea, and ny3i>'ipba, ^y3b'IpbeB^. 

Ilynbipb, in. a pimple ; nynbipa, nynbipefi, and nyniupba, nynupbeB'b 

Yrojib, m. the charcoal; yrjia, yrjieS, and yro.iba, yrojbeBT>. 

4epeB0, a tree; Aepesa, AepeB'b, and AepeBba, AepeBbeBt. 

4apa, a hole; Aiiphi, Aup-B, and Anpba, AapbeBi.. 

Ilte.ib, f. a chink; niejiH, nie.iea, and nje.iba, Qje./ibeB'b. 

c) Others again have two inflections with totally different meanings ; 
such are : v 

3y6-B, a tooth (in the mouth), pi. 3y6u, 3yfi6BT>, and tooth (of a saw), 3yoba, sySbeBt. 
Kanja, a drop (of water), Kau^u, Kane.ib, and drops (in medicine), Kan.in, Kan.ieii. 
.Ihctt., a leaf (of paper), jihctu, jiuctobt., and a leaf (of a tree) .aacxb/i, .iiicrbeBT.. 
MyHvt, a man, MyaiH, aiy>Kefi, and a husband, aiyjKba, MyJKefi. 
MBxt, a fur, MBxii, MBxoBt, and a pair of bellows, MBxa, bibxobt.. 
06pa3T>, the form, 66pa3bi, 66pa30B'B, and an image, o6pa3a, o6pa36Bt. 
IIoBO/i'B, a 7«0<ire,noBO4bi, uoboaob-b, and a rein, noBOAbfl, noBOAbeBt. 
Cyjao, a vessel (utensil), cjahm, cyjeirb, and a vessel (ship), cy/ia, cyAOBi.. 
Xa%6i>, a bread, x^B6bi, xjrfio'OB'b, and a corn, x.rc6a, x.iBCoB-b. 
Ubbt-b, a flower, ijbbtm, gBBxoBt, and a colour, ijBBxa, gB-fixoBt. 

d) Lastly there is one substantive which in the plural has three in- 
flections , a different meaning being* conveyed by each ; viz. 

j a tribe, pi. KOJBna, KOJiBHt, KO.iBHaM-b, etc. 
Ko.ibho, I the knee, pi. kojibhh, KO-iBHeii, KO.iBnaM-b, etc. 

a joint (of a plant), pi. KO.ii.Hba, KO.iiwbeBtt, KO.iBHbflMT., etc. 

6. The declension of the following nouns is quite irregular . 

rocn64B,theLord, ' is declined like a noun [n «, with the hard inflection: G. 
( TocnoAa, D. TocnoAy, /. TocnoAOMl; the vocative is: TocnoAH. 

XpucT6cb,Christ, ( CUtS ° ff in aI1 the other cases the s y llal)Ie oc ; G. Xpacxa, D. 
' ' Xpncxy, J. Xpacxoarb, P. o XpiicrB, V. Xpacxe. 

J insert in the inflections of the cases the syllable ep : G. and D. 
i Aoqepn and maxepa, I. Aoqepbio and sraiepbio ; plur. N. Aoqepa and 
( MaTepa, G. Aonepefl and Maxepefl, /. AoqepbMii and Maxepaaia, etc. 
/ although masculine, take in the genitive, dative and prepositional 
"yxMhe way' Singular the femini ne inflection u : n.iaiueHn, nyxa ; but the in- 
/ strumental case is regular (n.iaMPHCMX, nyxeMi). 

4. 



4owb, a daughter 
Maxb, the mother 



44 



RUSSIAN GRAMMAR. 



EXERCISES IN THE DECLENSION OF SUBSTANTIVES. 



Nominative The master of the garden and the mistress of the house. The garden of 

and Genitive. X03HHHI Ca^t H X03flHKa 40MT>. Ca^S 

the master and the house of the mistress. The roaring of the lions ; the song 
xo3aHHi> h /iomt. xo3aiiKa. PwKairie .ieBi> ; ninie 

of the nightingale; the bellowing of the bull, of the ox and of the cow; 
co-iOBeii ; MMiame 6wkt> , bo.it> h KopoBa ; 

the neighing of the horses ; the barking of the dog ; the cooing 
ptfcame .a6uia4&/; Jaa co6aKa; BopKOBair&e 

of the pigeons ; the cawing of the crows ; the croaking of the frogs ; 
ro^y6b m; KapKam>e Bopom. ; KBaKam>e ./mryjiiKa ; 

the howling of the wolf; the buzzing of the bees, of the cockchafers and 
boh bojkt.; HcyauKanie me.ia, JKyKt h 

of the flies ; the bleating of the rams and of the ewes. A chimney 
Myxa ; 6-ieame dapanL h OBiia. KaMiim. 

without fire ; windows without panes ; groats without butter ; saddles 
desi. oroHt m; okho 6e3i> CTeoo ; Kama 6e3i> mslcao ; c%aaq 

without stirrups; a charge without ball ; islands and meadows without trees ; 
6e3i> CTpeMH ; 3apaAi» 6e3i. ujah ; ocTpoBt h .*yn» 6e3i> AepeBo ; 

cooks, coachmen and labourers without work; children 
noBap-L, nyiept 11 padoTmiKi, 6e3i> pa66ia; ahth 

without mother ; soldiers without muskets ; muskets without flints ; a statue 
6e3i» MaTb; co^AaTt 6e3t py^te ; py;Kte 6e3i> KpeMeiibm; CTaTya 

without arms and without ears ; young bears and young lions without hair ; 
6ezi> pyKa h 6e3i, yxo; MeAB-EJKe'HOKT, h jLBeiiOKT. 6 e3i>inep en./; 



tea 
nail 



without sugar 
6e3t caxap r B 

of cups , of plates 
^arnica, Tape.ffia 



vessels without hammocks ; ships without oars ; 
Kopa6.i& m 6631. Kofma ; cyAHO 6e3T> Beoso ; 

and without cream. A bunch of pens ; a dozen 
h 6e37> cniBKii/! IlyKT, nepo; AWfluoia 

and of glasses ; five scores of trouts ; half a score of melons ; a quantity 
h CTaKarn.; cothji #ope.ib/; AecaTOKi. Abma; mhojkcctbo 

of geese , of ducks and of swans ; herds of cattle ; studs 
rycbm, yraa h jie6eAbm; ct&ao ckott., Ta6yHt 

of horses The men of antiquity, and the husbands of the wives. 
AowdAhf. Myflvb ApeBHOCTL, ii MyjKi. meHa. 

The flowers of the gardens and the colours of therainbow. Theleavesofpaper 
Ityun, ca,ni, » ubt>tt> pa/ivra. ^iictt. 6yMara, 



Lexicology. — the substantive. 45 

and the leaves of the trees. The teeth of the mouth and the teeth of a comb, 
n jhctt> /jepeBO. 3y6t> bo (pre/?..) port, h 3y(fo> y rpefieHb/n. 

The tribes of the Israelites, the knees of a man, and the joints of plants. 
Ko.mio HspanjbTHHiiiTB, ko^ho y le^oB-BRt, h kojimo pacTeme. 

The taking of herrings on the coasts of America has been very profitable 
.ioBt cejiMB / y 6epen> AaiepnKa 6bUT> oieHb Bbiro/ieirb 

to the English , the Swedes , the Dutch and the French. 
Am (gem.) AarAawmmk, IIIb&vb, ^roAaaHAem 11 4>paHiiy3Tb. 

Nominative 

Advice to friends. Glory to God. Woe to the enemies. The general order and Dative. 
CoB-BTt Apyn>. CiaBa Eon,. Tope Bpan>. JIpHKast 

to the troops. Obedience to the laws, Give food to the geese, to the hens, 
boiIcko. IIoBHHOBeHie 3aKoirb 4 a fr *CTJb rycbm, Kypima, 

to the pigeons and to the little dogs. To act conformably to the laws 
voA) T 6b m h meiioKT). nocTynaTL cootebtctbchho npaBiuo 

of honour. To live according to his situation. A law given as well 
4ecTb. iKiiTb iipHjraiHo cocTOHHie. 3aKoin, , ^amibift naicb 

for the nobles as for the citizens. To be against the wishes of the children, 
ABopamiH r b, Tani. u ]\r£maHiiHT>. npoTiuuiTbca JKe^anie ahth, 

and the desire of the parents. The books , the pens and the papers bel- 
li boah po/uiTe.ib. Kmira, nepo n TeTpaAb/"npimaA- 

ong to the scholars , and not to the masters. The fields and the meadows 
.lOKaT'b yqeHiiKT> 3 a lie yiiiTCib. ri6\ie h .iyn> 

belong to the father and to the mother, and the gardens, as well as the forests, 
npima/uejKaT'b OTeui. n MaTb, a caA^, Kam. 11 A%cb, 

to the sons and to the daughters. To be agreeable to the men and to be dis- 
cbiht. u 401b. HpaBiiTbca MYHraiina, n lie 

agreeable to the women. The verdure is agreeable to the eyes. The pictures 
npaBiiTbca ?Keniunna. SeAeiibf HpaBiiTca r^a3i>. KapTi'ma 

please the sisters and the flowers the brothers. Useful to the country; agreeable 
upaBHTca cecTpa a ubbtt. SpaT-b. IIo.ie3Hbifi OTeiecTBO ; iipiaTHbiii 

to God and to men ; faithful to the sovereign ; dear to friends ; agreeable 
Bon, H .ik)ah ; Bipiibiu rocyAapb ; .iio6e3Hbiu Apyn. ; mi'mhu 

to children. Man is known by his face , by his voice , by his figure , by 
-ahth. He.iOBbK'b no3HaeTca no A\me , no ro^oci., no pom,, no 

his walk and by the motions of his body. Tourists travel in 

noxoAKa ii no rbMOABnateiiie. Typiicrb nyTeuiecTByioTb no 

Switzerland, in France, in Italy, in Germany, in America and in Egypt. 
JJlBeiiuapia , ^pamua, IlT<uia, PepMaiiia, AMepiina h Eninert. 



46 



RUSSIAN GRAMMAR. 



Nominative 



The brothers have bought houses , gardens , a village and 

and Accusative. EpaTB KVfriMIJ 40MT> , CaAB , AepeBHfl « 

fields , and have sold oxen , cows , horses and a car- 
no.ie, a np64a.n1 6bik-b, KopoBa, Aomafibf, n na- 

riage. To read a table , draAv a picture , write letters , play 
peia. l InTaT& Gacua, pncoBaTB KapTi'raa, nncaTB nucBMo , nrpaTB 

an air , mend pens. To visit the brothers and the sisters , the mothers 
iibchh, iiihhtb nepo. IlocBmaTB 6paTi> u cedpa, MaTB 

and the daughters , the fathers and the sons. To buy a hat and a cap, 
11 aohb, oTeirt h cbhtb. Kym'iTB in.iana n uianKa, 

gloves and shoes , stockings and garters. The conqueror 
nep^aTKa 11 dauiMan-B, My.ioKB 11 no4BH3Ka. 3aBoeBaTe^b 

has vanquished the troops and has subjected the people. Peter de- 
no6 , E4u.n> boucko, h noKopu.iB Hapo4B. Ilerpi pa3- 

feated the Swedes , conquered Esthonia and Livonia , founded the city 
611.TB IHbcab, 3aBoeBaxB dcTJiAiwa. 11 Au^AkiiAifL, ocrob3lat> ropoA^ 

of Saint-Petersburg, and civilised Russia. The Russians have conquered 
CaHKTneiep6yprB, 11 npocBBTii.iB Poccia. PocciannHT. no6B/K4a.M 

the Tartars, the Turks, the Swedes, the French and the Persians. The rains 
TaTapim'B, TypoKB, IIlBe4B, 4>paHiry3 , B u HepciaHim-B. fl,0KAbm 

refresh the earth , and the frosts destroy the grasshoppers. 
ocEBJKaiOT'B 3eM.ia , a xo.io4t> Hcrpe6AHK)TB capaHqa (sing.). 



Vocative. 



Children , be attentive ! John , come here ! Soldiers , light 

4ma , 6yABTe npiue;KHBi! IlBam>, npiiWi ciOAa! Bohhb, cpajKaHTecB 

valliantly ! God , preserve the Emperor ! Lord , have mercy upon me ! 
xpaopo! Eon,, cnacii (ace.) U,apB ! TocnoAb , noMiuytt Mena! 

The scholars write with a slate-pencil or with a pen and 

N i°nstrumentar l ^eHta namyTT. rpiise.iB m iuii nepo h 

ink. John plays with Alexis and with Basil, and Mary 

qepiriua /?/. HBam. nrpaen. cb A^eKcitt n ct> Baci'aiii, a jMapBa 

plays with Sophia and with Amy. A tart with almonds ; pots 

urpaeTB cb C6$Ba 11 cb jIk)66bb. IluporB cb MUH4a^B m; ropmoKi, 

with ilowers ; a basin of water ; a man of wit and of genius ; 
cb ubbt-b ; Ka4Ka cb B04a; ne.iOBBK'B cb yMB 11 cb renin ; 

a gallery of pictures. Towns with a fortress and a port ; 
ra.iepea cb KapTi'ma. FopoAB cb KpeM.iBm 11 raBanB/V 

frees with leaves , flowers and fruits ; chakos with plumes : 

4epeB0 CB .IIICTB , HBBTT> H n.!04B ; KHBepB CB cy.iTariB ; 



Lexicology. — the substantive. 47 

a room with doors ; bread with salt ; water with wine ; 
KOMHaTa ct> 4Bep&/; x.ra6t ct» co.it/; B04a ct> biiho ; 

wine with water ; professors with pupils ; a letter with 
bhho ct. B04a; npo<i>eccopT. ct, y^eni'iKi; dhcbmo ct> 

money. To draw with a pencil , to paint with a brush and 
jxeabnif. PncoBaTL KapaH4aun>, micaTb kiictb/" ii 

colours. The shopkeeper trades in tallow , in soap , in milk, 
Kpacna. Kynem> TopryeTt ca-io , memo , mo.ioko, 

in flour , in groats , in wines , in beer , in cloth , in linen and 
MyKa, Kpyna, buho , miBO, cyKHo , do.iotho n 



in laces , 


and the neighbours of the shopkeeper trade in oxen, 


KpyjKeBo, 


a 


cocb4t> 


Kyneui. 


T0pr\"K)TT> B0.1T>, 


in sheep 


and 


in horses. 


Palaces with 


towers ; churches 


oapairb 


ii 


./loniaAb f. 


4Bopem> CI 


6anma ; iiepKOBb 


with steeples ; 


houses 


with windows ; buildings with 


CT> K0.10K0.lbHH 


; 40ivn> 


CT> okho ; 


34ame ct> 


galleries , 


regiments with 


colours. The 


mountains abound 


ra.iepea ; 


UO.IKt CT> 


3HaMH. 


Topa ii3o6ii.iyiOTT» 



in gold, in silver, in copper, in iron, in quick-silver and in lead. 
36.10TO, cepe6po, mb^b/J /Ke.iB3o, pTyTb/ n CBimem. 

The fables of the bull and the ram , of the ass and the 'nightingale ; ^minative and 

' ° ' Prepositional. 

BacHa o 6bikt. ii 6apain>, o6t> oce.ii> n cojOBeii; 

of the cicada and the ant; of the oak and the reed; of the fox and 
o KysHeHiiK'B ii MypaBeii; o Ayo^ n TpocTiniK-b; o .inci'ma n 

the crow ; of the wolf and the lamb. The tales of the guardian-angel, 
Boponi> ; o bo-ikT) ii arHe'HOKT>. Gna3Ka o6i> aHre.ii.-xpaHUTe.ib, 

of John and Mary; the histories of Sergius the hermit; of the hero 
o6i> I'lBairt ii MapbH ; noBBCTb o Ceprni nycTbiimiiKT> ; o repoii 

and the genius. To speak of games, of lessons, of the time, of the place, of 
ii remit. FoBopiiTb odi. nrpa, o6t. ypoKt , o BpeMH, o mbcto, o6i> 

circumstances. In the work there is said a great deal about honour and 
odcTOHTe.iBCTBo. Bt> coiiiHeme roBopan. MHoro o *iecTB n 

infamy , about virtue and vice , about courage and pusillanimity. 
6e3^ecTie, 4o6po4BTe.ib ii nopoia. , o xpa6pocTb ii Ma.i04yniie- 

In the water live five fishes , the frogs and the mollusca ; and 
Bi> B04a ^KiiByT-L pbi6a , jarymna n cuteeHb m ; n 

in the forests live the lions . the bears , the foxes and the hares. 
Rb .lBCb ;kubvtt> .leBT. . "MeAB^b m, .inci'ma n 3aeuT>. 



48 RUSSIAN GRAMMAR. 

The different ^he books of the scholar please the master. The light of the sun illumines 
cases. Kmira yiemiKT, HpaBaTca (datj ymneAb. Cb^tt, co.imie 03apaeTT, 

the earth with its rays. The colours of the rose are agreeable to the eyes. 
seMJia ayni. II.b'Btt, po3a (cyrmj npiaTHbi r.ia3T,. 

The friends of humanity do good to men. In the garden 
4pyn> ne^oBiiecTBO ^%amsii> Aodpo Aisw- Bt, (prep.) caAT, 

flourish roses with thorns ; for there is no rose without 
URETyTT. po3a cl (instrj mum, ; 1160 hett, (gen J po3a 6e3T, (gen J 

thorns. The children wash themselves with the water of the river. A glass 
nmm>. ]\mh yMBiBaiOTca BOAa p-BKa. OaKaHT, 

of water is on the table of the room. Tears of joy 

ct, (instrj boa& ctoiitt, na (prep J cto.it> KoMHaTa. Cae3a paAOCTB 

glisten in the eyes of the mother. The glory of the wicked is 
faecTflTT. m, (prep J i\ia3T, MaTt. CiaBa 3aoh,M (ecmb) 

without stability ; but the names of the beneficent shine in 

HenpoAO^HdiTe^iLHa ; ho hmh 6 AdLTOAiTeAb cmiott, bt, (prep J 

eternity. Happiness on earth consists in tranquillity 

btWhoctb. OacTie Ha (prep J 3euAA coctohtt, bt, (prep.) cnoKoficTBie 

of mind and in purity of conscience. Young people love 
AyxT, u bt> ancTOTa cobbctb. H)Homa .fliboaTT, 

the song of the nightingale, on the bank of a river, by light 

n-BHie coJOBeii , Ha (prep J 6eperT, pyieft , npu (prep J cbt^tb 

of the moon. To tell the truth is the duty of children. To love God 
.lyna. ToBopiiTB npaBAa ecTB AO-an, ahth. Aio6iiTb Bon, 

with heart and soul. The ants and the beavers may serve as a pat- 

cep/me ii Ayma. MypaBen 11 6o6pT> Moryn, c.iyaaiTB (instrj npn- 

tern to man. An excursion to Moscow and to Kiew. The entrance 

MipT, le-rtOB-EKT,. Il0B3AKa BT, (dCC J MoCKBa H BT, Kl'eBT,. BX0AT> 

of the room of reading O'eading-room). Give to the master the book 
bt, (ace J 6ii6^ii6TeKa ^a (gen J i rrenie. IloAaH yiiiTe.iB TeTpaAB/ 

of verses on the occasion of the feast. One must rise 

co (instrj cthxt, Ha (accj CAywn npa3AHiiKT,. HaAo6no BCTaBaTB 

in the morning , work in the day , rest in the evening , and sleep 
(instrj yTpo, padoiaTB AeiiB m, otabixeitb BeiepT,, n cnaTB 

at night. The roar of canons and the sound of bells announced to the cit- 
hohb/. TpoMT, nyuina h 3boitb ko^okojt, bo3b^ctii.hi rpa^Aa- 

izens Ihc arrival of the conqueror of the enemies of the country. 

lu'iiiT, o (prep J npnoMTie no6B/iiiTe.ib BparT, o r reiecTBO. 



Lexicology. — the abjective. 49 



THE ADJECTIVE. 

32. — The adjectives (npMaraTejiBHBM HMena) in the Russian Division 
language are of three kinds: 1) The qualifying (KanecTBen- ofthcadject,ve3 ' 
Htm) adjectives , as : nepmui Ka^TanL , a black coat; miixoe 

/lath, a quiet child; eecejian >kh3hb , a joyous life. 2) The 
possessive (npHTajKaTe^itHLia) adjectives , as : omuftez cmmi, 
the father's son; mcbn uncypa, a fox skin; 30Aomoe ko Abis,e, 
a gold ring ; jubmuiu ca/i.'L , the summer garden. 3) The 
numeral (HKC^MTe^LHtia) adjectives, as: dea CTOjia ; two 
tables; emopou mtjCau'l, the second month. 

To the adjectives belong also the possessive , demonstrative , interro- 
gative and other pronouns , as also the participles , which are at times 
used as simple adjectives The Numeral adjectives, which in Russian 
have their peculiar inflections , will be treated of in a separate article. 

33. — The qualifying adjectives , or such as express the ^eltive^ 
quality of an object, end in uu and ill, or, with the accent, 

in oil (neut. oe and ee, fern, an and nnj ; e. g. aoGptifi, 
good; jiendS, light; ciffliif, blue; cyxoii, dry; 6o«/iBiii6ii, great. 

34. — The possessive adjectives , most of which are pecu- Possessive 
liar to the Russian language, are divided into individual, ad J ect,ves - 
common , material and circumstantial. 

1. The individual or special (xivmbm, uacimia) , posses- 
sive adjectives, which mark the relation of an object to an 
individual , or in other words to an animate or personified 
being ■ end in oeo, eeo, urn and upim (neut 0, fern, a) , or 
in b (neut. e , fern. /?) , and are formed from the names of 
the objects in question by changing d and o into oeo (or 
into eeo after the lingual or a hissing consonant) ; u and & 
into eed; a, n and & into um , and ii^a into upim, remembering 
however that in this formation the a'djective follows the geni- 
tive inflection of the substantive ; e. g. clihobb , the son's ; 
MapKOBx, Mark's; .Ibbob'b, Leon's; Xpiictobx, Christ's; 
CTpasKeBt, the guardian's; OTireBx, the father's; AH/jpeeBi., 
Andrew's; iiapeBx, the king's; Hhkhthitl, Nicetas's; Mahh'b, 
the uncle's; cBeKpoBimL , mother-in-law's; MaTepnnB, the 
mother's; nmmnbiwb, the girl's (from cum, Mdpuo, Aeez, 
jjeri'.'AbBkj Xpucmdco, ^w.XpucTa, cmpaowo, orneufij gen, OTiia, 



50 



RUSSIAN GRAMMAR. 



Audpeii, i^apb , HtiKuma, did a, ceeapdeb , mamb, gen. Maiepu, 
dibeuu^a). The termination b, is only found in the adjective 
TocnoAeHi, , the Lord's (from. TocnodbJ , and in some few 
others in the ecclesiastical Slavonian. 

To the above rule the following are exceptions: HKOB^eBt, James's; 
6paTHHin>, the brother's; mpkhhitl, the husband's; and also Eojkm, God's, 
formed from Hkobz, 6pam<>, Myoicz and Eozz. — We have still to re- 
mark that it is from these individual possessive adjectives that the pa- 
tronymics , of which we have already spoken (§ 2i) , are formed : e. g. 
HBaHOBHTt and HBaHOBira, John's son and daughter; IfaB^oBfrn, and 
ITaB^ioBHa, Paul's son and daughter ; HKOB.ieBirn, andflKOBjeBHa, James's 
son and daughter ; Hhkhthtb and HiiKiiTn<iHa , Nicetas's son and daughter. 

2. The common or generic (o6niiH, poAOBbia) possessive 
adjectives, which mark the relation of an object to all the in- 
dividuals of the same species, have one principal termination, 
viz. iu, oeiii or eeiu (neut. be, fern, ba), and some parti- 
cular terminations; these are: emit, HbiU, umiii, oeuu, Hiu 
(neut. oe and ee, fern, an and mj, and are formed from the 
names of animate, inanimate and [abstract objects : e. g. pBi6iH, 
of a fish; me^Bimii , of a bear; nTirriii, of a bird; KionoBm, 
of a bug; KOHeBiii, of a horse; ckotckm, of cattle; rycnHLiii, 
of a goose; #omobmh, domestic; napoBoii , of steam; p^qHoii, 
fluvial; AynieBHbiii , of the soul; ?KH3HeHHtiH, vital; cbihobhm, 
filial (from pbi6a, Medeibdb, nmia^a, kaom, Kom, ciwmz, zycb 7 
doMo, naps, pjbm, dyiud, owu3m, muz). 

To the individual and common possessive adjectives belong also 
several Russian family names; e. g. 4 MP!T pi6BT>, nyimunn,, 3aBa40BCKw 7 
as also several names of towns and villages ; e. g. Kauunn. , EopoAiino, 
CMo^eHCK-L, etc. 

3. The material (BeuiecTBeHHBia) possessive adjectives, 
which indicate the material of which a thing is made, are 
formed from the names of material objects by means of the 
terminations uil , Hbiti, nmw, mnuii (neut. oe, fern, an) , as: 
30jiot6h ; of gold; jKe^3nbin, of iron; cepefipauMit, of silver; 
AepeBflHHbifi, of wood (from 30Jiomo , owejiwso, cepe6p6,depeeoJ. 

4. The circumstantial Co6cToaTejn.CTBeHHbia) possessive 
adjectives are formed from nouns and adverbs signifying 
time and place , by means of the terminations uui (neut. ee, 
fern, rsi), and in the names of months, by the termination 



Lexicology. — the adjective. 51 

emu (neut. oe, fern. anj\ as: jlethih, of summer; HbiH^inHifi, 
actual; TaMOiiraiH, of this place; MapTOBCKifi, of March; 
iiOJiLCKin, of July (from. Aibmo, mmm, majns, Mapms, iiojioj. 

35. — The properties of the adjectives in Russian are: the Properties 
gender (po/r*) , the number (hhcio) , the case (na^em) , the 
apocope of the termination [(ycBieme OKOHHama) , and the 
degrees of signification or degrees of the qualities (cTenemi 
KaHecTB-L) , and these properties are all marked by particular 
inflections. 

36. — As the adjective must agree in gender , number Ge b e d r er ' ca n S e m " 
and case with the substantive which it qualifies , it has three 
terminations to indicate the difference of gender, two for 

the different numbers and seven for the cases. 

37. — As the adjectives are used for two different pur- the FSfaSon. 
poses , firstly simply to qualify the noun to which they bel- 
ong, as: doCputi neAOBiKT*, a good man; Hdean manna, a 

new hat; and secondly to form the attribute of the proposi- 
tion, as : Me^oBiKx (ecmb) do6pz, the man is good; miana 
6bMa uoea, the hat was new; they have in Russian two dif- 
ferent terminations , the one full QiojiHoe) } the other apoc- 
opated (ycfcHeHHoe). These two terminations are as follows : 

lingular. Plural. 

Masculine. Neuter. Feminine. Masculine. Neut. and Fern. 

Full term: lih(oh), ifi; oe, ee ; aa, aa ; we, ,ie ; wa, ia. 
Apoc.term: i>, i> ; o, e; a, a; u, h; h, h. 

■ , (hobbih, cuHili: HoBoe, cimee; HoBaa, ciiHaa; HOBtie, crime ; hobbih, CHHia. 
Examples : i ... , . , . , 

r ( HOBT> , CIIHB ; HOBO, CUHe; HOBa, CUHa ; HOBLI, CHHIi; HOBbI, CIIHII. 

These two examples hobbw , new , and ciiHiii , blue , show that the 
apocopated is formed from the full termination , by changing bid and iih 
(or 6u with the accent} into 3 and &, according to the nature of the 
preceding consonant , for the masculine , and by cutting off the final 
vowel in the other inflections. In this formation, the vowel e or o is 
inserted between two consonants in the masculine, in order to facili- 
tate the pronunciation , and the semi-vowels b and it are changed into 
e, observing that the tonic accent, which remains on the same syl- 
lable in the inflections of the full termination, is often transposed in the 
apocopated termination, sometimes to the inserted vowel of the mascu- 
line , sometimes to the first syllable , at other times to the inflection of 
the feminine, and occasionally to that of the neuter and the plural; e. g. 



52 



GRAMMAR RUSSIAN. 



6-b.ihh, white, apoc. term. 6kjn>, Ji6, ja. BtpHbifl, true, apoc. term. BipeHi, pHo, pna. 
3AopoBHfi, wholesome, a/iopoBtjOBOjOBa. TasKKifi, heavy, •raJKeK'B, jkko, JKKa. 

aoporofi, dear, floport, oro, ora. hcthhhbih, veritable, HCTHHeH'B, hhho, HHHa. 

Be^HKifi, great, BeJHKt, hko, HKa. apeBHift, ancient, apeBeHB, BHe, bhh. 

Aibacin, stout, /uoJKt, jKe, a?a. no^Hbifi, full, noaoHt, jiho. Jina. 

xoponrifi, good, xoponrt, omo, onia. 3jioh, evil, ao-it, 3jio, 3Ja. 

jkbboh, live, hchbi, HBO, HBa. KpinKifl, strong, KpinOK'B, nKO, nKa. 

cyxofi, dry, cyxt, yxo, yxa. JierKifi, light, JieroKt, tko, rKa. 

BucoKifi, high, BHCOKt, oko, oica. ropbKifi, bitter, ropeKtjpiKO, pBKa. 

6wcTpwfi, rapid, GbiCTpt, Tpo, Tpa. chjbhhh, vigorous, CH-ieHt, jibho, ,/iBHa. 

TBep/iMH, firm, TBepat, epAO,pfla. enoKoflHbiH, quiet, cnoKoemb, ohho, OHHa. 

The following are exceptions to this rule: aoctohhbm, worthy; 6.iameH- 
iiwft, happy; HaAMeHHfcifi, proud, and C0Bepinemn>iH , perfect, which 
form : aoctoiifl, ohho, oflHa ; G-tfajKein., HaAMeHi> ; coBepinemb, eHHO, emia. 

The qualifying adjectives have both terminations, except pa/ri>, joyous, 
and ropa3Ai>, except, which have only the apocopated, while 6o.abin6H, 
great, and Mentnioii , little, have only the full termination. The indivi- 
dual possessive adjectives have only the apocopated termination, while 
the material and circumstantial possessive adjectives have only the full 
termination. The same is the case with several common possessive ad- 
jectives, with the exception of such as end in iu, which in the sin- 
gular have the full, and in the plural the apocopated termination. 

Unification 38 - — The qualifying adjectives have five degrees of sig- 
nification \ viz. the positive , the comparative ; the superlative, 
the diminutive and the augmentative. 

1. The positive (no^osKHTejibHafl CTenem>) is indicated by 
the ordinary terminations , full and apocopated ; e. g. 6iAhm 
and 6%at>, white; cyxdfi and cyxx, dry; chhIh and chhb, blue. 

2. The comparative (cpaBHHTejiBHaa CTenem.) is marked 
in the full termination by the inflections muwi'ti, aiauia, miii 
(neut. ee, fern, an J, and in the apocopated termination by the in- 
variable inflections me and e, and is formed in three different ways : 

1) By changing the termination of the positive, preceded 
by any consonant except a guttural , into muiaiu for the full, 
and into me for the apocopated termination; e. g. 

6%Abm, white, comp. d^inimft and 6%a%q, whiter. 

CAhfom, weak, .... c^adiiiniiii and c./ia6ie, weaker. 

jkhboh, live, HtHBifimifl and JKHBie, more live. 

nxMHBiH, full, no-iifBHinift and nojurse, more full. 

From this rule are excepted the following adjectives , which 
though they have the full termination mumiu, have the apocop- 
ated in e, changing at the same time the mutable consonant 



Lexicology. — the adjective. . 53 

GoraTbrfi, rich, comp. full term, 6oramiimn , apoc. term, doraie. 

4eineBwfi, cheap, flemeBfcfimift , aeineB-fle. 

rycToft, thick,. rycTininifi, ryme. 

KpacHBiil, handsome, . . . Kpacniihimf, Kpaine. 

(No KpacHLift, red, forms regularly: KpacHie.J 

KpyTofi, steep, KpyTiHinifi, Kpyie. 

no3AHiH, tardy, no34HiinniH, ...... no3me. 

npocToii, simple, npocTinmiii, npome (and npocrEe.) 

TBe'pAbifi, firm, TBepAifimhl, TBepflce. 

ToJiCTLift, thick, TO-icTiiiniiH, To^me. 

MacTBift, frequent, .... MacTifimifi, lame. 

iiicTBifl, pure, HncTiftuiin, inme. 

The adjectives ropaiifi, burning ; jibicbih, bald; ch3bm, dove-coloured; 
CB-Bmtt, fresh; and others in 3biii, cm , o/ciu, uiii, iu/u, have only 
the apocopated termination ne ; ropaiie, Aucie, msie, CBUJKie* 

2) By changing the termination of the positive, preceded 
by one of the gutturals (r , k , x) ; into aiiwiti for the full, 
and into e for the apocopated termination, permuting the con- 
sonant at the same time ; e. g. 

cTporiii, strict, compar. CTpoHiafimifi and CTptiace, stricter. 

Kpimrift, strong, .... Kp-EireafiiiiiH and Kpinie, stronger. 

BCTxift, old, BeTmailmiii and Beune, older. 

Exceptions. — Most of the adjectives in ziii, km, xiti , have 
not the full termination of the comparative; and also the follow- 
ing adjectives form their comparatives in different ways : 

AOJriH, long, comp. full. term. ao^jKanniiH, apoc. term. AoJbine. 

aoporofi, dear, 4paJKafiiniH, aopoace. 

Aa^eKiS and AEMBmil, far ; . . . AaJiBHiftmiu, 4a^Bme. 

6^ii3Kift, near, 6\iH}KaiiiniH, 6Mwe. 

oydoKiii, deep, rjyfioHdfimifi, rjyfijKe. 

ropBKifl, bitter, ropiafiiniii, ropie. 

(No ropBKift , bad , takes the Slav, inflection roprmii and ropine.) 

KopoTKift and KpaTKift, short, . KpaTiafimift, Kopoie. 

p^AKift, rare, p-BAiafimift, ....... piace. 

c^a4Kift, sweet, c4a4HafimiH, cjame. 

TOHKift, thin, TOHiawmft, ....... ToHBine. 

TajKKifi, heavy, TarHafimm, Tarie. 

miipoKin, broad, mnpoHaftmiH, miipe. 

ra^Kiil, dirty, \ These five/' raace. 

oaAKift, smooth, . . 1 have not thel oaace. 

jkhakih, liquid, I full term. / p&Ke. 

y3Kifi, narrow, I of the com- j yate. 

caa6Kift, slack, J parative. ( c.ia6?Ke, 

Reiff Russian Grammar. K 



54 



RUSSIAN GRAMMAR. 



3) The inflection mm for the comparative is only found in 
the following adjectives , three of which take their compara- 
tive from another root : 

bhcokw, high; comp. full. term, w&cniift, apoc. term. . Btime. 
MOJOAofi, young; . . . . . . . MMAwffip ')(] ZQUWi MOJioHte. 

HH3K1H ., 10W ;......, . . . HH3miH , HH)Ke. 

CTapwii, old; . . .. CTapniifi and CTap^MmiH, dapine anddap-fie. 

xyaoB, bad; . xy/uniH, ........ xyace. 

Be^HKift (and 6o^luiqh), great ; 66Abmiu, . 66Jibme. 

Ma^fcift (and MeHLUioft), little; . Mem>iniH, ....... MeHBine. 

xoponiifi, good; Jiynww, jrynine. 

1. Care must be taken not to confound the comparative of the ad- 
jectives 4o.ifcine, longer; ToHtme, finer; w^me, more distant, 6oJibwe, 
greater, Mem>ine, less, with that of the adverbs AOJive , longer; von-ne, 
finer; Mjii>e , further; do-aue, more; Meirae, less. But this difference 
exists only in the above five words , the comparative of the adverbs 
being in every other instance similar to that of the adjectives in the 
apocopated termination. 

2. The apocopated termination of the comparative sometimes takes 
the preposition no, which softens and diminishes the force ; e. g. no(te.iie, 
a little whiter; noTontme. a little finer; nojiyime, a little better. 

3. Such adjectives as want one of the terminations of the compara- 
tive , supply its place with the adverb 66.i£e before the positive ; 
e. g. 66jTBe y3Kift, narrower; 6oAt,e touuiI, more liquid ;doA%e pa/ri, 
more joyous; 66ji%e ropas^t, more expert. 

3. The superlative (npeBoexoAHaa CTeneHt) in Russian is 
not marked by any particular inflection, except in the four 
following adjectives : 

BejriiKM, great; compar. d ostium ; superl. BeAmmwm, greatest. 

BbicoKifi, high; ..... Bwcmift; BLicoHatimiH , highest. 

Mantra, little ; '. ..... MeHBimft; .... Maximum, least. 

HH3KiH, low; Hii3mitt;. .... HHHjaHmiii, lowest. 

In all the other adjectives, in the full termination, the super- 
lative is expressed by that of the comparative, the words H3T> 
bcext, , of all, being understood, or the particle Han being 
placed before it , or also by that of the positive , placing be- 
fore it the word caMtiii (n. caMoe, f. caMaa), as : jerqaimm 
(u3d ecrbx5j y HaH-ieruaftiuiii or caMfciii ^ermii , the lightest; 
Ajmam (usz ecibxaj, HaiMyHiniH, or caMbiii Afmum (improperly, 
for caMBift xopomiii) ; the best. In the apocopated termination 
the superlative is the same as the comparative , adding the 



Lexicology. — the adjective. 55 

word ecibX3 or ecezo, e. g. bcsx-l Sterne, the lightest; BCfcxx 
jiyuuie, the best; Bcero BajKHie, the most important; Bcero 
TpyAHie, the most difficult. 

4. The diminutive degree (yMentuiHTe^BHaa cTenenB) is used 
to mark the diminution of quality , indicating either a want or 
smallness of any quality in an object , or a softening of the 
force of the quality , and also for the agreement of the 
adjective with the diminutive noun; e. g. dibAoedmbiR uep- 
niL/ia, whitish ink: pbidKemuafi .ziouia/iKa, a little bay horse; 
MdAemKaa AiBOHKa , a little young girl. The diminutive ad- 
jective in the former case ends , in the full termination , in 
oednibiu or eedmuu (neut. oe, fern, an) , and in the apocopated 
in oedms or eedms (neut. o, fern, a) , and in the latter case, 
in the full termination , it ends in ommu and emmi (neut. oe, 
fern an) , and in the apocopated , in euem and euem (neut. 
mm, fern. ubKa)\ e. g. 

6£jibifi, white; dim. 6-B^OBaTLin or 6tMOBaTT>, and GiueiibKiii or 6-EJeneK'b. 
TeiMbifi, hot ; . . Ten^oBaTbiil or TeruoBaT'L, and Ten.*eHbKiii or TerueHeKT>. 
cyxoii, dry ; ... cyxoBaTbiil or cyxoBarb, and cyxoubKiii or cyxoneKt. 
KpacHLin, red ; . . KpacHOBaTtift or -iioBarb, and KpacHeHwtffi or -HeneKt. 
chhm, blue; . . . cimeBaTbiii or CHHeBan,, and ciiiieHbKiil or cimeiieKb. 
pbiHciil, bay; . . . pbDKeBaTbm or pbUKeBaTT), and pb'meHbKifi or pbiiKeneirb. 

The diminutive ending oeanmU, eeanutiu , must not be confounded 
with the similar ending of the positive , which belongs to the qualifying 
adjectives; e.g. BinioBaTbiii, culpable; yooBaTbift, angular; H034peBaxbiH, 
porous; yrpeBaTbifi, scaly. 

5. The augmentative degree (yBCfliiuiiTejiLHafl cTeneHt) is 
used in the qualifying adjectives to express the abundance 
or excess of quality , and is formed in the full termination by 
the prepositive particle npe, and in the apocopated by the 
endings exouem and evuenem , or oxouens and omeueKd (neut. 
HbKO , fern, ubua) ; e. g. 

6i>Jiuu, white; augm.ii\)e6i>Ahiu,or d^JiexoHeKX and 6'b.ienieiieK'b, quite white 
cyxoft, dry ; .... npecyxou, or cyxoxoneK'b and cyxomeHeK-b, very dry. 
ienrifi, light; . . . npejienrip, or ^eroxoHeKi, and .ier6meneKT> ; very light. 
Ma-ibift, little; . . . npeMa.*bii1,orMa.iexoHeKT>andMa.flemeHeK'b ; very little. 
The adjective npeKpaciibift, beautiful, in which the particle npe has 
an augmentative meaning, is used as a simple adjective to be distin- 
guished from KpacHbiii , red; but it is not the same case with npe^ecTHbrii, 
charming, derivated from npe\iecTb, charm. 

5. 



56 



RUSSIAN GRAMMAR. 



m 

M 

H 
P 

e 

w 


a 

a 

a 


^ 1 

O - | 

. H 1 
■< - 

| 

O 
M 

a 


1 1 
I* 


oB 

" — ' ss sa _ 2 oa 

03 © © 2 © © 
hO ►« J3 hQ hfl uO 


s 1 

« 1 

^ ' 

^ j 


1 

01 

© 
e« t« . a t« 

x a 8 a x 

a a g § a s 
o 




'■*■'! 
ID 


/ — \ 
© 

S a as 

© 03 © © B © 

•a >4 4 >a »q to 




I* 

II 






a 
is 
a 

00 


/ 

S3 

o 

!■ 

Oh 
O 
U 

o 

0-i 

*1 




oa 
© 

93 ds _ 2 oa 

« q c S * a 

sa ds 2 os 
CS o o >-> o o 




] 

Si 

8 

O 

• -g 

[4 ^ *" a to 
as 

i 

to t« e B & 

M 2S s | 2 

3 j 3 ■ g h« h« 

* 

o 

\ : 




1 1 

S 1 
£ 1 


tr=l tO 

© « s © k © 

o ca p»-» o 3 o 




SB 

J 


^ a § 

ga w 2 o H g 

~ a ^ 
© g a 




OS 

a 


© 

C5 
K 
H 

fa 


a 
<» 
"e 

"i 


.2 © 
1 « ss sa § 2 ss 

I 63 © © 2 © © 

( r- "\ / — > 
j 03 sS 

1 5 ^ 

' 03 oa os 2 2 sa 
KS o o >-. © o 


^ 1 

S 1 

^} 
.8 
8 
1 

"53 

1 


' © 

\ jq t« ^ a ta 

I 03 x a ^ a >s 

j 3 3 3 o 3 ►* 

<» 

1 "e 

i " . : 




1 «3 

} 

si 


© 2 a © a a 

1 © 63 © © a © 
) © & 1 £ 

r © c-c a © g a 

1 © CC O O uQ O 




s 

•S 

VI 


\ ^ 2 a ° a a 

\ ga OS O TS J3 O 


8 

OS 


[ ta t« ^ a cfl 

i >< a » a x 

1 o a s ^ a s 
\ •© 

f 2 £ § ax 




Gases : . . . 
Numbers : . 


. ^ 6 Q *< "-5 ^ 
SINGULAR. 


e d q -< i-; o^ 

PLURAL. 





Lexicology. — the adjective. 57 

39. — The Russian adjectives have three declensions; the ^jSjJj^ of 
first Tor adjectives of the full termination, the second for those 
of the apocopated , and thejthird for those of the mixed ter- 
mination, i. e. for such common possessive adjectives in iu 
(neut. be, fern, o/z?, as have some inflections of the full and 
others of the apocopated termination. Each of these declensions 
has three endings for three genders , masculine , feminine and 
neuter, corresponding to the three declensions of substan- 
tives ; as is seen in the opposite table. 

In declining adjectives according to this table, attention is required to 
the following observations: 

1. The inflection oil of the nominative singular masculine, instead of 
biu , or of iii preceded by a guttural or a hissing consonant , is only 
used when the accent is on the last syllable; e. g. citnofi, blind; 
bockobou, of wax ; rjyxoft, deaf; lyjKofi, foreign; Co^buioh, great (in- 
stead of cjubiuku, eocKoe&ii, zjiyxiii, nyo/ciu, 6oAbuiiu). 

2. The inflection uh or in of the genitive singular feminine is Sla- 
vonian, and is only used in poetry, or in religious prose; e. g. kpotoctl 
cexmbiR, JKU3HH, the sweetness of a holy life ; CoOopt Ka3dHCKin EoJicin 
MaTepn, the Cathedral of Our-Lady of Casan. 

3. The inflection ow, eix or beii of the instrumental singular feminine 
is a contraction of oro, ew or bem in use in familiar language. 

4. The inflection Tb, of the prepositional singular masculine and neuter 
of the II declension , is confined to the names of families and towns, and 
the inflection omz to the individual possessive adjectives, and to the 
qualifying adjectives in the apocopated termination. (See Paradigms 9, 
10, 11, 12, 13) 

5. The apocopated termination of the adjectives is often used instead 
of the full in poetry, for the sake of the rhythm; e. g. nyuiucmbi 
I'men (instead of nyuiiicmbie) , thick hoarfrost; foicmpbi boabi (instead 
of 6ucmpbiff) , rapid waters ; doopy mojoauv (instead of do6poMy)> 
to the good young man; capjf seBMio (instead of cbipywi) , the moist 
earth. 

6. The inflection ie, in, imo, etc. of the common possessive adjectives 
is used in an elevated style, and be, bx, bnzo, etc. in familiar language. 

7. As the vocative of the adjectives is always the same as the nomi- 
native , it has been omitted in the table of the declensions. 

40. — With due attention to the above remarks all the ad- Paradigms of 
jectives of the Russian language can be declined according I^SeT 
to the following 17 paradigms. 



58 



RUSSIAN GRAMMAR. 





PARADIGMS OF THE THREE 




Termination 
Declensions 


i»» 

>■ 
o 

'■I 
*i 

3:1 

-I 

5. 
6. 
7. 

8 


S I M G U 

Masculine and neuter genders. 




Nominative and Vocative. Genitive. Dative. Accus. Inslr. Prepos. 








m. h6bm#, new j 6fi _ aro _ • # 

m. MariuM , tender , . j MarK-aro . . OMy . -S • hmt. . . omt> . 
n. MarKoe : « a? 

m. cdpft, blue j cliH _ || eMl< 

n. cmiee j } ^ A 

m crimiu fresh . . . j ijK _ aro *| ^ eMl# 

(Tpa(f)o~) To^ctow .... To^CT-aro . OMy . | ^ . bimt. . . 6mt> . 

m. nopTHdw, a tailor . . nopTH-aro . oMy . g ® . bimt. . . 6mt». 

w. JKapKcte, a roast . . . >KapK-aro . . OMy . ®g , i'imi. . . 6mt> . 

c 




\ 


3 <u 




m 

o 


1 ^ 
1 © 

I ° 
/ © 

> 
H 


9.; 
,a| 

11. 

12. 

13. 
14. 

15 

16. 


m uapeBi, the king's j . - f . bimt. . . omt,. 
w. uapeBO j * J a ^ 

m. fajis white . . . . j d a ^ - • j; IMI) . . 6mt». 
n. 6-hAO j J « a 

(Kft/i3b) ?euEUH5 .... Peniiim-a . . y . . .J **> * wmt> . . i . . 
(zopodz) Kama//5 .... Kaunm-a . . . y . . g !* . bimi. ..*£.. 
(ceAd) BopOAW«o . . . EopoAOH-a . y . . o » . hmt> . . £ . ♦ 

^^3 




i m. FocnoAeHb, the Lord's r ocn 5 4H _ H m # . £ 5 . HMT, . . eMT> . 
rc. TocnoAiie j 

| m. chh6 , blue j chh-h w . . o> . hmt. . . e'MT, . 






17. 


j m-puow, of fish . . . j v ^_ haT0 . . ^My. * &hmt.. . beMT, 













The following observations, relative to the tonic accent in the declension of the adjectives, 
are ^ant: ^^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ terminationi j e . in the lst and Ulrd de- 
clension, retain the accentuation of the nominative singular masculine trans ferred 

2. in the apocopated termination, i. e. in the Ilnd declension, ^^^^1^^ 
to the last syllable, sometimes only in the nominative feminine, and ^ other tunes » tne » eu e 
and in the plural. The oblique cases of the apocopated termination either retain the accentua- 
tion of the nominative, or transfer the accent to the last syllable. 



Lexicology. — the adjective. 



59 



DECLENSIONS OF ADJECTIVES. 



L A R. 

Feminine gender. 

Norn, and Voc. G.D. and P. Accus. Inslr. 



HOB-aa . . 
MarK-aa . 

ci'm-aa . . 
CBiiK-aa . 

(rpatfuHfi) 

T(MCT-aa 



OH . . yiO . . OK) 

oh . . yio . . oio 

efi . . row . . eio 

eii . . yio . . eio 

oh . , yio . . 610 



KAdiAOB-d/l, . . oh . . yw . . oio 
a storehouse 



uapeB-a 



. ou 



y 



6-hA-a. .... oh . . y . 

(Khhzuhh) 

PenmiH-a . . 6ii . . y . 



cim-a 



. oio 
. oio 

. OK) 



P L U R 

For the three 



bIXT>. . 



HXT> 



m. HOB-Lie 
n. f. HOB-Bia 

m. MarK-ie 
n.f. Marn-ia 

m. ciiH-ie . I 
n.f. ci'm-ia . j 

m. CBi>}K-ie ( 
n.f. CB^K-ia j 

(rpdtfbi) TojcT-tie . Bixt 
• . nopTH-b'ie . BlXt 
. . JKapK-ia . . hxt> 
. . luaAOB-bia . bixt 



A L. 

genders. 



bIMT> 
IIMT> 



. HXT> . . HMT> 

. HXTi . . HMT> 

blM-b 
bIMT> 
HMT> 
blMT. 



(depeenn) 

Myp//«-a . . oh . . y . . . oio . 
TocnoAH-a . . eii . . io . . . eio . 



. . en . . K) . . . eio . 



pbi6-ba . . . beii . bio . . beio ... pbi6-bii . . . bnxT> . lumi . 



re 
.5 £ 

© £ 
<*> £ 

<x> re 

re o 



^5 



e » 



. . uapeB-bi . . bixT>. . biM-b 

. . 6-hA-hl . . . blXT. . . bIMT> 
(KHHSbi) FeniIIIH-bI . blXT. . UWb 



;s s 

* o^> 

fe;^3 

FoCnOAH-H . HXT) . . HMT) . 3 



CHH-II . . . I1XT> . . HM^ . 



bIMII 

IIMII 

nMu 
HMn 

bIMH 
bIMII 
IIMII 
bIMH 

bIMII 

bIMII 
bIMII 



HMH 



. IIMII 



. bllMII 



The accusative masculine, singular and plural, of the adjectives is like the nominative, when 
the noun, which they qualify, designates an inanimate or abstract object, as is also the case 
with the substantives; and it is like the genitive, when the noun designates an animate being, 
even when the accusative of the noun in question may not happen to be the same as the ge- 
nitive, as is the case with the masculine substantives of the lllrd declension; ex. mm juo6hmt» 
eibpnaio cjiyzy, we love the faithful servant; mm jiioohmt* eibpnuxs c/yzs, we lore the faithful servants. 



60 



RUSSIAN GRAMMAR. 



First 
declension. 



According to the 1st paradigm (hobbih) are declined : 1) the quali- 
fying adjectives in uu; 2) the common possessive adjectives in oeuu, 
eemu, mm, umiu; 3 J all the material possessive adjectives ; 4) the dimi- 
nutive adjectives in oeamuii and eeammii; remarking that the termina- 
tion uih when accented is changed into oil. Such are : 

1) Ao<5phiH,good, n. flodpoe, f. flodpaa. 2)EodpoBbifi,of beaver, rc.dodpoBoe, /".-OBaa. 
Chjbhmh, vigorous, cuabHoe, ciubHaa. Ejkcblih, of hedgehog, eateBoe, eaceBaa. 



Cxapbifl, old, dapoe, crapaa. 
ilepHHfl, black, qepHoe, qepHaa. 
KpacHufl, red, icpacnoe, -CHaa. 
BhAbia, white, disjioe, dijiaa. 
Ymhmh, wise, yamoe, yaraaa. 
Tpydufi, coarse, rpydoe, rpydaa. 
nojiHbifl, full, noaaoe, nojmaa. 
HBHtHbifi, tender, H'Ba?Hoe,HBacHaa. 
CaBnon, blind, cainoe, caBnaa. 
OpocTofl, simple, npocioe, npociaa. 
XyAofi, bad, xyaoe, xyaaa. 
Hbmoh, dumb, HBMoe, HBMaa. 



Ilqe^HHHH, of bee, nqeaaHoe, nieaiiHaa. 

4op6atHbifl, of road, Aop6acHoe,-p6auiaa. 

Hocoboh, of the nose, HocoBoe, HocoBaa. 
3) 3ojotoh, of gold, 3oaoToe, 3oaoTaa. 

JKeaB3HHH, of iron, JKeaB3Hoe, SKeaB3Haa. 

MacaaHbifi, of oil, MacaaHoe, MacaaHaa. 

KoHiaHHH, of leather, KoacaHoe, KoacaHaa. 

4epeBaHHbiH, ofwood, flepeBaHHoe,-BaHHaa. 
4)EBaoBaTbiH, whitish, dBaoBaioe,-BaTaa. 

KpacHOBaTbifl, reddish, KpacHOBaToe, -iaa. 

CaHeBaTbiH, bluish, cHHeBaToe, CHHeBaxaa. 

PHJKeBaTbiH, ruddy, pbiJKeBaToe, -Bataa. 



According to the 2nd paradigm (Marian) are declined : 1) the quali- 
fying adjectives in ziii, uiu , xiu; 2) the common possessive adjectives 
in CKiu and u,Kiu; 3) the diminutive adjectives in eHbKiit and omKiu ; 
the termination iit when accented being also changed into oil. Such are: 



1) ./lenda, light, n. aerieoe, f. aericaa. 
CTporin, strict, dporoe, ciporaa. 
KpoTKiu, kind, icpoTKoe, KpoTKaa. 
BeaaKin, great, Beaaicoe, Be.iHKaa 
Ynpyriu, elastic, ynpyroe, ynpyraa. 
TopbKiii, bitter, ropbicoe, ropbKaa. 
Beixiu, old, BeTxoe, BeTxaa. 
4opor6fi, dear, aoporoe, aoporaa. 
Cyxofi, dry, cyxde, cyxaa. 
rayxda, deaf, rayxoe, rayxaa. 



2) 3BBpcKia, bestial, n. 3BBpcK0e, f. -CKaa. 

JKeHCKift, feminine, acenxKoe, aceHCKaa. 

Tocno/icKiH, seigneurial, rocnoacicoe, -CKaa. 

PyccKifl, Russian, pyccKoe, pyccuaa. 

HBMesKiS, German, HBMeijKoe, HBMegKaa. 

wlto^CKOH, men's, aroacKoe, aroacicaa. 

ropoACKOH,ofatown,ropo/icK6e, -poacKaa. 
3)MaaeHbKia, little, MaaeHbKoe, -Kaa. 

B'BJieHbKiH, whitish, di;aeHbKoe,-Kaa. 
yieroHbKifl, lightish, aeroHbKoe, -Kaa. 



According to the 3rd paradigm (chhhT) are declined the adjectives: 
1) qualifying, 2) circumstantial possessive, and 3) some common pos- 
sessive, in niu (neut. ee , fern. hjQ; such are: 



i)ApeBHia, ancient, n. apeBHee, f. apeBHaa. 
EjHJKHifi, neighbour, daaacHee, danatHaa. 
^ajbHiu, distant, aaabHee, AajihE.ua. 
HcKpeHHift, sincere, HCKpeHHee, HCKpeHHaa. 
Hrpemfi, light-sorrel, arpeHee, nrpeHaa. 
HopoJKHifl, empty, nopoamee, nopoatnaa. 
n63/imft, tardy, no3anee, no3AHaa. 



3/i , 6mHia,ofheren.3A'BniHee,/ , .3A'BmHaa. 
HBHBmHiH,actual,HbiHlimHee,-HBniHaa. 
3hmhih, hybernal, 3BMHee, 3HMHaa. 
BeceHHia, vernal, BeceHHee,-Haa. 
•I-BTHifl, estival, aBTHee,a'ETHaa. 
OceHHia, autumnal, oceHaee, oceHHaa. 
IIpe3KHiB,precedent,npeacHee,-atHaa. 
nocjBAHia, last, noca'i»aHee,-aHaa. 



PaHHia, early, paHHee, paHHaa. 
2)BqepamHia,yesterday's,BqepamHee,-pamHaa. 3)Myatmi, marital, MyatHee, MyacHaa. 
Beie'pHia, evening's, Beiepnee, BeqepHaa. ^pyatniii, friend's, /ipya<Hee,flpyamaa 
YTpeHHia, morning's, yTpeHHCe, yTpeanaa. CbinoBHifi. filial, cbmoBRee, cwHODHaa 



Lexicology. — the adjective. 6 1 

According to the 4th paradigm (cB-BJKitt) are declined : 1) the quali- 
fying adjectives in o/ciii, niu, miii and iqiu (neut. ee, fern, an); 2) all 
the comparatives and superlatives in the full termination ; observing that 
the ending iu when accented is changed into oii. Such are : 
i) AibiKiii, robust, n. aroacee, f. /nbacaa. Qyaton, foreign, n. qyatoe, f. qyjKaa. 

ropaaifi, hot, ropaiee, ropaqaa. OGnjia, common, odnjee, odnjaa. 

KnnaqiH, boiling, Knnaiee, Kaaaaaa. HBgjifi, poor,Baniee, Haraaa. 

Xoponiia, good, xoponiee, xopomaa. 2) E6.ibniiu, greater, 66jibiuee,66jibmaa. 

Eojibiboh, great, dojibnioe, dojbniaa. ./ryquiia, better, jyqniee, jiyqaiaa. 

noxoatifi, resembling, noxoiKee, -acaa. Mesbniia, least, Menbiuee, Meabniafl. 

nparoaciH, pretty, npnroatee, nparoacaa. H/fcacHifiniin, more tender, -ifimee, -maa. 

According to the 5th paradigm (To.ictoiT) are declined family names 
in biu and iu } or in oil with the accent (fern, afi) ; the vowel u being 
changed into u after a guttural. Such are: 

Cmhphoh, Smirnoi, f. CwapHaa. /^o^ropyKifl, Dolgorooki, f. Ao-iropyKaa 

HojeBoa, Polaivo'i, IIojieBaa. TpydegKofi,- Troobetzko'i, TpydegKaa. 

Hap-BatHHH, Naraizhni, HapfiacHaa. SaBaaoBCKifi, Zavadovski, 3aBa/i6BCKaa. 

BpaHagKia, Branitzki, EpasagKaa. JKyKOBCKifi, Zhookovski, JKyKOBCKaa. 

EodpancKifi, Bobrinski, EodpflECKaa. MenjepcKiu, Mestcherski, MenjepcKaa. 

Such family names as are formed from the genitive, as: MepTBaro, 
Mertvaho; IlapeHaro, Parenaho ; CyxibcL, Soiikhikh; Hanixi ,*" Naghikh, 
are indeclinable. 

According to the 6th , 7th , and 8th paradigms (nopTHoft , JKapKoe, 
K^a^oBaa) are declined some masculine neuter and feminine nouns, 
which are in fact only adjectives used as substantives , remembering to 
change o into e and bi into u after a guttural or a hissing consonant. 
Such are : 

l)Bbi6opHbiH, a deputy. 2)JKHBOTnoe, an animal. 

Buctoboh, a messenger. MopoaceHoe, ice-creams. 

KopMiifi, the pilot. HaciKOMOe, an insect. 

^acoBOH, a sentry. 3) BceaeHHaa, the universe. 

MacTepoBofi, a artisan. rocxaaaa, a drawing-room. 

noABasia, a clerk. Hadepeatsaa, a quay. 

Upoxoaui, a passenger. qepxea<Haa, room for the drawers. 

n-BBsia, a chanter. IlepeAHaa, an antechamber. 

According to the 9th paradigm (napeBT,) are declined the individual decision, 
possessive adjectives in oes, ees, um, urn (neut. o, fem. a). Such are : 

Cmhobt,, son's, n. chhobo, f. cbraoBa. MaxepaB-b, mother's, n.MaTepHao,/:-pnHa. 
HeipoB-B, Peter's, IleTpoBo, nexpoBa. ^oqepaaT,, daughter's, aoqepBEO, aoqepEHa. 
OisfeB-B, father's, OTgeso, oigeBa. Hbketbet,, Nicetas's,HaKBinHO,H H KHiBHa.l 

TepoeBi,, hero's, rep6eBo,repoeBa. Hjhm&h-b, Elias's, Hjbbbo, ILibBEa. 

naB^OB-b, Paul's, naB^OBo, HaB^oBa. UapEgbiET,, the queen's, gapagbmo, -gbma. 

XpacxoB-b, Christ's, XpacxdBo, n»a. ^bbbmbt,, the girl's, aUbb 5 wbo, aUBagtma. 
The adjective XpncTOBi takes in the prepositional singular the inflec- 
tion n (instead of oms) in the phrase : no Po^AecTBi Xpucnweib (in- 
stead of XpucmoeoMZ), after the Birth of Christ. 



62 



RUSSIAN GRAMMAR. 



According to the 10th paradigm (6-mO are declined the qualifying 
adjectives in the apocopated termination in s (neut. o, fern, a), with 
the exception of those in oicz , wa , wz and w$ , which belong to the 
16th paradigm, remembering to change u into u after the gutturals (z, 
k, cc), and remarking that the tonic accent, which remains on the same 
syllable in all the inflections of the full termination, is often transferred, 
in the apocopated, to the last syllable, sometimes in the feminine only, 
and at other times also in the neuter and plural. Such are : 

Pa/i-B, joyous, n. pa/io, f. paaa; pi. pa/tu. BMc6Kt,high,n.BMCOKo,/;BHCOKa;p/.BBicoKH. 
Topa^/it, expert, -ao, -/ia; ropa34bi. CHjeH*B, vigorous, chjibho, chjbhsi; chjibhli. 
Hob-b, new, hobo, HOBa; hobh. Yniem., wise, yamo, yMHa ; yamu. 

CjiaC-B, weak, ciado, cia<5a; CAa6u. TenejrB, hot, TenAO, Ten^a; Teiubi. 

U,tA-b, entire, g'BJio, gt-ia; gBjiBi. ^leroKt, light, .aerico, jerica; JieTKB. 

BejHK'B, great, BejiHKO,Be.iHKa; BcanKH. 4o6p"B, good, aodpo, aofipa; floCpu. 
Cyx'B, dry, cyxo, cyxa ; cyxH. JKejiT'B, yellow, JKejiTo, MceJTa; acejiTw. 

KpinoK'B,strong,KpBnKO,KpBnKa;Kp'BnKH.B6jieH'B, sick, 6o^bho, dojiBHa; <5ojibhh. 

According to the 11th paradigm (PenHunV) are declined family names 
in 065, eez, um and mhs (fern, a) , which take in the prepositional sin- 
gular masculine the inflection m (instead of omz). Such are : 

CyBopoB-B, Soovorof, f. CyBopoBa. ^MHTpieB-B, Dmitrief, f. ^MHTpieBa. 

Kyry30B'B, Kootoosof, KyTy30Ba. TypBeB^, Goorief, rypBeBa., 
^Iomohocob-b, Lomonossof, ./loMOHocoBa. BacH.iBeB'B, Vassilief, BacHJBeBa. 

CTporaHOBTb, Stroganof, dporaHOBa. 4epJKaBHjrB, Derzhavin, 4epjKaBHHa. 

KphuoBT*, Krylof, RpiooBa. KapaM3HH"B, Karamzin, KapaM3HHa. 

IHhuikob-b, Shishkof, ninniKOBa. Khhjkhhh'b, Kniazhnin, KHflJKHHHa. 

XepacKOB-B, Kheraskof, XepacKOBa. nymKHirB, Poushkin, ByniKHHa. 

Op^oB'B, Orlof, OpjoBa. HoTeMKHH'B, Potiomkin, IIoTeMKHHa, 

IleTpoB'B, Petrof, FkTpoBa. TojiugiiH'B, Golitzin, rojmgBraa. 

Foreign family names, such as: Ea3e40Bi>, Basedow; KanKprnn., 
Cancrin , are declined like the substantives , and having no feminine, 
are indeclinable when referring to females. The same remark applies 
equally to Russian family names ending in ems; but sometimes in femi- 
nine they take the termination 6uueea, which then is declined as an ad- 
jective ; e. g. y Fpa*iiHH RduKpuuz, at the Countess Cancrin's; y FocnojKii 
MaKcuMdeuw or MaKcuMoeuueeoil , at Madame MaximovitcKs. 

According to the 12th, 13th and 14th paradigms (Rainum,, EopoAHHo, 
MypnHa) are declined such names of towns , boroughs and villages , as 
end in the masculine in oez , eez, um \\ urn; in the neuter in oeo, eeo, 
uho , mho , and in the feminine in oea, eea, una, mho, which take 
also in the prepositional singular masculine and neuter the inflection n> 
(instead of oms). Such are : 

1) (idpodz) BopucoB-B, Borissof. IlapngBiHO, Tzaritzino. 

MorHJieB-B, Mohilef. OcraHKHHO, Ostankino. 

A.ieKCHH'B, Alexin. 3) depeenu) BiaprojioBa, Pargolova. 
Ko3JioBTb, Kozlof. KpacKOBa, Kraskova. 

2) (ceAd) TapyTHHO, Tarootino. AeTameBa, Letashova. 

H3MaHJioBo, IzmaUovo. BaJiymHa, Valootina. 



Lexicology. — the adjective. 



63 



Exceptions to this rule are the names of the following towns : Kiein>, 
Kief; IIckobt, , Pleskow ; XapbKOBT, , Charkof; T^obt,, Gdof; Poctobt,, 
Rostof; Op^oBt, Orlof; as also the names of foreign towns, e. g. 
BepjifiHi, Berlin, which are declined like substantives, having [in the 
instrumental singular the inflection omz (and not umz). The same is 
the case with the names of towns in cm, up* and b ; as : CMO-ieHCKt, 
Smolensko; no-jomra., Polotsk; JfpociaBJb , Yaroslavle, etc. 

In such names of towns as are formed of noes and 6n*Jio, as: HoBro- 
poAt, Novgorod; Eu.5o63epo; Bieloozero , both the adjective and sub- 
stantive are declined: G. HoBar6po/ia, Esjiaoaepa; D. HoByropoAy, 
En-ayteepy; /. HoBbiMT>-r6poAOMT>, EiMHM'i-tiaepoM'i. ; P. o HoBuropoAU, 
E-MfcoBep* (taking also the inflection n instead of omz). 

According to the 15th paradigm (rocnoAeHb) is declined the indivi- 
dual possessive adjective : 

EoJKifl, of God, n. Sonde, f. Eowia; pi. Boutin, 

which must not be confounded with the common possessive adjective 
doHtecKin, divine, relating to the attributes of God. The adjective EoMh 
takes also the inflections of mixed termination, as in EoJKbe AepeBo, 
southern wood (a plant); E6tfO>H KopoBKa, cochineal, the Lady-bird; 
G. EoacBflTo AepeBa , Eoffibeii kopobkh , D. Eo;KbeMy ^epeBy , etc. 

According to the 16th paradigm (crmib) are declined the qualifying 
adjectives in the apocopated termination ending in b or 5 (neut. e, fern. 
h), and also those in jicz,, m, iuz, wp (neut. e, fern, a), remembering 
to change fi into a and w into y after the hissings Ok, % in, m). Such are : 

ApeBeHb, ancient, n. ApeBHe, f. /rpeBHa. Cbuhcb, fresh, n. cBbiKe, f. cBliJKa. 

HcKpeHeHt, sincere, HCKpeHHe,HCKpeHHa. PhiJK-b, carroty, pwace, puaca. 

IIopoJKeH'B, empty, nopoJKHe, nopomHa. ropaq-b, burning, ropaio, ropaqa. 

4k>jk"b, robust, AHme, Aionca. Xopom-b, good, xoponio, xopoma. 

IloxoJK'b, serablable, noxo>Ke, noxo^a. Tonjb, fasting, Toige, Tonja. 

According to the 17th paradigm (pbi6iii) are declined the common T hird 
possessive adjectives in iu, oeiil, eeiii (neut. be, fern, bn) , which are 
formed from the specific names of animals ; e. g. 

OjieHiu, of deer, n. oaeHbe, f. caeHba. HTHqifi, of bird, n. ninqbe, f. nTiiqba. 
Co66^in, of sable, cofio^be, co6o;iba. IltTyniiH, of cock, nUTynibe, MTyniba. 
Ko3ia, of goat, K03be, K03ba. BepSjubadif, of camel, Bep6\iK)JKbe,-JKba. 

KopoBia, of cow, KopoBbe, KopoBba. Ae6Amia, of swan, jie6asKbe, .leo'aJKba. 
OfieqiS, of sheep, OBeqbe, oBeqba. BojiOBift, of ox, BC/iOBbe, BoaoBba. 

MeAB-BJKiH, of bear, Me/tB-BJKbe, me/iBBiKba. KoHeBin, of horse, KOHeBbe, KOHeBba. 
Bapamfi, of ram, 6apaHbe, 6apaHba. Mymifi, of fly, Mynibe, Myniba. 

ToBH>KiH, of ox, roBaacbe, roBaiKba. Te-iaqiS, of calve, Te^aqbe, Te-iaqba. 

C^OHOBia, of elephant, cjLOHOBbe,cjiOH6Bba. RjionoBifi, of bug, K^onoBbe, KJionoBba. 
CoMOBiii, of silurus, coMOBbe, coMOBba. Bo^qin, of wolf, BOjiqbe, BOJWha. 
Aaciei, of fox, aacbe, jiacba. *Ie.aoBBqiH, of man, qejioBBqbe, -B^qba. 

The possessive adjective uejioemiii is used when applied to man as 
an animal, and the adjective uejioemecKiu («. oe, f. aa) to man as an 
intelligent being. 



declension. 



64 



RUSSIAN GRAMMAR. 



EXERCISES ON THE ADJECTIVES, 

It is necessary to observe preliminarily that according to the rules of 
construction in the Russian language the adjective is usually placed be- 
fore the substantive , when it does not form the attribute of the propo- 
sition ; and that the verb to be is commonly understood in the present. 

Apocope of the An empty pocket ; the pocket is empty. A strong castle : the castle 

termination. „ ,/ , r ^ T . , .„ , ' 

UycTOH KapMant ; Qecmb) . Kp'BnKin 3aMOKT> ; 

is strong. A faithful servant ; the servant has been faithful. The soft 
. BipHLiu CJiyfa; 6hWb . Mhtkui 

wax; the wax is soft. A quiet sleep ; the sleep is quiet. 

BOCKt ; . CnOKOHHMH COHT> | 

A worthy son ; the son is worthy. A true friend ; the friend is true. 

40CT0HHMH CLIHT) ; . HCTHHHBIH /ipyrt \ 

Perfect repose ; the repose will be perfect. A transparent glass ; 

CoBepmenHMH noKoii; GyfleTi . Ilpo3pa<mBiH CTeoo ; 

the glass is transparent. An ancient tradition; the tradition was 

4P6bhm npe4ame ; 6kmo 

ancient. A hot summer ; the summer will be hot. A blunt pen ; 
TeMBiH jteto; oy4erB . Tynoft nepo ; 

the pen is blunt. An old hut ; the hut is old. A blue paper ; 
BeTxifi xtoraa; . Cnmtt (JyMara; 

the paper is blue. New houses ; the houses are new. Rich 
. Hobbih aomt,; C^X mb l EoraTBift 

families; the families were rich.' Red ensigns; the ensigns 
ceMBa; Gb'mh . KpacHBifl 3HaMfl; 

will be red. 
6y4yri> 

Degrees of White paper ; whiter paper ; the whitest paper. The Neva 

signification. g^g 6yM a ra; HeBa 

is rapid , and the Volga is more rapid. The milk is liquid, 

CecmbJ 6bictpbih ; a Bo^ira . Mojoko WKifi, 

and the water is more liquid. A deep brook; a deeper river, 
a BO/ta . TjiyGoKiH pynefi; P^Ka. 

The houses are high, and the towers are higher. Good tea; 
ftowb Ccymb) BBicoKitt, a Gauma . XopoiniS iai1; 

better tea ; the best tea. The dogs are little ; the cats are 

. Co6ana m^bth ; Konrca 



Lexicology. — the adjective. «o 

less; but the mice are the least. The father is young; the mother is 
; ho mlihib f . Otcitb mojoaou ; m3tb f 

younger; but the sister is the youngest. The hay is dear, and the 
; no cecTpa . Cino Aoporoii, a 

straw is dearer. Milk is sweet; sugar is sweeter; but honey is the 
co^ojua . Mojoko cia/tKifi ; eaxapi. ; ho Meat 

sweetest of all. 

Some whitish paper; some reddish ink; some blackish water; 
Ei^tm 6yMara ; 6ypMH lepHika pi ; qepiiLifi BOAa ; 

the colour is bluish. A little red cow; a little pony; a little piebald 
Kpacna Qecmb) ciiniii. Bypwfi KopoBKa; Ma\iLM .louiaAKa ; nirifi 

horse; a poor little girl; the grey-headed man is very old; 

.lomaAKa ; 6iAHbm ABBOHKa ; CTapiiieKT. (ecmb) CTaptiii ; 

the little old woman is very good. Very white paper; the paper is 
CTapyuma AoGptift . E-mbih 6yMara ; 

very white; very dry wood; the wood is very dry. 
; cyxofi ApoBa pi ; 

The master of the large gardens, and the mistress of the new house. Declension of 

X03flHHl> 06mupHBlH CaA"B, H X03aflKa HOBBIH AOMT). ' * n a Jj 0n tenni ~ 

A glass of good water and of red wine; whole pots of pork- 
CTaKam> xopomul BOAa 11 KpaciiBiii bhho ; itb./ibm ropmoKt cbhhoh 

fat and of fir-resin. Do good to poor children and 

czuo 11 e^oBBifi CMO^a. 4^ au (ace.) Ao6po 6bahmh ahth u 

to infirm old men, and do not go into the fields of others. This is 
ApaxjiBiH CTapriKt, n lie xoah no Qdat.~) uoAe hvjkoh. Boti 

the house of the Prince Dolgoruki, that is the palace of the Countess Tolstoi, 
(nomj Aowb KH,i3h /(o^ropyKitt, bott> ABopeiVB Fpa^iiHa Tojctoh, 

and there are the large gardens of the young Counts Zavadovski. 
a botT) o6uiHpiiBiu caA'B mcioaoh rpa*T> 3aBaA6BCKift. 

I have admired the agreeable song of the nightingale of last year. 
H AHBiuca (dat.') npiaTHbiii ABHie co^OBeu npom.ioroAHiH. 

To cut a swan's quill with a blunt penknife. There are some goose 

Ihhhtb (acc.~) je6eAiiHtiS nepo Tynofi HofliiWB. Boti. {nom.~) rycimtiH 

quills, some red crayons, some thick blank books, some oak-rulers, 
nepo, KpacHLiH KapaHAaun>, to.ictbiii TeTpaAB/, Ay6oBLm ^rmiflKa, 

and great mathematical compasses, and here are some wollen clothes, 

II 6oAbm6u iiiipKy^Bm, a bott> cyKoHHbifi Ka^Tain., 

Reiff Russian Grammar. 6 



GG 



RUSSIAN GRAMMAR. 



some silk stockings, some beaver hats, fine linen, and still finer 
me.iKOHBiil iyjn6vL%, nyxoBBiii-uLMua, tohkui nojioTHo n Toimimiiii 

lace. Love good morals; read useful books; 

KpyjKeBO. A10611 (acc.~) Henopoikufi npaBi, ; qinaii (ace.) H0.ie3HBiii Eiuira ; 

honour old people; praise good actions; keep the 
thi (ace.) CTapBiii .ihwi pi; xBa^vi (ace.) 4o6pBiii /vmo; 6eyeTii (ace.) 

lionest and faithful servant. Give the new book to the most atten- 
HecTHbiil 11 BipiiBiii c.iyra. IIoAapn (ace.) iiobbiu KHiira (dat.) caMBifi npn- 

tive scholar, i You praise the weather of spring, the splendour of 
.leJKHBifi y^eniiK'L. Tbi xb£uiiuib (ace J noro^a Beceimifi, achoctb f 

the summer nights, the coolness of autumn, and the colds of winter. I esteem 
jiTHiu hohb /, npox.ia^a ocemim h xojo/tb 3iiMHiii. flvBajKaio 

the celebrated men, and the illustrious commanders of ancient times. 
(ace.) cflaBKBiil Myaii. 11 3HaMeniiTBnl no.iKOBOAeu'B ApeBmii BpeMH. 

The great military manoeuvres of this year will take place at 
Eo.flBm6ii MaiieBp-B bt> (prep.) HBiHfcmmTi ro/TB 6yAy:n> bt> (prep.) 

Krasnoe Selo, and on the mountain of Douderhof. 
Kpacnoe Ge.16 11 11& (prep.) Yoyh 4yAepro«j>CKiu. 

Declension of He has left the house of his father, and he does good to 
Oh"b BBiixa^i) ii3i> (gen.) aomt> oTiie'Bi), n /[i.meTb (ace.) /jodpo (dat.) 

the daughter of his sister. He has sold the property of his wife to the son 
AO^b f cecTpim-B. Out npoAa.iT) (ace.) HMBHie H(eHiiHi> (dat.) cbihb 

of his brother. To visit the temples of the Lord and the churches of God. 
6paTiiinrL, nocsmiTB (ace.) xpaMi. Tocno/ieHB 11 iiepKOBB / Eoasifi. 

To resign one's self to the will of the Lord, and to acknowledge the majesty 
noBimoBaTBca (dat.) bo.w Tocno^eiiB, u no3iiaBaTB (ace.) BCiirqecTBO 

of the name of God. The first Russian Grammar was written by 

iimh EoJKiii. nepBBifi PyccKiu TpaMMaTHKa dBLia namicaHa (instr.) 

the immortal Lomonossof, and the History of Russia by Nicholas Mikhai- 
oescMepTHBiii jIomohocobt., 11 IIcT6piaPocciucKiii("ms^JHiiKO^auMHxaH- 

lovitch Karamzin. The battles against the French were fought 
^OBim, KapaM3iiHT,. CpaHienie ct> (instr.) *paHuy3i» nponcxo^iun 

near • Borodino and Borissof. I have lived at Novgorod 

noA'b (instr.) Bopo/jimo h no/TB EopucoBT,. H acuBa^B b-b (prep.) HoBropo/TB 

and at Bieloozero. The villages of the Princess Saltykof are situated near 
11 Bt Btjooaepo. ^epeBiw KHan'ma CajTBiKom, .leatart 11041* 

the town of Kashin. 
(instr.) ropo4"B KaimiffB. 



the apocopated 
termination. 



Lexicology. — the numerals. 



G7 



There is a cloak of fox-skin, a sable- cap, a bird- nest, Declension of 

^ .. , .„ *• -o ' ' «a ' the mixed ter- 

Bot-b (worn..) inyoa jfioftj co6ojhi manna, nmiiu nmAo, m ination. 

some hare- skins, and some elephant's teeth. A pood ofdeer- 
3aaiiii Mfcxt 11 c.ioiioBiil 3761.. IlyAt o.ieniii 

flesh, a yard of ox- skin, and a pound of calf's brains. 
Maco, apimhTB bojiobw Kowa, h *yHTT. Te^jraii M03n>. 

Do not go on the track of a wolf, and do not enter into the den 
He xoaii no (datj c.i'BA'B boahm, h lie bxoaii fit (ace J 6ep^6ra 

of the bear. A dissertation on the man's eye, and on the 
MeAB&Kifi. Pa3cyjKAenie (prep J ie.i0B£Hin r-ia3T>, n 

fish- head. He deals in isinglass, in ox- fat, in goats' 

pbidifi ro^OBa. Oht. Topryert (instrj pwdiu oefi, dbrcamii ca^o, K03iu 

skins, and in cocks' 'combs, 
imxypa h nSTyiniu rpe6eHb?n. 

The braggart is like the jay, adorned with peacocks' Declension of 
XBacTym. (ecnib) noxoHrifiiia (ace J coa, yKpumeniiLiu (instr.') naB.uiHiii vari J" s e? a je ° 

feathers. The brother of the neighbour has arrived from a distant town, and 
nepo. iJpanb coceaob'b npiixa.ii>H3'L^ewjAa.iLHiMr6poA'b,a 

the sister from a more distant village. John's coat is small, but 

cedpa n3t Aa.ibHiii AepeBiia. MBaHOBi. miaTbe (ecmb) y3Kifi, ho 

that of Peter is still smaller. The good little old woman 

CnMnibe) neTpoBt Qecnib) em,e y3Kiii. /I,66pbiii CTapyuiKa 

lives in a damp house, situated near the village 

jkhbcti bt> (prep.) Cbipofi aom'b, .aejKamifi noAt (instrj ce.*6 

Tzaritzino. I have bought a cloak of bearskin with a collar 

Uapi'mbiHO. H KyniLii) (acc.}uiy6a MeABiflriii ct (instrj bopothhk'b 

of beaver-skin and a cap of beaver-skin with a silk- ribbon. There is 
CoopoBBiil, n manna CodpoBbiii ct> nie.iKOBbiii jema. Bott> (nom.~) 

a handsome book with a rich binding of morocco. Where shall we 

HpeKpacHLiii KHiira bi> (prep.) GoraTbiii nepen.ien, caswraHbiii. Tab mm 

find an instance of purer self-denial, of more exalted love 
HafiAeM!> npiiMip'b ihctbiju caMooTBepjKeme, Bbicoiriii jho66bb/ 

for the native land? 
kt> {datj OTenecTBO? 

THE NUMERALS. 

41. — The numerals Qiiic^iiiTejiLHLia HMena") are of two Division of nu- 
kinds : 1) the cardinal numerals (KOj»iHecTBeHHLia) ; which 
express the number; and 2) the ordinal numerals (nopaAO*!- 



68 RUSSIAN GRAMMAR. 

Htm), which indicate order or rank ; and are formed (with 
exception of nepebiu) from the cardinals, as is seen below. 

Cardinal numerals. Ordinal numerals. 

1. owwb,n.OAK6,f.OAKa.(sLediiHo, uhq, wwa).nepBbifi, n. nepBoe, /.nepBaa, first. 

2. ABa, /. abe BTopoft, oe, aa, second. 

3. Tpn , TpeTiil, he, ta, third. 

4L neTtipe qeTBepTLiil, oe, aa, fourth. 

5. rrtl naTLift, oe, aa, fifth. 

6. inecTB inecToii, 6e, aa, sixth. 

¥. ceMB (si. cedbMb) ceABMoil, oe, aa, seventh. 

8. BoceMB (si. ocbMbJ ...... ocLMoft, 6e, aa, eighth. 

9. AeBaTb AeBaiBiii, oe, aa, ninth. 

10. AecaTB AecaTBin, oe, aa, tenth. 

11. OAiiHHa/iiiaTB OAnHHaAuaTBin ornepBBifi Ha-AecaTB 11th. 

12. ABMaAuaTB (si. deatiddec/imb) . . AB^iiaAuaTBift or BTopoft Ha-AecaTB, 12th. 

13. TpimaAuaTB TpiiHaAuaTBin or TpeTift na-AecaTB, 13th. 

1-4. HeTBipHaAnaTB HeTBipHaAuaTBHior4eTBepTBiHHa-AecaT&,14th. 

15. naTiiaAuaTb naTHaAUcmiii or naTBift Ha-AecaTB, 15th. 

16. mecTnaAnaTL mecTHaAuaTtiil or uiecToil Ha-AecaTB, 16th. 

1¥. ceiinaAnaTB ceMHaAuaTBiu or ceABMou Ha-AecaTB, 17th. 

18. ocBMiiaAUaTB ou BOceMnaAuaTb . . ocBMiiaAnaTBift or ocbmoh na-AecaTB, 18th. 

19. AeBaTiiaAnaTB AeBaTHaAiiaTBiBorAeBaTBiil Ha-AecaTB, 19th. 

20. ABimaTB (si. deddecmnbj .... ABaAuaTBiii (si. d6adecAmbiiT), oe, aa, 20th. 

21. ABaAuaTB oaiih'b ABaAnaTB uepBBril, 21st. 

22. ABaAuaTB ABa ABaAuaTB BTopoft, 22d. 

30. TpiiAnaTB TpiiAnaTBiil, oe, aa, 30th. 

40. c6poK"B (si. uembipedecHmb) . . . co\>OKOB6ii(sl.y.embipedecAmbiu),6e,dLn,b0th. 

50. naTBAecaTt naTiiAecaTBiii, oe, aa, 50th. 

©©♦ mecTBAecaTi) uiecTHAecaTBiii, oe, aa, 60th. 

¥0. ceMBAecaTi. ceMiiAecaTBift, oe, aa, 70th. 

SO. BoceMBAecaTt ocBMiTAecaTBiii, oe, aa, 80th. 

90. AeBaHocTo (si. de6nmbdecHmo) . . AeBaHocTBiii (si. deenmudecAmbiu), 90th. 

lOO. cto ....... w . . . coTBifi, oe, aa, hundredth. 

200. ab£cth Abyxtj-cotbuI, oe, aa, 200th. 

300. TpiicTa ' . . . . Tpex'L-coTBiil, oe, aa, 300th. 

4LOO. HeTBipecTa leTBipex-B-coTBiil, oe, aa, 400th. 

500. naTbCOTT> ■ . . naTiicoTBiii, oe, aa, 500th. 

600. inecTBc6TT> inecrncoTBiH, oe, aa, 600th. 

?00. ceMBCoTb ceMiicoTBin, oe, aa, 700th. 

SOO. BoceMBc6Ti> . '. ocbmiicotbiu, oe, aa, 800th. 

©OO. AeBaTBeoTT, AeBaTucoTBiii, oe, aa, 900th. 

lOOO. TBica^a (si. rmicmya) .... TBicaanBift, oe, aa, thousandth. 

2000. AB'B TBicann AByxx-TBicaaHBiii, oe, aa, two thousandth. 

10,000. AecaTB TBicaTB (si mmaj . AecaTiiTBicaiiiBm, oe, aa, ten thousandth. 



Lexicology. — the numerals. 69 

100,000. cto Tbicaqt CTOTbica^Hbiii, oe aa, 100-thousandth. 

1,000,000. muMwb ...... milluohhsih, oe, aa, millionth. 

2,000,000. ABa Mii.oioHa .... 4ByxT»-Mii.oi6Hiibiii, oe, an, two millionth. 

1,000,000,000. Tbicaaa mhamohobt.. TbicaaeMii.MioHUbiii, oe, aa, 1000-miliionfJi. 

1,000,000,000,000. to£Mwh . 6[i.i.ii6nHbiil, oe, aa, billionth. 

To the cardinal numerals belong the fractional (ap66hbih) 
numerals, such as: no^omina, the half; Tpext, the third; x ieT- 
BepTt, the fourth; octaiyxa, the eighth; uo./rTopa, one and a 
half, no./iTpeTLa ; two and a half] no.weTBepxa, three and a 
half etc. ; and to the ordinal numerals belong also the circum- 
stancial adjectives /tpyroii, other, and noc.i'E/i.Hiij, last: dpyzo'd 
being used instead of BTopoii, second, and nocAi'bdum being 
opposed to iiepBbiii, first. 

From the cardinal numerals dea, mpu, etc. as far as dec Him, 
as also from cmo, are formed the collective Cco6npaTejiLHLia) 
numerals : ABoe, Tpoe ; MCTBepo, naTepo, etc., AecaTepo, coTepo. 
The following words also belong to the collective numerals : 
66a (f. 66-h), both; /iBoiiKa, two; Tpoika, three; rmTOKL, five; 
/i.ecaTOK'L, ten; fliojKHfia, a dozen; cothh, a hundred. 

The numerals odiiHo and nepebiii are also used as qualifying adjec- 
tives, and in that case take some inflections peculiar to adjectives. 
OOuho takes the augmentative termination OAUHexoHeKi> and o^ineineneKL; 
and nepebiii takes the diminutive termination nepBeiibKiii, as also the in- 
flection of the superlative nepBiiimiil or caMbiii nepubifi. 



42. — As regards declension, the numerals may be consi- Declension of 

the numerals. 

dered as substantive and adjective. The substantive numerals 
are: copons, cmo, deenuocmo, mmma, jwuudDm, nojoeuua, 
mpemb f nnmoKo, dec/imoh'o, dioatciuia, etc* The gender of these, 
as also their declension, is indicated by their termination. All 
the ordinal numbers , and the cardinal oduiio , are numerals 
adjective. All the other numerals are sometimes adjective, re- 
quiring the same case as the nouns to which they are joined, 
and sometimes substantive, in which occasion they require 
the noun to which they belong to be put in the genitive case, 
as will be seen later. Some of the last mentioned have the 
inflections of nouns, while others have inflections peculiar to 
themselves. A general view of the declension of the numerals 
may be obtained from the following table. 



70 



RUSSIAN GRAMMAR. 



CT5 



Ol 



*f- 



CO 



O <© CD ;<* 05 Cn jp=- CO tO ►■* 'GVUVJ 



*e ~^ 



"53 Co "53 <£ "53 

to- 3 co^ 5 5S 

§.<? § a *=> © a 

£ - . ^ P ~ &* P 



S? ^5 S?*5 






O 

_ o 2 ^ 

to s» a 



-< 2 



o 






►X5 H 
CD *© 

H a 



J- a - h 0" H 



a 

©OH 

t»"a o 
«-<- E,*a 

H ~ ps. CD 
O 

o &- 

s *= 

CD y 

ps a> 
a cd 
a- p. 

p 



•* 5- 3' 2. 



- CD 

5»o 



3 § 

Si 8 






H 5 S^ aaa a a a 

9? ? P opo © © © 

n ^ to to H H H H ^^ 

WCTi o © © 

© CD CD T3 ^3 >-© 

it £ tr" a >-< 

a a a 2 . 



to to © 
O.ps so 



tr< 


»■ 
to 




© 


o 




©> 


to 


H 


H 


tH 


a 



O © js, 

ovo a 
&}* o> «-«! 



o © o 



aaa 
© © p 



a a § a 
© © P © 

oo, w = ►« *© t5 od 6 

to to M S «> «> 2 ^ ^ 3 

i i 3 • SEE g 

• . . . b? >. ; *.,•■■• 



rf 



tr" to 

CD 



O 



cd © '■a 

© H CD: 

a- E g 
S ►a &* 

t* CD: 



2. °> 
©v ©\ co 

II ^ 
b" tr 1 



aa aa " a a aaa a 

oo So o©p o©© ta 

toto S© CD©CD>a»T3H© 

i g ^ ^ I 1 s § I 

a tri g gg a aa g 

• • • • B tr 5 * ' ^ 



to a w 

w pa o 

^ *-3 © 

a. to g 

CD B" 1 

h a ° 

p. -3 



© *m ^a tC 
a CD W CD 



O O to 
©\ ©\ cd 

a a 



o o > 

©\ 0\ cd 

SI - s 

bi Cr • 



m 
ft 

H 

r.B 

© 

H 

i 



aHaaBaaaaaa-gHc^S-S? 

II Jl lis III. H1.I§.II 
fr*1?i3.§1??f.|S I ^ I 

e • a sj rf ^ f >< a • ] 

b» ; ;' . 'I 

With respect to the tonic accent in the declension of the numerals we may re- 
mark, that it is generally placed on the inflexions of the cases, as happens in all 
the numerals from odiim to decamb, and from dedduomb to edcembdecnrnz, as also 
in dede, mpoe , uemeepo and other similar words. The numerals namb, me cmb, etc. 
as far as dec aim, as also deddiiamt and mptiduamb, while they are declined as 
feminine nouns in 6, differ from then in the accent, which is placed on the last 
vowel in all the cases: nmnii, nambwjecimu, etc., whilst in the nouns the accent 
is transposed only in the prepositional case: es ce.i3u, ez mnmu, etc. The nu- 
meral copoKs, which is declined like nouns in a, differs from them in the accent; 
for no dissyllabic noun can, without the elision of the vowel, transfer its accents 
from the first syllable to the inflexion of the cases, as happens in copoK-Bj 
copoKd, copoKf) etc. 



Lexicology. — the kumehals. 7 i 

According to the 6th and 7th paradigms (.juoe and leiBepo) are de- 
clined the similar collective numerals ; viz : 

6th par.) Tpoe and xpon, three. Illecxepo and niecxepu, six. 

Ofioe and 66oh, two. /Jecaxepo and AecaTepu, ten. 

7th par.) Haxepo and nHxepu, five. Coxepo and coxepw, hundred. 

/leoe, mpoe, uemeepo, etc., are used with the names of animate beings 
of the masculine and neuter gender; and dvou, mp&tt, Hemeepbi, etc., 
with the names of inanimate and abstract objects which only occur in the 
plural ; e. g. 4fi6e c.iyn>, two servants; Tpon Macb'i, three watches. We 
may stilt observe that 66oe had formerly a singular, the genitive, o66ezo, 
of which is still found in the expression : JKi'iTe.iu odoero no.ia, the na- 
tives of both sexes. 

According to the 8th and 10th paradigms (nan, and naTi^ec/m,) are 
declined the similar numbers following, with the exception of eoceMu, 
which is declined by the 9th paradigm : e. g. 

8th par.) Jllccxb, six, jew. niecxa. 4ua;uiaxb, twenty, gen. ABaairaTn. 

CeMb, seven, cejiii. Tpri/maxb, thirty, TpH/maTtf. 

AeBHTb, nine, aemnn. 10th par.) WecxbAecax'b, sixty, iuecxiiAccaxn. 

/Jecaxb, ten, Aecaxa. Ce.Mb/iecax'b, seventy, ceMiiAecflTH. 

O^iiHHaAgaxb, eleven, OAUHHaAnaxn. BoceMbAecax'b, eighty, ocbMiiAecaxn. 

The first member eoceMb of the last word is declined according to the 
9th paradigm: gen. ocbMiUecaru, instr. BOceMbiaiecarwo or ocbMi'uecaTbio. 

According to the 11th and 12th paradigms (ab£cth and nmbcoTb) are 
declined the following numerals; viz: 

11th par.) Tpacxa, three hundred, gen. Tpex'B coxt. CejibcoX'b, 700, #cm.ccme con> 

Hexupecxa, 400, qexbipext coxt. Bocenibcox-b, 800, ocbam c6xt>. 

12th par.) ILtecxbcoxi*, 600, mecxn coxt. /leBaxbcoxt, 900, /lecaxncox'b. 

Aefbcmu ^instead of Oedema") is the Slavonic dual of cto, and was 
used with dea and 66a, as we shall see later. 

According to the 13th paradigm (no.iTopa) are declined such nume- 
rals as are formed of no.n. . the half, with the apocopated genitive of 
the ordinal number, with the exception of noAmpemb/i, which is decli- 
ned according to the 14th paradigm : e. g. 

no,mcTBepxa, three and a half, gen. no.iyiexBepxa; fern. no.iqexBepxw. 
Ilo.maxa, four and a half, . . nojiyuaxa; . . nojinaxu. 

Ilo.iuiecxa five and a half, .. nojiyiuecxa; .. no^mecxii. 
llo.uecaxa, nine and a half, .. no^iy^ecHxa; .. no.i/iecaxbi. 

The compound numeral no.nopacTa, a hundred and fifty (a hundred 
and a half) forms no.iyTopacia in all the oblique cases. All these words, 
however, with the exception of noyimopd and noAtnopdcma, are anti- 
quated, and no longer used. 

According to the 15th and 16th paradigms (noJAeiib and no.inua) are 
declined such nouns as are formed with the numeral no.n>, the half; e.g. 

15th p.) riojiHoib, midnight, gen. no.iynoin. Ilo.iBe/ipa, half a pail, gen. uojyBe/ipa. 

16lh p.) Ilo.maca, half an hour, nojiyqaca. Tlo.'ic.ior.a, half a word, nojiyc/JOBa. 

nojUHa, half a day, uo.iyAita. nojimnnyxbi, half a minute, uojiyainnyxbi 

noa*ynxa,half a poundjuo^ytynxa. flo^Bcpcxw, half a werst, no^yBepcxu. 



72- RUSSIAN GRAMMAR. 

We must remark that the numeral no.n> is joined to substantives in the 
genitive singular, to indicate a half, with the exception of noAdem and 
nojiHoub, which signify the middle of the day or of the night, midday or 
midnight All these nouns are declined by joining nojiy to the other 
eases of the simple substantive. We have still to add that nojideub takes 
in the prepositional with no the inflexion u (instead of n>) ; thus we say: 
no no-jyAHH, after noon. Such nouns as have nojiy in the nominative 
singular, as no.ayocTpoB'B, a peninsula; no^yMBcaut, a crescent, are de- 
clined like simple substantives. 

In the compound cardinal numerals, such as: ABa/juan. ABa, twenty 
two; Tpii/juaTL nan., thirty five; cto uiecTB, a hundred and six, each 
number is declined separately; G. ABaAiiaTii AByxi>, TpnAiiaTH naTH, da 
mecTii, etc. Buch when they form ordinal numerals, such as: ABa/uiaTb 
nepBBift, twenty first; cto BTopoft, hundred and .second, the ordinal 
number only is declined, and the cardinal numerals remain indeclinable; 
G. .paAnaTb nepBaro, cto Bioparo. The same is the case with nddecnmb, 
in the compound numbers; e. g. nepBLiii-Ha^ecaTb, eleventh; BTopoft- 
naAecaTB, twelfth, where the first part, nepebiii, emopoii, is alone declined. 

The other numerals follow the declension of the nouns or adjectives 
to which by their termination they belong. Thus copoKi., forty; MH.uioirfc, 
million; AecaTOKT>, ten, follow the first declension of substantives (§30, 
gen. copoKa, Mii^ioHa, AecarKa); cto, a hundred, and AeBaHocTO, ninety, 
follow the second; while AroawHa, a dozen; cothh, a hundred; TBicaia, 
a thousand (i7istr. sing. TBicaiero and TLicaqtio) are declined according 
to the third. On this subject we must observe that the numerals copoKz, 
cmo and deeaHocmo only follow the declension of the substantives when 
they are used as nouns to express forties, hundreds and nineties, and 
then copoKt and cmo have also a plural (copoiai, copokobt. ; cTa, coti., 
etc.) ; but when they are joined to a substantive, or to another nume- 
ral, the take in the dative and instrumental cases singular the inflection 
of the genitive (copona, CTa, AeeanocTa), and sometimes even in the 
prepositional, especially with another numeral. 

The ordinal numerals, which are all adjectives, terminating in uii, or 
oil (neut. oe, fern, an), are declined according to the full termination of 
the adjectives, with the exception of TpeTiii (n. TpeTLe, f. TpeTta), third, 
which is decline^ according to the mixed termination (§ 40). 

The numerals dea, 66a, mpu, nemupe , dede, mpoe , nemeepo , have 
the accusative like the nominative, when they are with the names of 
inanimate and abstract objects, and like the genitive, when with the na- 
mes of animate beings. But all the rest: nmm, wecmb, cemb, dedd^amb, 
etc. have always the accusative like the nominative; the same is the 
case with the numbers dea, mpu, nemupe, when joined to tens, hun- 
dreds or thousands; as ABaAuaTt ABa, twenty two; cto Tpn, a hundred 
and three, etc, even when referring to animate objects; e. g. cofjpaTb 
d6ddu,amb dea Bouna (and not deddi^amb deyxz bohhob'b), to unite twenty 
two warriors. 



Lexicology. — the numerals. 73 

43. — The cardinal numerals, in Russian, when joined with Spec j a ' ruIes 

y *i ■ ot the 

substantives follow various rules unlike those of any other numerals, 
language. These rules are as follows : 

1. Odma agrees with its substantive in gender, number and case, and * 
in the compound numerals, such as, d6ddu,amb odum, cmo odum , the 
substantive is always put in the singular. 

2. The numerals dea, 66a, mpu , Hemupe (and their compounds as 
ABaAuaTb ABa, cto ie™pe, etc.) noAmopd, noAmpemA, and others of the 
same kind, when employed in the nominative or accusative, require the 
noun to which they belong, to be put in the genitive singular, observing 
that ABa, 66a, no.iTopa, no.iTpeTfca, agree in gender with the noun. If 
there is an adjective, it takes the gender of the substantive and is put 
in the nominative plural. — With all the other numerals, from nnmb, 
as also with deoe, mpoe, uemeepo, nnmepo, etc., the substantive is put 
in the genitive plural, and if there be an adjective, it agrees with the 
noun or with the numeral, according to the sense of the phrase. Thus' 
we say: nepeue Asa 6oAbwie CTO.ia, the two first large tables; and ecu 
iihti> 6oAbiuux5 cto.i6bt,, these five large tables. 

This genitive singular, which occurs with the numerals dea, mpu, hc- 
mbipe, is simply the Slavonic dual, which was used with dea and 66a, 
and which has also been retained in deibcmu Qsl. denctnni). The nume- 
rals mpu and uenukpe were simple adjectives, agreeing with their sub- 
stantive, while nnmb and the numerals following were considered as 
collective nouns, always requiring the genitive plural after them. 

A peculiarity of the Russian language must still be mentioned : it re- 
quires the adjective which accompanies the nouns formed of the nume- 
ral no as (as no.iiaca, no.iroAa), as also the numerals noAmopd, jioa- 
mpenwA, to be placed in the nominative plural: e. g. nepeue no^iaca, 
the first half hour. But in the other cases the adjective agrees with the 
substantive; e. g. bt> npoAO.iJKeme nepeaeo no.iyqaca , in the space of 
the first half hour. 

3. With the numerals in the oblique cases, the substantive is always 
put in the plural, a) When the numerals have a gender, as: nnmdKo, 
dfbo/cuHa, nmema, muaaioho, the noun is always put in the genitive, 
and the same rule applies equally to edpoh'z and cmo, when used in the 
plural. b~) With the other numerals, such as; dea, 66a, mpu, nemupe, 
nnmb, copoKo, deennocmo, cmo, etc., the noun agrees with the numeral 
in case. We remark further that in words compounded of two numerals 
the case of the substantive is determined by the later numeral. Thus 
we say: ct> Tpeaw CTaMii eounoez , with three hundred warriors, and 
co CTa TpeMa eoiiHamu, with a hundred and three warriors; bt> copoKi 
eepcmdxo, at forty wersts, and copoKt copoKOBl u,epKeeii, one thousand 
sex hundred churches (forty forties). 

4. With the preposition no, indicating the distribution of an equal 
quantity, the numerals d6a, mpu, uembipe, deoe, mpoe, nemeepo, retain 



74 



RUSSIAN GRAMMAR 



the inflection of the nominative, and then the noun is put in the genitive 
singular, but the other numerals are put in the dative (cdpons, cmo 
and deeimocmo then take their regular inflection y), and the noun is put 
in the genitive plural Thus we say : no ABa py6jin, no narii py6jieii, 
no copoKy py6Aeii, to each two, five, forty roobles. 

The numerals nojiniopd, nojimpenibA, etc. take also with the preposi- 
tion no the inflection y of the dative, and the noun in the genitive sin- 
gular: in all other cases the noun and the numeral agree; e. g. nono^y- 
Topy pyfax, to each a rooble and a half. 

EXERCISES ON THE NUMERALS. 

Man has one tongue, one nose, two eyes, 

y {gen.) ^ie.iOBiK'b (ecnib) oauht. r3uki>, oAiiirb hoct>, ABa rja3T>, 

two ears , two cheeks, two arms, two legs, ten fingers at the 
ABa yxo, ABa meKa, ABa pyna, ABa Hora, AecaTb na.ien.'b na Qprep.) 

hands and ten toes at the feet, thirty two teeth, and seven vertebrae. 
pyKa h Aecait mueirb na Hora, TpiJAiiaib ABa sy6T>, a ceMb nosBonoK'b. 

Leap year has four seasons, 12 months, 52 weeks 

Bt> (prep.') biicokochbih roAt {ecnub) ^eTt'ipe BpeMa ; 12 M'Bcarrb, 52 neA^a 

and two days, or 366 days, or 8784 hours, or 527,040 minutes, 
u ABa Aeiib »i, imii 366 AeHb, iuii 8784 ^act, iwi 527,040 MHHyia. 

The book has a hundred leaves less one. The two brothers and 
B-l (prep.) KHiira (ecmu) cto Micn> 6e3T> {gen.) oAuiit. 06a dpari. ii 

the two sisters. An hour and a half, and a minute and a half. Two 
66a cecrpa. IXo*iTopa nacL, ii nciTopa MimyTa. /^Ba 

roobles and a half, and three kopecs and a half. The 
pyd,n> m ci> (instr.) nojioBiina ii ipn KonifiKa cl no-iOBi'ma. Bt (prep.) 

berkovetz has 10 poods; the pood 40 pounds; the pound 32 loths; 
6epKOBeni» (ectm) 10 iivat> ; bl nyAt 40 svhtl ; bt, syro 32 aotl; 

the loth 3 zolotniks ; the pound has 96 zolotniks. 

Bl> AOlTh 3 SOJOTHUK'L ; BT> *yHTT» 96 30.A0THHK'b. 

Two beaver- hats, three silk- handkerchiefs, four pen- 
/I,Ba nyxoBbifi m.wna, Tpn uie'JKOBLifi n./iaToio., neTbipe nepo- 

knives, five cups of porcelain, and six magnificent pictures. 

HiiHHbiu ho/kt>, nflib ^auiKa o>ap*6poBbiii, iimecTbnpeKpacHbiiii;apTima. 

These two black crows; these three white feathers; my four 
Chi Asa qepiibiii Boponi, ; tb Tpn 6iAuii nepo ; Moii 'leibipe 

new books; these five petulant children. The two poor orphan boys, 
HOBbiii KHiira; 3th hatl pi3BLiii ahth. 06a 6'bahuh ciipora 



Lexicology. — the numerals. 75 

and the two unhappy orphan girls. Two servants, three workmen, 
n 66a HeciacTHbin cnpoTa. /iBoe ciyra, Tpoe MacTepoBoii, 

four children, six soldiers, two watches, three pairs of spectacles, five 
yeTBepo ahth, niecTepo co.iAaTi., abou iacbi m, Tpou o^kii m, naTepbi 

pairs of scissors. The first hour and a half. The first forty 

HOtfCHHlIBI f. IlepBLlU HO.lTOpa HaCL. IlepBBlH COpOKT> 

days; the second hundred crowns, and the last thousand florins. 
AeHb ; BTopoft cto e*LiMOKT>, ii noc.iBAnifi Tbicaia ryjibw&wb. 

I have bought an ox and a horse, a table and a mirror. 
ii Kynii.iT, oauhi. 6biki> h 0411111. .lonia/iB f, 041'mi. ctojt. ii 0Ana"b 3epKajo. 

Twenty one roobles, fifty one kopecks. The thousand one nights. 
/jBa^naTB 04iiHi»py6.ib»i,naTb4ecaT'L0j,iiin>K0n'BiiKa. Tbicaia n OAi'mi. iioibf. 

A young man of thirty one years less twenty one days. 
Mo.io/ioii iciOBiivb TpiiAijaTb oauut. toat> 6e3i>(gcn.) ABaAnaTb OAuuLAeHbm. 

Do not judge of a man by a single fault and by a single 
He cyAii (prep.) He.iOBBKT, no (dat) OAuirb npocTynoK'b 11 no oahht. 

error. An officer with twenty one soldiers. Peter the First and Ca- 
ounidKa. O^niiep-b ct>(ms//\) ABaAnaTb oaiiht. C0JAarb.neTpT>HepBbiii 11 Ena- 

tliarine the Second reigned in the eighteenth century. The Sweeds 
Tepiina BTopofl napcTBOBa^a bt> CF' c / , BOCeMH ^ L l aT£,1 " B ' BK ' L - IHseA'b 

revere Charles XII, and the French have erected a monument to 
yBa)KaK)T , B Kapjt XII, a <J>paHuy3b nociaBn^n naMnTiniKi. 

Henry IV. The article was written on the 15tk of the month of January, 
reiipuxi, IV. C'raTLji 6bi.ia micana (gen.) 15 m-ec/iut, aiiBapb m 

in the year 1823, and the event relates to the VI century, and 
iroAi> 1823, n npoucniecTBie oTiiociiTca KT>(dat.')Yl buri., a 

particulary to the year 573. 
lJMeiino kt> (dat.)YOA'b 573. 

A cupboard with a dozen of plates of porcelain , or with 
IIlKairL Cb (instr.) Aib/Kima Tape.ina 4>ap<i>6poBbiii, ii.iii ct> 

twelve plates of porcelain. A drosky drawn by a 

AB-BnaAuaTb Tape.iKa *ap*6poBbiii. /[.poiKKn f-, 3aupaa;eHHMii (instri) 

pair of bay horses, or by two bay horses; and a carriage 
napa Boponoii .loniaAb/, imi'i ABa Boponoii .lomaAb ; 11 Kapeia3a- 

drawn by six sorrel horses , or by a team of six sorrel horses. 

npaJKeiiiibiti (instr.') uiecrb pb'uKiii .lomaAB, ii.ui mecTepica pb'iiKiil .lomaAb. 

The town is situated a thousand wersts from here, the village a hundred 
TopoAT. .5ewuTiBT>(prepO Ti »icaia Bepcra OTcro^a, ce.16 bo cto 



7G RUSSIAN GRAMMAR. 

wersts, and the hamlet forty 'wersts. At Moscow there were 1600 
BepcTa, a AepeBiia b-l copoKi, BepcTa. Bt Qprep.) Mockb& dbuo 1600 

churches or forty forties of churches. I am satisfied with 
iiepnoBb /J ilii'i copoKT> copoKt uepnoBb. ft AOBOJibCTBywcb (instr.) 

eighty roobles Cor with two forties of roobles) a month, 

BoceMMecflTt pyd.ib m (hjh ABa copoKi. py6^b) bt> (ace J MBcanTb, 

i. e. with 960 roobles a year. He will not live till forty 
to edb 960 py6^b bt> (ace.) roAi.. Out, ne AO/KHBerb ao (gen.) copoKi, 

years; and she died at forty three. She is satisfied 

a%to ; 11 oHa ynep^ia (gen.) c6poKT> Tpn .ibto. Ona (ecmb) AOBOJbHbift 

with forty kopecs, and she admired a hundred pictures. He can- 
(instr.^ copoK-b KoniiiKa, u OHa yAHBi'uacb (dat.) cto KapTUHa. Oht> ne mo- 

not live on less than a hundred thousand roobles a year. A town 
/Kerb npojKitib Meme (gen.) cto Tb'icaia pyd.ib m bt. (ace.) roAT>. FopoA'b 

with two towers; a desk with six drawers; a house with 
c r b (instr.) ABa dauiHH ; komoa'b ct> uiecTb auuiK-b ; aomt, ct> 

forty windows ; a fortress with a hundred cannons ; a church with five 
c6poKT> 0K116 ; KpinocTb / co cto nyniKa; uepKOBb/oQw^pOnaTb 

cupolas; a house of three stories; a village with four 
rviaBa ; a-mt> Qprep.) r r\m apyci>; AepeBHa ct> (instr.') yeTbipe 

wind- mills. I love equally the two sons and the two daughters. 

BbTpaiibiii Me.ibiuiua. ft ak>6aio paBHo dda cbmi 11 66a Aoib/i 

He has four children, and she has left five orphans. My brother 
Oht> iiMieT-b ieTBepo ahth, a ona ocTaBiua uaTepo cnpoTa. Mofi dparb 

has not been able to manage these two restive horses. He 
ne Mori, c.iaAHTb ct> (instr.) 3tumh ABa ynpaMwft .soniaAb /. Oirb 

has lived long with his five cousins german. To this 

;KiL/n> aoato a> [instr.) cboumh naTb dparb ABoibpoARbiil. Kt> (dat.) 3TOMy 

million of old Prussian crowns must be added a thousand 
MH.Mi6H'b cTapbiil npyccKiii e<t>iiMOKT> iiaAodno iipudaBirrb Tb'ica i ia 

of these new roobles. 
TbXT> HOBbiii pydJb m. 

To each a hundred roobles and forty kopecs. So- 

KaaiAbiii no (dat.) cto pyd.'ib m n no (dat.) copoK'b KOiiiiiKa. Bb'(prep.) h-b- 

me months have thirty days and others 

KOTopbiil Micflivb {ecmb) no (dat.) TpiunaTb Aeiib /«, a Bb Apyrott 

thirty one days. In each coachhouse there were two 

110 TpuAuaTb oAiiHb Aeiib. Bt> (j)rep.) ninuim capail db'1.10 no(7io?n.) am 



Lexicology. — the pronoin. 77 

carriages, and in each carriage three men, and four 

napeia, a bt> KaJKABiii KapeTa no (jiom.~) Tpu MyHxiiina 11 no leTbipc 

women. To each a hundred and ninety roobles and forty 

/Kenmnna. KaacAHii no (dat.) cto noAeBaHocTO py6.ib m 11 no copoin> 

five kopecks. We have eacli twenty seven points, 

no nflTB KoniiiKa. Y Haci, (ecnib) no (dati) ABaAnaTb no ceMB oikh m* 

Every part of the work is sold at the rate of a rooble and a half 
KaacAbifi nacTB f coHimeme npoAaeTca no (dat .) noAiopa py6.*b m 

of silver. 

(instr.) cepe6po. 

By the morning one must not judge of midday. During the first 
Ilo (jdaQ yTpo He aoatkuo cy4UTb o (prep.~)n6AAenb m. Bt> Qacc.') nepBBifi 

half day he did not know what to do* At four o 1 clock in the 
noAAHa oht> He 3iia.n> tto A^aTb. BT>(#cc.)aeTb'ipe laci, uo(prep.~) 

morning, or at five o 1 clock in the afternoon. That happened during 
no.moab f iLiii bt> naTb Maci. no no.iAenb m. 3to c^ynuocB Bi>Qacc.~) 

the latter half of the year 1844. The first half hour passed 
nociBAniil no.iroAa toat* 1844. nepBbiii no-iiaca npoiu.iii 

quietly. During the space of the first half hour. I 

cnoKoniio. Bi> (ace.) npoAO.iJKeme nepBbin noAnaca. 3a mhoh) 

had a hundred and fifty thousand roobles annual revenue. 
6bLio no.rropacTa Tbicaaa py6.ib m toaoboh aoxoa'b. 



THE PKONOUff. 

44. — The pronouns (MUCTOHMema) in Russian are divid- of t i?e pronouns. 
ed into seven kinds. 

1. The personal pronouns (ahhh&ih) are, in the first per- 
son: a, /; plur. mm, we; in the second tbi, thou\ plur. bbi, 
you; and in the third person oht> ; he [fern. OHa, she, neut 
oho ; it); plur. omi ? they {Jem. ohi> ? they?) There is in Russian 
another personal pronoun, which is applied to all the three 
persons and both numbers, and which is used when the ac- 
tion of the object returns on the agent: e. g. a ce6A 3Haio, J 
know myself; tbi ceo A GepeaceniB, thou takest care of thy- 
self; mbi ceo A otfMiJHBiBaeM'B, we deceive ourselves. This is 
called the reflected (B03Bpai\Hoe) personal pronoun. 



78 



RUSSIAN GRAMMAR. 



When the reflected pronoun is used at the end of the verbs, it is 
contracted into cm or c&; e. g. aomt> crponTca, the house is being built, 
a moioci,, i" wash myself (instead of CTponTt ce6A, mow ce6A). 

2. The possessive pronouns (jipHTajKaTejiBHBM) are, in the 
first person; moh, my or mine; nauix, our or ours; in the 
second person: tbom, thy or thine; BanrB, your or yours; and 
for all the three persons: the reflected cboh, my, thy, his, 
our^ your, their. 

In Russian there is no possessive pronoun for the third person; its 
place being supplied by the genitive of the personal pronoun: ero, of 
him or his; ea, of her or her; iixt>, of them or their; e. g. a dturc. y 
ezo dpaTa, / have been to his brother (to the brother of him) ; a 3mm 
eA Myaca, / know her husband (the husband of her) , a 3to jiMio ami 
ux'd A'BTefl, 1 do that for their children (for the children of them). 

3. The demonstrative pronouns (yKa3aTe^HBia) are: cen, 
3T0TI., OHtiiij this;TOTi> y that; TaKon, TaKOBOH, to^hkih, 
such or such an one. 

4. The relative pronouns CoTHOCHTejiBHLia) are t kto, who 
or he who; ^to, which or that which; KOTopBift, koh, who; 
KaKon, KaKOBoft, KOjiHKiii, who ox he who; i ien, whose; ckojib- 
ko, how much or so much. 

5. The interrogative pronouns (BonpocHTCiBHbia) are the 
same as the relative. 

6. The determinative (onpeAB\/iHTe./iBHBia) or ampliative 
(AonojiHiiTejiBHLm) pronouns are: caarB, caMBiii, self; BecB, 
all; KaHCfltiii, Bcarcm, each. To this class belong also the nu- 
merals oauht., a single one or one only, and 66a, both. 

The pronouns caMZ and cdMbiil have the same meaning, but the for- 
mer is used with the personal pronouns and with the names of animate 
objects, the latter with the demonstrative pronouns and the names of 
inanimate and abstract objects: e. g. a caM-L, myself; oul caMi., him- 
self; caMoro ceda, one's self; OTen> caMt, the father himself; totl ca- 
mbih, ceft caMbiii, the very same; caMaa CMepTt, death itself.. The pro- 
noun caMHH before aqualifiyng adjective expresses the superlative (§ 38. 3). 

7. The indefinite pronouns (HeonpeABvieHHBia) are: hbkto, 
somebody; hbhto, something; hhkto, nobody; hhhto, noth- 
ing; kto aMo, kto HH6yAB ; kto-to, kto hh ecTB, whoever* 
ito avl6o , tto Hn6yAB , hto-to , hto hh ecTB , whatever; 

KaKOH-TO, 



Lexicology. — the pronoun. 79 

miKOToptiH, hh oahh'L; not any, none y Apyroft, inioii, upoiift, 
other ; ct(mj>ko, as much, as far; nicKO^LKO, some; MHoro, 
much; Mciio, little; ApyrL /jpyra, each other; tott. h Apy- 
roit, the one and the other ; bcjiicb, each. 

45. — The pronouns are either substantive or adjective 
1) The substantive pronouns are: /?, mm, om y ce6&, umo, nmo, 
uibKmo, uwnmo, miumo, ummd, of which one only C om ) nas 
all the three genders; ceoA, umo, nmo are the same in both 
numbers, and ce6k has no nominative. 2) All the other pro- 
nouns are adjective 7 and like the adjectives they have three 
genders, two numbers and seven cases, and agree with the 
substantive to which they belong. 

46. — The substantive, pronouns are declined in a peculiar Declension of 

•n t i mi <> .i i, .. the pronouns. 

manner as will be seen later. Those of the adjective pronouns 
which end like the adjectives , in uU and iii (or 6u) fern, an, 
neut. oe, such as : uorndpuu, 6mm, cdMbiu, motcdbiu, maKoeoU, 
ecfuriii, are declined according to the 1st and 2d paradigms 
of adjectives (§ 41); while such as have a termination differ- 
ing from that of the adjectives, such as: mou, uauid, cajsiz, ceu, 
•also mauoii and uauou, are declined in a particular way. 

The following observations on the declension of pronouns are necessary. 

1. The oblique cases of the pronoun of the third person C3d para- 
digm) take the euphonic letter h, when they are preceded by a prepo- 
sition; e. g. y nero, to him; kt> neary, towards him; ct> Heio, with her; 
o iie'Mi., of him; 6e3T» hiixt>, without them, etc. But this addition does not 
take place when the genitive ezo, e/i, uxo, serves as a possessive pronoun; 
e. g. bt> ezo aom'B, in his house; kt> uxz> nojB3 , B, to their advantage. — The 
genitive singular feminine of this pronoun sometimes takes the inflection 
of the accusative; e. g. n ee He bijajUt. (instead of en), I have not seen 
her; y nee (instead of y Hen), to her, and this inflection is sometimes 
contracted: y Heu. 

2. According to the 5th and 6th paradigms (kto and ito) are declin- 
ed the pronouns compounded from nmo and umo ; e. g. hdkto, nobody; 
hiiito, nothing; niKTO, kto midyftb, kto au6o, kto-to, somebody; h"Bhto, 
hto mi6) r Ah r Tfo .11160, ito-to ; something; remarking that, if there be 
a preposition with hukmo and nmmd, it is placed between the particle 
hu and the pronoun; e. g. hh y Koro, to nobody; hh kt> leaiy, to noth- 
ing: hh 3a hto, for nothing; hh ck kwl, with nobody; and also ob- 
serving that the parts mi6fdb, au6o and mo are invariable. 

3. According to the 7th paradigm (moii) are declined the pronouns 
tboh, thy; cboh, his, and koh, who, observing that this last is not used in 



so 



RUSSIAN GRAMMAR. 



c*j w^: swoiavuvj 




I 

I 
O 

X 

H 

m 

H 

I 

I 
I 

g 

3 



The fcmic accent in the 
on the terminations of the 



declension of the pronouns is, with some rare exceptions 
cases, as is seen in the accompanying paradigms. 



placed 



Lexicology. — the pronoun. 81 

the nominative and accusative singular of any of the genders, and that 
it has the tonic accent in all the cases on the first syllable (Koero, koh, 
kohxi, etc.). Its compound h^km, some, is declined in the same manner 
in the singular; but in the plural it takes the inflections of the adjecti- 
ves: N. HiKie, f. H^Kia; G. h-ekhxi., D. h-bkhmt., etc. 

4» According to the 8th paradigm (iiann.) is declined the pronoun 
Bairn;, your. 

5. According to the 16th paradigm (KaKofi) are declined TaKofi, such; 
ir&Kaicifi, some, and 3TaKi8, such an one. 

6. The other pronouns which have the adjective termination mil and 
iU or 6u (fem. an, neut oe), such as: ohlih, caMbiii, Bcairin, Apyroft, 
iihoS, KaKOBon, TaKOBon, are declined according to the 1st and 2d pa- 
radigms of the adjectives (§ 41). The pronouns KaKOBon and TaKOBoii 
have also the apocopated termination: Kaxoez and mauoez. In the pro- 
noun Apyn> Apyra, each other, which is used for the three genders and 
both numbers, the first part remains indeclinable, while the second is 
declined like a substantive; G. Apyn. APyra, D. Apyn> Apyry, A. Apyn. 
Apyra, /. Apyrt ApyroMi>, P. Apyrc. o Apyr-E. The pronouns caMT>-Apyn>, 
two together; caM^-TpeTeii, three together, etc., are indeclinable and are 
used for all the three persons, the three genders and both numbers. 

7. The pronoun gcrkz is used instead of ecHKiii v.ejioefbm , but only 
in the masculine singular. The pronouns cKOAbKo, cmoAbKO, whcKOAbKo, 
have in the singular, besides this termination which serves both for the 
nominative and accusative, only the dative in y with the preposition no 
(no CKOJiLKy, etc.); and in the plural they have only the genitive, the 
dative, the instrumental and the prepositional cases (cko^bkhx'l, ckojb- 

KHMt, CKO-flbKriMH, etc.). 

8. OduHo (parad. 15) is both a numerative and a determinative pronoun. 
The same is the case with the Slavonic word eatim (n. eAi'mo, f. eAuna), 
which is used in an elevated style, and which is declined in the singu- 
lar like an adjective of the full termination: G. eAHHaro, eAiinofi; D. eAii- 
HOMy, etc.; but in the plural it takes the apocopated form: eAHHbi, eAri- 

HbIXT>, eAHHMM'L. 

EXERCISES ON THE PRONOUNS. 
I love thee, and thou offendest me. We esteem him, as to her, Personal 
fl aio6aiq tbi, a Tbi o6n?Kaemb a. ft yBawaearb ohb, a ont pronouns 

we love her sincerely. I have much money, and thou 

a jMuMTb AyuieBiio. Y (gen.~) a {ecntb) MHoro AeHbrn, a y {gen?) tm 

hast not a penny. Protect him, and depend upon 

Hfcrb hii Cgen.^) KoniiiKa. 3acTymicb 3a (acc.~) OHb, d noHaAEiica Ha {ace.) 

her. Take a seat with me, and come with him. Tell her, 

ohi.. IIocuau cb (instr.~) a, h npiixoAH ct» Qnstr.~) oht>. CKaaui oht>, 

to come to me. Without him, without her and without you. 

MTo6b oht> npunMa ko (dat.~) a. Ee3i» {gen.) oht., 6e3T> oht> h 6e3i> tw, 

He iff Russian Grammar, 7 



82 



RUSSIAN GRAMMAR. 



life is wearisome to me. I do not see them, and I will do every thing 
mmnh Qecmb) CKJHEhm a. H He bhjkv oht>, a a warn bcS 

for them. We esteem you, and you have forgotten us. 

/uia (gen.) oht>. H vBaacaeMT. tbi, a tbi 3a6BMH a. 

Depend on me; I will speak of thee. It is agreeable tome 

Evab yBBpeH'B bo (prep.) a : a noroBopw o (prep.) tbi. (ecmb) IIpiaTHo a 

to be with her. I do not trust myself, and thou art contented. 
6bitb ct> (instr.) oht>. H He AOBfcpaw ceoa, a tbi (ecu) aobojbhbih 

with thyself. We take care of ourselves, and they do themselves harm. 
(instr J ce6a. H depeaceMT. ce6a, a ohb ce6a BpeAarB. 

Possessive My brother, thy sister and his son have studied together. I try 

pronouns. jyj ofl (5p aT1>j TBO g ceCT pa H OHl> CBIHT> yiKMHCB BMBCTfc. H CTapaWCB 

to be agreeable to your master and to our inspector. My house 
yro^HTB Bairn. ywre-iB m h HaniB CMOTpiiTcaB. Mofl &owb 

is more beautiful than thine, and thy dog is less than 
(ecmb) KpacHBBifl (gen.) tboh, a tboh co6aKa (ecmb) Ma-iBifi (gen.) 

mine. I live without them, and I can dispense with their help. 

moil H HMBy 6e3i> (gen.) out., h Mory o6ohthcb 6e3T> (gen.) oht. homoihb f. 

Do not boast of thy labours, and think of thy years. 
He xBa^ncB (instr.) cboh TpyAT>, a no/tyMaii o (prep.) cboh ji-bto 

Draw near my table, and give some money to thy sister. 
II040H4H kt> (dat.) moh cto^t>, h no4apii (gen.) 4em>rH f tboh» ceCTpa. 

We talk about our affairs, and you occupy yourself with your 

fl roBopiiMi, (prep.) cboh a-mo, a tbi 3aHiiMaeTecB (instr?) cboh 

lesson. Study is bitter, but its fruits are sweet. Thy 
ypoK-B. YieHie (ecmb) ropBKiii, ho oht> n^oA-B (cymb) caaAKifi. Tboh 

gardens are superb; I admire their beauties. 
caAi> (cymb) npeKpacHBifl ; a VAHB-flarocB oht> (dat.) KpacoTa. 

Demonstrative Dost thou see this dog and this cat, these men and those 

pronouns. BlIAHHIB AK 3TOTB C06aKa H 3TOTT. KOTT., 3TOTT. JK)AH Wl H TOTl 

trees? In these countries there is no gold; and in those 
AepeBo ? Bt. (prep.) 3tott> 3eM.ia h-btb (gen.) 36.10TO, h bt> (prep.) tott. 

no silver. I have heard that from your brother, but 

iibtt. (gen.) cepedpo. H aiBmia.n> stott, ott> (gen.) Baim, 6parB, ho 

I do not believe it. I praise your project; it is long since 
a He Btpio (dat) 3tott> . H xBa^ib Baun> HaMBpeHie ; AaBHo 

I had foreseen it. Have you lived long in this 

a npeABHWB ohbih. 5KnBeuiB au tbi asbho b-b (prep.) ceft 



Lexicology. — the pronoun. 83 

town? I admire this garden, but that is more beautiful. 
ropoAt ? fl vahb.ihiocb (daf) stott, ca.it, a tott. (ecmb) xopoinift. 

These pens are blunt; these houses are of stone; these streets 
3tott> nepo (cymb) Tynofi; cefi aomt> KaMeHHBift; tott. y^uua 

are narrow. Such eyes are piercing; such actions 

• y3Kift. TaKou tami* (cymb) npoHnii.aTe.iBHBiH ; Tanoft A^o 

do not do honour. Such are men. 

He npnHocflT'L (gen.) iecTB. TaKOBOHCc^mb) awau m. 

The relative pronouns agree in gender and number with the substan- Relative pro- 
tive to which they belong, and take the case required by the following 
verb, with the exception of the pronoun ueii, which agrees in gender, 
number and case with the accompanying substantive. 

The man whom you see, is very intelligent. The book 

tJe-aOBTiKt, KOTOphW TBI BHAHTe, (eCHlb) OieHB yMHBlfl. KHnra, 

which you read is very agreeable. I know the affair 

KOTopfcift TBI HH-raeTe, {ecmb) oneHB npiaTHBift. fl 3Haro a^ao, 

of which you speak. The water with which I wash myself, is 

o (prep.) KOTopBifl TBI roBopnre. BoAa, KOTopBift a mofocb, (ecmb) 

very cold. Beware of him who flatters thee. He 

oieHB XOJ0411BIH. Bepen'iCB (gen.} tott>, kto jibctht-b {dat.) tbi. Tott>, 

who has much business, does not think of pleasures. 

y {gen.) kto {ecmb) MHoro {gen.) a^ao, He AyMaerB {prep.) 3a6aBa. 

Learn that which you are ignorant of. Here is cloth like that 

YqHTecB {dat.) TOTi>,{gen.) tto tbi He 3iiaeTe. Botb (nom.) cyKHo TaKofi, 

of which I bought some. Such was the chief, such were the soldiers. 
KaKoii a Kyniu-B. KanoBon 6but> BoeHana.iBHHK'B, TaKOBon u b6hht>. 

That is the friend, in whose hands is my destiny. Listen to 

BoTT.(wom.)Apyn>, bt> {prep.) leftpyKa {ecmb)uo\i cyABda. C/iynianca {gen.) 

those in whose house thou hast lived There is a book (of those) 
tott>, bt, {prep.) neii aomt. tbi muAT>. Bott> KHnra {u3z gen. maKoii), 

such as there are few of, and an opportunity like those are rare. 
(gen.) Kanofi {ecmb) Ma.10, h caynafi KaKOBoft {cymb) piAKift. 

What o'clock is it, and at what o'clock wilt thou come ? With interrogative 
KoTopBift 4acB (ecmb), h bt> (prep.) kotopbih lacB npiuAeuiB ? Ka- pronouns. 

what books dost thou occupy thyself, and what people live here? Under 
koh KHnra 3aHHMaemBca, 11 KaKon awak m JKHByTT> 3A"£cb ? Hoat> 

what chief dost thou serve, and what language dost thou learn? 

(ms£)KOTop&iH Haia^BHHKT> tbi aiyHcnuiB, u{dat.) KaKon hsbik-b tbi ynnmBca ? 



84 



RUSSIAN GKAMMAK, 



Whose are these houses? By whose permission hast thou gone out? 
Uea (cymb) 3tott> aom'l ? ft& (gen?) ieft no3Bo.ieme th wamexb co ABopa ? 

I have not seen whose hat has been thrown to the ground. I do not know 
>1 ne BHAlat, ieft nuana dpoc&au Ha (ace J no.n>. H He 3Haro, 

with whose children she is walking. About what dost thou trouble thyself, 
cb (instr.) ie& ahth oht. ry.iaeT'B. (prep.) ito tbi 3a6oTnniBca, 

and in what way have I deserved thy friendship? On what can one 
a hto a 3aciyaaLrB tboh Apyxtda ? Cb (instr.) ito mojkho 

congratulate thee, and from whom hast thou received this money? How 
no3ApaBHTt Tbi, h ott> Qgen.) kto tbi nojyqH.a'b tott. AeHBrn /"? Ckojb- 

many wersts are there from this town to that? Of how 
so Qgen.) Bepcra (ecmb) ott> (gen.) 3tott> ropoAi Ao (#<?#.) tott> ? H3i> (jjenj 

many volumes is this work composed? How many roobles 

CK6-M.KO tomt> cefl coiuHeme coctohtt, ? no (daf.) cko^bko (gen.) pydjib m 

will fali to you to each of this profit ? 
40CTaHeTCfl tbi H3T> (gen.) tott> npii6buu> /"? 

Deierminative Thou thyself wilt be of my opinion: the sound even of his voice 
pronouns. Tbi ca»TB corjiacimiBca ct> (instr.) a : 3ByKT> caMBifi oht. rdAocb 

is agreeable. I take this appartment of the proprietor 

{ecmb) npiaTHBin. H HaHHMaio ceil KBapTiipa y (gen.) xo3aiiH-B 

himself. Vices themselves find with you an excuse, 

caan.. nopoKi, caMBift Haxo/taTT, y (gen?) tbi H3BHHeme. 

He always speaks of himself. You are discontented with 

Out, Bceryia roBopriTB o (prep.) ce6a caMT>. Tbi (ccme) HeAOBO-flBHBril (instr.) 

yourselves. We have seen her herself. Death itself is not 

ce6a caarB. H biU'B^h oht> caarB. dviepTB / caMBM (ecmb) ne 

frightful. We . all content ourselves with our only 

CTpaiHHBiii. H BecB AOBOJBCTByeMca (instr.) oahhb 

salaries. So think women alone. We two will 

jKMOBaHBe. TaKB AynaiorB jKemmiHa oahht.. H 66a xoti'uvtb 

serve God alone. In each assembly there were 

C/iyaaiTB (dat.) Bon> eAHH'b. Bb (prep.) KajKAbifi codpame 6b'uii 

citizens of both sexes. They are scattered in all the 
rpajKAaHi'iirB 66a uojb. Oht> (cymb) pa3ciam>i no (dat.) BecB 

world. One must accustom one's self to every food. 

cb-bt-b. HaAo6no iipuBBinaTB KB (dat-) BCHKin miina. 



indefinite pro- There is not anybody here ; do not ask help of 

Hi>tt> (gen.) hukto 3A"Bcb ; He npoci'i (gen.) miMouib / y (gen.) 



nouns. 



Lexicology. — the verb. ' 85 

anybody. Thou eatest nothing, and that serves no 

hhkto. Tm He -fiim> (gen.) hhito, h 3tott> He roAUTca kt> [dat.) 

purpose. Learn something, and say that to somebody. I 
HH4T0. Ymcb (dat.) ito Ha6yAb, a CKaatu 3tott> kto HimyAb. H 

will not sell my house for any thing in the world, and you have 
He ripo4aMT> (gen.) cboh /jomt> 3a (ace.) junto, h tm npo- 

sold yours for a mere nothing. Of nothing one can make nothing. 

Aa.iH cboh 3a hhito. H3T. (gen) hhito ne CAijiaeinb {gen.) huhto. 

During the space of some months he has bought every day 
Bi (ace.') Teneme hijckojeko ivrBcaH> ohi> noKyna.n, eJKe^HeBHo 

some hundreds of peasants. 

no (dat.) HicKOJiLKO (gen.) cto Ayma. 

The two sisters speak badly of each other. The Englishmen and 

06a cecTpa roBopaTb Aypno Apyn> o (prep.) Apyn>. AHOHHaHBHt h 

the French detest each other. We are going to take a walk 

<J>paHuy3T> HeHaBHAarb Apyrb /ipyra. H xoahmt> ry^arb 

with one another. These houses are situated one behind 
4pyrb ct. (instr.) Apyrb. Gen 40mt> jiemaT-b oahhi> 3a (instr.) 

the other. The boards are thrown one with another. 

Apyroft. /JocKa (cymb) HadpocaHbi oahht> ct, (instr.) Apyrofi. 

THE VERB. 

47. — The verbs (rjiarojiti) of the Russian language, are Division of 
divided, according to their meaning, into four classes, which 
are called voices (saAorvi), viz : 

1. The active verbs (A'EHCTBiiTe./iBHLie), such as: /ji./iaTb. to 
make; ,ho6hti>, to love; mbitl, to wash; o/vfcBaTt, to clothe- 

2. The pronominal verbs (M^CTOHMeuHwe), formed of active 
verbs by means of the reflected pronoun cm, contracted from 
ceo k. These verbs are: a^) reflected QB03Bip'aTKbie), as: mb'itl- 
ca, to wash one's self; OA^BaTLca, to dress one's self; 
bj reciprocal (B3anMHbie), as : odmrMaTtca, to embrace each 
other; ccopnTLca, to dispute with each other; and c) common 
(oGiiiie), which with the termination of reflected and recipro- 
cal verbs have an active or neuter meaning, as: 6oaTtca, to 
fear; CM^aTtca. to laugh. 

3. The neuter verbs (epeAHie), as; cnaTL, to sleep; ctoatb, 
to stand. To this class also belong the inchoative (HannHa- 



verbs. 



86 



RUSSIAN GRAMMAR. 



Inflections 
of the verb. 



Tenses. 



Aspects. 



Te./iBHBie), as: G-bjtbti, to whiten, become white; coxhvtb, to 
dry, become dry. Among these verbs two are to be distin- 
guished from the rest; viz: the neuter verb 6bitb, to be, and 
the inchoative CTaTB, to become, which help to form and con- 
jugate the other verbs , and which on that account are cal- 
led auxiliaries (BcnoMoraTejiBHBie). 

4. The passive verbs (cTpa^aTe^BHwe), as : 6bitb .mo6h- 
mbimt* , to be loved; 6bitb noHHTaeMBiMx , to be venerated; 
AiAO CAiMHO, the thing is accomplished. 

The reflected voice is often used in the passive sense , especially 
when applied to inanimate objects, e. g. &%ao A^aeTca, the thing is 
being accomplished; aomt> CTpoHTca, the house is being built. 

48. — The principal inflections of the Russian verbs are : 
tense (BpeiviaJ ; aspect (bhat») and mood (HaKJiOHeme) , and 
the secondary inflections are: person C/uuie), number Omcjio) 
and gender (poAx)* 

49. — The tenses of the Russian verbs are only three in 
number: 1 the present (jaacToamee BpeMa); 2) the preterit 
(npome/uuee), and 3) the future (6yAyin.ee), as: a wraio, 
I read; a miT&jn>, / have read; a 6y/iy wriTB, I shall read. 

50. — Though the Russian verbs have only these three ten- 
ses, they have other inflections to indicate duration, accom- 
plishment , reiteration , or other circumstances accompanying 
the action. These shades, or varieties of meaning, to which the 
Russian grammarians have given the name of aspects or degrees, 
are expressed by a change of termination or by means of the 
prepositions. The prepositions, being joined to verbs, form the 
prepositional (npe/uojKHBie) verbs, while such as have no pre- 
position are termed simple (npocTBie) or a-prepositional. This 
division of the verbs has an influence on the number and na- 
ture of their aspects. The following are the aspects of the 
Russian verbs. 

1. The imperfect aspect (HecoBepuieHHBiH bh/ttO, which in- 
dicates that the action is being, has been, or will be perfor- 
med without intimating, whether it is or will be finished; e.g. 
a A'Maio, / make; a A^aii,, / was occupied to make; a 6yAy 
A^JiaTB, I shall make; a npocMaTpHBam, I examine; anpocMa- 
TpHBajTB, / set about examining; a 6yAy npocMaTpHBaTB, I shall 
examine. This aspect is subdivided into definite and indefinite. 



Lexicology. — the verb. 87 

a) The definite (onpeA^eHHtra) imperfect aspect indicates 
that the action is performed at a given moment: e. g. nTHiia 
Mmumz, the bird flies (is flying now)\ 3aeivB omotcumd* the 
hare runs (is running at this moment). 

b) The indefinite (HeonpeA^eHHBiii) imperfect aspect ex- 
presses the action in an indeterminate manner, without re- 
ference to the time when it is performed, and also indicates 
that the acting person is accustomed to perform, or has the 
power of performing the action: e. g. uthiibi Aemdwms, the 
birds fly (have the power of flying); 3aHiiLi 6ibzaiom5, the hares 
run (are accustomed to run). 

The definite and indefinite meaning of the imperfect aspect is not mark- 
ed by any particular inflection , except in the case of verbs which ex- 
press movement or change of place. The other verbs, having properly 
speaking only the indefinite imperfect aspect , take the definite meaning 
without changing their termination; e. g. BacFuiii Tenepb nuemz KBacL, 
Basil is now drinking kwas; Baci'uuii nueniz h KBact h BO/ty, hto nona- 
AeTbca, Basil drinks both kwass and water, whichever happens to be there. 

2. The perfect aspect (coBepmeimtm), which indicates that 
the action has been, or will be entirely finished; e. g. a CAi-iajit, 
I have made) 1 have finished; a cA^aio, I shall make, I shall 
finish making; a npocMOTp-k/TB, I have entirely examined; a 
npocMOTpio, I shall finish examining. This aspect is subdivided 
into aspect of duration and aspect of unity. 

a) The perfect aspect of duration (A^HTe^LHtin) indicates 
that the action has been, or will be performed by many mo- 
vements, and has had or will have any duration; e. g. nTHiiti 
ehiKAeedm eMy r^ia3a, the birds have put out his eyes with 
beak-strokes; a nponow nicmo , / shall sing over this air. 

b) The perfect aspect of unity (oAHOKpaTHtiii) indicates 
that the action has been, or will be performed only once, 
and has lasted only a moment; e.g. a 3JbewyM, I have yauned, 
I have made a yaun; ohb mpouenid erne paax Bame x.ia/iHoe 
cep/we, he will once more touch your insensible heart; nTHiia eu- 
KjmnyAa eaiy oast, the bird has put out to him an eye. 

3. The iterative aspect (MHoroKpaTHBin), which indicates 
that the action has been performed repeatedly, and that it is 
long passed; e. g. bt> mojioama ./riTa a owwdAZ bx flepeBH-E, 
in my youth I often lived in the country. 



88 



RUSSIAN GRAMMAR. 



On the subject of these aspects we have to make the following ob- 
servations. 

1. They are never all found in a single verb , as we shall see later. 
We merely observe in this place that the imperfect , perfect of unity 
and iterative aspects are found in the simple verbs, while the perfect of 
duration is met with in the prepositional and some few simple verbs, 
enumerated further (§ 65. 8). The aspects of a simple verb are gene- 
rally distinguished in the following manner: the definite imperfect aspect 
is found in verbs signifying movement; e. g. (tery, / run (a?n running 
now); H/iy, 1 go Qam going at this moment); the aspect perfect of unity, 
is found in verbs which designate a physical action of men or animals, 
and ends in nynib (preterit HyAZ, future ny) ; e. g. niamyTb, to take a 
step; KanuauyTB, to cough once; the iterative aspect usually ends in bwamb 
or U6anib (preterit MeaAZ or ueaAZ): e. g. a.ijibiBdiA'h, he usually made; 
roBappma./rb , he said at different times. The other simple verbs, which 
have not these distinctive characters, are of the indefinite imperfect as- 
pect. All these properties of the verbs will be examined subsequently 
(§§ 59-65). 

2. The prepositions are particles which are joined to verbs to com- 
municate to them the meaning of the completion of an action: e. g. 
4-BJaTfc, to make, and c/rruaTb, to finish making, to have made; nucaTb, 
to write; and nanncaTb, to finish writing, to have written; and also to 
give them a particular meaning; e. g. x04htb, to go, and bxoahtb, to go in; 
Bocxo4HTb, to go up; Bbixo^uTb, to go out; aoxoahtb, f G g up to, to attain, etc. 

3 The aspects have not all the same number oi tenses; the imperfect 
aspect is used in all the. three tenses; the perfect is employed in the 
preterit and future, while the iterative is met with only in the preterit. 

Moods. 51. — The Russian verbs have only three moods , viz: 

1) the indicative (H3 r LHBHTejiLHoe HaKjiOHeme), e. g. axoacy, 
J walk; mbi rym/iH, we have taken a walk, bbi 6y^eTe yjKH- 
HaTB, you will sup; 2) the imperative (noBeMTejibHoe), e.g. 
xoah, walk; iiOH/jeMTe, let us go; ryjiMTe. take a walk; and 
3) the infinitive (HeoKOHMaTejiLHoe), e. g. xoahtb, to walk; 
ry^iaTL, to take a walk; yjKHHaTB, to sup, — The indicative 
is the only mood which is found in all the tenses and all 
the aspects, the infinitive has inflections for the aspects, but 
has no lenses, as is also the case with the imperative, except 
that it is not used in the iterative aspect. 

The conditional (uyeAtwAOMmeAbiioe) and subjunctive (cocjaraTe^bnoe) 
moods of other languages are expressed in Russian by the preterit of 
indicative with the particle 6ti; e. g. a wceAdjiz (Jbi -Bxarb, / should wish 
or / should have wished to depart, a 6bi ne dy MaAZ, wrodbi bli bto cdtb- 
AaAU, I should not have believed that you would have done that. 



Lexicology. — the verb. 89 

25. - The indicative and imperative of the Russian verbs J2^ s ; nd 
have further: 1) three inflections for the persons, e. g* mh- genders. 
Taw, I read; MHTaemt, thou reddest. MiiTae™, he reads; 2) two 
for the numbers : HiiTaio , / read , and wraeivii, j we read; 
^HTaeuiL, Mow readest, and wraeTe, yow read; wraeTi>, A# 
mzds, and hhtsiioti, they read; wrafi, raid, and wrafiTe, 
r^flrf £Vom?; and 3) in the singular of the preterits, three for 
the genders, e. g. yneHHKx uumdAd, the schoolboy read; ahth 
uumdAO, the child read-, oayacaHKa wmcuia, the maid read. 

The preterit of the Russian verbs is nothing bat the past participle, 
in the apocopated form, joined to the substantive verb, which participle, 
like the attributive adjectives , was used , in the ecclesiastical Slavonic, 
in the apocopated termination , and with the three genders , e. g. a35 
ecMb csmeopuAZ, I have created; UMfbAa ecu, thou hast had (in speak- 
ing to a woman). In Russian auxiliary verb is understood , and we 
say: fl coTBopii.rt, tm HMTi.ia, and on this account the genders have be- 
come an inflection of the preterits. 

There are some verbs which are only used in the third person sin- 
gular , without expressing the person either by a noun or a pronoun, 
and which for that reason are called impersonal (des.uiHHbie). These 
verbs have only the neuter in the preterit; such are: h-bti, there is not 
(pret. He 6huo, fut. He fiyaeTi); pa3CB , £TaeTT> , it begins to dawn ipret. 
paacB'B.io, fut pa3CB-BTe'TT.) ; xoieTca, the mind takes Qpret. xoTBJiocb). 

53. — To complete our examination of all the parts of the Forms derived 

„„,,,. , , , * i from the verb. 

Russian verbs, we will still add the forms which are derived from 
them; these are: 1) the participle (npiiMacTie), 2) the gerund 
QVfieiipHHacTie), and 3) the verbal noun (oToaro^LHoe ham). 
1* The participles, as parts of the verb, have voice, aspect 
and tense; and as adjectives, gender, number and case. As 
regards voice, they are active, neuter or pronominal, and pas- 
sive; they have the same number of aspects as the verbs 
from which they are derived; but they have only two tenses, 
the present and the preterit. 

2. The gerunds are simply verbal adverbs, which are for- 
med from the active and neuter participles and can take the 
different aspects of the present and preterit. 

3. The verbal nouns are abstract nouns which being deri- 
ved from the infinitive, indicate the particular action, expressed 
by the aspect, from which they are formed; e. g. 6'Brame. an 
habitual running; pa36nBanie, a defeat; pa3foiTie. a complete 
defeat (from the infinitives omamb , pa36uednib and pa36umbj. 

He iff Russian Grammar. $ 



90 



RUSSIAN GRAMMAR. 



conjugation. 54. _* j^q changing of the inflections of the verbs in order 
to indicate the moods, tenses, numbers, persons and genders, 
is called conjugation (cnpasKeme) ; and the verbs are divided, 
according to the manner in which they are conjugated, into 
regular (npaBMLHtie) and irregular (HenpaBMbHBie). 1) The 
regular verbs are such as have a pollysyllabic infinitive, en- 
ding in nib preceded by a vowel; e. g. Ai^aTB, to make; ry- 
jiATb, to take a walk; hm£tb, to have; roBopHTB, to speak; 
kojotb, to sting; TanyTB, to draw; TepeTB, to rub. 2) The 
irregular verbs are such as have a monosyllabic infinitive, 
ending either in nib preceded by a consonant , or in ub, mu 
and uifU; e. g. 6htb, to beat; 6paTB, to take; cjibitb, to pass 
for; BecTB, to conduct; rpBi3TB, to gnaw; htth, to go; c£*n>, 
to cut. — The following remarks on the conjugation of verbs 
are important, 

1. Each aspect of a verb, having necessarily an infinitive, is conjugated 
separately, without being mixed up with the other aspects of this verb. 

2. The infinitive in verbs is the same as the nominative in nouns: 
this mood is the direct form, whence all the others, called the oblique, 
are derived. It ends in nib (seldom in Hb, mu, iqu). 

3. The present, which is only found in the imperfect aspect (either 
definite or indefinite), ends, in the first person of the singular, in w oxy 
(very rarely in mz and Mb). 

4. The preterit , which is found in all the aspects , ends in jm and 
sometimes in 5 (neut. jio, fern. Jia; plur. mi). 

5. The future has no particular inflection; in the imperfect aspect 
(either definite or indefinite) it is formed by the help of the auxiliary 
verbs 6ydy or cmdny, joined to the infinitive; and in the perfect aspect 
(either of duration or of unity) this tense takes the form of the present. 

6. The imperative , which is found in all the aspects, excepting the 
iterative aspect, ends, in the second person singular, in u with the ac- 
cent, or, without accent, in u after two or three consonants, in 6 after 
one consonant and in w after a vowel. 

Regular 55. — The regular verbs are divided into three conjuga- 
tions^ according to the ending of the infinitive and the forma- 
tion of the first person of the present. 

1. The first conjugation embraces the verbs ending in the 
infinitive in nib with one of the vowels 0, /z or 7b, and of 
which the Frst person singular of the present is in w with a 
vowel. This conjugation is subdivided into four branches, viz: 



verbs. 



Lexicology. — the verb. 91 

1st branch. 2d branch. 3d branch. Mh branch. 

Infinitive. .aTb ... °BaTB ... htl .... tTb 
Present: . aro ... Jw .... aro .... bio 

K) 

Examples : 1) a^asltl, ; maAe, 4-Maio ; 2) phcob&tb, to draw, pncyro ; n.ie- 
BaTt, to spit, UAiom ; 3) ryjaTb, to take a walk, ry jihw ; 4) hm:etb,/0 have, HMiro. 

2. The second conjugation embraces such verbs as end in 
the infinitive in nib preceded by w or o, and by other vowels 
with a changeable consonant, and the first person in the pre- 
sent of which is in to preceded by a consonant (sometimes 
by a vowel) or, according to the nature of the hissing let- 
ters, in my, ny, my and uijy. This conjugation is subdivided 
into 7 branches, in the following order: 



Infinitive : 



Present : K) . . .«o . . y . my . . ny . my . . ray. 

Examples: l)roBopiiTB, to speak, roBopib; Be^iTB, to order, BeAw; ko.i6tb, 
to sting, koaw ; 2) .ik)6htb, to love, aio6aw ; TepniTb , to suffer, Tepn^ib ; 
ijpeMaTb, to slumber, 4peMMH); 3) TyatiiTb, to grieve, xywy ; KpireaTB, to cry, 
Kpnqy ; 4) bo4htb, to lead, BOJKy ; bi^-btb, to see, Biiaty ; Ma3aTB, to anoint, 
Maaty ; 5) njaTiiTb, to pay. uAdny ; BeprBTB, to turn, Bepny ; iuaKaTB, 
to weep, many ; fi) npocriTB, to ask, nporay ; bhcetb, to be suspended, 
BHiny ; naxaTB, to cultivate, naray ; 7 ) ii'icthtb, to clean, Hiimy ; xpycTBTB, 
to crack, xpyray ; HCKaTb, to seek, nray. 

3. The third conjugation embraces the verbs ending in the 
infinitive in uynw and in epemb , the first person of which is 
in y preceded by a palatal consonant (h, V)- This conjuga- 
tion is subdivided into 2 branches, thus: 

\st branch. 2d branch. 

Infinitive : . . . . HyTb epeTb 

Present: Hy py 

Examples: 1) THHyTb, to draw, Tany; 2> TepeTb, to rub, Tpy. 
The three conjugations of the regular verbs and their va- 
rious branches, as also the inflections of the moods, tenses 
and persons, are shown in the following table. 



1st br. 


2d br. 


3d br. 


Uh br. 


bth br. 


6th br. 


1th br. 


1 H 


6 

R 


HTb 


m 


HTb 


n, HTB 


„ HTb 




HTb 








H HTb 


4 


T 


C 


CT 




/ -6 Tb 


M 


tTb 




tTb 


"BTB 


-BTb 




•BTb 








ra aTb 


3 


K 


X 


CK 




1 ° 


11 


aTb 


ra 


aTb 


aTb 


aTb 




aTb 



92 



RUSSIAN GRAMMAR. 



CONJUGATIONS OF REGULAR VERBS, 







1st branch. 



an. 



m. n.f. 

a^T>, 0, a 



[mm 

[mm 1 the 3 g. 

\6bl > ajH 



oyay 

6y4euiB 

6y/jeTT> 

dy^eMt 

6y4eTe 

6y4yT r f» 



FIRST* 



2d branch. 



oeaTB eemh 



yw row 

yeuiB weuiB 

yerB K)eTi> 

yeMt ioeMT> 

yeie weTe 

yH)TT> H)I0T1. 



OBa^n> eBa^n. 



OBajin eBajn 



3d branch. 



© HTB £ HTB 



aio 10 

aeuiB euiB 

aerB eTi> 

aeM-B eMi> 

aeTe eie 

flI0TT> lOT-B 



Ah ajn> 



fl.in h.ih 



or 



CTaHy 

CTaHeuiB 

CTaHeTT> 

CTaHeMi. 

CTaHeie 

daHy tt> 



kth branch. 



-BTB 



-BK) 
'BeillB 

■Ben 
neie 

■BBOTT) 



£.n> 



1st branch. 



HTB 
■BTB 



HTB 



OTB 



K) BO 

HHIB euiB 

HTl eTT. 

HMT. eMT> 

iiTe eTe 

aTl> I0TT> 



EJFb 



HJH 



OJIT. 



2d 6ra» 

6 HTB 
„ -BTB 



95 



.IK) 

HHIB 

HTT> 

HMT> 

HTe 

aTTb 



THAT* 
%AT, 



{ H.1H 
I "B.1H 



with the infinitive ( f the imperfect asp 



yii ion 



ynTe K)iiTe 



HH 



airre HTe 



■bh 



fcHTe 



H 
B 

H 

HTe 
BTe 
fiTe 



HTe 



HTe 
&Te 



Lexicology. — the verb. 



93 



ACTIVE, NEUTER AND PRONOMINAL. 



SECOND. 



anck. 


ith branch 


" '" 








„ HTb 


2 


1Tb 


a 






-bTb 


3 aTb 


1Tb 




a 




3 HTb 


Y 


j/cy 


o/cy 


nuib 


HIHb 


jKemb 


htt> 


I HTb 


ffleTT> 


\lWb 


A ]nwb 


/KeJVTb 


iiTe 


3 j HTe 


jKeTe 


1TT> 


J HTT> 


HtyTb 


UTb 


/ 

IMT. 


r 

3 a^L'b 


UT» 


3 | 


A 


UH 


f n.m 


r 


UH 


f S.1H 


3 &au 

A 









5<A branch. 



HTb W 
-6Tb a: 



aTb 



Tnuib Henib 

THTT> ieTT> 
THMT> leMT) 

THTe neTe 

TflTT. HyTT> 



HAT* 



p H.lH 
•fcJIH K 



a.iii 



6th branch. 



.HTb C 
C aTb 

•BTb X 



CHUIb 
CHTT> 



my 

uieuib 

uieTi. 



CHMT. HieMT) 

CHTe uieTe 

CflTT. UiyTT> 



a.n> 



H.I II 

j hau 



ler definite or indefinite) 



for 



7th branch. 



n HTb CK „ mT 

cm aTb 

■BTb cm 



CTriuib meuib 
cthtti merb 
cthmt, ineivn. 
CTHTe meTe 
CTHT'b myrb 



CT 



H^T> 
%AT> CT 



a^i> 



CT 



IMH 



CK 



%JLU CT 



a^in 



the 



THIRD. 



1st branch. 2d branch 



«yTb 



Heuib 

HeTT> 

Heivn. 
HeTe 

HyTT> 



Hyji> 



Hy.in 



epeTb 



py 

peuib 
peTi> 
peart 
peTe 
pyTi> 



ep'b,ep^o,^a 



ep.ni 



three 



conjugations. 



uTe 



HTe 
s x bTe 



T iiTe q HTe 
bTe bTe 



in. 



,HTe 
bTe 



HTe 
bTe 



CTH 



mn 



CTHTe UIHTe 



f HTe 
bTe 



pH 



puTe 



94 



ERUSSIAN GRAMMAR. 



Formation of 

the inflections 

of the verb. 



56. — In the conjugation of the regular verbs the following 
rules relating to the formation of the various inflections are to 
be attended to. 

1. The second person of the present is formed: a) from the first per- 
son in all the verbs of the 1st and Hid conjugation, as also in those of 
the lid in omb, and in amb when not preceded by a hissing consonant, 
by changing w orj into eniL ; 6) from the infinitive in the verbs of the 
lid conjugation ending in umb, mm , and in amb preceded by a hissing 
consonant, by changing umb, n>mb or amb into hih&. The other persons 
are formed from the second. The present has generally the following in- 
flections : 

I. 2. 3. 4, 



o 


SINGULAR. 


1. 


. . . K) ...y....io . . . . y 


2. 


. . . emt . . "•". emb . . . Hint .... Hint 


3. 


. . . eTT. . . . eTt . . . HTt .... HTt 




PLURAL. 


1. 


. . . eWb . . . eMT> . . . HMt . . . . HMt 


2. 


. . . eTe . . . eie . . . HTe .... me 


3. 


. . . K)TT> . . . yTt . . . flI"B .... ATI. (aTB) 




For verbs of the 


For verbs of the 


For verbs of the 


For verbs of the 




I conjug., and for 


III conjug. and for 


II conjug. 1st and 


II conjug., 3d, 4th, 




those in omb, 1st 


those in amb, 4th, 


2dbr.(exceptthose 


5th, 6th and 7th 




br. and in amb, 2d 


5th, 6th and 7th 


in omb and in amb). 


br. (except those 




br. of the II conjug. 


br. of the II con- 


(See the paradigms 


in awi&not preced- 




(See the paradigms 


jug. (See the pa- 


8, 9 and 11 J 


ed by a hissing 




1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 


radigms 15, 17,19, 




letter). (See the 




10 and 12.) 


21, 22, 23, 24and 
25.) 




paradigms 13, 14, 
16, 18 and 20.) 



The third person of the plural ends in amz (instead of nmz) after the 
hissing consonants (m, % in, ni), and this for the verbs of the third branch of 
the lid conjugation. (See paradigm 13.) 

2. The preterit in verbs of the 1st and Hd conjugation is formed from 
the infinitive by changing rm into at> {Jem. Jia, neut. ao ; plur ah). The 
inchoative verbs of the Hid conjugation syncopate the termination nyjiz 
into i> (fern, a&, neut. ao ; plur. Jii% by suppressing the consonant a in 
the masculine, when no vowel immediately precedes; e. g. coxt, bhat> 
(fern. coxAdi, Bjua, neut coxao, bAao), instead of c6xHyjiK,6RHyjiz, from 
coxiiyTL, to dry; BfmyTB, to fade. Occasionally the full form is used: 
e. g. Mep3HYTB, to freeze, Mep3Hy./rc> ; but in the inchoative prepositional 
verbs, the preterit is almost always syncopated, and this sometimes hap- 
pens also in the aspect perfect of unity; e. g. 3aMep3HyTB, to freeze, 
3aMep3-B; B034BHTHyTB, to erect, B03ABHn> (instead of 3aMep3HyM, eo3- 
demuyjid). 



Lexicology. — the verb. 95 

The non-inchoative verbs, as also the perfect aspect of unity, retain 
the termination nyM>; e. g. THHy jtl, abuuy Jn>, from TirayTb, to draw; 4bh- 
HyTb, to move once. The verbs of the 2d branch of the Hid conjugation 
also syncopate the termination of the preterit. (See the paradigms 22, 
23, 24 and 25.) 

3. The imperative ends in the second person of the singular in u, 6, u 
ot'u, and is formed from the second person of the present (or from 
the future , in the perfect aspect of duration or of unity) , by changing 
euib or uuib : 

a) into u , if the accent is on the termination of the infinitive (para- 
digms 8, iO, 11, 12, 15, 16, 18, 19, 21, 22); 

6) into 6, if the accent is not on the termination of the infinitive (pa- 
radigms 13, 14, 17 and 24) ; 

c) into u, if, without having the accent, the termination of the infini- 
tive is preceded by two or three consonants (paradigms 20 and 23) ; 

d) into w, if the inflection euib or uuib of the second person is pre- 
ceded by a vowel (paradigms 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 and 9). The verbs in 
umh preceded by a vowel, and with the accent on the last syllable, also 
take the inflection u, e. g. Tai'm,, to hide; nouTb, to water; KJieHTb, to 
paste; imperative : Taii, noii, KJien. 

The second person of the plural is formed by adding the syllable me 
to the inflection of the second person of the singular. The other per- 
sons have no peculiar inflection. The first person of the plural takes (hat 
of the future; e. g. 6y4eMi> yHiiTbca, let us study; nou/jeivrb , let us go, 
and sometimes adding the syllable me , noiiAe'MTe. The third person in 
both numbers takes that of the present or the future, preceded by the 
conjunctions nycnib or da, e. g. nycTb roBopiiTb , let him speak; 4a 
34paBCTByeTi>, let him live; 4a 6y4yn», let them be. 

The second person singular of the imperative is sometimes [used with 
the personal pronouns of the first and third person, in order to express 
the conditional mood; e. g. cjyiAdM. 3to a, if I should do that; cjy%M\ 
3to oht,, if he were to do that; instead of ecJiu 6bi r (or out) jmo 
cdibAaAZ. In the same manner the phrases: coxpami Eon,, God preserve! 
4afl Eon,. God grant, take the place of the optative mood. 

Remark. There are some regular verbs which deviate slightly from 
the general rules, undergoing a trifling change either in the first person 
of the present, or in the imperative, as we shall subsequently point out. 
We remark lastly that there is but one verb which has its imperative in s ; 
it is the irregular verb Jieib, to lie down; imperative: Jian,, pi. .wne. 

57. -Observing these different rules for the formation of Paradigms of 
the moods, tenses and persons, the active, neuter and pro- of^eguiafverb"! 
nominal regular Russian verbs are conjugated according to 
the 25 following paradigms. 



96 



RUSSIAN GRAMMAR. 







PARADIGMS 


OF THE 


THREE 


cow«r 






I. INFINITIVE. 










11. 1 


M D 


o 

a 

© 


Paradigms : 
Branches : 




















I. PR 


ESENT. 








Singular. 


p lural. 




C/3 






" 1. 


2. 


3. 


1. 


2. 


3. 




/l. 1. 


A-hmnib, to make. . . 


KhJiato, 


A%Aa-ewb, 


eTT>; 


eMT,, 


eTe, 


BDTT. 




1 I 2 * 


TOAKoedmb, to explain. . 


tojkjw, TOJKy-emb, 


eTt; 


eivnb, 


eTe, 


K)TT. 


s 


l«. 3. 

( 4 - 


Boe6dmb, to war. . . . 


BOWW, 


B0H)-eUlb, 


en>; 


eMi., 


eTe, 


lOTT. 




meedmb, to chew. . . 


JKV/O, 


jKy-euiB, 


e'Ti>; 


em, 


eTe, 


H)T1> 


|H 


M4 


TjAfimb, to take a walk. . 


vyji/ifo, 


ry^a-emt, 


eTT>; 


eMi» 7 


eTe, 


BOTl. 




ch/imb, to sow. . . . 


ckfo, 


ci-eniB, 


en; 


eMi,, 


eTe, 


I0TT> 




^! 7. 


meATTbmb, to grow yellow. 


JKCIT/bW, 


jKe-flTi-emt, 


eT'B; 


eMT>, 


e r re, 


IOTT) 




/ i a 


xB&Mmb, to praise. . . 


XBHAlb, 


XBa^I-HUIL, 


HT'B 


; HMT», 


HTe, 


HT'B 




1. 9. 
(lO. 


CTpdwmd, to build. . . 


CTpdw, 


CTp6-HUlb, 


HT'B 


; HMT>, 


htc, 


ATT) 




KOJionib, to sting . . 


KOAW, 


KOJ-euiB, 


eTT> 


; eMi>, 


eTe, 


K)TT. 




I*.! 11 - 
i 12. 


Aio6umb, to love. . . . 


jiw6Afb, 


jiibd-iimb, 


HT'B 


; hmb, 


HTe, 


HT'B 




ATpeMdmb, to slumber. . 


AyeMJifb 


, ApeM.i-emB, 


eTTb 


, eMi>, 


eTe, 


IOTT. 


CO 


la 13. 


Mymwu), to torment. . . 


Myyjr, 


Myl-HLHB, 


HT'B 


; HMT>, 


HTe, 


aTT. 


° < 


\ i 15. 


A&dumb, to tune. . . . 


Akoicy, 


•aaU-imiB, 


HT'B 


, 11MT>, 


HTe, 


ATT. 


as 


Bfl3a'mb, to tie. . . . 


BSIQ/Cf, 


BaiK-emL, 


en> 


; en., 


eTe, 


yT'B 




ki 16 - 


njiamumb, to pay. . . 


UAMJT, 


njiaT-Hinb, 


HTT. 


; hmi>, 


HTe, 


HT'B 




J } 17. 


uAkrcamb, to weep. . . 


nA&vy, 


njiai-euiB, 


en. 


; eMi., 


eTe, 


yn> 




h.m 


npocwmb, to ask. . . . 


nyowy, 


npoc-Hiub, 


HT'B 


; hmi>, 


HTe, 


ATI. 




f 19. 


mcdmb, to write. . . 


UEiujr, 


UHIU-eiHB, 


en. 


eMi> ; 


eTe, 


yT'B 




i g j 20. 


mcmunib, to clean. . . * 


^uiu/y, 


ihct-huib, 


HT'B 


; HMT>, 


HTe, 


HT'B 




\ '121. 


mcKdmb, to seek. . . . 


may, 


um-euiB, 


en> 


; eMt, 


ere, 


yT'B 


H-i 


( ( 22> 


THHjrmb, to draw. . . 


TRHJT, 


TflH-eUIL, 


en> 


; eMi., 


eTe, 


yTi. 




1. 23. 


coxwymb, to dry. . . 


coxny, 


coxH-eniB, 


en, 


; eMi., 


eTe, 


yT-B 


j (24. 


mHymb, to fade. . . . 


Bkny, 


BflH-eUIB, 


eTt 


; eMi>, 


eTe, 


yT'B 




•2. 25. 


nepenib, to rub. . . . 


Tpx, 


Tp-einB, 


en. 


; e'Mi, 


e'Te, 


yTB 



With respect to the use of the tonic accent in the conjugations of regular verbs , the followii 
rules are to be observed. 

1. The first person of the present takes the accent of the infinitive , with the exception of tl 
verbs in oedmb and eedmb, in which the last syllable is accented. These verbs transfer the accent ( 
the penultima, if this termination belongs to a derivative verb; but if the syllable oe or ee belonj 
to the root of the verb, they preserve the accent on the last syllable; thus TOJiKOBatb, BoeBaTb (pi 
rad. 2 and 3) have in the present TOjiKyio, boiok); while jKeBa-rr. (parad. 4) has jKyib ; and also k< 
BaTb, to forge, Kyib ; njieBaTb, to spit, nAioib. The other persons of the present preserve the acce: 
of the first person, with the exception of several verbs of the lid and Hid conjugation, accented 
the last syllable, which transfer the accent on the penultima in the second and other persons 
the singular and plural. (See the paradigms 8, 10, 11, 12, 15, 16, 18, 19, 21 and 22.) 



Lexicoh 


gy-- 


~ THE VERB. 






yz 


LTIONS OF REGULAR VERB§> 


L T I V E. 








III. IMPERATIVE. 

2d pers. 


______ II. PRETERIT. 




HI 


. FUTURE. 


Singular, 




Plural. 




Sing. 


Plur. 


f masc. neut. fern. 


t2[ 


3 genders. 


WAdiA-b, mo, m&; . 


Aiua-in. 




Aiuafi, 


iiTe. 


1 tojkobelii, ajio, a.ia; 


© 1 


T0.lK0Ba.lQ. 




TOJKyfi, 


HTe. 


] BoeBa.iT>, a^o, a^a; 


*3 / 
o 1 


BoeBa^H. 


^ 


B0K)fi, 


iiTe. 


■\ «eBa^T>, Aao, mbl; . . 


aceBa^H. 


.§ 


*yfi, 


iiTe. 


j TjAkA-b, Aao, jwa; 


S J 


ry.ifl.iH. 


1 ; 


ryjflfi, 


fiTe. 


I cha.AT>, siao, iua; 


-"[ 


CEfl.IH. 


CHH, 


HTe. 


1 meATiATt, &ao, iAa; . . 


«\ 


TKeATKAU. 




Hte^Tift, 


IiTe. 


/xBaji'uii, fcao, ftia; . 




f XBaJUJH. 


XBa.IH, 


htc 


/ CTpOH^t, hjio, ma; 




CTpOH^H. 


/~~s 


CTpOH, 


htc 


1 ko.a6.it>, o-io, o^a; 




110A0AU. 




K0.1H, 


HTe. 


1 Am6uA'b, uao, i'ua; . 




jho6hjjh. 


oT 


.ik)6h, 


htc 


1 apcMaji, a.io, a.aa ; . 


/tpeMa^H. 




ApeaLiH, 


iiTe. 


1 MyiMt, UAO, BAdi ; . 




My^n.in. 




Mynb, 


LTe. 


J A&WAT>, EAO, HJia ; 


V S J 


f AMUAU. 


.la^b, 


bTe. 


\ Bfl3ajT>, ajio, a.ia; 


© \ 


Bfl3a^lH. 


t«r • 


Bflacri, 


HTe. 


1 nAajTUAiy, uao, i'ua ; . 


s 


1 n.iaTi'un. 


<as 


n^aTii, 


HTe. 


liLflaKa-flt, a.io, a^a; 
I npoci'urb, 11.JO, I'ua; 


3 J 


n^aKa^H. 
' npociLJH. 




n.ia%, 
npocH, 


bTe, 
HTe. 


1 nnca.iT>, ajo, oa; 




niica^ii. 


>^ 


nnmn, 


iiTe. 


1 HHCTIMT., H.10, H^a; 




<niCTH.lH. 


-eO 


HHCTH, 


HTe. 


\ HCKa.iT>, a.io, a.ia ; 




i HCKEUH. 


O 

o 


HHIH, 


iiTe. 


| TflHy.n>, yjo, y^a; . 


'S3 


TaHyjH. 


TflHH, 


iiTe. 


1 coxt>, xjo, xJia; . 




COXJH. 


->* 


COXHH, 


htc 


| ba.it>, jmo, jua; 
\ Tept, p.io, p^a; . 


8? \ 


Bfl.IH. 

Tep^ii. 




BflHb, 

Tpn, 


bTe. 
iiTe, 



The preterit retains the accentuation of the infinitive, and that in all the inflections, excepted 
iTb, to bring forth, fret. poAH-it, f. poflHJia, n . poflriJio, pi. poflnjH, and some verbs of the Hid con- 
tion , which, as well as the irregular verbs , follow the rules of adjectives in the aocopated 
ination, i. e. the accent is often transferred to the last syllable, sometimes only in the feminine 
ler, and at other times in the neuter and in the plural, as we shall see later. 

The accentuation of the imperative is above indicated in the formation of this mood. 

The pronominal verbs preserve the accentuation of the active verbs ; however some of these verbs 
sfer the accent to the reflected pronoun ch, as poAHjea, he is born, 3apnepca, il shut itself vp ; 

that happens only in the masculine gender; in the feminine and neuter, as well as in the plu- 

the accent is placed on the syllable which precedes the pronoun (poAHjaci. , 3anep.a6cb , etc.). 
transferring happens above all in the monosyllabic verbs, as 3Bajca, B3fl.ica, aslach, etc. 

Rtissian Grammar. 9 



98 



RUSSIAN GRAMMAR. 



First conjuga- According to the 1st paradigm (ab Jan.) are conjugated verbs in arm, 
as well simple as prepositional (with the exception of those in oeamb 
and eeamb, which belong to the three following paradigms, and of se- 
veral in arrw, which are of the secondconjugation). Such are : 
EoaTaTb, to shake, pres. fio^Taio. YnoBaib, to hope, pres. ynoBaio. 
BtHqaTB, to crown, BtHiaio. 06ojKaxb, to adore, o6oJKaio. 
4ep3aTB, to dare, aep3aio. OTBiqaTb, to answer, OTBiiaio. 
/tyMaTB, to think, ayMaio. OetnjaTb, to promise, oOtsaio. 
^lacKaxB, to caress, .jacKaio. OTA"BJHBaTB, to finish, OTflijHBaio. 
IIuTaTb, to assay, nbiTaio. YcMaipEBaTB, to perceive, ycMaTpnBaio. 
HeiaTaTB, to print, neqaiaio. 3aKpuBaTB, to cover, 3aKpuBaK). 
Pa66TaTB, to work, paGoTaio. Ha/uvieBaTB, to render proud, HaAMeBaio. 
IlHTaTB, to nourish, nuxaio. OdypeBaTb, to agitate, odypeBaio. 
HioxaTb, to smell, Hibxaio. OiMUjeBaTB, to avenge, oiMnjeBaio. 
Tep3aib, to worry, Tep3aio. 3flopoBaTbCH, to salute, 3flop6Baiocb. 
YMHuqaTb, to subtilize, yManqaio. KacaTbca, to concern, Kacaiocb. 
Yacacaib, to terrify, yacacaio. HaMtpeBaTBca, to purpose, HaMtpeBaiocb. 

Also AaBaTb , to give , as the prepositional verbs 3HaBaTB , to know; 
AOCTaBaTt , to procure (and with other prepositions) and co3AaBaTB , to 
build, which have in the present : flaw , y3Haib, AOCTaib and co3Aaib, and 
in the imperative: flaBau, y3HaBaft, /jocTaBau and co3AaBan. — Some pre- 
positional verbs in ueamb, e. g. noKa3BiBaT& ; to show; VKa3BiBaTB, to in- 
dicate; noMa3BiBaTB, to anoint; HcnoBiflBmaTB , to confess, belong also 
to the following branch , having the present tense in ueato and in y to : 
noKa3BiBaro and noKa3YK» , noMa3BiBaro and noMa3yK), etc. 

According to the 2d paradigm (To^KOBaTB) are conjugated verbs in 
06anib (with the exception of ynoedmb and 3oopoeambCfi which belong 
to the precedent paradigm), which have in the present yw , observing 
that those in oeamb accented on the last syllable transfer the accent to 
y, if this termination belongs to a derivative verb, but they preserve it 
on the last syllable, if the syllable oe belongs to the root of the verb. 
Such are: 

BopKOBaTb, to coo, pres. Bopicyio. PncoBaib, to draw, pres. pncyK). 

ToproBaTB, to traffic, Topryio. 06pa30BaTb, to form, o6pa3yio. 

EaaoBaTB, to cocker, 6ajyio. Pa/jOBaiB, to rejoice, pa/iyK). 

Kobeitb, to forge, KyK). TpeSoBaTB, to require, Tpe6yH)» 

CHOBaiB, to warp, CHyib. ^JyBCTBOBaTB, fo feel, qyBCTByio. 

Cobeitb, to shove, cyib. CoBiTOBaTB, to counsel, coBiiyio. 

3hmob8itb, to winter, 3BMyio. MaJioBaTB, to have pity, Mwyio. 

HMeHOBaTB, to name, HMeHyio. HpHBiTCTBOBaTB, to welcome, npHBiTCTByio 

I|UjoBaTB, to kiss, n-Bayio. IIoBHHOBaTBCfl, to obey, noBHHyiocb. 

According to the 3d paradigm (BoeBaTB) are conjugated verbs in eeamb 
(with the exception of those in e6anib preceded by a hissing consonant, 
which belong to the following paradigm , and of naoMeedmb , o6ype- 
edmb, oniMu^eedmb and naMibpeednibcfi , which belong to the first pa- 
radigm), which have in the present wro, with the same observation rela- 
tively to the tonic accent as for verbs in oeamb. Such are : 



Lexicology. — the verb. 99 

TopeBaTB, to grieve, pres. roproro. RjieBaiB, to peck, pres. KJiroro. 

/JiieBaTB, to pass the day, AHibro. ILieBaxb, to spit, nJiroro. 

YipeHHeBaTb, to pass the morning, yxpeHHK)K).E.ieBaxb, to vomit, caroro. 
Ma^ieBaTb, to paint, Marrow. Heic/ieBaxb, to bolt, neKJiroro. 

According to the 4th paradigm (flceBaTL) are conjugated verbs in eeamb 
preceded by a hissing consonant Ok, % m, mj, which have in the pre- 
sent yio (instead of /ow); such are: 

BpaieBaib, to cure, pres. Bpaiyio. EymeBaxb, to howl, pres. 6yniyro, 

KoqeBaib, to nomadize, Koqyro. TymeBaxb, to wash a drawing, xymyro. 

HoqeBaxb, to pass the night, Hoqyro. XBOgjeBaib, to rub with horse-tail, xBonryro 

MejKeBaib. to survey, Meacyro. HoxqeBaib, to regale, noxqyro. 

This last verb is also written nodw6amb , and then it belongs to the 
first branch, having in the present : noAiuBaio. 

According to the 5th paradigm (ry^aTb) are conjugated all the verbs 
in nmb preceded by a consonant, as well simple as prepositional, and 
also four simple verbs in nmb preceded by a vowel, and some prepo- 
sitional verbs in onmb, in which turn is contracted from ueamb. These 
verbs have the present in hw. Such are: 

BajaTb, to roll, pres. Bajaro. Yxojiaxb, to quench, pres. yxo./iaro. 

BoHHTb, to stink, bohhk). H3BnHaxb, to excuse, h3Bhhhk). 

Kauijiaxb, to cough, Kanuaro. noBBpaib, to verify, noBtparo. 

MmaTb, to change, mKhAio. YxoMJaxb, to fatigue, yiOMJiaio. 

Ko3hipaTb, to trump, K03Biparo. BaaxB, to sculpture, Baaro. 

KpaB^aTb, to contort, KpHB.iaro. 3iaib, to gape, 3iaro. 

TepaxB, to lose, xeparo. HaaiB, to solder, naaro. 

Cxpt^aTb, to shoot, cxpluaro. Ciaxb, to shine, ciaio. 

HBjaTb, to show, aBJiaro. Ycxpoaxb, to arrange, ycxpoaro. 

Kjanaxbca, to salute, KJaHarocb. YABoaxb, to double, yABoaro. 

According to the 6th paradigm (cbhtb) are conjugated verbs in ntrib 
preceded by a vowel (with the exception of those which belong to the 
precedent paradigm, and of cmonmb and doambc/i, which belong to the 
first branch of the lid conjugation). They have the present in w; such are: 

Eaaxb, to speak, pres. 6aio. Taaxb, to thaw, pres. xaK). 

Ejieaxb, to bleat, djiero. Haaxb, to hope, qaro. 

Boniaxb, to cry, Boniib. *Iyaxb, to hear, qyro. 

BfiaTb, to blow, Biro. KaaxBca, to do penance, keuocb. 

Tpaaxb, to croak, rparo. Maaxbca, to languish, Marocb. 

Aeji-haTb, to cocker, .aciBro. CjrtaxBca, to laugh, carfcrocb. 

According to the 7th paradigm Okc.it£ti0 are conjugated the inchoa- 
tive and some other verbs in ibmb, which have the present in nw, (the 
non-inchoative , in nmb belong to the various branches of the second 
conjugation). Such are: 

Ebjibtb, to grow white, pres, CBjibio. B^aaixb, to possess, pres. BjiaflBK). 

To^y6ixb, to become azure, rojiyGiro. I\ia3BXB, to gaze, r.ia3"Bro, 

Co.ioBbxb, to grow light bay, cojobbw. ToBBxb, to keep fast, roB'isro. 

Pa6BxB, to become freckled, pa<5iro. 4ojBib, to overcome, ao^bio. 

KpacHBib, to grow red, KpacHBro. 5Kajii>xB, to have pity, JKa^Bro. 



100 



RUSSIAN GRAMMAR. 



CnHBTb, to grow blue, pres. CHB7BK). Kojibtb, to starve, pres. KOA-kvo. 

CtAisTb, to grow grey, cfcAtsH). KochBtb, to linger, KocHiio. 

PbUKisTb, to grow rufous, pHatiio. IleqaT^iTB, to impress, neiaTjiiio. 

TpyCBTb, to grow harsh, rpy<5'BH). HrniiTb, to have, hmIuo. 

^epHfiTt, to grow black, qepHiio. Ym-Btb, to know, yM-BK). 

IIoTiTb, to sweat, noTiio. PaAisTb, to take care, paA^K). 

IIJiaMeHirb, to flame, nAameniw). Eoa'BTb, to ache, 6ojiiiO. 

The verb 6ojubmb belongs also to the first branch of the Hd conjugation, 
having in the present 6o.mo and 6oaw , do-iieim. and dojiimt , etc. — 
The prepositional verb bbi3aopob£tb, to recover (perfect aspect of eu- 
3dopd6Aueamb) , belongs also to the second branch of the lid conju- 
gation, having in the future BBi34opoB-£K) and Bbi34opoBJH) , but only in 
the first person, the others being: BbiSAopoB-Beim., eft, etc. 
Second conju- According to the 8th paradigm (xBa^HTL) are conjugated verbs in umb 
gation. preceded by a palatal consonant O, h, p), and also by another conso- 
nant, as those, non-inchoative, in Jiibmb , nnmb, pnmb, observing that 
several verbs of the second conjugation , accented in the infinitive and 
and in the first person of the present on the last syllable , transfer the 
accent to the penultima in the second and other persons of the present. 
Such are: 

BpaHHTb, to scold, pres. 6paEH), dpaHHnib. KoiMHTb, to edge, pres. kohmk), KODMHnib. 
BecejiHTb, to divert, Beccaib, Beccannib. KieaaiaTb, to stamp, kjichmm), iMeHMHnib. 
BnHHTb, to accuse, bhhh), BHHHmb. TyAHTb, to fiddle, ryAK), ryAnnib. 

BipnTb, to believe, Bispio, B-Bpnnib. 4vahtb, to pipe, AyAK), AyAHmb. 

ToBopHTb, to speak, roBopib, roBopHnib. Mep3HTb, to abhor, Mep3ib, Mep3Hmb. 

CMOJHTb, tO pitch, CMOJK), CMOJHHlb. Ty3HTb, tO CUff, Ty3H), Ty3HUIb. 

^•bjhtl, to divide, a*^h), AlUHnib. KyAecnib, to juggle, KyAecio, KyAecHnib. 

CkoSjihtb, to scrape, cko6.ik), CKo6jiHnib. x IyAecHTb, to behave oddly, qyAecio, ecninb 
4pa3HHTb, to provoke, Apa3Hib,Apa3HHiub.Be.i'BTb, to order, Bejjib, Be./[Hnib. 
XopoHMb, to hide, xopomb, xopoHHmb. TopiTb, to burn, ropib, ropnnib. 
KypHTb, to smoke, KypK), Kypnnib. 3BeHBTb, to sound, 3BeHH), 3BeHHmb. 

BapnTb, to boil, Bapib, Bapnnib. CMOip-BTb, to look, cMOTpib, cmotphhib. 

And also mhcahtb, to think, which changes c into ui in the first per- 
son of the present: mbiolmo, mhcjhiiib, etc.; imperative: mb'iojh; and 
the prepositional verb h3octphtb , to sharpen (perfect aspect of U30- 
ut^pnmb) , which changes cm into ui, in the first person of the future : 
H3oinpib, H30CTpHnib, etc. 

According to the 9th paradigm (ctpohtb) are conjugated verbs in umb 
preceded by a vowel, as the two simple verbs in o/wib, observing that 
the verbs in umb of this branch, accented on the last syllable, have the 
imperative in u. Such are: 

4B0HTb, to double, pres. aboh); imp. aboh. Ctohtb, to cost, pres. ctoio; imp. ctoh. 

4oHTb, to milk, aoh); aoh. CfiOHTb, to appropriate, cboh); cboh. 

KjienTb, to glue, KAeib ; Kjien. BoKOHTb, to give repose, hokok) ; hokoh. 

HoHTb, to give to drink, now ; hoh. PoHTbca, to swarm, poibcb ; ponca. 

KpoHTb, to cut, Kpoib; kpoh. GTauTbcfl, to fly in flocks, CTarocb, cxancfl. 

CTpynib, to pour, CTpyib; cTpyn. Eohtbch, to'fear, 6oibcb; 66Mcfl. 

TaHTb, to hide, tari); xaa. doatb, to stand, ctoh) ; ctoh. 



Lexicology. — the verb. 101 

According to the 10th paradigm (koji6ti>) are conjugated verbs in omb, 
as two verbs in amb; these are: 

BopoTB, to vanquish, pres. 6opK>, <56penib. IIopoTb, to rip, pres, nopib, nopenib. 
BopoiBca, to wrestle, 6opibcb, 66penibca.rjiar6jiaTB, to say, rjiarojio, i\iaro.jenib. 
IIo-JOTb, to weed, nojib, no-aemb, OpaiB, to plough, opib, openiB. 

And also mojotb, to grind, which has in the present: Me.iib, MeJiemt, 
etc. and in the imperative mcm (instead of mojiw, MOAeuib, moau, not 
to be confounded with mojuo, MOJimib, moau, from mojiitl, to pray). — 
The verb opaTt in the sense of to cry belongs to the third conjugation. 

According to the 11th paradigm (jHoGutiO are conjugated verbs in 
umb preceded by a labial consonant (6, b, m, n, <*>) as the non-inchoa- 
tives in 6wmb, Mfbmb, nnmb, which insert the consonant ji in the first 
person of the present (with the exception of KAeuMumb and KotiMunib, 
which belong to the first branch of the Hd conjugation, of UMibmb and 
yMnmb, which belong to the 4th branch of the 1st conjugation , and of 
iuu6unib, which belongs to the first branch of the Hid conjugation. Such 
are: 

PydiiTB, to hew, pres. pyd^K), pyfinniB. dcoptfisTB, to sorrow, pres, CKop6\iK), pdanib 
3ho(5htb, to chill, 3ho6jm), 3ho6huib. CBeptfiTb, to itch, cBepfi-iib, cBepOnnib. 

TpyfiHTb, to be saucy, rpyfijib, rpyCnnib. TpeM-fiTb, to thunder, rpeMJiw, rpeMunib. 
jIoBHTb, to catch, AOBjiib, jiobhuib. lDyMBTb, to racket, niyMJiK), niyMiinib. 

roTOBHTB,toprepare,roT6B^K),roT6BHniB. KnniTB, to boil, kbh^h), khuhuib. 
4umhtb, to smoke, amm.ik>, ^mmhuib KopniTb, to work, Kopnjib, Kopniiuib. ; j 

KopMHTb, to nourish, KOpaMib, KopMHnib. ConBTb, to wheeze, cohjik), coniinib. 
ToneTb, to heat, Ton.iib, Tonnuib. CKpnnBTb, to creak, CKpnn^K), cKpHniinib. 

•flfcUHTb, to mould, jiljnjiK), ./linunib. TepniiTb, to suffer, Tepn.ub, Tepnnuib. 

Tpa*HTb, to rule, rpasjib, rpa*Hiub. Xpanixb, to snore, xpan^ib, xpananiB. 

Tpa*HTb, to hit, Tpa*Jiio, Tpa*Hnib. XpunBTB, to croak, xprnuib, xpununiB. 

HpaBHTBCfl, to please, HpaBjuocB, bhdibch. IIIhubtb, to hiss, mniMK), nranHniB. 

PH3BHTBCH, tO SpOrt,p'B3B^lbCB,pt3BHmBCa. 

And also the prepositional verb VMepTBUTb to put to death (perfect 
aspect of yMepuifijiAmb) , which changes m into w, in the first person 
of the future : yMepmBJib, yMepTBnmb, etc. 

According to the 12th paradigm (ApeaiaTb) are conjugated verbs in 
6amb, Mamb, namb, which insert also the consonant ji in the first per- 
son of the present, and retain it in the other persons as in all the 
inflections derivated from this first person. These are: 

3hJ<5aTB, to wave, pres. 3ti6.iib, 3b'i6.ieniB. And thus the following verbs which be- 
Ko.ie6aTB, to shake, KOje6jK),KOjiedJiemB. long also to the lstbr. of the 1st conjug. 
KienaTB, to impute, KJienviid, KJenaeniB. 3o6aTB, to peck up, pres. 3o6aw and 3o6aio 
TpenaTB, to scutch, TpenjiK), Tpenvieuib. KanaTb, to drop, Kanvuo and Kanaio. 
IHenaTb, to chip, njenJiib, njenJienib. KpanaTb, to dash, Kpan^ro and KpanaH). 

munaTB, to pinch, npnjiK), gnn^eniB. XpoMaiB, to be lame, xpoMJiK) andxpoMaio. 
ChinaTB, to strew, Cbnuio, cb'mjeniB (imper. cmhb, instead of cbiruib). 

And also UMdmb, to take, which now is used only with a preposition, 
as npuHOMaTB, to receive, pres. npieivuio and npnHHMaio, and with other 
prepositions. 



102 



RUSSIAN GRAMMAR. 



According to the 13th paradigm (MyiHTb) are conjugated verbs inwm& 
and amb with a hissing consonant (X % in, in,), as one verb in ucwmb 
(with the exception of the inchoatives in amb and /&m&, which belong to 
the first conjugation). Such are: 

Hbjkbtb, to tender, pres. HBiKy, h-bskbhib. ./EesKaTB, to lie, pres. .leJKy, jeJKBnib. 
4pyjKBTb,to make friends,ApyJKy,JKaniB. 4ep?KaTB, to hold, Aepacy, AepjKaniB. 
KopyHTt, to shrivel, Kopqy, KopianiB. KpaqaTB, to cry, icpaiy, KpaqaniB. 
CipaniHTB, to frighten, CTpauiy,CTpaniHniB.MojiaTB, to be silent, MO.my, MO^qauiB. 
BoBgHTB, to wax, Bonjy, BonjauiB. CxyqaTB, to knock, cxyqy, cTyqaniB. 

^loniHTB, to gloss, Jionjy, jionjnniB. IlbiniaTB, to burn, nwuiy, nuninniB. 

C^iyjKHTB, to serve. ciyiKy, c/ryJKamb. /[biminb, to breathe, Awniy, AbinianiB. 
AevvLTb, to cure, Jieqy, jievamb. TJaniaTb, to pipe, nngry, nanjanib. 

Yihtb, to teach, yqy, yqaniB. TpenjaTB, to burst, Tpegry, TpenjaniB. 

CyniHTB, to dry, cyniy, cymaniB. Kbdxbtb, to swarm, KBiuy, Kamauib. 

According to the 14th paradigm (Jia/tHTt) are conjugated verbs in dumb 
and 3umb, as well as the non-inchoatives in dnmb (with the exception 
of zydumb, dydumb, Mep3iimb, mysicmb and some others, which belong 
to the first branch of this second conjugation) ; these verbs change d and 
3 into oic in the first person of the present. Some verbs in dumb have 
retained the Slavonian change of d into o/cd in the first person of the 
present. Such are: 

Bpe/iHTB, to hurt, pres. BpeJKy, BpeAauiB. Tpo3HTB, to menace, pres. rpoJKy,rpo3Bnib. 
T^aAHTB, to even, r.iaJKy, rjia/rnniB. Hh3htb, to lower, HBJKy, HB3BBJB. 

IU,a/uiTB, to spare, nia/iy, nja/jumb. Ysbtb, to narrow, yJKy, y3aniB. 

Poabtb, to bring forth, powy, poABnib. Mopo3BTb, to freeze, Mopoacy, Mopo3BniB. 

vly/lHTB, to tin, Ay>Ky, JiyAaniB. Bo3btb, to carry, BOJKy, B03Bmb. 

HyAHTB, to compel, Hyacy, HyAaniB. Bbabtb, to see, BHHty, (imp. bbab and jkab) 

By/iHTB, to waken, <5yjKy, CyAaniB. I\/iHA'fcTb, to look, r-iaacy, rjiaAiinib. 

Boahtb, to lead, bojkv, boabiub. Cbabtb, to sit, caacy, cbabhib. 

CepAaiB, to anger, cepiKy, cepAamB. CMepA'BTB, to stink, cniepacy, cMepAaniB. 

CyABTB, to judge, cyacy, cyABiuB. Y6BAUTt, to persuade, /uf.ydBJKAy, o^eabdjb 

Xoabtb, to go, xoJKy, xoahiub. HarpaABTb, to reward, HarpaacAy,paABmB. 

Tpy3BTB, to lade, rpyacy, rpy3Bmb. Bo36yABTB, to excite, B036yatAy, dyABnib. 

BjiB3aTB, to approach, 6M?Ky, 6Ammab. YnpeAaTb, to prevent, ynpeJKAy,ynpeABnib. 

According to the 15th paradigm (Bfl3aTi>) are conjugated some verbs 
in 3amb, zamb and danib, which change 3 , z and d into oic for all the 
persons of the present , as well as for the inflections formed from this 
tense. These are: 

Ma3aiB, to anoint, pres. Maaty, Maacenib. T.iOAaTB, to gnaw, pres. ivio>Ky, ivioAenib. 
PB3aTB, to cut, piiJKy, pBaceniB. And thus the following verbs which be- 

Ka3atB, to show, icaaty, KaaceuiB. long also to the 1st br.oflst conjug. 

Ka3axtca, to seem, Kaatycb, Kaacenibca. 4BflraTB, to move, ABaaty and ABiiraio. 
Ha3aiB, to thread, HBaty, iraaceniB. TaraTBca, to be at law, Taa?ycB and rarocB. 

yiB3aTB, to lick, .iBJKy, jubKeniB. CTpyraiB, to plane, cTpyjKy and CTporaio 

Bpbi3raTB, to splash, dpbi3acy, Cpbis'tfenib. (instead of cmpyzdw). 

According to the 16th paradigm (iuaTHTB) are conjugated verbs in 
mumb, as well as the non-inchoatives in mnmb (with the exception of 



Lexicology. — the vekb. 103 

some verbs in mumb which belong to the 20th paradigm), which change 
m into h in the first person of the present. Such are: 

Bhhthtb, to screw, pres. BHHqy, BHHTunib. KaTHib, to roll, pres. Kaqy, KaTHUiB. 

3ojOTHit, to gild, 30^oqy, 30jiothiub. Mojothtb, to thrash, Mo.ioqy,MO.a6THniB. 

3a6oTHTb, to busy, 3a66qy, 3a6oTHnib. Cbbthtb, to light, cBlmy, cbbthuib. 

HopTHTb, to spoil, nopqy, nopTHnib. IHyTHTb, to joke, niyqy, niyTHnib. 

MyTHib, to muddy, Myqy, mvthuib. Kojothtb, to knock, KOJioqy, kojothhib. 

KpyiHTb, to twist, Kpyqy, KpyraniB. BepiBTB, to turn, Bepqy, BepTHnib. 

Mbthtb, to aim, Mtqy, MBTHnib. AerhTb, to fly, Jieqy, JieTHniB. 

TpaTHTb, to spend, Tpaqy, TpaTHiuB. nbixTBTb, to puff, nuxqy, nuxTHnib. 

According to the 17th paradigm (iuaKaTL) are conjugated several verbs 
in mamb and Kamb , which change m and k into t for all the persons 
of the present , and for the inflections formed from this tense. Such 
are: 

HpaiaTB, to hide, pres. npaiy, npaqenib, K^HKaiB, to call, pres. Kjmqy, K^nqeiuB. , 
EopMOiaib, to murmur, <5opMOiy,M6qeiub. CKaicaTb, to Ieap,CKaqy, CKaqenib. 
.leneiaib, to chatter, jieneqy, jeneqenib. Tb'iKaTb, to thurst, Tbiqy, TbiqeniB. 
TonTaib, to tread down,Tonqy, xonqeuiB. And thus the following verbs which be- 
Xjonoxaib, to bustle, xaonoqy, nbqeuib. long also to the 1st br. of the 1st conjug. 
Xoxoiaxb, to laugh aloud, xoxoqy, oqeniB. A^iKaxb, to long, ajqy and a^Kaio. 
Illenxaxb, to whisper, iuenqy, menqewb. flicaTb, to hiccup, nqy and HKaio. 
IIJeKOxaxb, to tickle, njeKoqy, oqenib. XHb'iKaxb, to sob, xHhiqy and xmiKaio. 

Ky^axxaxb, to cackle ,Kyaaxqy, axqeniB. Mexaib, to cast, Meqy and Mexaio. 

According to the 18th paradigm QipociiTt) are conjugated verbs in 
cunib (with the exception of hydecumb and vydecumb which belong to 
the first branch of the lid conjugation), and also one non-inchoative in 
cibnib, which change c into w in the first person of the present. Such are: 

BaKcnxb, to black, pres. Baicniy, BaKcnniB. Pochtb, to bedew, pres.poiuy, pocnnib. 
B-Bcnxb, to weigh, Bi>my,Bi>CHnib. Btciixb, to madden, Gsniy, CbcHmb. 

KBacHXb, to leaven, KBainy, KBacnnib. Tacnxb, to put out, raniy, racauib. 
KpacHib, to colour, Kpaiuy, Kpacanib. Mschtb, to knead, Mtmy, MBcanib. 
KocuTb, to mow, Koniy, Kociimb. Hocaib, to bear, Homy, Hocnnib. 

TpycHTb, to be afraid, xpymy, TpycaniB. Bhcbtb, to hang, Bnniy, bhchiub. 

According to the 19th paradigm (nucaTb) are conjugated some verbs 
in camb and xamb, which change c and x into ui for all the persons 
of the present, as well as for the inflections formed of this tense. These 
are: 

ILiHcaTb,to dance, pres. n^amy, n-iamenib.IIaxaTB, to plough, pres. naruy, nanienib. 
IIoacaTb, to gird, noaniy, noanienib. And thus the two following verbs which 

Tecaxb, to hew, Teniy, TemeniB. belong also to the 1st br. of the 1st conjug. 

'Jecaib, to comb, qemy, qerueuib. KojbixaTb,to swing, KO^bimy and KO^bixaio 

BpexaiB, to yelp, dpeniy, 6penienib. MaxaTB, to fan, Maniy, MameniB and Maxaio. 

According to the 20th paradigm (iiicthtl) are conjugated verbs in 
cmumb and the non-inchoatives in cmwmb, which change cm into w, in 
the first person of the present. Some verbs in mumb, which have re- 
tained the Slavonian change of m into ui> , belong also to this para- 
digm. Such are: 



104 



RUSSIAN GRAMMAR. 



rpycTHTB,to grieve, pres. rpynjy,yciHniB.EoraxHTB, to enrich, pres. 6oraisy,6oraTHiuB 
Tocthtb, to visit, ronjy, rocxnnib. IIpexuxB, to forbid, npenjy, npexuniB. 

KpecTHTB, to christen, Kpenjy, KpecxHiUB. Cbathtb, to sanctify, CBanjy, CBaxaniB. 
Mocthtb, to floor, MOgjy, mocthiub. CbiTHTB, to satiate, cwnjy, chxhuib. 

lecxaxb, to treat, lenjy, lecxanib. Xhxhxb, to ravish, xunry, xnxHniB. 

BjtecTBTB, to shine, Clergy, Ciecxiinib. Hocbthtb, to visit, fut. nocBnjy, ctxnniB. 
CBHciiTB, to whistle, CBHnjy, cbhcxhhib. Ykpoihxb, to appease, yjcponry, KpoiamB. 
XpycxiiB, to cranch, xpyay, xpycxBuib. CoicpaxHXB, to shorten, coicpanry, KpainuiB. 
IIpocTHTB,to pardon, fut. nponjy, cxiiniB. IIpocBBxaxB, to enlighten, npocBlsnry,iHiu& 
HycTHTB, to let go, nynjy, nycxnniB. Bo3BpaiHib, to return, B03Bpanjy, BpaxnniB. 

The verbs npocTHTt, nycTiiTB, hocbthti. and following, are the perfect 
aspects of npoiu,dmb, nycxdmb, nocTbw,drm , yKpow,dmb , coKpaiqdmb, 
npocGTbuijdmb , eosepaui^mb; thus the inflections npomy, nyiny, noctmy, 
yKpomy, etc., are future tenses. 

According to the 21st paradigm (ucKSLTb) are conjugated some verbs 
in cKamb and cmamb, as well as four verbs in mamb, which change ck 
and cm, or m, into w, for all the persons of the present, and for the 
inflections formed of this tense. These are : 

ILiecKaTB,to splash, pres.n^enjy,n.ieigeniB. PonxaiB, to murmur, pres. ponnjy, ponffieniB 
Pb'iCKaTB, to run, piinjy, pb'iujeuib. CitpeJKexaxb, to gnash, CKpeJKeniy,JKeiijeiub. 

IIojiocKaTB, to rinse, no^ionjy, nojoigeiub. Tpenexaxb, to tremble, Tpenenjy, nenjeuib. 
CBHCTaiB, to whistle, CBHigy, cBunjeniB. And thus the two following verbs which 
XaecTaTB, to lash, xjeniy, x.ienjeuiB. belong also to the 1st br. of the 1st conjug. 
XBocTaTB, to brush, xsoniy , xconjemB. BjiHCTaTB,shine,dJienjy, enjeniB and BJinciaio 
K^eBeTaTB, to slander, Kjeoenjy, enjemB. IIpiJCKaTB,to sprinkle, npiinjy andpnucicaio 

Third conju- According to the 22d paradigm (miyTb) are conjugated verbs in ttymb, 
gation. as we ji as f our Yer jj S m amb an( j one in ^^ w hich have in the pre- 
sent y, observing that some of these verbs, accented on the last syl- 
lable in the first person of the present, transfer the accent to the pen- 
ultima in the second and other persons of the present. The perfect 
aspect of unity belongs also to this paradigm, but the form ny of these 
verbs is a future tense. Such are : 

ToHytB, to sink, pres. TOHy,TonemB. KnHyxB, to cast, fut. KHHy, KHneniB. 
PflXHyxBca, to be crazed, paxHycB,eniBca.BepHyxB, to turn, BepHy, BepHeniB. 

/KasKAaxB, to desire, acaJKAy, JKaJKAeuiB. CBHcnyXB, to whistle, CBucHy, cbhchciub. 

OpaxB, to cry, opy, openib. TpaHyib, to thunder, rpaHy, rpaHeniB. 

GocaxB, to suck, cocy, coceiub. TjiflHyxb, lo look, rjiaHy, iviHHenib. 

CxoHaxb, to groan, cxoHy, cxoHemb. 4BHHyib, to move, ABHHy, ABHHeniB. 

PeBBXb, to roar,peBy, peBeuiB. 06iaaHyxB,to cheat, o6inaHy, o6MaHenu>. 

The verb cmoHdmb belongs also to the first branch of the 1st conju- 
gation, having in the present : ctohv , cTOHeuib , and CTOHaro, CTOHaemt, 
etc. The verb opdmb , in the sense of to plough , belongs to the first 
branch of the Hd conjugation. 

According to the 23d and 24th paradigms (coxHyTb an( j B flnyT&) are 
conjugated the inchoative verbs in rtymb, which in the preterit syncop- 
ate the termination nyjfb in s if this termination is preceded by a con- 
sonant, and in ^5 ifit is preceded by a vowel (neut. jio, fern. Jid). Such are: 



Lexicology. — the verb. 105 

BjieKHytb, to fade, fret. 6jieK'B,KJio,K^a. rjaxnyxB, to smell, pret. nax-B, xjio, xaa. 

3a6HyTB, to freeze, 3h6t>, 6ao, 6asl. Mokhytb, to grow wet, mok-b, kjio, K.aa. 

KncHyxB, to turn sour, khci, cjo, cia. Ba3HyxB, to sink in, Baai), 3jio, 3Jia. 

Mep3HyTt, to freeze, Mep3"B, 3.10, 3^a. racHyxB, to go out, racB, cjio, oaa. 

ra6HyTB, to perish, rnfjib, 6jio, 6^a. TaxHyxB, to grow still, THx^, xjo, xjia. 

46xHyTB, to die, Aoxt, xjio, xja. CxhinyxB, to cool, cxbmt>, jio, Jia. 

And also the prepositional verb ynin6iiTB , to contuse (and with other 
prepositions, perfect aspect of ywu6dmb), which has in the future yuiu- 
6y, yinHOeuiB, and in the preterit yuriiG'B, yniridjo, yuw6.ia, etc. 

According to the 25th paradigm (TepeTB) are conjugated verbs in 
epemb , which have in the present py, and which syncopate also the • 

preterit, observing that mepemb and nepemb transfer in the feminine 
gender of the preterit the accent to the last syllable. These are: 

MepeTB, to die, pres. Mpy, MpeniB ; pret. Mept, Mepja, pjo ; pan. 
IlepexB, to press, — npy, npeniB; — nept, nepaa, pjio ; pja. 

And also the verb cmepmu, pres. CTpy, CTpeinB ; pret. CTepT>, p^a, p-flo, 
which now is used only with a preposition , as : npociepTB , pacnpo- 
cTepTB, to extend. 

58. — The irregular verbs of the Russian language are di- irregular verbs. 
vided into three classes : 1) the monosyllabic verbs in rm> 
preceded by a vowel; 2) some dissyllabic verbs mmb, which 
in some inflections do not follow the general rules of the 
conjugation > and 3) the verbs with an irregular termination 
(in sm&, cmo, ub, mu and mi), as is seen in the following table. 

Among the monosyllabic verbs there are some which are regular and 
conjugated according to the paradigms of conjugations. These are : 

3HaTB, to know, 1.1, pres. 3HaK>, 3HaeniB. Tjhtb, to corrupt, II. 1, pres. tjih), TjIhuib. 

IIxaxB, to push, — nxaio. TMHTB,to darken, — tmio. 

licaiB, to clash, — mcaio. E/rfiTB, to wake, — 6410. 

TptTB, to warm, 1.4, pres. rpiio. 3pfiTB, to see, — 3pio. 

3p-6TB, to ripen, — spin. Mjkhtb, to twinkle, H.3.pres. amy, mjkhmb. 

BLitTB,to be stupified, — M-iiio. Mhihtb, to cover with moss, pres. Muiy. 

IIptTB, to stew, — npiio. Tujhtbch, to endeavour, — TnjycB. 

Pfl*TB, to redden, — paiio. MiaTB, to hurry, — Miy. 

Cm*tb, to dare, — CMiio. //3wm&(npoH3HTB),topierce,II.4, HJKy,H3HniB 

CntTB, to ripen, — cdbio. .Ibcthtb, to flatter, II.7,pres..«Bnjy,.aBCTHniB. 

T^itb, to rot, — TjI-bh). Mcthtb, to avenge, — Mnjy, mcthoib. 

4jihtb, to prolong,II.l,pres.flJno, fljiuniB. THyxB, to bend, III.l, pres. my, nienjB. 

4mhtb, to swell, — amh>. .flBHyniB, to stick, — JiBHy. 

3jhtb, to irritate, — 3JM). M3myTB,to turn sour, — Bnrsy. 

Mhhxb, to think, — mhh); MKHyxB, to shut, — MKHy. 

Chhtbch, to dream, imp. chhtch. CHyxB, to fall asleep, — CHy. 

The following table of irregular verbs gives also the iterative aspect 
and the passive participle, inflections which in these verbs do not fol- 
low always the general rules of the formation. 

Reiff Russian Grammar. 10 



106 



RUSSIAN GRAMMAR. 



r 









|,I 






i a 3 

• ■3 g 

• » "2 

• a s 



.1'. 



« I -S -S •« 



I S i f i 



39 « » SB 

. a 2 3 a 

S B B E SB 
S •« "5 '5 •« 
•a; w O et " 



. OS sH . » . 

I ft 2 3 I 

' S g B I 



' •© § -« 
5s 



a 3 

. H fa 



s ; 

s \ 

.-* •< 

e ; 






© <a H © © © 



£ h « £ *> 2 



SUesS 



P. >,'S 

^ «g K 



S »B 3« "" WB >3S 0S9 3a «fl 
« - -is? - , 
O » SB 



■S • 11 4 



© © o, © © 



rf .**"*««* , s - g 3 3 3 » ^ O.O. tf « £ S » jf i g" b" 3* S ; 

a. u o 3 a «; a ySB»©Sw'Q«gwa S£p.p,*£Hge 



s- s; 



•B *S 

B «5 



3-3 







•a : . 

fa wa . w: 
'5 S £ *• 

B a >m e 

Q. >, § * 

»© «5 V, c 


1 


fa J3 
-e« fa 

a « 

a s 
ft 3 


.a 

H 

•« 

1 


«a h J 

'2 » •* 

« B ea 

2 a s 
P. fa « 


S H ** 

2 DO O 

a S b 
a ps »j 


H 

•« 

S3 

u 
BS 


1 «g 

•a s 


fa 
'2 
3 

■ 


II 

fa B 


1 JJ ^ rf 

• fa fa f- 

• •« •« •« 

• o, su « 

•BBS 

• <0 «J M 


S-cS-cS.g .-«-« 

'« a, ■: « . E « 

ft B B S . B B 


■a 


ex s 

S 3 


a 




© 

© 

in 

3 

a, 
o 








> 


fa 


* © 


JS 


«5 : 

© • 
Si • 

« • a 

b :« 

© . b 


£ 


•J 


a5 

CO 

° a 


a 






© st^ 


be v 


^ 


i 


© '• 

O.JS 
ei © 



S S: 



^ I 



Lexicology. — the verb. 



107 



2 2 



>a OsiaH 



• t « -3 ■« •« 



* S F » S S. 



O Sj H C O H 



(5 K iS B B B S 



H H *P M 



K K © B f- >» 



«««5«5«!H«UWD ,, 



B 

|: :-S ; : : :§ :* 

• • ■ ••> « • o 

■ • • o • • • • o • «? 

::: 4g ::::"* • a 

• ' & - '. '. I ! * *•« 

" "»e-c6 " * . ! 3 5 e 

- : -5 s : . a m a 



«3 < 



u a a b e 

"? t- w u 43 



I I I 



PS 

** -S3 •= 

© u. * 

a * « 






<* S ^ 

S3 S H 

K *» © 



6« f8 jQ & 

t" ^ f f 

•£»>>>>>> 

2 t, is ie 

5 "S H o 



ili-fi fi 



* £ 



to u 

>><0 




* : ■* 



-a to 

8 



« 5 






S B 



2 H' 



' a 



3 a 



,<»~. "t E" © U « B" ».< 



3 : : :| 

S : : : = 

o . . . ^ 


f- 

5- 


( 1 

• 


j 
& 

■R 

B 
2 

«. 


! 

B 

B 


• 


'ead 

tp. to become.. . 

p. to put 

t». to give 


a 


■" a 


S 


t 

».c 


© 

o 
. 

(5U 




- — ■■■ — -_ a • a • 

RlBa>ajO©4)4)0SR!BB5 " '" ~— — 

h &. « 5<o a b^-js-^SSS^* 5 

43 w O. © B S3 E •? CO 



>,«o © •>» 5 «t •>, ^ •>» «s n i 

■' © «? B,a) *; « D. s,A-t; 
VDO'OasaBEuBu 



a. d. a © 



fi B B? 

- ^ £ >> "^ "^ 

h f- qj a> *a 

« oj a *? a 
5 S B B B) 



s s 






I 



I J a 



O « <U B, •* SB 

es n, n. m ° "fl 

B H t- W «0 S3 



ri <£ >• « a 
j»" o o o © o o 



3 — 

2 © 



iS O..S 



Kb.* . © 

8 " * o.S 



S<2 



i e i 



S I -s 4 h £ 



>a a 



g H 43 05 « 



2 « s 
lie 



• ^ 



•2*' 



- - - f. 



,jj - ^ j j: x x j 
' f,£5£ * * s H 



, © © ©. *^ 



5"« 



rt S h 



«HS*n^S 



= K K 9 

2l » » R 



» 4) 

© a 
a. a 



-a 5 h-s ?? «a f? h h J 



55 -a 5? £ 



El 



■^15 ft 



B« v_/ 



«j x » o « « 5 b « e » » « « J S 
© «! ft.©. '?«o<Q t o««a** « JS 5- « 



*r^ 



108 



RUSSIAN GRAMMAR. 




a s b a . a 

g . B B -o >s B 

K )g G « S 2 K 

a s s «) 2 = ^ 

"a a> p, s ••*> -a 

V £ e< *> « & p. 

g g 03 f- ?5, Q H 

O-a <© o a a « 



. 3H 

sa a • 

3 B« 

■ a a 3 • 
a :« a ! 



0) r* p< 



3 3 
a a 



09 


03 


O 


-a 


O 


63 






P 






H 


s 




C3 




C 




© 




0] 


© 


^ 


i. 




























>, 


Cm 


be 


a 


o 


'- 


J3 


O 


"a 5 
© 


.-3 


s_ 


03 


03 


en 


© 



••>» r bo m © £ 

*"© — £ ^ — 
•2 ^ 2 <£ 



■a 03 4> e- -a 



~ .m «a -a i-i „ - a -a 
3 -a fi p. » 5 g o 

=!r£ao3H?S.5f- 

as a ff <c " a a 



Ji ^ „-B ^ ^ 



p. u t* ai «3 as 



© xa 03 03 



.©§-s 

-as "1 ■« 
«? -a ^ 



a - .2 

h u •£* 

a * g 

© a a 

W bD S" 
<U c© 

■2§e 



a .5 



sa- 



1 3 ^ ► 'C 03 



- = •«* ta g ■ "V» » * ■ -g . ' g 

a.2£p.o3 te^pt-t-tosiaM^as 

>=; - =^03He.St-:a3©^©:O3:a3©*a 



■S ** f> a. 




O — ' 


.S -a 






"rl «) 






tive 

esen 

(§ 

f th 




= © 


nfini 
e pr 
tters 
on o 




.a ** 

** 03 


— JS 03 •- 






03 *° "" C8 




„,, ■• 


■^ *- ^ e 




S-2 


*««'! 


a 


P 03 








„ tn "^ *» 




U M 


tant 
t pei 
muta 
>e of 


a - 

bx>5 "3 
.■EL£1 be 



I o i-S « a a 

"2 t. a p „« « 

-K » a- - 
•2s.. .g»-S 
2 ^ a a ° ° 

S © -S "S 03 V> *» 

|§l.f 5 "c.i 

s55|.sl 

3 u e *» ^ p. 

£ « 03 P C 03 

© -3« g °5 

-j= ^2 ©01 

<« ** • p. 03 a 

° c£ J= -5 03 ".S -« 
!Sl2 .M!S 



2 2 ^-s S g = ^ 




« ■! h e » k a,3 t. « » «? 9 a; » 5 « 



5 SI 



Lexicology. — the verb. 



109 



59. — The property of the Russian verbs to have more or Delineation of 
less aspects , is named their delineation (HanepTame) , and 
depends as well upon their exterior form as upon their mea- 
ning. With this relation the verbs , as is above mentioned 
(§ 50) , are simple (npocTtie) or prepositional (npe/j- 

JIOJKHMe). 

1. The simple verbs, which are without a preposition, can 
be complete (nojiHBie) , double (cyrytfBie) , incomplete (eg- 
noH-iLie) and defective (HeflocTaTOHHtie). The complete sim- 
ple verbs are those which designate a physical action of men 
or animals, as KH/iaTB, to throw ; nvieBaTL, to spit. The double 
simple verbs are those which express the movement of an 
acting object, as htth and xoahtb, to go; HecTH and hochtb, 
to bring. The incomplete and defective simple verbs are those 
which are not included in the two preceding subdivisions, as 
Ai^aTt, to make; hmbtb, to have. 

2. The prepositional verbs, which are formed with any 
preposition, are subdivided, relatively to their delineation, 
according as they are derivated from the incomplete, defective, 
complete or double simple verbs. — In general the delinea- 
tion of the Russian verbs, as simple as prepositional, is seen 
in the following table. 

DELINEATION OF VERBS* 



SIMPLE VERBS. 

The incomplete simple verbs have 2 as- 
pects: 

1) imperfect. 2) iterative. 

Ai-iaTb. ATLILIBaTL. 

2. The defective simple verbs have only 
the imperfect aspect. 

HMETb. 

3. The complete simple verbs have the 
3 aspects : 

1) imperfect. 2) iterative. 3) perfect of unity. 
KH/jaTL. KIWblBaTB KHHVTL. 

4. The double simple verbs are two verbs 
which have together 3 aspects: 

1) definite imp, 2) indefinite imp. 3) iterative. 



Hecni. 



HOCHTb. 



HaiflHBaTb, 



II. PREPOSITIONAL VERBS. 

1. Formed from the incomplete simple verbs, 
the prepositional verbs have 2 aspects : 

1) imperfect. 2) perfect of duration. 

o64"B^biBaTb. o64'E./iaTb. 

2. Formed from the defective simple verbs, 
they have only the aspect perfect of duration. 

B03'bIIM'ETb. 

3. Formed from the complete simple verbs, 

they have the 3 aspects : 

1) imperfect. 2) perf. of duration. 3) per f. of unity.. 

3aKbi4MBaTb. 3aKH4aTb. 3aKi'myT&, 

4.Formed from the double simple verbs, there 
are two various verbs, each with 2 aspects : 

aKromtherfe/Sntfeverb. b) from the indefinite verb. 
1) imperfect. 2) perfect. 1) imperfect. 2) perfect. 

BblHOCHTb. BblHeCTH. BblHaUIIIBaTb. BblHOCHTb, 



110 



RUSSIAN GRAMMAR. 



Simple verbs. go. — The incomplete simple verbs are those which do not 
designate a physical action properly so called, neither a 
movement of a place to another. These verbs have two as- 
pects: 1) the imperfect aspect, and 2) the iterative aspect. 
The first, which is the radical form of the verb, ends in mb 7 
ub, mu or uifU, and the latter in ueamb, ueamb, eamb or amb T 
and is formed from the imperfect aspect , as is seen in the 
following examples. 

In the formation of the iterative aspect the tonic accent is placed on 
the terminations eamb and amb, whilst in bieamb and ueamb it is placed 
on the antepenultima , and if in this syllable is an o, this vowel is 
changed into d. We must yet observe that the iterative aspect is seldom 
used in the infinitive, and it has in general only the preterit tense; e. 
g. He nuedmb Te6i Bima , you ought not to drink wine; owb moicdjfo 
BepxoMi), he rid often, but this inflection is necessary to form the pre- 
positional verbs. The table of irregular verbs , above shown (§ 58) r 
gives also the iterative aspect, which in these verbs presents some ir- 
regularities. 
1) Imperfect asp. 2) Iterative asp. 1) Imperfect asp. T) Iterative asp* 



TaAaTB, to guess, 1. 1. . ra/ibiBaTb. 

/[yMaTt, to think, — . . ayMWBaTB. 

/J'B.iaTi,, to make, — . . AijBiBaTB. 

HrpaTb, to play, — . . urptiBaTb. 

KyTaTb, to wrap, — . KyTBiBaTB. 

MoTaTB, to wind, — . MaTWBaTL. 

PadoTaTb, to work, — . pa6aTBiBaTB. 

IIJynaTT), to sound, — . mynbrcaTb. 

3naTb, to know — . . 3HaBaTb. 

KoBaib, to forge, 1. 2. . KoBbmaTb. 

PncoBaTb, to draw, — . pncoBbiBaTb. 

COB-BTOBaTb, tO COUnsel, — COBliTBIBaTB. 

BoeBaTb, to war, — . . Boe'BbiBaTb. 
/jHeBaTb, to pass the day, — AHeBbiBaTB. 
HoneBaTb, to pass the night, Ho^eBbiBaTb, 
Ty^arb, to take a walk, 1.3. ry.anBaTB. 
FaBHHTb, to equal, — . . paBHHBaTB. 
CMtaTbca, to laugh, — . CM*BHBaTbca, 

BiflTb, tO blow, — . . BfcBEtTB. 

CiaTb, to sow,— . . c-BBaTb. 
CaadiJTb, to grow weak,1.4. caaosBaTB. 
FpfcTb, to warm, — . . rp^BaTb. 
ToBBTb, to keep fast, — raMUBaTb. 



BpaHHTb, to scold, II, 1. 
Ila^iiTb, to fire, — . 
Mo JHTb, to pray, — 
Ciiopnib, to contend, — 
/JapnTb, to give, — . . 
4pa3HHTb, to provoke, 
Eo-iiTb, to ache, — 

CMOTp-ETB, tO lOOk, — 

TopiTB, to burn, — . 
BejiTB, to order, — 
3ptTB, to see, — . . 
IIohtb, to give to drink, 
K.aeiiTB, to glue, — . 
EoaTbca, to fear, — 
, IIopoTb, to rip, — . 
Mo-aoTb, to grind, — 
jliodnib, to love, II 2. 
, ,/IoBiiTb, to catch, — 
Py6nTb, to hew, — . 
KopMHTb, to nourish, — 
TomiTb, to heat, — . 
TepniTb, to suffer, — 
KmTBTb, to boil, — . 



6paHHBaTb. 

na.niBaTb. 

MEUIIBaTb, 

cnapnBaTb. 
AapnBaTb. 
ApaacHHBaTb, 
6a.iHBaTb. 

CMaTpHBaTb„ 

rapaTb. 

BCiBBaTb. 

3npaTb. 

nanBaTb. 

K.ienBaTb. 

6anBaTbca. 

napbmaTb. 

Ma^biBaTb, 

JH)6JHBaTbv 

jaB^HBaTb. 
pydaTb. 

KapMJHBaTB. 

Tau^HBaTb. 

Tepn^HBaTb-,. 

KiinaTb. 



Lexicology. — the verb. Ill 

1) Imperfect asp. 2) Iterative asp. 1) Imperfect asp. 2) Iterative asp. 

4peMaTb,to slumber, 11.2. 
CtmaTL, to strew, — 
XpoMaTL,to be lame, — . 
Aemib, to cure, II. 3, . 
CiyacHTB, to serve, — . 
TynriiTfc, to put out, — . 
MopmuTB, to wrinkle, — 
4epHtaTL, to keep, — . 
Mo^iaTb, to be silent, — 
/JwmaTb, to breathe, — . 
l\ia4HTb, to even, II. 4. . 
ropoAHTb,to enclose, — 
CyAHTb, to judge, — . . 
rpy3HTb, to lade, — 
CuAbTb, to sit, — . . 
Ba3aTb, to tie, — . . . 
ILsaTHTb, to pay, II. 5. . 
Ko.aoTHTb, to knock, — . 
Mo^on'iTb, to thrash, — 
ILflanaTb, to weep, — . 

61 . — The defective simple verbs are those which have only 
the indefinite imperfect aspect, such are the following verbs: 



ApeauHBaTb 


. Bicarb, to weigh, II. 6. . 


BbmnBaTb. 


cbinaTb. 


IlpocHTb, to ask, — . . 


npamuBaTb 


xpaMbiBaTb. 


TacHTb, to extinguish, — 


ramnBaTb. 


^einBaTb. 


IlncaTb, to write, — . . 


nucbmaTb. 


ciyjKHBaTb. 


II^acaTb, to dance, — . 


njacwBaTb. 


TymBBaib. 


IlaxaTb, to plough, — . 


naxeBaTb. 


MapmnBaTb. 


rocTiiTb, to visit, II. 7. . 


ramnBaTb. 


4epH(HBaTb. 


MocTHTb, to floor, — 


MamHBaTb. 


Ma^quBaTb. 


CHacniTb, to rig, — 


cnamHBaTb 


4bixaTb. 


HcKaTb, to seek, — 


HCKHBaTb. 


oajKiiBaTb. 


TonHyrb, to sink, III. 1. 


TonaTb. 


ropaJKHBaTb.TflHyTb, to draw, — . . 


TflTHBaTb. 


cyjKHBaTb. 


BflHyTb, to fade, — 


Bfl4aTb. 


rpyHiHBaTb. 


C6xHyTb,todry, — . . 


cwxaTb. 


CHHvHBaTb. 


IlaxHyTb, to smell, — . 


naxHBaTb. 


Bfl3LlBaTb. 


THyTb, to bend, — ♦ . 


rn6aTb. 


nja4HBaib. 


MKHyTb, to shut, — . . 


MLIKaTb. 


K0Ja4HBaTb 


. CocaTb, to suck, -- . . 


cacbmaTb. 


Mo.iainBaTi 


. IlepeTb, topres, III. 2. . 


nnpaTb. 


n^aKHBaTb. 


TepeTb, to rub, — . . 


THpaTb. 



AJbTb, to grow ruby, 1.4. 
KiACTBOBaTb, to be in misery, I. 2 
BuHHTb, to accuse, H. 1. 
B-jaa^Tb, to govern, 1.4. 
BpeAHTb, to hurt, II. 4. 
TopAHTbCfl, to be proud, II. 4. 
}Ka^iTb, to have pity, 1.4. 
}Ke.iaTb, to wish, 1. 1. 
HMbTb, to have, 1.4. 
KapaTb, to punish, 1. 1. 
.IbCTHTb, to flatter, II. 7. 
MeTraTb, to imagine, I. 1. 
MepuTb, to pacify, II. 1. 
MyapiiTb, to subtilize, II. 1. 
MarHiiTb, to mollify, II. 3. 
IIo.iAHiHaTb, to lunch, 1. 1 . 



Pa^iTb, to take care, 1.4. 
Pacn'iTb, to let grow, II. 7. 
PomaTb, to murmur, II. 7. 
PbiAaTb, to sob, 1. 1. 
CBATHTb, to sanctify. II. 7. 
CntmHTb, to hasten, II. 3. 
GxapaTbca, to endeavour, 1. 1. 
TBopiiTb, to create, II. 1. 
TepaTb, to lose, 1.3. 
ToponuTb, to hurry, II. 2. 
YMmnaTb, to refine, 1. 1. 



YMbTb, to know, I. 4. 
XnTpiiTb, to be artful, II. 1. 
XpamiTb, to preserve, II. 1. 
XoTbTb, to will, irr. 
IE[a4»Tb, to spare, II. 4. 

The defective verbs differ from the incomplete verbs in as much as 
they have not the iterative aspect, which in general is used only in 
verbs designating an ordinary, non intellectual action, and it is not found 
in poetry neither in an elevated style. 



112 



RUSSIAN GRAMMAK. 



62. — The complete simple verbs are those which designate 
ordinarily a physical action of men or animals, or, speaking 
more correctly, a visible or audible action. These verbs have 
the three aspects: 1) the imperfect, 2) the iterative, and 3) the 
perfect of unity. The two first aspects have all the properties 
of those of incomplete verbs; but the perfect aspect of 
unity ends in uymb, and is formed putting this termination 
in the place of that of the imperfect aspect, sometimes 
with a little change of the vowel , and sometimes with the 
elision of the preceding consonant, as is seen in the following 
examples. 

1) Imperfect apect. 2) Iterative aspect 3) Per f. asp. of unity. 



AxaTB, to sigh, 1. 1. 
B^HCTaTB, to shine, — 
Eo-iTaTb, to shake, — . 
I\aoTaTb, to swallow, — 
/jBHraTb, to move, 1. 1 and 
4ep3aTB ; to dare, 1. 1. 
3BBaTB, to yawn, — 
KacaTbca, to touch, — 
KBaKaTB, to quack, — 
KnBaTB, to give a nod, 
KhMtb, to cast, — . 
JonaTB, to burst, — 
HibxaTB, to smell, — 
llopxaTB, to flutter, — 
IIpBiraTB, to jump, — 
IIpa/iaTB, to bound,— 
CBepKaTB, to flash, — 
ToMaTB, to push, — 
TporaTB, to touch, — 
XapKaTB, to spit, — 
X^onaTB, to clap, — 
CoBaTB, to shove, I. 2. 
K^eBaTB, to peck, — 
ILieBaTB, to spit, — 
}KeBaTB, to chew, — 
KaULlflTB, to cough, I. J 
HBipaTB, to dive, — 
OptJiaTB, to shoot, — 
HlBBipaTB, to sling, — 
PiaTB, to throw, — . , 



axHBaTB axHVTB, III. l. 

— 6jecHyTB. — . 

, 6a^TBIBaTB 60JITHyTB, — . 

. r^aiBmaTB ooHyTB, — . 

II. 4. ABiiruBaTB and ABnraTB. ABHHyTB, _ # 

— Aep3HyTB, — . 

. 3BBBIBaTB d%BHyTb, — . 

— KOCHyTBCfl, — . 

, KBaKHBaTB KBaKHYTB, — . 

— KHBHyTB, — . 

KH^BIBaTB KHHyTB, — . 

JonBiBaTB JonHyTB, — . 

, HIOXHBaTB HBOXHyTB, — . 

. napxHBaTB nopxHyTB, — . 

npBirnBaTB npBirHVTB, — . 

npaABiBaTB. .... npaHyTB, — . 

CBepKHBaTB CBepKHyTB, — . 

Ta^KHBaTB TOJIKHyTB, — . 

TporHBaTB TpOHVTB, — . 

xapKHBaTB xapKHyTB, — . 

X-flOIIBIBaTB XJOnHVTB, — . 

. COBBlBaTB cyHyTB, — . 

KJe'BBIBaTB K.5K)HyTB, — . 

n^eBBiBaTB nAJonyrb, — 

aceBBiBaTB aceBHyTB, — . 

Kam^HBaTB KanuanyTB, — . 

HBipHBaTB HBipHyTB, — . 

CTpBJHBaTB. ♦ . . ♦ CTpBJBHyTB, — 

mBBipHBaTB uiBBipnyrB, — . 

— .... punyTB, — . 



Lexicology. — the verb. 113 

1) Imperfect aspect. 2) Iterative aspect, 3)Perf. asp. of unity. 



Ckojib3htb, to slip, II. 1. 
IlIeBe^HTt, to stir, — . 
Ko.iotb, to sting, — 
/JaBHTB, to press, II. 2. 
PydiiTB, to hew, — . . 
TpeMiTB, to thunder, — 
XpaniTB, to snore, — . 
TpenaTB, to brake, 
IU,HnaTb, to pinch, — . 
BopoimiTB, to rummage, 
E.flK)imiTB, to flatten, — 
Bii3JKaTB, to squeak, — 
/JpotfiaTB, to tremble, — 
KpimTB, to cry, — . . 
llBimaTB, to burn, — . 
TpeinaTB, to burst, — . 
rja4"BTB, to look, II. 4. 
Bpb'i3raTB, to splash, — 
.dH3aTB, to lick, — . . 
Ma3aTL, to anoint, — . 
BepT-BTB, to turn, II. 5. 
CnaKaTb, to leap, — . 
K^piKaTb, to call, — 
UlenTaTb, to whisper, — 
TpycHTB, to sprinkle, II. i 
KojbixaTB, to swing, — 
MaxaTB, to wave, — . 
lljecKaTt, to splash, II. 7 
IIpBicKaTB, to syringe, — 
CBHCTaTt, to whistle, -- 
X.iecTaTB, to lash, — . 
TpecTii, to scrape, irr. 
/[jtb, to blow, — . 
/KeHB, to burn, — . 
PBaTB, to tear, — 
GTpiHB, to shear, — 
TpacTii, to skake, — 



CKajB3nBaTb. 
nieBe^HBaTB. 
Ka^BiBaTb. 

AaB^HBaTB. 

pydaTB. . 



xpanbiBaTB 

TpenjiiBaTT>. . . . 

munbiBaTB 

BopaimiBan,. . . . 
njiibmnBaTb. . . . 

Bl'l3riIBaTB 

ApaniBaTB 

Kpi'iKHBaTB 

nb'ixHBaTt 

TpecKiiBaTb 

r^a^BiBaTB 

6pB13niBaTL. . . . 

^H3BIBaTB 

Ma3B1BaTB 

BepTBiBaTB or BepniiBaTB 

CKaKHRaTB 

KJIHKaTb 

uienTBiBaTB 

KOJIBIXIlBaTB. . . . 
MaXHBaTB 

n^ecKHBaTB 

npBICKHBaTB. . . . 
CBHCTBlBaTB. . . . 

X^eCTBlBaTb. r ' . . 

rpedaTB 

AyBaTB 

jKiiraTt 

pBlBaTB 

CTpuraTB 

TpacaTB 



CK0.1B3HyTB, III. 1 

uieBejiBiiyTB, — . 

KOJBHyTB, — . 

ziaBHyTB, — . 
pyfiHyTB, — . 
rpjwyTB, — . 
xpanHyTB, — . 
TpennyTB, — . 
mnnnyTB, — . 
BopoxnyTB, — . 
n^ibcuyTB, — . 
Bi'omyTB, — . 
ApomyTB,— . 

Kpi'lKHyTB, — . 

nBixHyTB, — . 
TpecHyTB, — . 
r.iaHyTB, — . 

6pB13HyTB, — . 
JIH3HYTB, — . 
Ma3HyTB, — . 
BepHYTB, — . 
CKOKHyTB, — . 
lUHKHyTB, — . 

mennyTB, — . 
TpyxHyra., — . 

XOJBIXHyTB, — . 

MaxHyTB, — . 
ruecHyTB, — . 
npbiCHyTB, — . 

CBHCliyTB, — . 

xjeciryTB, — . 
rpe6HyTB, — . 
AynyTB, — . 
jKiirHyTB, — . 
pBaHyTB, — . 

CTpHTHyTB, — . 
TpHXHyTB, — . 



Some verbs, as MimyTB, oOMaHyTB, noMHHyTB, BBmyTB, which are per- 
fect aspects of MimoBaTB, to pass; oGaiaHBiBaTB, to cheat; noMrmaTB, to 
mention; BBirniMaTB , to take out, have the termination of the perfect 
aspect of unity; but by their meaning they do not designate an action 
performed only once. In these verbs the letter h belongs to the root 
and not to the termination. 

Rei/f Russian Grammar. 1 1 



H4 



RUSSIAN GRAMMAR. 



Prepositional 
verbs. 



63. — The double simple verbs are those which designate 
the movement of an acting object, or sometimes a visible or 
audible action. These verbs have together three aspects: 1) the 
definite imperfect, 2) the indefinite imperfect and, 3) the 
iterative aspect. The definite aspect is the radical form, from 
which are derived both the others. These are the following 
verbs : 

i ) Definite imperfect asp. 2) Indefinite imp. asp. 3) Iterative aspect. 



E^vahtb, to ramble, II. 4. 

EpecTH, to wander, irr. . 

E-BJKaTb, to run, irr. . . 

Ba^iiTB, to throw down, II. 1 

Be3TH, to carry, irr. . . 

BecTu, to lead, irr, . . . 

MAHTb, to see, II. 4. . 

TuaTt, to drive, irr. . . 

Htth, to go, irr. . . . 

KaTHTL, to roll, II. 5. . . 

Kphbhtl, to crook, II. 2. . 

AerhTb, to fly, II. 5. . . . JieiaTB, I 1. 



6jiy)K4aTi>, 1. 1. 

6pOflHTB, n. 4. 

oiraTb, 1. 1. . 
BajaTt, I 3 . 

B03HTB, II. 4. 
BOA11TB, — . 
BHAaTB, I. 1. 
rOHflTB, I 3. 
XOAHTB, II. 4. 

KaiaTB, 1. 1. 
KpinwrB, I. 3. 



./Iomhtb, to break, II. 2. 
^I-B3tb, to climb, irr. . 
HecTH, to bring, irr. . 
IUbitb, to swim, irr. . 
IIo^3th, to crawl, irr. . 
Pohhtb, to let fall, II. 1. 
CiBimaTB, to hear, II. 3. 
Ca4HTB, to seat, II. 4 . 
TauiHTB, to trail, II. 3. . 
'B'xaTi,, to ride, irr. . 



JlOMaTB, — . . 
^a3HTB, II. 4. 
HOCHTB, II. 6. 



6paacHBaTB. 
6i>rnBaTB and 6fcraTB. 
Ba.iiraaTB. 

BaJKHBlTB. 

BaauiBaTB. 

Bl')4BIBaTB. 

raHHBaTB. 

XaJKHBaTB. 

KaniiBaTB and KaTBreaTB. 

KpiIBJHBaTB. 
•ZieTBlBaTB. 

jaMbiBaTB. 

ji"B3aT& and ^ajKimaTB. 

HaiUHBaTB. 

n^BmaTB. 

no^3aTB and naj3BmaTB. 

pamiBaTB. 

CflBIXIIBaTB. 

caaiHBaTB. 

TaCKHBaTB. 

-B3H(HBaTB and -&3)KaTB. 



n^aBaTB. 1. 1. 
no^3aTB ; — . 

POHHTB, I. 3. 
CJIBIXaTB, I. 1. 

eaw&TB, — 
TacKaTB, — 

"B3AHTB, II. 4. 

The Russian language has some verbs which, with a double termi- 
nation, do not designate a movement; such are: 6.iHCTaTb and foecrETB 
to shine; mbphtb and MipaTB , to measure; CBuciaTB and cbhctbtb , to 
whistle. These verbs do not belong to the class of the double verbs; 
they are two various forms which have the same meaning, and which 
do not express the definite or indefinite nature of the action. 

64. — The prepositional verbs are formed from the simple 
verbs by means of any preposition. The prepositions , when 
they are joined to a verb, subject it to sundry changes 
either in the voice, in the aspect and time, or in the meaning. 

1. A neuter verb sometimes takes with the preposition the 
active meaning, as : cnaTt, to sleep, and npocnaTt, to pass in 



Lexicology. — the verb. 115 

sleeping; 6bitb , to be , and 3a6fciT& , to forget; iuiaicaTb , to 
weep , and Bbin^aKaTt, to obtain by weeping. 

2. The influence of a preposition on the time and aspect is 
more important than that on the voice. A simple verb, taking 
a preposition, receives a more restricted meaning. Thus, by 
joining to a preposition, the iterative aspect becomes im- 
perfect , and the imperfect aspect becomes perfect. But this 
latter remains a perfect aspect even with a preposition, as 
is seen by the two following examples. 

Simple figure. Prepositional figure. 

/jBHiiyTB, to move, j , . .. BABimyTB, to move in, j perf. asp. 

EpocnTB, to throw, j perf ' a6p ' ' muj Ha6pocnTb, to throw on. j of unity. 

553;! **«**«•«'.• • • S X^k,\p^f.a SP .of duration. 

ABHraTB or ABiirnBaTB, ( it0lt , nti „ nQn B/iBnraTb or BABriruBaTb, I imperfect 
6pacBiBaTB 3 j uermveas P- H a6pacBiBaTB, | asp. 

3. The acceptation of the verb , independently of the com- 
pletion of the action, is modified by the meaning of the pre- 
position, as is seen in the two following examples: xoahtl 
or htth, to go, and HMaTt or stl, to take. 

Bxo4htb, bohti'i, to go in. BHHMaTb, bhhtb, to attend to 

BocxoAHTb, B30HTii, to go up. B3HMaTb, to levy. B3flTt, to take. 

BbixoAHTb, bbihth, to go out. Bo34BiMaTB, to raise. 

4oxoahtb, aohth, to come to. BocnpHHnMaTb,BocupHHHTb,to receive 

3axoAHTb, sanrii, to go behind. BbimiMaTb, Bb'myTb, to take out. 

HcxOAHTb, H30HTH, tO gO OUt. 4 OHHM aTb,AOHflTb,tOgettheremainder 

HaxoAHTb, HafiTii, to go upon. 3aHHMaTb, 3anaTb, to borrow. 

HncxoAHTb, hhsobth, to go down. H3HHMaTb, H3HaTb, to take out. 
OGxoAHTb, 060HT11, to go round. HaHUMaTb, HaHHTb, to hire. 

OTxoAtiTb, oTOHTii, to go away. OdHHMaTb, odHaTb, to embrace. 

HepexoAHTb, nepefiTu, to go over. OTHHMaTb, oTHHTb, to take away. 
IlpeBOCxoAUTb, npeB3o0Tu, to surpass. IlepeHHMaTb, nepeHATb, to intercept. 
IIoxoAHTb, to resemble. IIoiIth, to go. IIoHHMaTb, noHHTb, to understand. 
IloAxoAHTb, noAOHTii, to go under. flouiviaTb, to catch. 
IlpeAxoAHTb, to go before. IIoAHHMaTb, noAHarb , to take up. 

ITpuxoAHTb, npiuTH, to come in. IIpeAnpHHHMaTb, -HHTb, to undertake. 

IlpoxoAHTb, npouTii, to go through. JIpumiMaTb, npimarb, to accept. 
flponcxoAHTb, npoH30HTn, to proceed. IIpunoAHUMaTT., -noAHHTb, to raise up 
PacxoAHTbca,pa3ouTiica, to go asunder. IlpoHHMaTb, npoiraTb, to put through. 
CxoAHTb, couth, to go down. PasHHMaTb, pa3HaTb, to take asunder. 

CHHCxoAHTb,cmi30HTii, to condescend. CmiMaTb, CHflTb, to take off. 
YxoAHTb, yuTii, to go away. YiiHMaTb, yHHTb, to repress. 



116 



RUSSIAN GRAMMAR. 



The two preceding examples show that the prepositions which are 
joined to verbs , are : b (bo) , B3 (B30 , B03) , bm , 40 , 3a , 113 (1130), 
Ha, Ha4 (Ha/jo), hh3 (hh30), or 06 (060), ot (oto), nepe or npe, no, 
noA (no4o), npn, npo, pa3 (pa3o), c (co), y. We must remark that the 
prepositions which end in a vowel, never undergo a change, whilst 
those which end in a consonant, take the vowel 0, when they have to 
be united to a verb which begins with two or three consonants, as well 
as to the verb iitti'i (>/. umu) , in which the vowel u besides that 
changes into the semi-vowel (u). 

The prepositions 6e3 (6e3o) , npe4 (npe^o) , and also c (co) in the 
meaning of a reciprocal action, modifying the acceptation of a verb, do 
not communicate to it the meaning of the completion of an action. 
Joined to one of these prepositions , the verb remains in its imperfect 
aspect, as : 6e3iecTiiTb, to dishonour ; npeABUij-bTb, to foresee; coAiHCTBo- 
BaTh , to cooperate. It is the same with adverbs used sometimes for 
prepositions , e. g. npoTimocTOHTb , to resist; mhmohtth, to come by. 

Care must be taken not to confound the prepositional verbs with the 
verbs which are derived from nouns formed with a preposition , as : 
pa3yMiTb, to understand, frompa3VM'b, intelligence; homhhtl, to remem- 
ber , from naMHTL , memory; cob-bcthtbch , to have a conscience , from 
cobectb, conscience. These verbs belong to the class of the incomplete 
simple verbs. 

65* — The prepositional verbs , with regard to their deli- 
neation, differ among them, according as they are for- 
med from the defective, incomplete, complete or double sim- 
ple verbs. 

1 . Those which are derived from a defective simple verb, have 
only the perfect aspect, which is purely the imperfect aspect 
of the simple verb, joined to one of the prepositions above 
enumerated. Such are: 

IlojKe.iaTB, to wish, 1. 1. Bos^hm-btb, to have, 1.4. 

IIoKapaTb, to chastise, — . SdLBAW&Tb, to possess, — . 

OTMeiT&Tb, to imagine, — . CyMiTb, to know, — . 

BocnbuaTb, to burst into flames, — . OmeHiiTbCfl, to whelp, II. 1. 
HapbuaTbca, to wail, — . OcTeneHHTbca, to grow sedate, — . 

IlocTapaTbca, to endeavour, — . Bo3rop4iiTbca, to be proud of, II. 4. 

Ome^bMOBaTb, totreatlikearogue,I.2. llonwiiTb, to spare, — . 
PacTepaTb, to lose, 1. 3. 3aipeneTaTb, to tremble II. 7. 

Bo3oniaTb(pr.63eom'^m6),tocryout,-. IIo6.ieKHyTb, to fade, III. 1. 

Some verbs derived from the defective simple verbs, have 
also the imperfect aspect , which is formed from the iterative 
aspect, not used in the simple verb and taken in its contrac- 
ted form, as will be seen later (2. b). 



Lexicology. — the verb. 117 

The preceding and the following examples show that the perfect as- 
pect of a prepositional verb is formed from the imperfect aspect of the 
simple verb , by the mere joining of a preposition , without any change 
in the termination of the verb. Further, the infinitive and the impe- 
rative from imperfect become perfect (CTapaibca, to endeavour; CTa- 
paiica, endeavour, and nocTapaTbca , to use all one's endeavours; 
nocTapaiiCH, use all your endeavours); the present (ciaparocb, / endea- 
vour) becomes a perfect future (nocTaparocb, / shall endeavour, I shall 
use all my endeavours), and the imperfect preterit (cTapa.ica, I endea- 
voured) becomes a perfect preterit (nocTapa.ic/i , / have used all my 
endeavours'). 

As the prepositions serve generally to form the perfect preterit and 
future of the defective simple verbs, custom only can show what is the 
preposition which a verb takes in order to designate the completion of 
an action. Thus 3« expresses a beginning; no, a part; do, the finishing; 
om, the discontinuance; npo, all the time; c, y, 3a, no, the completion 
and simultaneousness ; ebi, U3, 06, npu, nepe, a totality. E. g. 3aroBopiiTt, 
to begin to speak; iioroBopirrb, to speak a little; AoroBopi'iTb , to finish 
speaking; OTroBopriTb , to leave off speaking; nporoBopiiTb , to pass the 
time in speaking; CA^Aaib, to have made; ynpacTb, to have stolen); 3a- 
CMfcfiTbca, to have laughed; noKpacuiTb, to have blushed; Bbixo^uTb, ncxo- 
AiiTb, ofixoAUTb , to have gone all over; npiidb, to have eaten all up ; 
nepeA^aTb, to have made all. 

2. Derived from the incomplete simple verbs , the prepo- 
sitional verbs have two aspects: 1) the perfect aspect, and 
2) the imperfect aspect , which are formed, the former from 
the imperfect, and the latter from the iterative aspect of 
the simple verb, at first without any change in the termina- 
tions , at other limes with contraction , sometimes even with 
and without contraction at the same time : occasionally they 
vary widely from the general rules for the formation of the 
prepositional verbs. We sometimes find: a quite irregular for- 
mation, the want of one of the two aspects perfect or imper- 
fect , the loss or non-existence of the simple verb which has 
formed the prepositional verb, and several other irregularities 
which are mentioned below. 

We must remark that in the prepositional verbs the tonic accent re- 
mains upon the same syllable as in the simple verb, with exception of 
the verbs formed with the preposition 6W, which in the perfect aspect 
transfer the accent to this preposition. Some monosyllabic verbs, taking 
a preposition , transfer also , in the preterit of the perfect aspect , the 
accent to the preposition ; as : yMep-b , oinepi, npiiowjii , Haia,n>, etc., from 
yaiepeTb, to die; oTnepeTb, to open; npn6b'iTb, to arrive; HaiaTb, to begin. 



118 



RUSSIAN GRAMMAR- 



a) The perfect and imperfect aspects of the prepositional 
verb preserve both the terminations of the imperfect and ite- 
rative aspects of the simple verb. Such are : 
1) Perfect, asp. T) Imperfect asp. 1) Per feet asp. 2) Imperfect asp. 



Yra£aTb,to guess, I, 1. . . yra/jbiBaTb, 1. 1. 
06AfMaTL ; to deliberate,— oG^yMbiBaTb, — . 
OTA^^aTB, to finish, — . OT^ijibiBaTb, — . 
3anrpaTb, to play,— . . . 3aiirpbiBaTi>, — . 
OKyTaTb. to wrap about, — OKyTbiBaTb, — . 
IIpoMOTaTb, to squander,- npoMaibmaTb, — 
CM-BinaTb, to mingle, — . CMiuiHBaTb, — . 
Y3naTb, to recognise, — y3HaBaTb, — . 
IIpHKOBaTb, to chain to, 1.2. npHKOBbmaTb, — 
06pncoBaTb, to outline,—. oopHCoBbiBaTb, - 
OcHOBaTb, to found, — . ocHoBbiBaTb, — . 
3aBoeBaTb, to conquer, — . 3aBoe'BbiBaTb, — . 
IlporyjaTb, to walk, 1.3. . npory.inBaTb, — . 
OcM-BHTb, to laugh at, — . ocMiiiBaTb, — . 
ycbHTb, to sow, — . . . . yCEBdTb,— . 
Oc^aSiTbjto grow weak,I.4oaia6 , BBaTb, --. 
/[oroBiTb, to fast, — . . . AoraBJurcaTb, — . 
CorpiTb, to warm, — . . corp-BBaTb, — . 
3antapHTb, to roast, II, 1 . 3amapnBaTb, — . 
YcMOTpiTb, to discern, — . ycMaTpiiBaTb, — 
3aropiTb, to be sunburnt,-.3arapaTb, — . 
Bb'mpoHTb, to cut out, — . BbiKpariBaTb, — . 
HaK^eiiTb, to glue on, — . HaoenBaTb, — . 
BbicTpoHTb, to build, — . BbiCTpauBaTb, — 
OTCToaTb, to defend, — . OTCTaiiBaTb, — . 
OraopoTb, to unrip, — . . OTnapwBaTb, — . 
OKopMi'iTb,to poison, II. 2. OKapM^iiBaTb, - 
BbMOBHTb, to catch all,— . BbuaB-fliiBaTb, — 
BbnepntTb, to endure, — . BbrrepnjniBaTb, - 
BcKuniTb, to boil up. — . BCKunaib, -- 
BbueiHTb, to heal, 11. 3. . BbueinBaTb, — . 
Ynpowrb, to secure, — . ynpo^nBaTb, — . 
3acjyjKiiTb, to deserve, — 3ac./iyjKHBaTb, — . 



YMo.i4aTb,to keep secret,H.3.yMcU4HBaTb, 1. 1 , 
CUa/uiTb, to arrange, II. 4. cflajKiraaTb, — . 
IloKa3aTb, to show, — . . noKa3biBaTb, — . 
IIpHBa3aTb, to bind, — . . npHBfl3biBaTb, — . 
3aKO^OTi'iTb,to knock, II.5. 3aKOJiaiHBaTb, — . 
Bb'iMOJOTHTb, to thrash, — BbiMO^aqHBaTb, — . 
Bb'mjiaKaTb, to weep out, — .BbinjaKHBaTb, — . 
HcnpociiTb, to ask, II. 6. . ucnpauiuBaTb, — . 
IIo4nncaTb, to subscribe, -. noAniicwBaTb, — . 
BbiMOCTHTb, to pave, II. 7. BbiMamuBaTb, — . 

B3bICKaTb, tO exact, — . . B3bICKHBaTb, — . 

YTonnyTb, to drown, III. 1 yronaTb, — . 
Bb'iTfliiyTb, to stretch, — . BbnarnBaTb, — . 
YBaHyTb, to wither, — . . yBHAa-rb, — . 
3amyTb, to bend, — . . . 3ani6aTb, — . 
BcocaTb, to absorbe, — . BcacbiBaTb, — . 
3anepeTb, to shut, III. 2. . 3anupaTb, — . 
BbnepeTb, to rub out, — . BbiTupaTb, — . 
YMepeTb, to die, — . . . yMHpaTb, — . 
. OTo6paTb,to choose out,irr.OT6upaTb, — . 
IIpn6HTb, to affix, — . . . npnGiiBaTb, — . 
npn.«iTb, to pour to, 



BbinuTb, to drink out, — 

3amiiTb, to sew up, — 

BbiMbiTb, to wash out, — 

3aKpbiTb, to cover, — . 

YjKHTbca, to settle, — . 

HaniiTb, to tune, — . . 

.IIpocnaTb, to sleep away,- npocbinaTb, — . 

3ane%, to bake, — . . . 3aneKaTb, — . 

H3CB1b, tO CUtOUt,— . . H3CBKaTb,— . 

C-btcTb, to eat up, — . . cbtviaTb, — . 
BiuecTb, to plait in, — . . Bn^eiaTb, — . 



npnjHBaTb, — . 
BbinnBaTb, — . 
3amnBaTb, — . 

BblMblBaTb, — . 

3ab-pbiBaTb, — , 

yJKHBaTbCH, — . 

Han-bBaTb, — . 



b) In the verbs in umb of the lid conjugation , the termi- 
nation of the iterative aspect is often contracted into umb, or 
into amb after a hissing consonant; this happens especially 
when the simple verb belongs to the class of the defective 
verbs, that is when the iterative aspect is wanting. In 



Lexicology, — the verb. 119 

this case the tonic accent is placed on the termination. Such 
are the following verbs : 

1) Perfect asp. 2) Imperfect asp. 1) Perfect asp. 2) Imperfect asp. 

OomhYitb, to accuse, II. 1. . oGBHHflTb, 1.3. nocrmnrm., to hasten, II. 3. . nocntniaTB, 1. 1 . 
ymiiiTB, to appease, — . . yio^aTb, — . CoBepuii'iTb, to perfect, — . coBepmaTb, ~. 
ripHMHpiiTB, to reconcile,— . npiiMupaTb, — . 03HaiiiTb, to denote, — . . 03HaHaTb, — . 
CoTBopi'iTb, to create, — . . coTBopjm>, — . OTariiiTb, to burden, — . . OTarnaTb, — . 
HcnecTpuTt, to variegate, — ncnempaTb, — . IIoBpeAiiTb, to damage, II. 4. noBpe^AaTb, — . 
Pa3MbiairiTB, to meditate, — . pa3Mbim^aTb, — IlooyAiiTb, to incite, — . . no6y?KAaTb, — . 
yMyApHTbCfl,to grow wise, — .YMVApaTbca, — .npH6.iu3HTb, to draw near, - npn6.5H)KaTb, — . 
yxHTpiiTbca, to use art, — . yxunrpaTbCfl, — .3aMi>THTb, to remark, II. 5. . sainsiaTb, — . 
HoryGi'iTb, to ruin, II. 2. . . nory6.mb, — . IIoracnTb, to put out, II. 6. noramaTb, — . 
y-roMiiTb, to fatigue, — . . . yToauaTb, — . OGoJbcniTb, to seduce, 'II. 7. o6o.*bmaTb, — . 
noTpa*HTb, to liit, — . . . noTpa<i>^aTb, — . OTOMCTiiTb, to avenge, — . OTMinaTb, --. 
Oc^'biiHTb, to blind, — . . . oc^fiiutiTb, — . IlocBaTiiTb, to hallow, — . . iiocBamaTb, — . 

c) Sometimes in the same verb the imperfect aspect is for- 
med in two ways , with contraction and without contraction. 
Here we must remark that, if the prepositional verb retains 
its primitive, simple, physical meaning, the termination of its 
imperfect aspect is without contraction , and that on the con- 
trary it is contracted, if the prepositional verb takes an ab- 
stract, figurative, intellectual acceptation, as is seen in the 
following examples : 

1) Perfect, asp. 2) Imperfect asp. 1) Perfect asp. 2) Imperfect asp, 

Pa36paiuiTb, to scold, II. 1. pa36paHHBaTb, I. landBo36pamiTb,to forbid, II.l.B036paHaTb,L3. 
3ana^i'iTb, to kindle, —,. . 3ana^iiBaTb, — ,. and BocnajiiTb, to inflame,— , BOcna^aTb, — . 
IlepenojHUTb, to fill, — , . nepemuiinBaTb, — andHcno-mirrb, to fulfil, — , iicnojHaTb, — . 
IlepecTpoHTb, to rebuild, — ,nepecTpaiiBaTb,— andycipouTb, to arrange, — , ycipoaTb, — . 
3aB0CTpnTb, to sharpen, — , 3aBacTpnBaTb, — , andlloocTpiiTb, to excite, — , noompaTb, — . 
Il3JioBiiTb, to catch, II. 2. . ii3JaB.MiBaTb, — , andy^OBi'iTb, to surprise, II. 2. yjoBjaTb, — . 
Ilo4MoiriTb, to wet, II. 3. . noAManiiBaTb, — , and Omohhtb, to steep, 11.3. OMOiaTb, 1. 1. 
BbiyqiiTb, to teach, — , . . BbiyHimaTb, — , . andHaynaTb, to initiate, — , . Hayi&Tb, — . 
3aropoAi'iTb, to fence, H 4. 3aropajKiiBaTb, — 'andOrpa^nTb, to guard, II. 4. orpa?KAaTb, — ,, 
UepecyAi'iTb, to rejudge — ,nepecy}KOBaTb, — and OcyziiiTb, to condemn, — , ocyjKAaTb, — .. 
OcaAHTb, to plant, — , . . ocajKimaTb, — , . and OcaAiiTb, to besiege, —, ocamAaTb, — . 
BbinepeAiiTb, to outgo, — , BbinepeHaraaTb, — jandllpeAynpeAiiTbjtoprevent^ipeAynpejKAaTb^ 
BbiTBepAHTb, to rehearse, —,BbiTBepH(HBaTb,—,andyTBepAHTb, to affirm, — , yTBepjKAa-rb, — r 
IIoMyTiiTb, to muddy, II. 5, noMyiiiBaTb, — , andBo3MyriiTb, to raise, II. 7, B03MymaTb. — . 
3acB'BTiiTb, to light, — , . 3acBiqiiBaTb, — , andIlpocB'BTiiTb,toenlighten,-,npocB'BinaTb, — 
3aKpaciiTb, to colour, II. 6, 3aKpauniBaTb, — , andynpacHTb, to adorn, II. 6, yKpamaTb, — . 
3arocTiiTbca, to visit, II. 7, 3arauniBaTbca ; — ,andyrocTiiTb, to regale, II. 7, yroniaTb, — . 



120 



RUSSIAN GRAMMAR. 



d) The inchoative verbs in uymb, which by their nature 
have not the iterative aspect, take, in the formation of the 
imperfect aspect of prepositional verbs, the termination amb, 
e. g, 

1) Perfect asp. 2) Imperfect asp. 1) Perfect asp. 2) Imperfect asp. 



3aMep3HyTb,tofreeze,III.1.3aMep3aTi,, I. 

IIOTyxHyTI., tO gO Ollt, — , IIOTYXaTL, — . 

nonidHyTB, to perish, — , nornfiaTB, — . 

OKHCHyTb, tO grOW SOUI',— ,ORHCaTB, — . 

y-nixHyTb, to abate, — , . yraxaTB, - . 
IIoracHyTb, to go out, — , noracaTB, — . 



03a6HyTb, to starve, III.l, 03a6aTB, I l. 
3aMoKHyTb,togrowwet, - ,3aMOKaTb, — . 
Il3c6xnyTb, to dry up, — , H3CbixaTb, — . 
K3A6xHyTb, to die, — , . . H3ABixaTB, - . 
PpuBbiKHyTb, to habituate,-, npiiBbinaTb, - 
Hcie3HyTb, to vanish, — , ucie3aTb ; — . 



e) The Russian language has some prepositional verbs, the 
simple verb of which is no more used or is lost. Such are: 

1) Perfect asp. 2) Imperfect asp. 1) Perfect asp. 2) Imperfect asp. 

OnpaBAaTb, to justify. 1. 1. onpaBAbmaTB, I. I.Bctp-bthtb', to meet. II 5. . BCTp-BiaTB, 1. 1. 
06Hap6AOBaTB,topublish,I.2.o6Hapo40BBiBaTB.OTBiTHTB, to answer, — . OTB-BiaTB, — . 



3aT-BaTB, to devise, I. 3. . sai^BaTB, - 
Oaojbtb, to surmount, 1. 4. OAO-fl-BBaTB, 



yKopeHaTB, I. 

BO^BOpaTB, — 

pa3opaTB, — . 
y^apaiB, — . 
noBTopaTB, — 



BocKpeci'iTB, to revive,II.6. BocKpemaTB, — . 
IIoMtCTHTB, to place, II. 7. noMtmaTB, — . 
IIoAycTi'iTB, to instigate, — noaymaTB, — . 
IIocbthtb, to visit, — . . nOCBIRaTB, — . 
yKpoTHTB, to appease — yKpomaTB, — . 
Hacb'iTHTb, to satiate, — . HacbimaTb, — . 
3amnTiiTB, to protect, — . 3auinmaTB, — . 
4ocTi'irHyTB,to reach,HI.l. AOcraraTb, — . 
BocKpecHyTB, resuscitate, — BOCKpecaTb, — . 
OKyHyTB, to dip, — ... OKyHbiBaTB, — . 
Ha/ioyM^HBaTB,I.1.3aMKRyTB, to lock, — . . 3aMBiKaTB, — . . 
npiuaraTB, — . Yum6i\Tb, to bruise, — . . ymnGaTB, — . 

UpocTepTB, to extend ; IIL2. npocnrpaTB, — . 
06yTB, to put shoes, irr. odyB&TB, — . 
IIonpaTB, to trample, — . nonnpaTB, — . 
PacnaTb, to crucify, — . . pacnimaTb, — . 
HanaTb, to begin, — . . . HainnaTB, — . 
Othjitb, to take out, — . othhm<itb, — . 
OTBep3Tii, to open, — . . OTBep3aiB, — . 
OSp'BCTH, to find out, — . o6p-BTaTb, — . 
CnecTb, to count, — . . . CHirraTb, — . 
Pa3CBBCTii, to grow light,— pascB-BTaTb, — . 
3anpa*n>, to put to, — . . 3anparaTb, — . 
Among these verbs there are several which are also used with other 
prepositions besides those which are above indicated. 



yRopeHHTB, to root, II 1 

Bo4Bopi'iTB, to settle, - 

Pa3opnTB, to ruin, — . . 

y^apuTB, to strike, — 

IloBTopHTB, to repeat, - 

McTpeouTB, to destroy, II. 2.HCTpe6.aaTB, - . 

OAymeBi'iTB, to animate, — .04ymeB^aTB, — 

yCBIHOBHTB, tO adopt, — . yCHHOB^aTB, — 

HaAoyMHTB, to instruct, - 
llpMOHCHTB, to add, II. 3 
yrmiHHCHTB, to humble, — . ymiHtDKaTB, — . 

yHHITOHUlTB, tO annul, — yHHITOJKaTB, — 

BoopyacHTB, to arm, — . . BOopyjKaTB, — . 
Buymi'iTB, to suggest, — . BHywaTB, — . 
Bpyn'iTB, to hand, — . . . BpyiaTB, — . 
Hctoiuhtb, to exhaust, — HCTOinaTB, — . 
CoopyAUTB, to erect, II. 4. coopyjKaTB, — . 
I1o6bautb ; to vanquish, — no6BflyiaTB, — . 
ycflaAHTb, to delight, — . ycaaiKAaTB, — . 
IlpoH3HTB, to pierce, — . npoH3aTB, — . 
OSha'Btb, to offend, — . oGiuKaTb, — . 



Lexicology. — the verb. 



121 



fj The following verbs do not form their perfect aspect from 
the imperfect aspect of the used simple verb ? but from some 
disused aspect of this simple verb. 

1) Perfect aspect. 2) Imperfect aspect. 



3aM^HaTt, to compensate, 1.3. 
3acTpB.niBaTB, to shoot, kill, 1. 1. 
BCKaKiiBaTB, to leap in, — . 
ynycBiBaTB, to bite, — . 
B03BBmiTB, to announce, — . 
nor.iomaTB, to swallow up, — . 



3aMBHUTB, II. 1 (instead of 3aMn>HAmb) . 
3acTpBjiiTB, — (instead of 3acmprbA/inib) . 
BcKOiiJTB. II. 3 (instead of ccKaKdmb) . . 
YKyciiTB, II. 6 (instead of yKycdmb) . . 
Bo3bbcti'itb, II. 7 (instead of 6036Tbui>dmb~). 
Uoiviotiitb, — (instead oinozjiomdnibj . . 

gj Some prepositional verbs are formed irregularly, and 
occasionally they have two formations, one regular, and the 
other irregular. Such are: 

Regular formation. Irregular formation. 

1) Perfect asp. 2) Imperfect asp. 1) Perfect asp. 2) Imperfect asp. 



npe3piTB, to despise, II. 1. npe3npaTB, I. 1; and06o3piTB,to examine, II. 1. o6o3p , £BaTB,l. 1 
CBiCKaTB, to find, II. 7. . CBicniiBaTB, -; and CmiCKaTB, to obtain, II. 7 . CHiJCKnBaTB, — . 
06y3AaTB, to curb, I. 1 . o6y34BiBaTB -: andB3iiy34aTB, tobridle, 1. 1. . B3Hy34BiBaTB,— . 
Co3,TaTB,tobuild,irr.(co3iiHi4y)co3ii4aTB,-; and Co34aTB (co34aMT>), . co34aBaTB(co34aib). 
Harp ecTii, to rake up, irr, HarpeSaTB-; and florpedcTii, to bury, irr. norpeo'aTB, 1. 1. 
I1o3b6.mtb, to permit, II. 1. no3BO.iaTB, 1. 3 ; and YB6.inTB,to discharge, II. 1. ybojbimtb, I. 3. 
OcM'EjrTB, to deride, I. 3. . ocMBHBaTB, 1. 1 ; and HacMBaTBca, tolaughat,I.3. HacM^xaTBca,!.! 
OdBa3aTB, to bind, II. 4 . odBH3BiBaTB, -; and 06a3aTB, to oblige, II. 4. . o6a.3BiBaTB, — . 
CpaBHATB, to even, 1.3. . cpaBHiiBaTB, -; and CpaBHiiTB, to compare,] 1. 1. cpaBmiBaTB, — . 
npimaTB,totake,zrr.CnpHMy).npimnMaTB,-; and Bb'myTB, to take out, III. 1 . BBmmviaTB, — . 
IlpnOBiKaTb, to run up, irr. npudsraTB, - ; and flpnSirHyTBjto resort,] II. l.npiidBraTB, — . 

K) Other prepositional verbs have no perfect aspect and 
therefore fall into the class of defective simple verbs ; such are 
the following: 



OdoacaTB, to adore, 1. 1. 
OG.iaAaTB, to dominate, — . 
06Biu,aTB, to promise, — . 
3aBBmaTB, to bequeath, — . 
YBBmaBaTB, to exhort, — . 
0xy?K4aTB, to criticize, — . 
OcH3aTB, to touch, — . 
OaauaTB, to wait, — . 
OCmaTB, to habit, — . 
OnacaTBca, to fear, — . 
OdypeBaTB, to agitate, — . 

Reiff Russian Grammar, 



IIo4pa>KaT&, to imitate, 1. 1. 
IIo4o6a7B, to be necessary,—. 
IIopimaTB, to blame, — . 
no403pBBaTB, to suspect, — . 
CoMHBBaTBca. to doubt, — . 
Co3epuaTB, to contemplate, — . 
Il3o6iuoBaTB, to abound, I. 2. 
Hac.iiAOBaTB, to inherit, — . 
IloBHHOBaTBca, to obey, — . 
IIpiiBBTCTBOBaTB, to welcome, — . 
06onaTB, to scent, I. 3. 
12 



122 



RUSSIAN GRAMMAR. 



YnpajKHflTL, to occupy, I. 3. 
ymep6-/iflTBCfl, to decrease, — . 
ComaAiTb, to take pity, I 4. 
Cmb'io/ihtb, to understand, II. 1. 
Coctohtb. to consist, — . 



yripaMHTBca, to be obstinate, II. 2. 
Co/iepjKaTt, to maintain, II. 3. 
Ilpe4BH4£Ti, ; to foresee, II. 4. 
Hoxoahtl, to resemble, — . 
3aBiic£TB, to depend, II. 6. 



ij Lastly the following simple verbs have the properties of 
prepositional verbs, in other words they express the accom- 
plishment of an action without being joined to a preposition 
and without having the termination of unity in uyrrib. They 
are called perfect simple verbs. Some of them have also the 
iterative aspect. 



1) Perfect asp. 



T) Imperfect asp. 



3) Iterative asp. 



E-flarocjoBHTB, to bless, II. 2 
BpocHTB, to throw, II. 6. 
Bbitb, to be, irr. . . . 
Bc/iiitb, to order, H. 1. . 
BopoTHTB, to turn, II. 5. . 
/laTB, to give, irr. . . 
/t'BTB, to put, irr. . . 
^KenuTB, to marry, II. 1. 
Ka3HHTB, to execute, II 1 . 
Kohihtb, to end, II. 3. . 
KynnTB, to buy, II. 2 
Ae*ib, to lie, irr. . . . 
^nniHTB, to deprive, II. 3. 
IlacTB, to fall, irr. . . 
ILi'Bhhtb, to captivate, II. 1 
JlpocTHTB, to pardon, II. 7. 
IlycTuTB, to let go, — . 
PaHHTB, to hurt, II 1. 
P0411TB, to beget, II. 4 . 
PyiuuTB, to break down, II.3 
P-bihhtb, to decide, II. 3. 
Gbo6oahtb, to deliver, II. 4. 

j to become, irr. 
CTaTB ' (to be sufficient, irr. 
OyniiTB, to go, II. 2. 
CtXTB, to sit, irr. . . . 
XBaTHTB, to seize, II. 5. 
Hbhtb, to show, II. 2. . 
flmb, to take, irr. . . 



6.*aroc.flOB./iaTB, 1. 3. . . . — . 

6pocaTB, 1. 1 6pacBiBaTB. 

6BIB&TB, — OBIBBIBaTB. 

(Be./I'BTBj BCfl-fiBaTB. 

BOpO^aTB, 1. 1 .... B0pa4HBaTB. 

AaBaTB, — (Aaw) ... — . 

4'BBaTB, — — . 

()KeHHTB) — . 

(Ka3HHTB) — . 

KOHiaTB, — .... KaRHHBaTB. 

(noKynaTB), — .... — . 

JOHtHTBCH, II. 3. ... — . 

^HUiaTB, I. 1 — . 

ua4aTB, — Qia4aTB). 

n^-BHHTB, I. 3 — . 

npomaiB, 1. 1. ... . — . 

nycnaTB and nymaTB, _ . _. 

(paHHTB) , — . 

po^aTB and pam/jaTB, — . — . 

(pyniHTB) pyuiHBaTB. 

p-suiaTB, — — . 

CBOfiOHUaTB, — . . . — . 

CTaHOBHTBCH, II. 2. , . . CTaRaB.flHBaTBCfL 

CTaBaTB, 1. 1 (daw) . . — . 

cxynaTB, — — . 

ca4HTBca, II. 4 — . 

XBaTaTB, I. 1 XBa^HBaTB. 

flBJIHTB, I. 3 .... . — . 

UMdmb, 1. 1 and II.2 (uMdw and eMJito). — . 



Lexicology. — the verb. 



123 



To the list of perfect simple verbs we must add some verbs taken 
from foreign languages and ending in oearrw, e. g. aTTaKOB&TB, to attack; 
KOH^ncKOBaTB, to confiscate, which express both the perfect and imper- 
fect aspects with the same termination and without preposition. 

The verbs BCfl-BTB, ^emiTB, Ka3HiiTB, painrrb and pyinnTB, do not 
change their termination to form the perfect and imperfect aspects; the 
perfect future (nem, meuw, Ka3Hib, pamo and pymy) is also used for 
the present. In the verb KymiTB, the present and the imperfect pre- 
terit are borrowed from the prepositional verb nonynaTB. The verbs 
AapoBaTB, to give; MHHOBaTB , ' to pass , and o6pa30BaTB, to form, as 
well as the inflections AapoBa\flT>, MHHOBa^T> and o6pa30Ba.fl'B, are of 
the perfect aspect; but the inflections AapyK), MRHyro and o6pa3yio are 
of the present. The verb MHHOBaTB forms its future with Mimy, mi'i- 
neinB, and the preterit has the two inflections MB«yjT> and MimoBa\/n>. 

With regard to the perfect simple verbs we remark that in such of 
them as express a physical action, performed by a single motion (as 
6pociiTB, 4aTB, a"Btb, nacTB , nycn'iTB, CTyni'iTB, xBaraTB, htb) the 
meaning of their perfect aspect is the same as that of the aspect of 
unity in complete verbs (§ 62). 

These perfect simple verbs, with the exception of dAmocjio- 
eumb, otcemmb, Ka3uunib, Auwumb, pdimrnb and nATbHumb, 
form also prepositional verbs. Such are: 

1) Perfect asp. 2} Imperfect asp. 1) Perfect asp. 2) Imperfect asp. 



3a6biTB, to forget, irr. . . 3a6BiBaTB, I. 1. 

noBe.TBTB, to order, II. 1. . noBCAUBaTB, - 

Pa34aTB, to distribute, irr. pa3AaBaTB, — . 

Oa'btb, to dress, irr. . . . OASBaTB, — . 

PacKyni'iTB, to buy up, II. 2 pacKynaTB, — . 
3a.ie4B,tohide one's self,?rr.3a^eraTb, — . 

YnacTB, to fall, irr ynaAaTB, — . 



YpoAHTB, to produce, II.4. ypowaTB, 1. 1. 

Pa3pyimiTB,todestroy,II.6. pa3pyrnaTB, — . 

Pasp'BmHTB, to decide, — . pa3p"£inaTB, — . 

Ocbo6o4htb, to free, II. 4. ocBo6o?KAaTB. 

4ocTaTB, to procure, irr. . AOCTaBaTB, — . 

OcraHOBUTB, to stop, II. 2. ocTaHaBJHBaTB,- 

BbiCTyniiTB, to go out, II. 2. BBiCTynaTB, — . 



PacnpocTHTBca, take leave,IL7. pacnpomaTBca 3acicTB, to sit, irr sacwTt, — . 

IlponycTHTB,to let pass, — nponycnaTB, — . H3i>8BHTB,to indicate, II.2. h3t.hb.mtb, I. 3. 

The verbs 6pocumb, eopomumb, Komumb and xeamtinib have the 
two perfect aspects in their prepositional verbs, like those derived 
from the complete simple verbs, as we shall subsequently see. For 
the prepositional verbs derived from nmb, see § 65. 3. 

3. Such prepositional verbs as are derived from the com- 
plete simple verbs, have in addition to the preceding perfect 
and imperfect aspects, a second perfect aspect, which, being 
formed from the aspect of unity of the simple verb, indicates 
that the action has been or will be performed at one time and 



124 



RUSSIAN GRAMMAR. 



by a single movement, whereas the perfect aspect, which is 
formed from the imperfect aspect of the simple verb, indicates 
that the action has been or will be accomplished by various 
motions, and that occupied or will occupy a certain length of 
time. The same remark applies to such prepositional verbs as 
are formed from certain double verbs, and also from the perfect 
simple verbs 6p6cnTt, bopothtb, koh^htl andxBaTHTB; e.g. 
1) Perfect aspect: 2) Imperfect aspect. 



a) of duration. 
Bbi6ojiTaTi>, I. 1. 
HaKH^aTb, — . 
BcnopxaTB, - . 
Bb'mpbiraTb, — 

CTOJKaTb, — . 

3axJionaTb, — . 
3a6pw3raTb, — 
BcoBaiE, I. 2 . 
BbioeBaTB, — . 

IIpH/iaBHTB, II. 2 
OlUHKaTB, II. 5 

C/tyTB, irr. . . 
IIo4JKeiB, — . . 

BBIBaJIHTB, I. 3 . 

IIpoKaTaTB, I. 1 

BBMOMaTB, — . 
CpOHHTB, I. 3 . 
BBITaCKaTB, I. 1 

3a6pocaTB, — . 
CBopoiaTB, — . 

OKOH^aTB, — . 

3axBaTaTB ; — . 



b) of unity. 

BBl6(MTHYTB, III. 1 
HaKHHYTB, — . 

BcnopxHyTb, — 
Bb'mpbirHyTb, — 

CT0.3KHyTb 7 — . 

3axji6iiHyTb — 

3a6pbI3HYTb, — 

BcyHyTB, — . . 

BblKJIOHyTb, — 

npn^aBHyTB, — 

OKJIHKHyTB, — 

c4yHyT& ; — . ♦ 
noAJKiirHyTB, — 

BBIBa^IHTB, II. 1 . 

npoKaiHTb, II. 5 

BbUOMHTB, IL 2 
CpOHIiTb, II. 1 . 

BbiTamHTb ; II. 3 
3a6p6cnTb, II. 6 

CBOpOTHTB,II. 5 
OKOHHHTB, II. 3 
3axBaTKTB, II. 5 



. Bbi6a^iTbiBaT&, to divulge, 1. 1. 
. HaKHibiBaTB, to heap up, — . 
. BcnapxHBaTB, to flutter, — . 
. Bbmpb'iniBaTb, to skip out, — . 
. CTliKHBaiB, to push down, - . 
. 3axJi6nbiBaTb, to shut with a clap. 
. 3a6pb r i3ruBaTB ; to besprinkle, — . 
. BcoBbiBaTB, to shove in, — . 
. BBnue'B&iBaTB, to peck out, — . 
, npu4aB^HBaTB, to press to, — . 
. oiuimaTB, to call to, — . 
. cAyBaTB, to blow off, — . 
. noAJKnraTB, to fire, — . 
. BbiBOHBaTB, to throw out, — . 
. npoKaTMBaTB, to roll through, — . 
. BbuaMbiBaTB, to break out, — . 
. cpanuBaTb, to throw down, - . 
. BbiTacKOBaTB, to pull out, — . 
. 3a6pacbiBaTb,to throwbeyond,— . 
. cBopaHHBaTb, to avert, — . 
. OKiaHiHBaTb, to terminate, — . 
. 3axBaTbiBaTb, to catch, — . 

6htb, 6paTB and 



The simple verbs roBopiiTB, jiobhtb, 
luacTB, to indicate an action performed by one movement 
borrow their perfect aspect from another verb; as: 
1) Imperfect aspect. 2) Perfect aspect: 

b) of unity. 
. cKa3aTB, II. 4. 
. nofiMaT&, 1. 1. 

. YAapHTB, II 1. 

. B3HTB, irr. (B03BMy). 

, U0.50H{HTB, II. 3. 



a) of duration 
ToBopHTB, tospeak, say, II. 1. . . noroBopiiTb 
^loBHTb, to seize, catch, II. 2. . mAOBrnb . . 

BnTb, to beat, irr nodiiTb . . . 

BpaTB, to take, irr nodpaTb . . 

K^acTb, to lay, irr. nooacTb , . 



Lexicology. — the verb. J25 

4. From the double simple verbs two prepositional verbs 
are formed, which with their two aspects, the perfect and the 
imperfect, have each a particular signification. Such are: 

O From the definite verb. 2) From the indefinite verb. 

a) Perfect asp. b) Imperfect asp. a) Perfect asp. b) Imperfect asp. 

Bbi6pecTH, irr. BbidpoAUTb, to go out, II. 4, andBbi6poAHTb,II.4.Bbi6paa{HBaTb,toferment,I.l. 
BbiG-BJKaTb, — . Bbi6-6raTB, to flee, I 1, . . andBbi6-braTb,I.l. Bhrfinmajb, to precede, — . 
3aBe3TH, — . . 3aB03»Tb,to bring back,If.4, and 3aB03HTb, II. 4. 3aBajKHBaTb, to transport,— . 
IIpoBecTH, — . npoBOAHTb, to conduct, — , and IIpoBOAHTb, — npoBomaTb, to accompany. 
3arHaTb, — . . 3aroHaTb, to drive, 13,.. and 3aroHjrn>, I. 3. 3aramiBaTb, to harass, — . 
Bb'iHTH, — . . . Bbixo4HTb, to go out. II. 4, . and Bbixo4HTb, II. 4. Bbixa?KHBaTb, to obtain, — . 
BjerbTb, II. 5 B^eTBTb, to fly in, 1. 1 . . . and riepe.*eTaTb,I l.nepe^eTbmaTb, to fly by, — . 
/JoHecTii, irr. 40Hoci'iTb,to denounce, II. 6, and/Jc-HocnTb, II. 6. AOHaumBaTbJowearout,— . 
BnoJ3Tri, — . Bno^3aTb, to creep in, 1. 1, and Ono-^aTb, Li. OTna.i3biBaTb,togoaway,— . 
Bb'iBxaTb, — , BbiB3JKaTb, to go out, I 1, . andBb'r634HTb,II.4. Bbii3)KHBaTb, to train, — . 

From the other double verbs are formed prepositional verbs as from 
the incomplete or complete verbs. The verbs BaJiiTb, KaiiiTb, ^oMiiTb, 
poHHTb and TauuiTb form prepositional verbs with the two perfect as- 
pects of duration and of unity, as we have seen above. 

EXERCISES ON THE VERBS. 

I do good, as much as I wish. Thou desirest instruct thyself. Regular verbs. 
fl ai-iaTb A06p6, CKO^bKO a meASiTb. Tbi me^aTb yuiTbca. 

He imagines that he knows all the sciences, and he boasts of his 
Oht. AVM&Tb tto oht> 3HaTb Becb HayKa , h xBadaTb CinstrJ cboh 

success. We dare not believe in your words, even when you 
ycnix^. fl 4ep3aTb He Bipirrb (dat.) Baun> ciobo, xoto tm 

speak the truth. My neighbours only live on bread, and 

roBopuTb npaB^a. Moil coctU'l oahht. niiT&Tbca (instrj x.i'fid'b, h 

trust in Providence. You trade in cloth, and 

ynoBaTb Ha QaccJ) IlpoBH^ime. Tbi ToproBaTb (instrj cyKHO, h 

you ask much. The pigeon cooes; the turtle moans; 

Tbi Tpe6oBaTb (genj MHoroe. T6^y6b BopnoBaTb; rop^nqa CTonaTb; 

dogs bark; puppies yelp; the frog croaks; the raven 
codana Jikmb; meHoicb dpexaTb; .laryniKa KBanaTb; Bopom. 

croaks; the crow caAvs; lions roar; the stag bells; fowls 

rpanaTb; Bopona KapicaTb; jreBi pbinaTb; o.ieHb TOKOBaTb; Kypmja 

cluck; the cat mews; oxen bellow; the bee hums; 

KVAaxTaTb; Komna MaynaTb; 6wkt> MbiiaTb; nie^a JKyaoKaTb; 

12. 



- ■■"-" 



126 



RUSSIAN GRAMMAR. 



Preterit. 



Future. 



twitter; sheep 
medeTaTt; oBija 

yelps; the ass 
BH3%a-cb ; oce.o> 



the serpent hisses; eagles scream; nightingales 
3Mi>a miin-BTt; ope>B TpyoYiTB; cojioBen 

and lambs bleat; pigs grunt; the fox 

11 arHe'HOKfe 6^eaTt; CBiiHta xpibnaTB; .mci'ma 

brays; the turkey gobbles; the quail calls; the cock crows; 

peBiTt; Ka^KyHT. luoxTaTb; nepenejKa BaBaKai-B ; nB-ryxT. KynypeKaTB; 

the magpie chatters; the parrot prates. The thunder roars; water 
copoKa cKpeKOTaTb; nanyraft 6o.iTaTB. Tpo.ni. rpeMiTB; BOAa 

boils; the doors creak; the brooks murmur; the fire crackles; 
KuniTB; 4BepB CKpun-BTB; pynefi ky?KJR#b; oroiiB TpecnaTB; 

the stars twinkle; the sun shines; honey-bees swarm; 

3B-B3Aa CBepKaTb; co.iHiie cbbthtb; iine^a potiTBca; 

diamonds sparkle; dry leaves rattle; the wind whistles; 
a^Ma3i. 6-3ecT"BTB; cyxoft juictt, xpyciBTB; BBTepx. CBncraTb; 

the snow melts. The sun illumines the earth with Us rays, 
CHBn> TaaTb. Commie 03apaTB 3eM.fla (instrj cboh .ly^i., 

warms and vivifies her. The earth turns round the sun. 

rptTB h jkhbhtb ohx. 3eM^a o6pamaTBca BOKpyn. (gen J co^Hqe. 

You grieve in vain. 
Tbi ropeBaTB nanpacHO. 



I walked yesterday 
ft ryjiarb Biepa 

the sun was setting. My 
co-iHiie ca4iiTBca. Moft 
which was shaken by the 



on the bank of the river, when 

no (datj deperi. p'BKa, Kor^a 

sister sat under a tree, 

cecTpa C114BTB noM> (instrj /jepeBO, 

wind. Yesterday we worked, read, 



KOTopwfi KaqaTBca (instrj Bixep-B. Bnepa a pa66TaTB, ym&rh, 

wrote and drew much. The sheep perished through 

micaTB h pncoBaTB mhofo. OBua MepeTB oti. (genj 

the cold. His mother has been dead a long time. The enemies 
CTyaca. Out, MaTB yMepeTB Aaiuio. HenpiaTeJiB 

have shut him up in the fortress. This man has become blind, 

3anepeTB out. bt> (prep J KpsnocTb. 3tott> leaoBta oc.iinHyTB, 

and his wife has become deaf. My trees have withered, and 
11 out. jKeHmHiia oooxHyTB. Moft AepeBO bbicoxhytb, h 



my flowers 

MOH lIBtTl. 



have faded. 

3aB3HyTB. 

Moscow will shine 
MocKBa KpacoBaTBca 



long 
AO.iro 



at the head of the cities 
bo (prep J waBa ropoAi. 



Lexicology. — the verb. 127 

of Russia. Thou wilt play, and I shall write. The empire of Russia 
pyccKifi. Tbi HrpaTi> ? h a mica/rb. TocyAapcTBO PocciiicKm 

will develop itself incessantly, and acquire constantly more force 

B03RbiuiaTbCfl 6e3npepbiBHo, u npiodp'ETaTb Bcer^a 6oA%e(gen.) cii.ia 

and glory. A great monarch will never die. 
a c.iaBa. Be^uKiii rocyAapb ne miKorAa y&iepeTb. 

Do what thou art bidden, and do not think of resisting. Do not imperative. 
/I/BJaTb hto Tbi roBopiiTb, u He AyMaTb ynpaMHTbca. He 

lose hope, and trust in God. Go home, and 

TepaTb HaAeJK^a, h ynoBaTb na (ace.) Eon>. OynaTb aomoh, h 

do not dispute so much. Do not lose thy time, and do not tor- 
He TO-iKOMTb CTO.ibKO. He TpamTb (gen.) BpeMH, h He My- 

ment the animals. Speak always the truth, and do not dispute 
HHTb (gen.) auiBOTiioe. FoBopuTb Bcervia npaB/ja, h He cnopuTb 

about trifles, 
o (prep J nycTAKi. 

The nightingale sings; the horse neighs; the wolf howls. There are irregular verb?. 
Co.iO!3eii n'BTb; AomaAh pa^Tb; bo^kt> bmtb. BbiTb 

animals which sleep during the whole winter. Thou takest much 
SB^pb, KOTopwii cnaTb (ace J Becb mm.. Tw 6paib amoro 

upon thyself, and I do not undertake this affair. How 

Ha (ace .) ce6a, n a lie dpaibca 3&(accJ 3tott> /vb\io. SaTEivrb 

do you crumple this book? He lives at Moscow, and 

tw MHTb 3tott> KHiira. Oin> KiiTb bt> (prep.) MocKBa, II 

is thought to be a rich man. The shepherd shears the sheep; thepea- 
aflbiTb (instr.) doraTbiii le.iOBiiK'b. fIacTyxT> CTpu% OBua ; upe- 

sants spin the flax and weave the linen. He wishes to sleep, and you 

CTiUHHT) npaCTb Je'HT> H TKaTb XOJICT'b. OH!. XOTiTb cnaTb, H Tbi 

wish to play. My neighbour kept me as his own son, and could 
xoTiTb nrpaTb. Moii cocsai 6epe<H> a Kain> poAHoft cbwb, u MOib 

not part with me. The enemies have burnt several 

lie pacraTbca co (instr.) a. HenpiaTe^b cmeib MHoro 

towns; the were inflamed by hatred and vengeance. The shep- 
ropoAT>; out, yB^e^bca (instr.) 3.166a 11 MHieiiie. nac- 

herd pastured the sheep in the meadow. I will send 

Tyxi. nacni OBua 11a (prep.) ^yri.. H nocAdTb 3a 

for the doctor, and thou wilt send me money. This town 

(instr.) .liKapb, h tw npii&iaTb a (.gen.) AeHbrn. 3'tott> ropo/ii, 



128 RUSSIAN GRAMMAR. 

is nourishing, and it will flourish long through its strength and 
ubucth, h out hbucth 4o\aro (instr.) CH.*a H 

wealth. I will give thee a book, and thou, what wilt thou give me? 
6oraTCTBo. H flan. Tbi KHiira, h th qio AaTb a? 

Thou canst not say: what will he give me for that? Do not 

Tbi MOib He roBopiiTb: tto oHb AaTb a 3a (ace.) 3tott>? He 

take upon thyself, what thou canst not perform. 

6paTb Ha Qacc.~) ce6a (gen.) tott> (gen.) ito th Moib He ncno^HHTb. 

Children, live in peace, do not swear, never lie, and behave 

4HTfl, JKHTb MHpHO, He K-MCTbCa , He HHROr^a AT&Tb H BeCTH 

yourselves well. 
ce6a xopouieHbKo. 

Definite and in- Beasfs walk and run, birds and flies fly, fishes 

e fect aspect" 3b"6pb xo/juTb h GiraTb, mi'ma h Myxa ^eTaTb, pbi6a 

swim, and worms crawl. See, a soldier is coming here; 

ruaisaTb, h nepBb no^3aib. flocMOTpiTb, coJAaTi hath ciOAa; 

behind him runs a dog. Thou seest, how this swallow 
3a Qinstr.^) oht. S-BJKaTb coSana. BiU'BTb, KaKb 3toti> jacToiKa 

flies fast; they fly always so. This mariner has long 

.leTiiTb CbiCTpo; oht> jeTaTb Bcer^a TaEn>. Cefi Mopta Ao.iro 

sailed on the Black Sea. What is swimming there on 

n.iaBaTb no (dat.~) tJepHbia Mope. Uto HJbiTb TaMb Ha (jprepj 

the water? The wives of the Slavonians carried water and fetched 
BOAa? }KeHa CiaBflHinrb HOCHTb BOAa h TacnaTb 

wood. What dost thou carry in this bag? See, what 

ApOBa. ^TO Tbi HeCTHBT> (/?rej3.) STOT-bMSmOK-b? CMOTp^Tb, KaKOH 

a heap of wood this man is draAving. One saw then what 

Ba3aiiKa ApoBa 3T0T r b qeJioB-EKT. TamuTb. BiiA'fiTb TorAa (jen.) ito 

one had not seen for a long time. 

He BHAaTb AOTO-/T&. 

Perfect aspect The enemy dashed into the town and seized the 

of duration and HenpiHTCflb pbHTbCa BT> QttCC.^ r6pOAT> H KHAaTbCH Ha (ace.) 

of unity. 

booty. It began to lighten. It lightened, there was a 

KopucTb. 3acBepKaTb Mo^mia. GBepnaTb Mo^Hia, rpeMiTb 

violent clap of thunder, the earth trembled, the church was shaken. 
CHJbHbifi rpoMT>, 3eM^a Apoacaib, uepuoBb 3aTpacaTbca. 

My brother went to bed, and began to snore. He gave a loud snore 
Moh 6parb je<n» h aaxpaniTb. XpaniTb rpOMKO 



Lexicology. — the verb. 129 

and awoke. May I hope that my lyre will touch 
h npocwnaTBca. Moib a Ha/v&aTBca, ito moh" .Mipa TporaTb 

once more your hard heart? The sun began to shine, but 

eme Bann. x^mhbih cep4Ue? CojiHue 3a6.iHCTaTb, ho 

not for a long time; it shone for a moment and disappeared. We have 
He Ha4o.iro: (uecrBTb h CKpbiBaTbca. ft bbi- 

thrown out of the window all the sweepings; among the sweepings 
dpacLmaTB 3a (ace.') okho Beet copT>; bt, (prep.) copt 

we have thrown out also a paper of importance, 
a BbiGpacbiBaTb h dyniara Baa<Haa. 

Last year I often went to the town. Socrates iterative aspect. 

(gen.) Ilpouubift ro4T> a xo4HTb bt, (ace.) ropo4T,. CoKpaTi. 

was accustomed to say. The Germans had long inhabited Nov- 
roBopiiTb. HiMeirb H34aBHa aenrb bt. (prep.) 

gorod. When living at Moscow, I often went to the monastery 

HoBropo4T>. >KnTb bt, (prep.) MocKBa, a T>3AHTb bt, (ace.) ./laBpa • 

of the Trinity. In my youth I often lived in the country. 

TpoBiiKift. Bt, (ace J mo^oaoh ^tito a a(HTb bt, (prep.) 4epeBHa. 

If the stones could speak, they would teach thee Conditional and 

E'cflii 6bi KaMeHb mo% roBopuTb, oht, nayiiiTb 6bi th Sub J UMt,ve - 

prudence. If any one had come to us at 

(gen.) ocropoamocTb. E'c.in 6t> kto Hii6y4b bohth kt, (dat.) a bt. (ace.) 

this moment, he would have seen us in despair and 

3TOTb MHHyTa , out, yBTOTb 6bi a BT. (prep.) OTiaame , h 

would have heard our groans and our sighs. There are few 
yc/ibimaTb 6w HauiT, CTeHanie 11 Harm, B340XT,. Ectb Ma^io (gen.) 

things in the world on which I have not fixed 

upeAMerb bt, (prep.) cbuti., Ha (ace.) KOTopwu a He odpamaTb 6bi 

my attention. There was no heart so insensible that 

(gen.) BHiiMame. EbiTb (gen.) He cep4ne TaKoii KaMenHbiu, KOTopbiti" 
it did not melt into tears. 

He H3^HBaTbca 6bi bt. (prep.) cie3a. 

This soldier has served long and has received for his serviceThe different ten- 

3'TOTT. C0^4aTT> CiyaUITb 40^r0 II BbICiya(HBaTb ses and aspects. 

a pension. It is not every soldier that will obtain it with such 

neHCia. He bchkih BbTC.iyawBaTb oht. ct, (instr.) TaKoii 

distinction. He was in many battles and distinguished 

QTAmie. Oht. Gbrn. bt> (prep.) MHoro cpaateHie, h OTjmaTfe- 



130 RUSSIAN GRAMMAR. 

himself everywhere by his remarkable courage. He distinguished himself 
ca Be3Ai> , (ms/r.) d.iHCTaTe^bHHH xpadpocib. Oht> OTJiHiaTBca 

particularly at the capture of a battery oftheenemys. He mounted 
ocodenHO npn (prep.) B3arie 6aTTapea HenpiaTe^bCKiil. Oht> B36npaTbca 

first on the parapet, killed the hostile soldier, and 

nepBbiu Ha (ace.') GpycTBepi., y6iiBaTt» HenpiaTeJbCKiii co.wiarB, h 

captured a cannon. For -~ that he was rewarded by a decoration. 
b3htb nyuiKa. 3a (ace.) 3to oht> Harpa«4aTL (instr.) opAeHb. 

Afterwards he was rewarded also with other marks of distinction. 
noTOMi> oht> HarpajK/jaTb h (instr.) Apyroft OT-iiinie. 

Now he will return to his country, will establish himself with 
Tenepi> out oTnpaB.iaTbca bt> (ace.) poAima, noce.iHTbca bb (prep.) 

his family, and will relate his campaigns, how he marched 

cboh ceMBa, h pa3CKa3biBaTb o (prep.~) cboh noxozrb, KaKT> xoAiiTb 

against the Turks and the French, how he beat the enemy, how 
, Ha Qacc.') TypoKT> h 4>paim;y3Tb, KaKb 6iiTb Bparb, KaKb 

he indured hunger, suffered from his wounds, and consoled himself 
TepnbTb t6jioat>, CTpa^aTb orb Qgen.) pana, h yTbmaTbca 

with the thought that he is serving his sovereign with heart 
« (instr J Mbiaflb , tio oht> cayatiiTb (dat.) cboh JTocyAapb (instr.) cepAUe 

and soul. Trust in me- 

h Ayma. VnoBaTb na (ace.) a. 

THE PARTICIPLE. 

Division of the 66. — The participles (npHHacTi/i) have, as a part of the 
participles. yer j ) ^-g 53^ voice, aspect and tense, and ; as adjectives, that 
they may agree with their substantive, they have gender, 
number and case. As regards voice, they are active or neuter 
(or, with the pronoun cm, pronominal) and passive. They have 
the same number of aspects as the verbs whence they are de- 
rived, but they have only two tenses, the present and preterit. 
67. — The active and neuter (as also the pronominal) 
Active and neuterparticiples are formed as follows: 
participles. j ^ e present participle is formed from the third person plu- 
ral of the present indicative by changing the termination ni5 into 
uiflu (neut. u^ee, fern. ui,afi), and this without any exception; 
e.g. A^aronim, making; ./ii66fliiiiii, loving; KpiiHaiiiiH, crying; 
HecyuiiH, bearing (from dibAawmd, jM/im5 } Kpimmm, uecymf). 



Lexicology. — the participle. 131 

2. The preterit or past participle is formed from the preterit 
indicative, by changing .75 into ewiu, and 5 fin such verbs as 
have not az in the preterit) into will (neut. wee, fern, maa)) 
e. g. a -B ./i a Bin iit, having made; HOCiiBuiiit, having borne; no- 
Tyxmin, being extinguished; Tepmifi, having rubbed (from 
drbAdjW, nociiAo, nomyxz, meps). An exception to this 
rule is found in some irregular verbs in dy and my, which, 
though forming their preterit in A3, change y of the present 
(or of the future) into will; these are: 6AWfl,mm , having kept; 
Beflinii, having lead; naAiuiii (and naBuiin), having fallen; 
npiiAmiii, having spun; n.ieTinin, having plaited; MeTiniii, 
having swept; o6piTmiii, having found] UBiTiniii, having flow- 
ered (from OAwdy, eedf, nady, npndy, UAemy, Aiemy, oopwmy 
and ufimmy), and also yBHAuiiii, being faded; me &mw, having 
gone; Menuin, having counted (from yeAuy , udy and umy). 

68. — The passive participles, which are only formed from Passive P ai u- 
active verbs, are used both with the full and the apocopated 
termination, ending: a J in the present, meAibiu, iiAibiii or oaimU 
(neut. oe, fern, an) in the full, and in eAid, ums or 0M5 (neut. 
0, fern, a) in the apocopated termination, bj in the preterit, 
in HHbiu or nibiu (neut. oe, fern, an) in the full, and in m or 
mo (neut. 0, fern. a~) in the apocopated termination. 

1. The present participle is formed from the first person 
plural of the present indicative, by changing the termination 
Mo into Mbiu, as: /ii.iaeM&iii, being made; ./iwo'iimbih, being 
loved (from dfbAOSMo and awouaio). But abiihcv", / move, and 
6opio, / conquer, form ab&jkhmhh and oopimbiu (instead of 
deujweMbm and oopeMbui). The irregular verbs with the first 
person in em (i. e. with the accent), have oAibiXi, resuming 
the guttural consonant; e. g. 30b6mliu, being called; Tpaco- 
MBiii, being shaken; GeperoMbiii, being kept; neKOMBiil, being 
baked (from 3oeeMo, mpnceAio, 6epejweAi5, neueMd), and in 
like manner cggomuii, being sucked; hckombiiI, being sought 
(from coceAio and um^Aid). 

2. The preterit participle is formed of the preterit of the 
indicative by changing Ad of the terminations aA5, rao and jbA5, 
into HHbiu with permutation of the commutable consonants or 
with intercalation of the consonant a, as also in the first 



132 RUSSIAN GRAMMAR. 

person of the present; m and 5 of the terminations om, uyM 
and 5, into nibiu; e.g. AiuaHHbift, done; pa3ciaHHMH, disper- 
sed; BH/VfcHHMH, seen; na^eHHtifi, burnt; flBJieHHbiH, shown; 
BHHieHHbifi, screwed; kojiotmh, pricked; abmhythh, m0 ved; 
TepTBin, rubbed (from dfbJiaM, pa3cibMA5 ) 6udn>A5, naAUAZ, 

H6UA5, 6HHmUA5, K0A0A5, deUHfAd, mepz). 

The passive participles of the irregular verbs, which also present 
some irregularities in their formation, have been given in the List of 
the irregular verbs, pages 106—108 

Declension of 69. — The participles, being used as adjectives , and as 
the participles, snc ^ a g ree i n g with their substantive in gender, number and 
case, are declined like the qualifying adjectives (§ 40, parad.4). 
The active and neuter participles are only used in the full ter- 
mination, while the passive participles are used both in the 
full and the apocopated. 
Passive verbs. 70. — The passive participles, both present and preterit, 
with the apocopated termination, joined to the auxiliary verb 
6bimb } form what is called the passive verbs (cTpa^aTejitHLie 
rjiaro^bi); e. g. chiwh (ecmb) aw6um8 cbohmt> otucmx, the 
son is loved by his father; yneHHicL 6biM Hazpaotcdem 3a npn- 
jejK&Hie, the scholar has been rewarded for his assiduity. 
We have here to remark that from the present and preterit 
of the passive participles are formed two aspects of the pas- 
sive verb: the imperfect and the perfect aspect. As regards 
the present, preterit and future tenses, they are determined 
by the auxiliary verb foimb, as seen below. 

1) Imperfect asp. 2) Perfect asp. 

1. Present: . . a QecMb) HarpajKAaeMT>. a (ecMb) HarpajK/ie'Hi. 

2. Preterit: . a 6bWb HarpaacAaeMt. a 6bmt> HarpaJKAe'Ht. 

3. Future: . . a 6jAY HarpaatflaeMi. a 6yay Harpaaf/tenx. 

EXERCISES ON THE PARTICIPLES. 
Active and neu- The man who loves truth, hates falsehood. The child 

ter participles. ^e^OB-BKl, JIofoiTB npaB/ja, HenaBHA'BTB AOMh. fl,HTA 

that bathes; the dog that attacks passers by. The tradesman 

KynaTBca; codana 6pocaTBca Ha (ace.) npoxoauu. KyneuT., 

who received the goods from London, sold them advanta- 

no.*y i iaTB TOBapt h3t» (gen.) ^ohaoitb, npo/jaBaTB oht> bbi- 



Lexicology. — the verb. 133 

geously. The tradesman who has received the goods from London, 

toaho. Kyneirt, « no-iyiHTt TOBapi, n3i» (gen.) JIohaoht., 

has sold them advantageously. Suffering from illness, he seeks 
npoAaTb oin. BuroAHO. OpaAaTb (instr.) 6oxB3Hb, ucnin (gen.) 

relief. Light the candle which has gone out, and wipe the 

o6^erieHie. 3aHteiB CBUia noxyxnyTt, h Bb'rrepeTb 

window which is frozen. Glory to the hero who has saved his country, 
creiuo 3aMep3HyTb. C.iaBa repon cnacni cboB OTeiecTBO. 

The roaring lion, the bellowing ox, the barking dog, the crow- 
PbiKart .Jievb, MbrcaTb 6hki, jaaib coGana, nuTb 

ing cock, the cooing dove. express their feelings and wants. 
n-BTyx-b, BopKOBaTb T0Aj6b, BbipaHiaTb cboS nyBCTBO ii JKejame. 

The sea agitated by the winds frightens the sailors. The daughter Passive par- 
Mope, BO-moBaTb BSTp-b, ycTpamaTb liAOBen-b. 4oib, tlc, P le s- 

beloved by her father seeks to deserve his love. One must succour 
jiio6nTb OTeui. , ncKaTb 3ac.iy>KHBaTb ohi. .«o66bb. 46-^ho noMoraTb 

the unfortunate man, harassed by fate and pursued by disasters. 
(<M)HeciacTHbm, maTb cyAbGa n npec.i-BAOBaTb neyAaqa. 

This is skimmed milk, and here is rappee snuff. It is a loaded 
3'TOT-b cHHTb MO.10KO, h bott> TepeTb Ta6aKT>. S'toti, 3apa4UTb 

gun. In the market they sell killed geese, tarred 

pymbe. Ha (prep.) pbiHOKi> npoAaB&Tbca 6nrb rycb, mojiiiTb 

ropes, little sucking pigs, and shorn sheep. 

Bepe'BKa, otkopmiitb nopoceHOKi) n CTpnib oBiia. 

Russia is inhabited by various nations. Good sovereigns Passive verbs. 
Pocci'a o6iiTaTb (instr.) MHoro HapoAi*. /Jofipbift rocyAapb 

are loved by their subjects and respected by their neighbours. The Tar- 
.iK)6iiTb CBoii noAAanHbifi h. yBaataib coc^ab. Ta- 

tars have been vanquished and defeated in the plains of Koulikof. 
Tapi'mi no^BAHTb n pa36iiTb na (prep.) no^e Kv.ihkobT). 

Thy labours will be crowned with success. Nouns are declined, and 
Tboh TpyAT> VB-bHqaTb (instr) ycnixT.. H'mh ciuoHaTb h 

verbs conjugated. This great captain will be revered by pos- 
rjiar6jT> cnparaTb. Ceii BejiuKin no.nvOBOAerrb hthti. bt> (prep.) 

terity. Moscow has been devastated and burnt by the enemies. 

noTOMCTBO. MocKBa pa3opiiTb h cjKe<n> Bpan,. 

This gun is charged. This book is well bound. 
3'tott, pyjKbe 3apaAiiTb. d'TOTb KHiira npeKpacHO nepen^ecTn. 



adverbs. 



134 RUSSIAN GRAMMAR. 

THE ADVERB AND THE GERUND. 

Division of the 71. — The adverbs (Hapinia) are divided into different 
classes according to their meaning: 

1. Adverbs of quality or manner (napiHifl Ka^iecTBa), e. g- 
TaKt, thus; HHaie, otherwise; xopomo, well; xyAO, badly; 
Hapo^HO, intentionally; CKopo, quickly; HanpacHO, in vain; 
HayraAi., at random; 3ao^Ho ; by agreement; no-CBoeMy, in 
one's own way, etc. 

2. Adverbs of time (BpeMeHii), e. g. BHepa ; yesterday; 
ceroAHH, to-day; 3aBTpa, to-morrow; yTpoM'L, in -the mor- 
ning; BenepoMx, in the evening; hb'ihs, now; TenepL, at 
present; Tor^a, then; nocji^ ; afterwards; npejK^e, before; 
HHor/i,a, sometimes; TOTHacL, presently, etc. 

3. Adverbs of place (j\ticTa) : a) such as indicate a place 
without motion: sa'Bcb, here; TaMT> ; there; nnrAi, nowhere; 
AOMa, at home; Bea^i, everywhere; b~) such as indicate the 
place to which the action is directed: cio/ja, hither; TyAa, 
thither; HHKyAa, nowhere; /iomoh, home; bch)av, every- 
where; c) such as indicate the place whence the action pro- 
ceeds; e.g. OTCH)/ja, from here; OTTyAa, from there; msni, 
from without] cHapyjKH, from the exterior; OTBdOAy, from 
all sides, etc. 

4. Adverbs of order (nopaAKa); e.g. BO-nepBBixt, firstly; 
BO-BTopbixx, secondly; noTOivri., subsequently, etc. 

5. Adverbs of quantity (KO.o*iecTBa); e. g. aobojibho, 
enough; mrao, little; MHoro, much; HicKOJiBKO, some, etc. 

6. Implicit (3aMiiHiiTe.ziBHi»ifl) adverbs ; as: Aa, yes; hutt>, 
no; mo-at., ac, says he, etc. 

7; Interrogative (BonpocHTC/iBHbia), adverbs; e. g. KorAa, 
when? aoko-ztb, how long? rAU, where (without motion)? KVAa, 
where (with motion) ? OTKyAa, whence? cko^ibko, how much? 
3a T iBM r L, why? etc. 
Formation of 72. — Adverbs are for the most part derivatives, being for- 
med from nouns, adjectives, pronouns or verbs. Nouns in the 
instrumental and other cases are often employed adverbially; 
e. g. KpyroMi,, in a circle; BepxoMi,, on horseback; AapoivrL, 
gratis; Ha nOKa3T,, for show; bt, ToponaxT>, in haste, etc. 
Every qualifying adjective, in the apocopated termination of 



the adverbs. 



Lexicology. — the adverb and the gerund. 



135 



the neuter gender, can become an adverb, as: OKpacuTt Gib.w, 
cune, dye white, blue; nocTynaTt xopomo, to conduct himself 
well. The possessive and circumstantial adjectives form ad- 
verbs of manner by means of the preposition wo, as: iio-^e^io- 
BiiHbH, as a man; no-pyccKH, in Russian; no-Apy>KecKH, as 
a friend; no-3Bi>priHOMy, like beasts; no-Moeiviy, according 
to my view. 

73. — The adverbs formed from qualifying adjectives admit 
of degrees of comparison; e. g. yMHO, wisely, and yisiHie, 
more wisely; xopomo, well, and Jiyniue, better; noKopHO, 
humbly, and BcenoKopHinnie, very humbly. We must here 
remark that the comparative of the adverbs is the same at that 
of the adjectives in the apocopated termination, with the ex- 
ception of the five adverbs: 66ji%e,more; Men^e, to; AOJTBe, 
longer; Aa^e, further; Ton-Be, more finely, which must be 
distinguished from the adjectives 6oAbme, greater; MeHtnie, 
less; AO./ii>me, longer; A&Jihuie, more distant; TOHtme, finer. 
The qualifying adverbs can also be used in the diminutive and 
augmentative aspects; e. g. CHHeBaTO, bluishly; Ma^efltKO, a 
little; HeMHOJKKO, not much; noxyace, a little worse; npe- 
yMHO, very wisely. 

74. — The gerunds (A'&enpnHacTm) are nothing but verbal 
adverbs formed from active or neuter participles. They have 
two terminations in each of the two tenses, viz: aj in the 
present, r or (after a hissing letter) a, and wmi or ym, e. g. 
Ai-ziaa and A^awMH, in doing; Atinia and AtiuiyiH, in breath- 
ing; Heca and Hecyin, in bearing; bj in the preterit, ed 
and emu; e. g. A^aB't and A^aBinn, after having done; 
npocHBi> and npocHBnm, having prayed, remarking however 
that verbs which have not the letter ji in the preterit, have 
only the termination mm, e.g. yaiepmn, being dead; noTyxnra, 
being extinguished. The same is the case with the pronominal 
verbs; e. g. yHHBinncB, after having learned; B03BpaTHBmncL, 
having returned. 

The full terminations of the gerunds fouu and emu are more com- 
monly employed in familiar language, while the apocopated termination 
n and es are more usual in the written tongue. 



Degrees of 
comparison. 



Gerunds. 



136 



RUSSIAN GRAMMAR. 



Adverbs. 



Gerunds. 



EXERCISES ON THE ADVERBS AND THE GERUNDS. 

Come here, for I live here. Where is your brother? He is not 
nofiTH CKW, lido a 3KHTL 34SC&. T4U Baim> 6paTi>? 0hi> Him, 

at home. Where did he go yesterday evening? Thou judgest wisely, 
AOMa. Ky4a oht> noixaTt Bnepa BeiepoMi>? Tbi cy4HTB vmho 

and thy brother judges more wisely. I walk quik, and thou walkest 
a tboh 6paTt . H xo4htbum6ko. a tbi 

quicker. You speak Russian purely, and your sister speaks it 
. Tbi roBopiiTB no-pyccKH ihcto, a Bann, cecTpiina 

more purely. To-morrow we shall go very far, and in a year 
3aBTpa a noixaTB o^eHt aajeKo, a ipe3 r L (ace.) ro4t 

we shall go still further. Thou singest well, but she sings better, 
enie • Tbi n£TB xopomo, ho oht> 

I beg you very earnestly. I thank you very humbly. 
H npoci'iTB tbi yfi-BAHTe^tHO. fl 6jiaro4apiiTB tbi noKopiio. 

While walking on the bank of the river, I enjoy 

Tv-mtb Ha (prep.) 6eperi> p£Ka, a Haciaa^aTBca 

the freshness of the evening. While pitying the unfortunate, 

(instr.) npox./ia4a Benep-B. }Ka.iBTB o (prep.) HeciaCTHBM, 

try to aid them. I instruct you, because I wish you well, 

CTapaTBca noMoraTB orb. ft yiiiTB tbi, rn.eAa.Tb tbi (gen.) 4o6po, 

and because I hope that you will make progress in the 
h Ha4iaTBca, hto tbi ycnBB&TB bi (prep.) 

sciences. When thou dost not know how to do a thing, ask 

Hayna. He vmbtb 4'BjaTB (ge?i.) hto rho^b, npociiTB 

advice without blushing. Do right without fearing any man. 

(gen.) cohiTrh , He KpaciiBTB. /Ib^tb 4o6po, He 6oaTBca (gen.) hiikto. 

One must not eat when lying down. In serving our country, and 
46.OUI0 ue $ctb jiemaTB. CayaiHTB (dat.) OTe^ecTBO h 

dying for it, we do our duty. Having received your 

yMHpaTB 3a (ace.) ohb, a ncno^HHTB cboh 40^ri. IIo.mHTB BauiB 

letter, and having learned what you want, I have answered imme- 
uhcbmo, h y3HaTB (gen.) hto tbi ;Ke.ia r fB, a oTBB^aTB HeMe- 

diately. After having dined, stop at home. Having written 

4-flemio. OTo6i>4aTB, ocTaBaTBca 40Ma. HanncaTB 

your letter, placed it in an envelope, and sealed it, 

nncBMo, uoAomiiib bt> (ace.) KyBepTB h 3aneiaTaTB, 



Lexicology. — the preposition. 



137 



put it in the post. Having returned home, I set about 

0TAap,aTb oHt ira {ace.) uoiTa. IlpiuTii aomoh, a cbctb 

writing. After being married, he repaired to the country. Having 
nucaTt. .JKemiTbca, oht> noixaTb bt. {ace.) AepeBHa. npo- 

remained an hour with him, I returned home; after undressing 
CHAiiTb (ace.) iacb y (gen.) oht., a nouni aomoh ; pa3A"£BaTb- 

myself and going to bed I fell asleep immediately, 
ca a Aeib, a ycHyTB CKopo. 



THE PREPOSITION. 



75. — The prepositions Ope/porn) of the Russian Ian- Division of the 

prepositions. 

guage are simple [6^ r h ) Ha, no) or compound (n^x-aa, h3t.- 
noA^); the following is a general list of them: 



Ee3T> (6e3o), without. 

B3- Or B03- (B30), up, SUS-. 

Bt> (bo), in, into, to, at. 
Bbi-, out, without, ex-. 
4-aa, for. 

/Jo, as far as, until. 
3a, behind; after; for. 
H3b (H30), f r om. 
H3T>-3a, from behind. 
H3B-no/n>, from under. 
Kt> (ko) to, towards; for. 
Ha, on; against. 
Ha/n> (na4o), upon, over. 
Hh3- (HH30-), down, de-. 



Ott> (oto), from; since; out of. 
no (na-), about; until; after. 
noAi. (noAo-), under, underneath. 
npa-, (indicating a removed relation- 
ship; npaABA'b, great grand-/ ather). 
npe- or nepe-, beyond, trans-; re-. 
npe,Ab or nepeAT> (npeAo), before, 
npu, near; in the time of. 
npo, of, about. 
PaAH, for the sake of. 
Pa3- or po3- Cpa3o), apart, se-. 
CbB03b, through. 
Ct. (co, cy-), since ; about ; with. 
y, at; by, near. 



or o6t> (odo), of; round ; against. tlpesT. or Hepe3i> ; through ; during. 
The following adverbs also belong to the class of prepo- 



sitions : 

B^u3T>, near. 

Bao.m., along. 

Bmbcto, instead of. 

BHyTpb and BHVTpu, within. 

Bh-b, out of, without. 

B63-J-B, beside. 

BonpeKti, against, in spite of. 

KpoMB, besides, except. 

Me)K4y or mem-b, between, among. 

Mi'imo, past, by. 

Ha3aAii, behind. 

HacynpoTiiB-b, opposite. 

ReifT Russian Grammar. 



O'kojo, round; about. 
O'KpecTi,, around. 
OnpiWb, except, excepting. 
noBepxx, upon, above. 
IIoa^b, beside. 
no3aA» and no3aAb, behind. 
noc^B, after. 
IIpeffiAe, before. 
npoTHBi, or npoTi'my, against. 
CBepxi,, above; besides. 
C3aAH or co3aAi'i, from behind. 
CpeAH and cpeAb, in the middle. 
13 



138 RUSSIAN GRAMMAR. 

Certain adverbs, formed from qualifying adjectives, are also 
used as prepositions; e. g. othochtc/ibho, in reference to; 
KacaTejtno, concerning. The same is the case with certain 
gerunds, as: Hcmuoiafl, excepting; He CMOTpa Ha, not with- 
standing, and also some nouns in different cases, as: Bt pa3- 
cyjK/jeHM, in consideration of; nocpe/jcTBOMt, by means ofeic. 

76. — The prepositions in every language have a twofold 
use. In the first place they are used, as prefixes, in the for- 
mation of the different parts of speech, of which they become 
an integral part; e. g. <fe?yMie, absurdity; 63TAfijxh, look; 3d- 
na^x, the west; o6oAhw,kTb, to seduce; /kzcbihok'b, the son in 
law; HMBHyK'L, the great-grand-son; cjMepKH, twilight; upe3- 
BBiHaiiHBiM, extraordinary, etc. Secondly, as particles of 
speech, they are placed before nouns and pronouns to indicate 
the relations of the objects; e. g. He^0BiKT> 6e.35 yMa, a man 
without talent; npocBtfa do cvabh, a request to the judge; 
nncBMo K3 /tpyry, a letter to a friend; CKa3Ka o ./ihchu/e, the 
tale of the fox, etc. 

These examples show that some prepositions are used con- 
jointly and separately, while others of them can only be em- 
ployed in one of these ways. Such as are only used separa- 
tely, are: rah, kt, (ko), pa^n, ckbo3B, H3 , B-3aandH3T>-n6/i, , B. 
Such as are only used conjointly, are: B3 (bo3, B30), bbi, 
hh3 (hh3o), na, npa, npe (nepe), pa3 (po3, pa3o) and cy, 
and for this reason are called inseparable prepositions. All 
the other prepositions may be used both conjointly and se- 
parately. 

Government of 77. — The separable prepositions require the complemen- 

the prepositions. tary WQrd tQ ^ ^ m ft certain cage Tmis: 

Be3T>, /[ah, ao, H3x, 03^-3*1, ns'B-noA'B, otx, pa^H and y, 
as well as almost all the adverbs usedprepositionally, require 
the genitive. 

Kt» and the adverb BonpeKH require the dative. 

IIpo, ckbo3b and npe3T» govern the accusative. 

HaA'B requires the instrumental, as does also the adverb 
MejK#y or MencB, though used occasionally with the genitive. 

Ilpn governs the prepositional. 



Lexicology. — the preposition. 139 

3a, nojyb and npe/rt require the accusative when they in- 
dicate motion towards an object, and the instrumental when 
they design repose. 

B'L, Ha and o or o6t> govern the accusative when they in- 
dicate a change of place, and the prepositional when there is 
no motion indicated from one place to another. 

Ct> governs the genitive, the accusative and the instrumental. 
With the genitive it means from, since; with the accusative, 
as, about, of the size of and with the instrumental, with. 

Ho requires the dative, the accusative and the prepositional. 
With the dative it signifies about; with the accusative, as far 
as, and with the prepositional, after. 

EXERCISES ON THE PREPOSITIONS. 

Without hope it is impossible to live in the world. From the river 
Be3t HaAejK^a Hejb3fl jkhtt> bt> cbbtb. On. ptna 

to the forest there are two versts. Ofwhatareyou talking? We labour 
40 A'hC'b (ecmb) Asa BepcTa. ito tbi roBopiiTb? ft TpyAUTbca 

for the public good. Between the house and the garden there is a 
AAn 66niiu daro. MewAy aomt> h caAi> (ecm&) npo- 

large court with stables. For God's sake do not grieve. The 

CTpaHHBlH ABOpt CT> KOHfOUIHfl. PaAU Eon> He yHblBaTfc. Aw- 

love of the sovereign and of one's native land. He lives at his uncle. 
66bb kt> rocyAaph h oTenecTBo. 0ht> jkhtb y cboh ajiah. 

The soldier started from behind the bush. The ray of the sun 

CO-flAaTt Bb'lCKOIHTb H3T>-3a KyCTT>. AyHT> COJHeqHblft 

passes through the water. This man is at death's door. The bird 

npoHUKaTb CKB03b BOAa. S'tottj leJOBiKT) Qecnib') npu CMepTb. nTiiua 

flies under the clouds. I have put the book under the table. Sit down 
.leTaTb noAT> 66.*aK0. fl nciomiTb KHiira noAT> cto.it>. CaAHTbca 

to table and remain at table. My brother starts for Moscow, be- 
3a CTO-IB H CHABTb 3a CT0.1T>. Mofi oparb ixaTb bt> MocKBa, noTOMy 

cause his wife lives at Moscow. The eagle is perched on the tree. 
tto OHb jKeHa *HTb bt> MocKBa. Opejn> CHA'BTb Ha AepeBo. 

This glass has been broken into several pieces. I am angry with 
3'tott> pibMKa pa36nBaTbca Ha jvie.iKiH iacTb. fl AOcaAOBaTb Ha 

my brother for his laziness. Never mind the affairs of others. 

MOB 6paTT> 3a OHL 4T>H0CTb. He 3a66THTbCa o A"B^Q HVJKOH. 



140 RUSSIAN GRAMMAR. 

My friend has wounded himself against the corner of the table. The 
Mofi 4pyrt ymn6aTica o6t> yro.n> ctojlt>. 

water runs from the roof. Here are trees with leaves, but without 
Bo#a Tent ct KpoBJia. Botb AepeBo ct> jhctl, ho 6e3i» 

blossoms. This dog will be of the size of a cow. The children run 
ub$tb. 3'totb cofiaKa 6bitb ct> KopoBa. J\mk GiiraTB 

about the court and about the garden. We worked from the first to 
no ABopt h no ca,/ri>. fl pa(5oTaTB ott> nepBBiii no 

the fifth of August. He wears mourning for his brother. 
nflTBift hhcw A'BrycTi). Oht> hochtb Tpaypi> no cboh CparB. 

THE CONJUNCTION. 

78. — The following is a general list of the Russian con- 
junctions (C0H)3bl). 



A, and; but. 


He to.3bko ... ho h, not only but 


By4e, if, provided. 


Heace-iH, than. [even 


EyATO, 6y4TO 6bi, that, as if. 


Hn, HHHte, neither, nor; not even. 


BnpoqeMi>, as for the rest. 


Ho, but 


/[a, and, but; let. 


O/iHaKO, however. 


4a6Bi, that, in order that. 


noceMy, then. 


4-fla Toro hto, because. 


noTOMy hto, because. 


E')Kem and ecAu, if, in case, when 


. npaB^a, it is true. 


}Ke or an,, then, also. 


nycKafi or nycTB, let. 


H, and; also, too. 


Ckojib hh, whatever. 


H'6o, because. 


C^i/ioBaTejBHO, consequently, then. 


Maii or EAb, or. 


To, then. 


H TaKT>, therefore. 


Toro pa^u, therefore. 


Kant, as, when. 


To^bko and tokmo, only, merely. 


KaKi.-TO, for instance. 


Xoth, though, although. 


Kor^a, when, whenever. 


XoTii 6bi, even though. 



Ah or Ab (interrogative); if, whether, ^to, that. 

Ai\6o, either, or. l Lw6bi or ito6i, that, in order that. 

Auwb, just, as soon as. <I^mt>, than. 

There are other parts of speech which perform the office of 
conjunctions; such are the relative pronouns: kto, tto,kot6- 
ptin, koh, who, which; uen, whose; KaKoit, which; the inter- 
rogative adverbs : r^, Ky^a, where; OTKy/ja, whence; ^OKO-a*, 
how long; ckojilko, cko^il, how much; and others: TaiCL, thus; 
noKa ; as much as; t-smx . . . hemt., so much the more. . . that; 
humx .... TUMx, the more . . .\ the more; nacTiio } %n part, etc, 



second part. — Syntax. 141 

EXERCISES ON THE CONJUNCTIONS. 

My uncle was born and lived at Moscow, and not. at Tver. Do you 
Mofi ajUh poAHTbca h muTb bt> MocKBa, a He bt. TBepfc. 3HaTb 

know that our tutor is indisposed? If you do not come, I 

au tto naujT> yiiiTe^L ne3Aop6Bbiil? E'Hve^HTbi He nprE3JKaTb, to a 

shall be angry. Ask him if he will come, or if he has the intention 
ocepAiiTbca. CnpociiTb y oht> ; ah oht> xoTiTb sxaTb, imh BosnaMipiiTbca 

to stop at home. He distresses himself more about his brother than about 
ocTaBaTbca AOMa. Oht> 3a66'niTbca Goj-fie o dparb newe-m o 

his sister. It is more agreeable to do good to others, than to re- 
cecTpa. llpiaTiibiu A'B-WTb Ao6po Apyroil, TEJvrb no^y- 

ceive benefits one's self. Let him come; let them go. Do 
saTb G^aroTBopenie caarb. IlycTb 0Hb npinTii ; nycKatt oht> ybxaTb. 

not let the sun find you on your bed. Long live the Tzar. The 
He Aa c6.«m;e 3acTaBaTb tm Ha Aome. /Ja 3/ipaBCTBonaTb IJapb. 

more thou learnest diligently, the more study will be easy to thee. 
y-bwh tw yiHTbca npu^e^Ho, n-BWb yienbe 6biTb jerKin j\ah th. 

THE INTERJECTION. 

79. — The principal interjections QviejKAOMeTinJ of the 
Russian language are the following: ypa! ra! expressing 70?// 
axt! oxt>! yBti! axTii! expressive of pain; an! yxi! on! in- 
dicate fear; T$y! indicates aversion; y<s>i>! expresses fatigue; 
Hy! nyjKe! are used to encourage; ctb! tcl! to impose si- 
lence; an! ren! to call. 



gH(S®HIS) IP&IE'lFa 

SYNTAX. 

80. — Syntax, which treats of the union of the different Division of 
elements of speech, and of the order in which those different Syntax 
elements ought to be arranged, is divided into three parts: 
1) the concord of words (cor^acoBaHieJ, or the syntax of 
agreement, which teaches how to express the union existing 
between the words forming the proposition; 2) the dependence 

13. 



142 RUSSIAN GRAMMAR. 

of words (ynpaB^eme), or the syntax of government, which 
teaches the manner of indicating the relation existing between 
a term and its antecedent; and 3) the construction of words 
Cpa3M-Bm,eHie) ; or the place to be assigned to the single 
words in the proposition, and to the propositions in the period. 

CONCORD OF WORDS. 

81. — The following are the rules of the concord of words 
in the Russian language: 

1. The subject (no/j./iejKam,ee), attribute (cKa3yeivioe) and 
copula (cBH3KaJ must agree in gender, number and person; 
e. g. Eon, ecTB Bceivioryiir/L, God is almighty; HayKH (cymb) 
no^e3Hbi, the sciences are useful; MocKBa 6tua c/iaBiia, 
Moscow has been celebrated; A'3ia 6y/j,eTT> cnoKoima, Asia 
will be tranquil; co./iHueB30iii./i6, the sun has risen. — When 
the attribute is a noun, it retains its gender and number; as: 
ope./n> ecrj> xniUHaa nmuu,a, the eagle is a bird of prey; but 
the movable nouns agree with the subject; as: ajebl ecTB 
cnfmmui.a 3eivMM, the moon is the satellite of the earth. 

To this rule there are the following exceptions: 1) The personal 
pronoun of the 2d person, with its determinatives, as also the verb and 
the attribute when an adjective, is used, from politeness, in the plural 
instead of the singular; but when the attribute is a noun, it remains in 
the singular; e. g. bli caMu, Apyra moh, ne3dop6ebi, you yourself, my 
friend, are indisposed; 6ptTe ceudibmeAeMG, be a witness. — 2) The 
verb Obimb, in the sense of exist, though the subject be plural, remains 
in the singular in the 3d person of the present; but in the preterit and 
future it agrees in number with its subject; e. g. y Hero ecnw AeHtrn, 
he has money; y nero 6mau AeHLni, he had money; y Hero 6yoyrm 
AeHLrH, he will have money. — 3J In the case of nouns indicating a 
title, the verb and the attribute agree in gender with the sex of the 
person who bears the title; as: Ero BcuWecTBo (Kopojib) He3dopo6Z, 
His Majesty (the King) is indisposed; M CisTC/iBCTBO (TpacfiiiHfi) 6buid 
3a-ecl, Her Excellency One Countess) has been here; Ero Cb-btvioctb 
(KHR3b) npozyjiueajicR, His Highness (the Prince) has taken a walk. 

2. Determinative words agree with the noun they determine, 
in gender, number and case; e. g. Bernum IleTpi* npeo6pa- 
30BaA r B oomupuyjo Poccim, Peter the Great has regenerated 
the vast Russian empire. If the determinative is a noun, it 
only agrees in case; e. g. C/ie3ti, ymibmeuie HecnacTH&iX'L, 



Syntax. — concord of words. 143 

y nero H3caiuH, tears, the consolation of the unhappy, were 
dried up within him. 

3. Two or more subjects in the singular require the verb and 
the attribute in the plural; e.g. AiuooTb ii npa3AHOCTB C c y mb ) 
epedfibi, laziness and inactivity are pernicious. If the two nouns 
in the singular are united by an alternative conjunction, the 
verb and the attribute must be in the singular; e. g. 3iiivia iuh 
BecHa Te6i npi/imua? is it winter or spring that is agreeable 
to thee? 

4. The infinitive, when it performs the office of subject, re- 
quires the verb and the attribute to be put in the neuter sin- 
gular; this is also the case with the adverbs araoro, much; 
moo, little; ck6jii>ko, how much; h-bcko^lko, some; e. g. 
yMiipaTL 3a OTe^ecTBO (ecmb] cAdeno h npikmm, it is noble 
and pleasant to die for one's country; cko^lko npuuiAO ce- 
MeilcTB-B, how many families have arrived? 

5. When two nouns, the one appellative and the other pro- 
per, both relating to the same object, differ in number or gender, 
the adjective or verb agrees with the appellative noun; e. g. 
dpeeuiiiYOipoft'b Bi'ibbi, the ancient city of Thebes; cAdena/i ptica 
4yHan, the celebrated river Danube. When there are two 
nouns of different genders, the adjective agrees with the mas- 
culine; e. g. CAdemie napn h uapnubi, the celebrated kings 
and queens. In the verbs the first person has the priority over 
the two others, and the second over the third; as: th h a 
zyAueMS BM^CTfc, thou and I walk together; tm h oht> ne 
suaeme hto Ai^aTL, thou and he know not what to do. 

6. The numerals compounded of oahht., one, require the 
noun in the singular (§ 43J ; e. g. ABa/juaTL oahhb pydAb, 
twenty one rubles; Tticaqa o/jHa nonb, the thousand and one 
nights. 

7. The relative pronouns agree in gender and number with 
the noun to which the relate, but they take the case that the 
verb of the phrase in which they occur, may require; e. g. a 
3Haro fl,%Jio, o KomopoMS bm roBopiiTe, / know the affair of 
which you speak. The pronoun neii, occurring always with a 
noun, must agree in every respect with that noun; e.g. tot-l, 
B r b Hbiixd pynax'B Moa cy/jtfia, he in whose hands is my destiny. 



144 RUSSIAN GRAMMAR. 

EXERCISES ON THE CONCORD OF WORDS. 

Winter is agreeable. Men are mortal. Novgorod was 

3hm& npiaTHfcia. I Ie.aoB'BK'B CMepTHBiu. HoBropoAt 6bitb 

rich. Russia is a vast empire. The Wolga is the king of 

GoraTMH. Poccia 6bitb o6uinpHBM HMnepia. Bo^ra 6bitb ijapB 

the rivers of Russia. My friend, you shall be satisfied. We 
pBKa pyccKift. Moii npiaTe.*B, tbi 6bitb aobojbhbih. Y a 

have great stores. I shall have to-morrow some money. Her Ma- 
6bitb 6oAbwoii 3anacB. Y a 6bitb 3aBTpa AenBru. Orb Be- 

jesty (the Empress) is gone out. His Excellency (thegene- 

JHiecTBO (IiMnepampuu,a~) BbiBxaTB. Orb npeBOCxoAiiTCiBCTBo {zene- 

raQ is gone. His Imperial Highness (the Grand Duke) 

pdjLZ] yixaTB. Oht> HMnepaTopcKifi BBicoqecTBO (BeAUKiu KnH3b') 

has been satisfied. Geography and history are very useful 

6bitb aobo^bhbih. Teorpaoia h HCTopia 6bitb BecBMa no.ie3HBiH 

branches of knowledge. It is difficult to be silent. How many children 
3HaHie. TpyAHBiii Mo^aTB. Ckojibko Aina 

were there? Moscow is celebrated; the town of Moscow is celebrated. 
6bitb T9Jvn>? MocKBa 3HaMeHHTBiM; ropo/TB 

China is densely peopled; the empire of China is densely peopled. 
KuTafi MHoroJUOAHBifi ; rocyAapcTBO 

He has thirty one horses. The book which you are reading, is 
y oht, 6bitb TpiUuaTB 04hht> JoiuaAB. Km'ira, KOTopBifi tbi HUTaTB, 

very amusing. Here is the man by whose works we profit. 
oieHB 3a6aBHBin. Bott> hcjob'BK'b, (instr.) ieii TpyAi. no./iB30BaTBca. 

DEPENDENCE OF WORDS. 

82. — For the dependence or government of words in Rus- 
sian the following rules are to be observed: 

1. Words which, having the same root, appear in the form of sub- 
stantive, adjective or adverb, as also in the form of verb, participle or 
gerund, require the same cases; e. g BpeAUTB 6./iuJKHeMy, to do harm 
to his neighbour; BpeAainifi 6AiWRemy, doing harm to his neighbour; 
Bpe^a 6.flii)KHeMy, in doing harm to his neighbour; BpeAt 6^ua(iieMy 3 the 
harm done to his neighbour ; BpeAHBiu 6.fli'i}KHeMy, prejudicial to his neigh- 
bour; BpeAHO G.u'mHeMy, prejudicially to his neighbour. 

2. The governing power of the verbs depends on their meaning: the 
same verb used in different significations requires different cases; e. g. 
roBopnTB npaBAy, to speak the truth; roBopiiTB o A'B^'B, to speak of an 
affair; roBopuTB a3BiKOMB, to speak a language; roBopuTB cb ApyroMB, 



Syntax. 



DEPENDENCE OF WORDS. 



145 



to speak with a friend; 0TKa3aTh npocirre.iK), to refuse a petitioner; 
0TKa3an> bt> npoCBOB, to refuse a request, OTF.a3aTB aomt., to bequeath 
a house; OTKa3aTb ott> 4o.ovhoctu, to deprive of an office. 

3. The prepositions communicate to the verbs to which they are 
joined a double quality. In the first place they express simply the com- 
mencement of the action, its duration and its completion; as: iirpajT. Ha 
*.ieuT3, he played on the flute; 3aiirpa.n> Ha *.iefiT-B, he began to play 
on the flute; nonrpaBi. na ^eiiTB, 3aH/uca oht> iTemeivrfc, after having 
played a little on the flute, he busied himself with reading ; Biepa cbi- 
rpa.it Ha 4>.ieiiTB npeTpy4Hoe coHiiHenie. yesterday he played on the 
flute a very difficult composition; oht> 4011rpa.1T> Ha 4>.ieiiTi> Haqaroe Ha 
CR-piinKB, he finished playing on the flute what he had begun on the vio- 
lin; OTbirpa.il> Ha *.ieuTi> bt> no-flHoib, he ceased playing on the flute at 
midnight. Secondly the preposition gives to the verb another meaning; 
e. g. micaTb nncbMO, to write a letter ; BOcnucaTB xBa.iy, to confer praises 
upon: BniicaTB bt> KHtiry, to inscribe in the book; Bb'mucaTb ii3i> khhth, 
to extract from a book; 3anncaTb bt> ciyKfiy, to enter on the service; 
na^nncaTb a4pecT>, to write an address; OTnwcaTb kt> 4pyry, to inform 
a friend; nepenucaTb Ha6b.flo, to make a fair copy; npiinucaTb CTpoiKy, 
to add a line; nponiicaTb bcio c.iy)K6y, to describe the whole service; 
pacnncaTB KOMHaTy, to paint a room; cnncaTbca cb npiaTejeivn., to cor- 
respond with a friend. The prepositional verbs of the first mentioned 
class require after them the same preposition and the same case as in 
the simple form, while those of the second category, in which the ad- 
dition of a preposition modifies the sense, take after them the prepo- 
sition with which they are formed, or a corresponding one, as is seen 
below. 



B03 or B3, 

b or bo, . 

Bbl, . . . . 

40, 

3a, . . . . 

113, . . , . 

ua, . . . . 



Is / HH3 > 

% \0T, 

luepe, 

|no4, 

npe/i, 

npn, 

npo, 

npoii3, 

pas, 

c or co. 



Ha; e. g. 
bt>; . . 

H3T>; . . 

40; . . . 
3a; . . . 

H3T>; . , 

ua; . . . 
naA-b ; . . 
ct>; . . . 
ott>; . . 
ipe3T>; . 
no4T>; . . 
npe^t; . 
kt>; . . . 

CKB03B; . 

ott>; . , 
Ha; . . . 
CT>: . . . 



. B3onTii na ropy, to ascend the mountain. 

. BCTynaib bt> 40mt>, to enter in the house. 

. BBiilTH ii3* .racy, to issue from the forest. 

. AoixaTB 40 ropo^a, to go as far as the town. 

. 3aKiniyTB 3a cnuiiy, to throw behind one's self. 

. B3B.ieHB H3T> KHiini, to extract from a book. 

. HaBbhbwrb Ha ^oma^b, to place upon a horse. 

. Ha4CMaTpiiBaTb Ha4T> 4BTbMi'i, to watch over the children. 

. HH3.ieTBTb cb KpoEuii, to fly down from the roof. 

. OTopBaTB ott, pa66TBi, to tear from labour. 

. nepecKOHiiTB ipe3T, poBT>, to leap across a ditch. 

. no/uoauiTb no4i> ro,ioBy, to put under his head. 

. npe4CTaTBnpe4T> cy4eii,fo present himselj 'be fore the judges. 

. npnmi kt> 4pyry, to come to a friend. 

. npoimi CKB03B oroHb, to pass through the fire. 

. npoH3oSTii ott, 6ojb3hii, to arise from a disease. 

. pa3pi3aTb na nacTii, to cut into pieces. 

. CKUHyTb ct> ce6a, to throw of one's self. 



146 



RUSSIAN GRAMMAR. 



83. — We now give the application of these rules in every 
case, with the exceptions thereto. 

Nominative. In the nominative are put: 1) The subject, or the principal 
member of the proposition; as : cornice cb^thtx, the sunshines; 
Mope myMMT'L, the sea roars. (The subject with a negative 
verb is sometimes put in the genitive; see below.) — 2) The 
attribute, united to the subject by means of the verb ecmb, 
6bU5 or 6ydy, when it expresses a permanent quality of the 
subject; as: ope^x ecTL nmuu^a, the eagle is a bird; A'/jaMi, 
6biAT> uejioeibKd, Adam was a man. The adjective in this 
occasion is used in the apocopated termination; as: Eor r B ecTB 
ecemozyufi, God is almighty; CiaBHHe Gbijih xpdOpu, the Sla- 
vonians were brave. If the attribute does not express some 
permanent quality of the subject, but only a transitory one and 
of short duration, it is then put in the instrumental; as: moh 
6paTT> 6bmt> bt. to BpeMa KademoMS, my brother was at that 
time a cadet; ohx CKopo 6f&eT r b zeneptiAOMZ, he will soon 
be a general. This exception however occurs only with the 
preterit and the future, never with the present. 

vocative. In the vocative is put the name or denomination of the per- 
son addressed} e. g. Bootee, cnacn E,apa! God, save the Tzar! 
Tocnodu, noMMyiiMeHa! Lord, have mercy upon me! 

Accusative. The accusative is used: 1) After the active verbs; as: nTiiua 
nteTi) eddy, the bird drinks the water; % noracHJit cewuy, 
I have put out the candle; mom coc^at. KynMx Oomz, my 
neighbour has bought a house. The verbal nouns, formed from 
these verbs, require the genitive; as: nriTie eodu, the drinking 
of the water, norauieme cemuu, the putting out of the candle; 
noKynKa dojna, the purchase of a house. — 2) To indicate 
the duration of an action for a given time or over a given 
distance; as: a nncajn> ecu) uom, I have written the whole 
night; oht. npoixa^ eepemy, he has run a verst. — 3) After 
the prepositions 65, ua, 3a, nods, npedz, npo, cK603b, npe3z, o 
or o6z, no and cz (§ 77). 
Dative. The dative is used: 1) With the accusative, to indicate the 

person to whose gain or loss the action is performed; e. g. 
tbi noAaJi r B mmoctbihio oibduojny, thou hast given alms to the 



Syntax. — dependence of avokds. 147 

♦ 

poor man. — 2) After the verbs formed with the prepositions 
npeds and co (in a sense of reciprocity), or with the adverbs 
6a&iq, npomim and npeuo; as: oceHB npe/unecTByeT r i> 3UJwh, 
autumn precedes winter; He npeKOC/iOBB cmdpmiiMZ, do not 
contradict the aged. — 3) After the verbs expressing command 
or prohibition, pleasure or grief, compliance or opposition, 
assistance or obstacle; e. g. mbi noApaacaeMi dpeeuumz, we 
imitate the ancients: He .abctii fiozdmuMd, do not flatter the 
rich; CJiyjKji ycepAno rocyddpw, serve the sovereign with 
zeal. The verbal nouns formed from these verbs also require 
the dative; as: no/ipajKaBie dpeemiMd, the imitation of the an- 
cients; jiecTB oozdmbuiz, flattery of the rich. — 4) After such 
verbs as are used in the infinitive instead of the future; as: 
6bitb oibdw, there will be a misfortune; He Bn/iaTB hums Ac- 
hbix'b ah eft, we shall see no more fine days. — 5) With the 
impersonal verbs; as: mhw xoneTCHBCTB, I want to eat; eamd 
He3AopoBHTca, you are indisposed. — 6) With such adjectives 
and adverbs as are derived from the above mentioned verbs, 
or which express advantage or detriment, utility or uselessness, 
pleasure or dislike; e. g. upiaTHBifi cjifxy, agreeable to the 
ear; jkhtb npiMHHHO CBoeiviy cocmoMiio, to live suitably to 
one's condition. — 7) After the prepositions ko and no, and 
the adverb eonpeuu (§ 77). 

The instrumental is used: 1) With the active, neuter, pro- instrumental 
nominal and passive verbs, a) to designate the instrument, the 
means by which the action is performed; as: oht. GepeT'B 
KHury pyndMU, he takes the book with the hands; a moiocb 
eoddw, I wash myself with water; KHura HamicaHa momm'b 
ymmeAeMo, the book has been written by my master; b) to 
designate the name, surname or quality given to an object; as: 
ero 30ByTi> EeduoMZ, they call him John; Te6a noHHTaroT'B 
fMHMMo, you are considered intelligent. Some active verbs 
expressing motion, which usually govern the accusative, are 
also found with the instrumental; as: 6pocaTB mmem and 
6pocaTB KdMiieMo, to throw a stone; ABnraTB cepdi^d and 
cepdu,aMii. to move the hearts. — 2) With the verb obimb and 
Obiedmb, to designate a quality; as: oh-b xowfB 6bitb aw6u- 
MbiMd, he desires to be loved; He Gbib&tb Te6i eduuoMd, thou 



148 RUSSIAN GRAMMAR. 

wilt not be a warrior. (See above the nominative.) — 
3) After such verbs as indicate contempt, indignation, esteem, 
possession, sacrifice, etc.; as: npeHedperaxL ondcuocmbio, to 
despise danger; B^aAiTt uMibmeMd, to possess a property; 
iKepTBOBaTfc coooio, to sacrifice one's self. The verbal nouns 
formed from such verbs also require the instrumental; as: 
npeHefipe/Kenie cndcuocmbio, the contempt of danger; B./iaA'B- 
nie iiMibiiieMd, the possession of a properly. — 4) To desig- 
nate that part of an object which is distinguished by some 
particular quality; as: Auu,eM5 6%Ah y while in the face; hjh- 
poKT> nMuaMii, broad in the shoulders. — 5) To indicate the 
road an object takes; and also to designate the seasons and 
the parts of the day; as: njiBiTL MOpeMd, to go by sea; eec- 
hoh) CBroTt, one sows in spring; howio cnaTT>, one sleeps at 
night. — 6) After the prepositions 3a, Hadd } nodd, npedz, cd, 
and the adverb Mewcdy or jnewcd (§ 77). 
Genitive. The genitive is used: 1) With nouns to indicate that one 
object is the properly of another, and also its origin, etc.; as: 
xo3flMH , L doma, the master of the house; aomt. cocMa, the 
house of the neighbour; cbiht> coAddma, the son of a soldier. 
The complementary noun in such occasions may be converted 
into a possessive adjective ; as : doMoebiti xosAviE r b ) cocfbdniii 
Aomt>, coAddmcuiii cbih-l. The dative may sometimes be sub- 
stituted for this genitive; as: Apyrt 6pdmy, the friend of the 
brother; ntHa MwcmdMo, the price of the places. A noun with 
a qualifying adjective indicates in the genitive the quality of 
the object in a higher degree; as: nan Afmuazo copma, a tea 
of superior quality; ne^OBiKt cmpomxz npdeuAd, a man of 
rigid principles. — 2) With the verbal nouns, formed from 
active verbs governing the accusative; e.g. HTeme kuuzu, the 
reading of a book; 3Hame dfbAa, the knowledge of an affair. 
— 3) To designate number, weight, measure, and in general 
after adverbs of quantity; as: nyAi> cmia, a pood of hay; 
apiiiiiHT. cyKHdj an ell of cloth; r%cko j[\>kqkhuz5, some books. 
; — 4) To designate the years, the months and the day of the 
month; as: uiecmazo HEBapA Tticaqa BoceMtcoTTb nembipuad- 
u,amazo zoda, January 6th i81i. — 5) After active verbs 
preceded by the negative adverb ue, and with the impersonal 



Syntax. — dependence of words. 149 

negative verbs nmmd, ue cmdjio, ne cauuiho, ne UMwemcn, and 
others indicating privation; e. g. He iw6j\w ueefbwcdbi, I do 
not like the ignorant; He bidkv noAb3bi, I do not see the advan- 
tage; yHact h-ett. xjfbfia, we have no bread; rot A'dMeHAne 
6yAe*n>, when I shall be no more; He bhaho nepemmibi, one 
sees no change. — 6) With the active verbs, when the action 
extends only to a part of the object, or lasts only a limited 
time; e. g. npHHecn eodu, bring me some water; Aaft mh£ 
nepd, give me your pen for a little while. The same is the 
case with some verbs formed with the prepositions Ha and no, 
as: HayAHTt pixobi, to catch some fish; noKociiTL mpaeb% to 
mow some grass. — 7) With such active and pronominal verbs 
as express desire, expectation, disobedience, fear, privation, etc. 3 
e. g. jKejiaeivrB 3dpdeiR, we desire health; oht. awn. pa3- 
cewma, he awaits daybreak; 6ohtbch /itigbbrto ceibma, to fear 
the light of day] AepacaTBca npaeiuu necTii, to keep to prin- 
ciples of honour. The verbal nouns formed from these verbs 
also require the genitive; as: jKe,ianie cAdebi, the desire of 
glory; jiHuienie iiMJbmn, the loss of a property. — 8) After 
the adjectives aoctohhbih, worthy; nojiHBin, full; HyjKAtM, 
a stranger to; and the adverb Hca^iB, it is a pity; e. g. a ^yjKAt 
cero Mufbuifi, I am a stranger to this opinion; m&Ah eaiy 
6pdma, he is sorry for his brother. — 9) After adjectives and 
adverbs in the comparative, when not followed by a conjunc- 
tion; e. g. coKpoBHiiia Aparou.'EHH'EHmia 30Aoma, treasures 
more precious than gold; c/ioht. BB'iine eepfiAwda, the elephant 
is larger than the camel; out hchjit, jyoj[%z ecmxz, he has lived 
longer than all. — 10) After the prepositions 6e35, 3ar, do, 
U35, u35-3d, u35-nod5 ) omz, pddu, cd and y, as also after most 
of the adverbs used as prepositions (§ 77), remarking that 
the prepositions Oar and pddu are sometimes placed after 
their complement; as: rak Bora and Bora A./ia, for God's 
sake; paAH hccth and ^ecTH paAH, for honour. 

Lastly the genitive is used with the numerals. See the 
particular rules relative to the numerals § 43. 

The prepositional case is only used with the prepositions Prepositional 
65, na, or o6d , no and npu (§ 77). 



150 RUSSIAN GRAMMAR. 

EXERCISES ON THE DEPENDENCE OF WORDS. 

Nominative. Wafer is an element. Alexander of Macedon was a great 

Bo/ia 6bitb cTHxia. A^eKcaH4pi> MaKe40HCKw 6bitb BcanKifi 

captain. The Tatars were ferocious. My grand-father was an offi- 

no-flKOBO^eut. TaTapnHt 6mtb CBup-EnBiit. Moft 4$/^ 6bitb o<i>h- 

cer; my grand-father was then an officer. It is said that the comets 
uept; Torvra . Tobophtb hto KOMeTa 

have been or will be once planets. 
6bitb imh 6bitb eme n^aHeTa. 

Accusative. The rain refreshes the earth. Rogues hate honest men. 

40JKAB 0CB*6)KaTB 3eMJIH. 3^104^8 HeHaBH4'6TB leCTHBlH - AMAH. 

The storm which devastated our fields, has ruined many pea- 
Eypa, onycTomaTB Haun> no^e, pa3opaTB MHorie noce- 

sants. Speak always the truth. My brother was been sick all 
j6hbht>. ToBopiiTB BcerM npaB^a. Moft oparB 6bitb 6ojibhoh BecB 

winter. I have been a whole verst on horseback. Thou art praised 
3HMa. H ixaTB niAbm Bepda BepxoMT>. Tbi xBa^uTB 

for thy assiduity. He struck himself against the wall. We are in 
3a npn^e^Kame. Oht> yAapaTBCH 061. CT-BHa. H ciw'btb bt> 

the water up to the neck. The son is the size of the father, and the 
BO/ia no men. Cbiht. pocrB Cb OTeu.T>, 11 

daughter almost the size of the mother. 

40% nO^TH Cb MaTB. 

Dative. The miser prefers money to glory, and the warrior prefers 

CKyneui. npe4noiHTaTB 4eHBrn CMBa, h bohht. 

glory to money. The lightning precedes the thunder. I admire your 
OflaBa 4eHBrn. Mo^Hia npe4inecTB0BaTB rpoMi>. 4 HBII TBca BaniB 

patience. Do these pictures please you? Do not avenge thyself on 
Tepnime. 3'tott. KapTima HpaBHTBca.aH tbi? He mcthtb 

thy enemy, and do good to him who has offended thee. There will 
TBofl HenpiaTe-iB, h 4 r BJiaTB 4o6po o6n?KaTB tbi. Bbitb 

be a prodigy. Bitter tears will be shed. The child wishes to drink. It is 
iy/io. FopibiiH cie3a ./iutbch. Fe6e'H0KB xOTtTBca nnTB. 

not proper for a strong man to offend the weak. The imitation of 
He npH-jHiHBiH cimbhbih lejOB'EK'B o6iiJKaTB aaaoMit no^pa^ame 

Jesus Christ The love of virtue and the hatred of vice. 

JiicycB XpucTocB, Aw66Bb kt> Ao6^oj\ijeAb « HeHaBHCTb kt> nopto, 



Syntax. — dependence of words. 151 

I see with the eyes, I touch with the hands, I hear with instrumental. 
Bhastb rAWb, oca3aTB PY^a, cjbiuiaTb 

the ears, I smell with the nose, I taste with the tongue. Ismail 

yXO, o60HHTb HOCT>, BKyUiaTL H3LIKT,. HsMatui. 

was taken by Souvorof, and Otchakow by Potemkin. Every body 

B3HTb CyBOpOB'b, H OiaKOBt flOTeMKHHt. Bees 

calls these officers heroes. The patient moves scarcely the lips. 

Ha3biBaTb 3tott> o$nuepT> repofi. EojibHofl iueBcaiiTb eABa ry6a. 

I detest fraud and falsehood. Here one breathes a pure air. 

THymaTbca o6MaHi> a Aomb. 3A^Cb AbiiuaTb HiiCTbw B03AyxT>. 

The sacrifice of one's live for his sovereign and country. He is kind 
IlojKepTBOBaHie »(H3Hb 3a TocyAapb a oTeqecTBo. Oin>A66pbM 

in heart, but weak in head. One must rise in the morning, work 
cepAue, ho cflaobift ro-ioBa. HaAodHo BCTaBaTb yTpo, padoTaib 

during the day, rest in the evening and sleep during the night. Reconcile 
Aenb, OTAbixaTb Beiep-b, h cnaib Hoib. IIoMHpi'iTb 

my friend with his uncle. I congratulate you on .your success. 
mob Apyrc. ct. oht> ahah. Ilo3ApaBjiflTb Tbi ct> BanjT> ycnixi.. 

The son of my faithful friend departed yesterday. Quick-witted Genitive. 
CbiHi. moh HCKpeHHift Apyn> yB3a(aTb Biepa. Eo^binou vmt> 

children are often delicate. There has been made a list of the officers 
AHTa 6biBaTb HepiAKO xiabiu. CocTaB^arb cnucoK'b o$HnepT> 

of our division. The baking of bread. I have bought a pound of tea 
Hauxb AHBii3ifl. IleieHie xa^t*. A KyntiTb *yhtt> qaft 

and a cord of wood. Such labour and pains have been lost 
h cajKeHb ApoBa. Cto^bko TpyAi> h 3a6oTa nponaAaTb 

uselessly. The Russians took Paris March 18th 1814. I do not 
no-nycTOMy. PyccKiii 6paTb [lapiiJKi Mapn. 18 1814. fl He 

eat bread, but I drink water. I eat the bread, but I do not 
■BCTb xA%6 r b, ho niiTb BOAa. H -BCTb xa^t,, ho He 

drink the water. I have received neither letter nor packet. In this 
nnTb BOAa. H nojyiaTb He hh nucbivio, hh nocbUKa. Bt> 3tott> 

letter there is not a fault. Procure me money. The warriors 
HHCbMo ntrb hh oAHHt oimidKa. 4 0CTaB ^ Tb H 4eHbro. B6hht> 

wish for the battle and seek glory. The ambitious man thirsts for 
jKejaTb 6iiTBa h HCKaTb c^aBa. CsaBtMibGeui mimA^Tb 

honours. Thou desirest riches, and thou fearest labour. The barrel 
nonecTb. Tbi xorETb 6oraTCTBO ; h 6oaTbca TpyAT>. Bo4Ka 



152 RUSSIAN GRAMMAR. 

is full of wine. A worthy man is a stranger to hatred and envy. 
no^Hbifi biiho. 4o6pi>ifi ledOBiirfc ipKAbifi 3^66a h 3aBHCTb. 

Gold is dearer than silver; lead is heavier than iron. He 

3o.ioto /joporoH cepe6po; CBHHeuT> Taace./ibifi )Ke.ii30. Oh'b 

asks alms for Christ's sake. Rest is agreeable after la- 

OpOCHTb MIUOCTblHa XpHCTOCb pa^H. 0'TAbIXT> DpiflTHblH noClfc pa- 

bour. Along this shore runs a chain of mountains. The wolves 
OoTa. B^o^b 3tott> 6eperi> TaHyTbca u/Bnb ropa. Bojkt> 

prowl round the village. 
6po4HTb oko.10 ziepeBHa. 

Prepositional. My brother preserves his presence of mind in all the troubles 
Mori 6parb xpam'rrb npncyTCTBie Ayxi> npu Becb nenpiaTHOCTb 

of live. This town is built on the precipitous bank of a rapid 
B r b Htu3Hb. Gen ropo4T> nocrpoiiTb na KpyToii 6eperi. 6b'icTpbin 

river. A church with five cupolas. He weeps over his father. 
P'BKa. U,epKOBb o naTb r^aBa. Oht> n^anaTb no cboh oTeirt, 



The different THE FAIRY. 

rules of Syntax. 

Bo^UIEBHHrJlA. 



A widow had two daughters : the elder resembled her mother 
Oahht> BAOBa HMiTb Asa Aoib: crapbifi GbiTb noxoMn Ha cboh MaTb 

both in face and temper, that is to say, she was as ugly and 
h .iHue n HpaBi., to edb, oht> dbiTb Tain, me Aypnoft m 

as malicious as her mother. Nobody loved them; every one 

TaKT>Hte 3AOVL, KaKI, OHl. MaTb. HllKTOlie ^H>6liTb oht>; Becb 

avoided them. The younger was beautiful and ^ good. Every one 
CiraTb ott. ohT). Ma-ibiii me 6biTb npeKpacHbiu h AodpoAyuiHbifi. Becb 

loved her. But her malicious mother and her wicked sister detes- 
jiio6iiTb oht>. Ho oht> 3^bift MaTb h 3.ibiH cecTpa neHa- 

ted her; they scolded her without ceasing; she alone was obliged 
BiiAtTb oht,; ftpamiTb 6e3npecTanHO; oht> oauhi 6biTb AOJJKHbiil 

to work in the house, to heat the stove, to sweep the rooms, 
pa66TaTb bt. aomt., Toni'iTb neib, Mecra ropuniia, 

to cook. The poor child wept from morning till night, 

CTpanaTb bi KyxHa. B"BAna?KKa n.ianaTb ct> yTpo ao Beiep'b, 

but she was not lazy at her work; she was obedient, 

HO OH-b He -I-BHf'lTbCH pa66TaTb ; 6bITb noaiyiuHbifi, 



Syntax. — dependence op words. 153 

patient, and all that was in vain, for she could in no way 

Tepnuji'iBMH, h Becb tott> 6litl HanpacHbifi, iido mohl He hhtto 

satisfy her wicked mother and her wicked sister. 

yroauaTb Ha cboh 3joh MaTL h Ha cboh 3.*oh cecTpa. 

Every day this poor girl was forced to go with 
EaceAHeBHO aTOTt dbAHbifi A'BByuiKa 6litb 4o.ukhi>ih xo^iitb ct> 

a large pitcher to fetch water in a neighbouring wood, where 

dojbinoH KyBuiiiHT> 3a BOAa bt> 6Mwmft poma, bt> KOToptiil 

there was a clear spring. One day she had gone according 
HaxoAi'iTbca qtiCTLifl hctoihhktj. OAHajKAH oht» noiiTii no 

to custom to this spring. The day was very hot. After 
odbiKHOBeme kt> stoti. hctoihbkx. 4°hb dbiTb oieHb xtapKifi. 

having filled her pitcher with water, she returned home. All at 
Hano.iHHTb KyBimiHb BOAa, oht> B03BpamaTbca 40M01I. BApyn> 

once she saw before her an old woman. „My child! said to her 
BiU'BTb npe4i> ceda CTapyuiKa. „Mon AH'ra! CKa3biBaTb oht> 

the old woman, give me water to drink; I am wearied; 1 am 

ciapyniKa, AaBaTb a HanHBaTbca; a ydaBaTb; a (6i>wib) 

very hot." — „With pleasure, good mother, said the young girl, here! 
jKapKifi." — „Ct. oxoTa, dadyuiKa, CKa3biBaTb A^Bynwa, bott>! 

drink." And she presented the pitcher to the poor woman. 

HannBaTbca." H oht> noAaBaTb KyBmi'mx CTapymna. 

The old woman sat down on the grass from weariness, and the young 
OapyuiKa ca/iHTbca Ha TpaBa ott> ciadocTb, a mcioaou 

girl knealed down before her, and held ' gently 

KpacaBnna CTaTb Ha ko.isho nepeAi> oht>, h noAAepaaiBaTb octopo^kho 

the pitcher, wiiile she drank. „I thank thee, my dear! said the 

KVBmiiHT>, noKa OHb nnTb boa! „EjaroAapib tbi, mhabiS! CKa3biBaTb 

old woman after having drunk. I see that thou art a good, an amiable 
CTapynwa, HamiBaTbCb. BiU-BTb, hto tm (ecMb) Aodpbift, .lacKOBbiii 

child, and I wish to reward thee for thy kindness. Enow 

AUTa, h xoTbTb Harpaa^AaTb tm 3a tboh ycjyauHBOCTb. 3HaTb 

then that I am a fairy, and that I took purposely the form 
Jkc, a BO-flinedHHua, h B3aTb Ha ceda HapdiHO bha^ 

of an old woman to put thee to the proof. I am delighted that thou 
ciapyniKa, «rrodbi tm ncnbiTMBaTb. PaAOBaTbca, ito tm 

art so good, and this is what I will do for thee: every 

(ecMb) TaKOH Aodpuii, h bott>, hto xoxiTb CAi^aTb A^a th: BcaKifl 

Reiff Russian Grammar. 14 



154 RUSSIAN GRAMMAR. 

time that thou shalt pronounce a word, there shall issue from thy mouth 

pa3T>, 1TO TBI CKa3bIBaTL OflOBO, BbmaAaTb H3b y TBI pOTt 

either a pretty flower, or a precious stone, or a large 
mil npeKpacHbift iibetoki., h^h Aparon'BHHbiH KaMenb, uau Oojibmou 

pearl. Farewell, my little friend." And the fairy disappeared. 

jKeMiyjKtma. IlpocTH, ApyatoRb." H BO-iineoHmia H3ie3aTb. 

The pretty girl returned home. „Where hast thou been 

npeKpacHbift AiByiuRa B03Bpanj,a r rbca aomoh. ,£&-& tm 6biTb 

so long, asked her mother with ill humour? — What hast thou 
TaKT>4o.iro, cnpamnBaTb y oht. MaTb ct, cepAue? — ^to tm 

been doing so long in the wood? cried her wicked sister. — I beg 
Ai-flaTb Tain> aoato bt> poma, 3aKpnqaTb 3aou cecTpa? — Bhho- 

pardon! I lingered by the way, replied the poor child, and at the same 
BaTbifi ! 3aMimKaTbca, OTBHiaTb 6$AHaJKKa, u B r b tott. caMbift 

instant there issued from her pretty lips two roses, two pearls, and 
MHiiyTa cnaTbiBaTbca H3i> oht> npeKpacHbiii ry6a ABa po3a, ABa aceMipciiHa h 

two large emeralds. „What do I see? exclaimed the mother astonished. 

ABa dO-lbUIOH HSyMpyA'b. j, 1 * 10 aBHA£Tb?BOCK.lHliaTb MaTb yAHB^ieHHblH. 

These are flowers! these are precious stones! What has happened to 
3'tott> iiBtrb! 3tott> Aparou'bHHbiH KaMeHb! 1 Ito CAB./iaTbca ct 

thee? — The young girl related to her with simplicity her meeting with 
tm? — KpacaBHiia pa3CKa3MBaTb oht> npocTOAymHO o cboh BC/rp-Bqa ct> 

the fairy, and while doing it the flowers, diamonds and pearls issued 
BOJuie6Hnua, u MeJKAy tott, ub-btt>, ajMa3T> h JKeMqyri. cb'maTbca 

just so from her lips. „Good ! muttered the mother; to-morrow I will 
Tain. ct> oin>ry6a. ; ,XopomiHH{e! npoBopiaTb MaTb; 3aeTpa nocw- 

send to the wood my elder daughter, and it will be the same with her. 
jiaTb bt> poma moh CTapbifi Aoib, h 6wTb TOTtace ct> oht>. 

And the next morning she said to her daughter: „To-day thou 
H na Apyroft yTpo oht> CKa3MBaTb cboh aoib: „HbiHbie Tbi 

shalt go to fetch water: take the pitcher; but pay attention, if thou 
noiiTH 3a BOAa: B3flTb KVBUMH'b; ho CMOTpiiTb me, ec./ui 

meetest at the spring an old woman, give her to drink and 
BCTpuiaTb y HCToiHHK'b CTapyuiKa, AaBaTb oht> HaiMBaTbca, h 

be very civil to her." The wicked girl frowned, 

xopouieHbKO npiuacKHBaTbca kt> owl" 3.ioh A'BBioHKa HaxMypimaTbca, 

took the pitcher with ill humour; went to the wood against her will, 
Bsaib KyBimiHi. Cb AOcaAa; dohth bt> poma HexoTa, 



Syntax. — dependence of words. 155 

and grumbled all along the road. The good old woman was already 
h Bop^aTL Bees bt> 4opora. CiapyniKa chabtb y?Ke 

seated near the spring. „Dra\v me some water, my dear! said 

y hctohhhkt.. „3aiepnaTB a boM, moh mhjbih! CKa3aTB 

she to the young girl; it is hot, I wish to drink. — „What 
oht> 4"BB0HKa; (ecmb) atapirifi, xotbtb HanuBaTBca. — „KaKi> 

stuff! I am not come here to serve old 

6BiHeTaKt! H ne npiHTii cw^a 3a to, hto6bi ycjyjKnBaTB CTapBift 

vagabonds ; thou wilt have to drink without me." — „How rude thou art ! 
6po4-4ra; HantmaTBca h 6e3i> a." — „KaK6uacerpy6bm tbi! 

said the old woman to her; I will punish thee. From this moment with 
CKa3BiBaTB CTapyuma oht>; a HaKa3tiBaTB tbi. Ct> 3TorB nopa npii 

each of thv words there shall issue from thy mouth either a serpent or 
KaJK/lBlil TBOH C.IOBO BBinaMTB Itt'B y tbi poTT. n.ni 3M-Ba n.ifi 

a frog." She disappeared, and the wicked girl raw home, 

.laryuiKa." Oht, H3ie3aTB, a 3.101I wioHKa noG-BJKaTB ^omoh, 

after having broken her pitcher from spite. „Whaf hast thou to tell me, 
pa3(5nBaTB cboh KyBmtm'B cb 40ca4a. ,,^0 CKa3BiBaTB, 

my dear daughter? asked her mother, when she saw her at a distance. — 
MH.iBiu ^oiKa? cnpamnBaTB MaTB. biU^tb oht> «34a.ieKa. — 

I have nothing to tell!" answered the daughter; and all at once there 
Herro CR*a3biBaTB!" oTBBiaTB 40hb; h BApyn> BBicKa- 

issued from her mouth two vipers and two toads. „What do I see ! what 

KHBaTB H3T> OHT, pOTT, 4Ba 3MBH H 4B3 }Ka6a. ^TO R BHA'fiTb ! KaKOfl 

horror! cried the mother; but it is thy sister who is the cause of all 
CTpavT>! 3aKpn^aTBiviaTB: ho troh ceCTpa Qecmb) BTiHOBaTBiii bt> BecB 

that! I will make her feel it." And they ran to beat the young girl. 

3TOTT>! fl ^aBaiB OHT> 3HaTB." H OHT> OpOCaTBCa 6RTB MeHBmOH 40HB. 

Frightened by their threats, she went to hide herself in the wood, ran 
HcnyraTBca yrpo3a, oht> cnpBiBaTBca bt> poma, diraTB 

long without daring to look behind her, fled very far and at last 
Ao.iro, He cmbtb orjflvibiBaTLca. 3a6$raTB ^a.ieKo, h HaKOHen> 

lost herself. But this was for her good. The son of the king, 

noTepaTB Aopora. Ho 3tott, 6bttbkt> oht> ciaCTie. Cbiht> iiapcKiii, 

who was amusing himself at that time with hunting, was just 

KOTopBiS 3adaB^aTBca TyrB oxoTa, Haxo/uiTBca bt> totb 

then in the wood; he saw the young girl, who, seated on the grass, 
Bpeivia bt> poma; vbiU-etb KpacaBnua, KOTopBifl, cii^btb na TpaBa, 



156 RUSSIAN GRAMMAR. 

was weeping bitterly. „What has happened to thee? Avhy dost thou 
njanaTi. ropBKO. j^to C4'B.*aTBca ct> tbi? o hto tbi 

weep, my dear? asked he, taking her gently by the hand. — 
njanaTL, miubm? cnpauiHBaTt ohb, b33tb ofb jiacKOBO 3a pyna. — 

„AIas! how can I help weeping! My mother has driven me out of 

„Eon,MOH! nam a He n^anaTB! MaTyniKa BBiroHaTB a h3t> 

the house." She spoke, and the flowers and the precious stones 
40mt>." Out roBopiiTB, a ubhtb h 4parou"BHHBiH KaMeHB 

issued from her rosy lips, and her tears were changed into 
CB'maTBca ci po30BBiii ry6a, h c^e3a odpamaTBca bt> 

pearls. „What is the meaning of that ? asked the son of the king; whence 
JKeM<ryjKHHa. „<Ito 3Hawr& 3tott>? cnpamnBaTB cbihb uapCKiii; ot-btfo 

come these flowers, these pearls and these stones?" The poor child 
3TOTT, nB-BTi., jKeMiyn, h KaMeHB?" E-BAHaacKa 

related to the prince what had happened to her. He became 

pa3CKa3BmaTB napcKia cbiht> o tott>, tto c.*y<mTBca ct> oht>. Oht> uomo- 

in love with her, and he loved her more on account of her being so 
6htb oht>, h noMo6iiTb enie 66A%e 3a to, hto ohb 6bitb TaKi> 

good and so pretty, than on account of her flowers and precious sto- 

466pBlfi H MIMBlft, H&KejIH 3a OHT> U,B%TT> H AparOirBHHBIH K&- 

nes. He took her with him, presented her to the king his father, 
MeHB. Out. b33tb oht. ct» ce6a, upeACTaB^aTB oht. napB, cboh OTem>, 

whom she pleased also, and the king permitted his son to marry 

KOTOpBlfi OHT> UOHpaBHTBCH TaK)Ke, H UapB n03BO.WTB cbth-b aceiniTBca 

her. Thus she became a princess, and on the death of the king, 

Ha oht.. TaKofi odpasi. oht, CA^aTBca uapeBHa, a no cMepTB napB, 

when her husband mounted the throne of his ancestors, she became queen, 
Kor4a ohb MyacB bocxoahtb na npecTOJTB OTHOBCKifi, uapiiua, 

and was a good queen. And her wicked sister, what happened to her? 
h 6bitb 4o6pBin napnna. A oht. 3jiou cecTpa ; tto CA^aTBca crb ohb? 

She closed her life in a miserable way. Her mother, whom she 
Ohb KOHiaTB cboh jkh3hb jk^octhbih odpasT). MaTB, KOTopBiii oht> 

vexed and irritated incessantly, was forced to drive her 

cep^HTB h oropiaTB 6e3npecTaHHO, 6bitb npHHya^eimBM BBiroHaiB oht. 

from house; nobody would give her an asylum, and she went to hide 

H3T> 40MT. ; HHKTO He XOTliTB 4aTB OHT. npHCTaHHine, H OHT, CKpBIB&TB- 

herself in the forest, where she died shortly after of vexation and hunger, 
ca bt> A%vh, r4U yMnpaTB CKopo ct> 40ca4a h to^oa^. 



Syntax. — construction. 



157 



CONSTRUCTION. 

84. — The grammatical order of the words in Russian is 
further removed from the natural construction, and inversions 
are more frequent than in English, French or even German; 
this however causes no obscurity, in as much as the inflections 
of the words sufficiently indicate their relative concord or de- 
pendence. With respect to the order of the propositions in 
the sentence, it is nearly the same in the four languages, as 
is seen in the following examples. 



E'cjh remfi h 4apoBama yMa hm-biott> 
npaBo Ha 6^aro4apHocTb Hap640Bi>, to 

PoCClfl AQAM&k .lOMOHOCOBy MOHyMeHTOM-b. 

KapaM3um. 
IIo6iAbi, 3aBoeBaHia h Be.iihie rocy- 
AapcTBeHHoe, B03Bb'icHBb Ayxt Hapo4a 
PocciucKaro, hmb.ih CHacT.ii'iBoe AificTBie 
h Ha caMLiti h3wkt> ero, KOTopbiii, 6y/iy<ra 
ynpaB^aeMi> 4apoBameivn> h BKycoivn> na- 
caTe^ia yMHaro, MoaceTt paBHaTBca hlihs 
bt> ciu-b, KpacoTi h npiaTHOCTn cl .ayi- 

UIHMH a3LIKaMH 4peBH0CTH H HaiUHXl Bpe- 
MeHT>. KapaM3UHd. 

RoBeAmeAb MHornx-b a3biKOBT> a3biKT> 

POCClTlCKifl He TO.lbKO 06lUl'ipH0CTiK) MtCTT,, 

rAt oht, rocnoACTByeTT,, ho Kyirao h c66- 

CTBeHHbIMT> CBOIIMT) IipOCTpaHCTBOMT. H 
AOBO^bCTBieMT. BClHK'b DCpeAT> BCBMH BT> 

EBpons. Kap^T, V, Phmckw HMnepaTopi,, 
roBapnBa^i>, mto McnaHCKHMT> asbiKOM'b ci> 
Eoroarb, 4>paHuy3CKHMi> ct> Apy3baiviH, H-b- 
MeuKiiMT> c-b nenpiaTeJiaMH, MTajnaHCKHM-b 

Cb WeHCKHIVTb n6.10MT> TOBOpiITB npH-fllilHO. 

Ho ec^e 6bi oht> PoccificKOMy a3biKy SbWb 
BCKyceHi), to KOHeniio kt> TOMy npuco- 

BOKynH^T> 6bl, ^TO HMT> CO BCBMH OHblMH 

roBopiiTb npncTOHHO. H'6o HameJi 6w 
bt> HeMt Be.MiKo.fl'Bnie HcnaHCKaro, jkh- 
boctb 4>paHuy3CKaro, KpinocTb H'BMeuKaro, 
hbjkhoctb HTa.iiaHCKaro, CBepxT> Toro 60- 
raTCTBO h cii.ibHyio bt> H3o6paa(eHiaxT> 
KpaTKocTb rpe^ecKaroH.IaTiiHCKaro a3biKa. 
Jomohoco6Z. 



If genius and talents merit the gratitude 
of the nations, Russia owes a monument 
to Lomonossof. Karamzin. 

The victories, the conquests and the 
grandeur of the empire, by elevating the 
intelligence of the Russian nation, had a 
happy influence even on the language, 
which, when employed by the talent and 
the taste of a man of genius, can now 
rival in strength, beauty and delicacy the 
noblest tongues of ancient and modern 
times. Karamzin. 

The Russian language, the parent of 
many others, is superior to all the lan- 
guages of Europe not only by the extent 
of the countries where it is dominant, but 
also by its own comprehensiveness and 
richness. Charles the Fifth, Emperor of 
the Romans, said that one ought to speak 
Spanish to the Divinity, French to one's 
friends, German to one's enemies and 
Italian to ladies. But had he been ac- 
quainted with Russian, he would assuredly 
have added that one could speak it with 
each and all. He would have discovered 
in it the majesty of the Spanish, the vi- 
vacity of the French, the strength of the 
German, the sweetness of the Italian, and 
in addition energetic conciseness in its 
imagery with the richness of the Greek 
and Latin. 

Lomonossof. 
14. 



158 RUSSIAN GRAMMAR. 



ORTHOGRAPHY. 

USE OF THE LETTERS. 

85. — We have already seen (§ 7—10) that several let- 
ters lose their own peculiar sound, taking that of the letter 
with which they have the closest affinity, and that certain 
other letters are silent, disappearing entirely in the pronun- 
ciation. In such cases the object of Orthography is to indi- 
cate the letter which has last its own peculiar sound and taken 
an accidental one; and, to do that, recourse must be often had 
to etymology, in order to discover a derivative and give it, by 
the help of the grammatical forms such an inflection as may 
serve to show the form of the doubtful letter. 
vowels. 86. — Several vowels are often confounded in writing, on 
account of the close affinity or perfect identity of their pro- 
nunciation. As this confusion arises almost invariably from 
the absence of the tonic accent, it is necessary, in order to 
discover the form of the letter, to find a derivative or an in- 
flection of the word where the doubtful vowel is accented. 
Thus: 

/HMmiiKT. (and not cmuIjUks), a postilion, nwb (primitive word), a relay. 
I ahiio (and not euu,6), an egg, . . J auna (nom. plurj, eggs. 

aiMeHL (and not euMeHb), barley, . I ahhbih (derivative), of barley. 

THHy (and not meny), I draw . . '^lTflHyTT. (3d pers. pi), they draw. 

Bflmy (and not eeo/cf), I bind, . . ™ lBaHceim, (2d pers. sing J, thou bindest. 

rca.iiH> (and not oicejinw), I pity, % JxMb (primitive), pity. 

ma^yHt (and not weAfHs), a rogue, g \roaJiocTb (derivative), roguery. 

qacb'i (and not uecbi), a watch, . . | jiaci (primitive), the hour. 

maAHTL (and not iqedumb), to spare, Jlnonwa (derivative), pardon. 

MO-iHTBa (and not MaMmea), a prayer, [ oht> mojhti (3d pers. sing.), he prays. 

BAOBa (and not edaea), the widow, I b^obbi (nom. plur.), the widows. 

roBopnTB (and not zaeapunib), to speak, \ roBopi., speaking, and pasroBopi,, discourse. 

E. 'B. — The two vowels most commonly confounded are e and /&. 
In order to know which of them ought to he used, recourse must be 
had to the dictionary. We may however observe that the letter n> is 
never used in words taken from foreign languages; as: KaAerb, a ca- 
det; caecapb, a locksmith (Germ. <5d;iofferJ; nena, fine (Lat. poena), 



Orthography. — use of the letters. 159 

excepting in BiHa, Vienna, which is properly speaking a Slavonic word. 
Sometimes the vowel u (or i) is changed in the derivatives into /&; 
as: 6eci£a, conversation; xktu, children; A^eKCBH, Alexis; CepriH, 
Sergius; Anpi^t, April (from cu./iiTb, to be seated; ahth, child; A-ieKcift, 
CepnTf, Anpiuifi). In the words jiKapb, a physician; .iBKapcTBO, ame- 
dicine; .mirrb, to heal, etc., which some persons write AeKapb, jie- 
Kdpcmeo, Aenunib, the Dictionary of the Russian Academy preserves the 
letter n>. These vowels may in some occasions be distinguished. As 
the vowel e is in certain cases pronounced io or o, and the vowel n 
has this sound only in some words (§ 8), it is necessary to look for 
an inflection or a word in which the doubtful vowel is accented. Thus: 

Ic«e3a (and not cAn>3d), the tear, . . . ^ fcAeau (nom. plvr.), the tears. 

e.Ab (and not n>Ab), the fir, ® le^na (diminutive), a little fir. 

6"epe3HHKi> (not 6epw3HUh-5), a birch kopse, § J6epe'3a (primitive), a birch. 

^leAHHKT, (and not AihdHUKz), an ice-house, g ue,/n> (primitive), ice. 

yTBeywTbtdLndnotymerbpdumb), to affirm, * fTBepAbift (primitive), firm. 
ymeTeHie (not yzimmeme), persecution, ° rne'Tt (primitive), stick for packing. 

E. 3. — The vowel 9 is used at the beginning of the Russian words 
3h\ ho\ 3xi>, hey\ 3tott>, this; 3koh and 3TaKon, oh whatl also at the 
beginning of foreign words and after a vowel; e. g. 3KBaTopt, the 
equator; 3eripi>, ether; nosMa, a poem; nosrb, a poet. After i we can 
in this case employ the vowel e, as in nieca, a piece. Such words as 
had been incorporated into the Russian language before the vowel '3 
was in use, are written with e; as: eBaHre.de, the gospel; emicKont, a 
bishop; enapxia, a diocese; eBHyxT>, an eunuch; Espona, Europe, and 
some others. The vowel e is further used for the Latin or German 
letters jV, gi, and cjc; as: npoebrb, a project; peecTp-b, a register ; 
e*ecT>, the sword-hilt, e^pefiTopt, a corporal (Lai projectum, register; 
Germ ®efafJ, Oefretter). 

H. I. — The vowel i is used, instead of u, before all the vowels 
and before the semi-vowel u; as: cie, that; npiy^aTb, to accustom; 
npiaTHMil, agreeable; remii, genius, as also in the wordMipi>, the world, 
and its derivatives: MipcKoit, worldly; BceMipHbw, universal; B.ia4iiMip7>, 
Vladimir, to be distinguished from Mnp-b, peace, and its derivatives; as: 
Mi'ipHbiit, peaceful; MupriTb, to reconcile: cMripubift, calm. In words for- 
med from the numeral^, as: naTH-apuranHBift, of five yards; ceivrn- 
yro^bHLiH, heptagon, etc., the letter u is retained, but a hyphen must 
be placed between the two parts of the word. In the word Mvpo, the 
holy oil, and its derivatives: MvponoMa3anie, unction; Mvponocnua, bearer 
of aromatics, MvponoMa3aHHiiKT>, the Lord's anointed, the Slavonic letter 
uo/cuu,a has been retained. 

H. LI. — The vowel bi is formed by the union ofsanda; in com- 
pound words however it is necessary to retain the form of these two 
letters, and write, for instance, npeAT>0Aymw, preceding; 6e3'bHMHHHbm, 



160 



RUSSIAN GRAMMAR. 



Semi-vowels. 



anonymous, etc. It is only in the words compounded of HCKaTt, to seek, 
and BrpaTB, to play, that the letters z and u are joined and form «; 
e. g. chihhkt>, an emissary; po3HCKT>, the inquiry; cwrpaTbCH, to play 
quits; pa3BirpaTi>, to raffle for (instead of C5uut,unz, po3mcKz, cm- 
zpdmbCH, pa35U2pdnib). — In foreign words after u, the vowel u is 
employed, although pronounced »; thus we write MeAnuuHa, medicine; 
UHpKMLHHKT), a barber; uu*pa (which some persons write iibi-spa), a 
cipher; excepting ni>iraHT>, a gypsy, and m>i*HpL, ciphers. — In the 
adjectives it is necessary to distinguish the terminations uii and iu, as : 
nocTHbifl, of Lent; .liTHifi, of summer, and its compounds coBeprneHHo- 
.msthm, of full age; CTO.d>THm, centenary, etc.; the word Ma-io.iiTHwa, 
young, is an exception. 

87. — The semi-vowels ( r f>, l, h), the two first of which 
are placed after consonants, and the last after vowels, are 
vowels only half uttered (§ 9), 5 being half of the vowel o, 
b and u half of the vowel u. 



Consonants. 



The semi-vowel 5 at the end of words may be used after all the 
consonants, while the semi-vowel & cannot be placed either after the 
gutturals (r, k, x) or the lingual (ii). The hard or liquid sound of these 
two letters, which is generally perceived after consonants, as: 6paTT>, 
the brother, and 6paT&, to take; nhwb, flame, and iihub, dust; CTam,, 
the stature, and CTaHt, become, is not distinguished after the hissing 
letters (jk, h, in, m), as in the words: Hoact, a knife, and Aomh, a lie' 
Me<n>, a sword, and cbhl, to cut; KaMLinn,, the reed, and mmhil, a 
mouse; tohtl, fasting, and Horns, the night 

In the middle of a word the semi-vowel b is placed after all the 
consonants, excepting r, k, x, u; e. g. cy/itda, destiny; BecLMa, very; 
o6e3i»aHa, a monkey; AeHBm, money; hhcbmo, a letter; no.«>3a, utility; 
ce.ib/tf>, a herring; Tiop&Ma, the prison, etc. The semi-vowels, in words 
formed with a preposition, is only retained before the vowels e, u, n>, 
to, R\ as: OTteM^iK), J take away; npeAtHAymift, preceding; BiixaTL, 
to enter; oStiopoA'fcTL, to become a fool; oG'LHBiiTi., to announce. The 
same is the case with the Latin prepositions ad and ob, as in the words 
a^'LioTaHT'L, an adjutant; o6T>eKTiiBHLift, objective. 

The semi- vowels & and u are sufficiently distinct; the former (l) 
can only be used after a consonant, the latter (ft) only after a vowel, 
as we have already seen, § 9. 

88. — The feeble consonants (6, b, r, a, 5k, 3), which, at 
the end and in the middle of a word before a strong letter, 
are articulated like their corresponding strong consonants (n, 
$, k or x, t, m, c, § 10), may be distinguished from the latter 
by an inflection of the words. Thus: 



Orthography. — use of the letters. 



161 






/ 6o6t>, a bean, and qtm., a flail, 
^obt,, capture, and rpa^T,, a cotml, 
Kpyn>, a circle, and KpioK-b, « hook. 
Eon,, GW, and 4yxi>, spirit, 
KAMI*, treasure, and Gparb, brother. 
hojkt>, a ftnt/i, and kobutb, a scoop, 
Ty3i), £Ae ace, and yet, Me moustache, 
Tpydna, a pipe, and manna, a cap, 
jiaBKa, a 6ewc/t,and*en<i>Ka, ablow-pipe, 
6y4Ka, sentry-box, and yraa, a </wc#, 
KpyffiKa, a ^oft/d'/, and MymKa, little fly, 

\ CKa3Ka, a tale, and miacb-a, a dance, 



6o6a and ii-Ena. 
^oBa and rpa*a. 
Kpyra and KpibKa. 
on account of gen. sin. \ Bora and 4yxa. 
K^ia4a and 6paTa. 
Hoaca and KOBina. 
TV3a and yea. 

I Tpy6oKi» and uianoKT,. 

paBOKT, and ^eifooKt. 

on account olgen.pl. I 6y40KT> and yTOK-b. 

j Kpy^eK't and MyuieKi. 

f cKa30Ki. and imicoKi. 



In cases where the change of inflection fails to indicate the 
doubtful letter, recourse must be had to etymology to discover 
the root from which the derivative word is formed. Thus: 



/npocb6a, a prayer (and not npo3b6a), . 
jKeiTHTbda, marriage (an not oicemidbtia), . 
6y40ihhkt>, a sentry (and not 6ymov.nuKz), 
npncyTCTBie, presence (and not npucydenwie), 
jKJKenHBiu, burnt (and not coiceHHbiu), . § 
paGiHKij, a hazel-hen (and not pAmuKu), * 
£ ( rpmieBbiu, of buck-wheat (not zpeumeebiu), .g 
cb"Bmhhkt>, a candlestick (and not ceibuiHUKZ), § 
ry40iHHKT., violonist (and not zydoiuHUKz), M 
BeTouiHHKt, rag-gatherer (not eemowuKz), a 
HayniHHK'b, slanderer (and not HafwuKz), . 
BojouiCKin, Walachian (and not eoAdoiccKiu), 
Bojjkckw, o/7/je Fo/ya (and not eoAUicmu), 



/npociiTB, to pre?/, from the root wpoc. 
/ jKewiTb, to marny (in SI. oicenumed). 

dy4Ka, sentry-box, gen.pl. 6y40KT> 

cyTb, 3d pers. pi. of ecMb, / am. 

7nmemb,2dpers. sing, of aery, / burn. 

pa66n, with variegated feathers. 
( rpeHa^Mcft-wetf/A^beingimmutable. 

CB-BMa, a candle, from CBtT-b, light. 

ry40Ki», violin, mandtf change into v. 

BeTomb, a rag. from BeTxift, old. 

yxo", the ear, x changes into m. 
\ Bo^ioxt,, a Walachian, x ch. into m. 

Bojira, the Volga, z changes into oic. 

The present orthography of the word nopyinicb, a lieutenant (from 
nopym'iTb, to commit, from pyna, the hand), is not in conformity with its 
etymology; for the termination being sum (as in noTarniK'b, anindulger, 
from noTanaTb, to connive, from Tairb, thus), it ought to be written 
nopyTHHicb, as some persons still write it. Another exception is CBa4b6a. 
wedding (formerly cedmb6a), from CBaTaTb, to ask in marriage. 

The word CTOJin-b, a column, is written in Slavonic with a n, as also 
its derivatives: CTo.jnHHK'b, the stylite; cTo^noTBopeHie, the tower of 
Babel; but in Russian it is written with a 6, ctoj6t>, a consonant which 
is retained in the words ctoj6oboh, columnar; CTo.fliHaK'b, basalt; ctojio- 
Hairb, tetanus; ocTO^fieHiTb, to be stupefied. 

3. — The feeble consonant 3 of the prepositions B3 or bo3, h3, 
hh3, pa3 or po3, is changed, in derivatives, before the strong conso- 
nants k, n, t, x, into its corresponding strong consonant c; thus we 
write: BcnoMHHTb, to remember; BocnHTanie } education; nciuioqHTb, to 



162 RUSSIAN GRAMMAR. 

exclude; hhcx<mhtl ; to descend; pacToprHyTL, to tear up; pocrrnct, a 
catalogue (instead of 63ndMHunib, eo3numdme, u3KJiw%unib, HU3xodumb, 
pa3mopznymb, po3nucb). Before the strong consonants c, n, % m and 
m, the letter 3 keeps its form, as in ii3CTapn, formerly; pa3nB-6CTu, to 
open; H3<ie3HyTb, to disappear; B03inecTBie, accession; pa3men?>, a slit. 
The prepositions 6e3z and upe3z in this case remain unchanged; thus 
we write: 6e3noA66HLiii, incomparable; ipe3Hyp-L, excessively (and not 
6ecnod66ubiu, npecifpz). It is the same with the preposition cs, which 
retains its form before a feeble consonant, although it then takes the 
pronunciation of 3; thus we should write: cdaBtiTb, to diminish; ojyi- 
.mtb, to make; crowm, to drive off; OKUMaTb, to compress (and not 
36deumb, 3dri>jiamb, 3zouAmb ) 3oicuMdnib). 

II,. — The compound consonant u, cannot be used instead of mc or 
dc, when m and d are radical letters, and c belongs to the termination 
of the word; thus we write: imotckm, carnal, from njioit, the flesh; 
nepci'iACKift, Persian, from the Latin Persis, idis (and not nji6u,Kiii, 
nepcuUfKiW) ; but we write: H^MeiiKiu, German, from HiMeni., a Ger- 
man; Ka3airKift, Cossack's, from Ka3aKT>, a Cossack. In the numerals 
we write du,, as: OAiiima/uiaTb, eleven; ABazruaTb, twenty, words con- 
tracted from the Slavonic odum-Ha-decnmb, ded-decnmb. 

HI,. — The compound consonant w,, in the derivatives, is the com- 
mutation of ck and cm, or else it supplies the place of the consonants 
3i, oich,, cu, as: BomuTb, to wax, from bockt>, wax; yMamaTb, to anoint, 
from MacTt, balm; npuKaniHK'b, a clerk, from npuKa3T>, an order; p'B- 
uihkt,, a cutter, from p^aTb, to cut. But the form of the radical let- 
ters is retained in the words ciacTie, happiness; ciHTaTt, to count; 
cieYb, pasc^erb, an account; Myanma, a man, which must not be writ- 
ten m,dcmie, iu,umdmb, utemz, pa3ui,emz, though we also write Myui^ina. 

<&. 0. — The consonants $> and e are used, the former for Russian 
words, and such Greek and other words as are written with <p, f or 
ph, and the latter for Greek words written with 9- or th; thus we write: 
*y*attKa, a jacket; *aMiaia, a family; gnsinea, physics; Qiuimwh, Phi- 
lip; 4>6Tm, Photius; and pii0MT>, rhythm; pneMa, rhyme; Mneo^oria, my- 
thology; Geoflopi, Theodore; 0OMa, Thomas. 

Doubling of 89. — The consonants are doubled in Russian in the follo- 
wing cases: 1) In the words in mmz, cmeo, mm, uiu and ckw, 
the radical of which terminates in h or c; e. g. n-zfBHHHKT,, a 
prisoner, from n^m., captivity; HCKyccTBO, art, from HCKyci., 
an essay; hcthhhlih, true, from HCTHHa, the truth; oceHHifi, 
autumnal, from bcem,, autumn; PyccKiii, Russian, from PycL, 
Russia. The same takes place in adjectives in euHbiil, and 
passive participles in auubixi, mmm, eumiu, TbhrniU, e. g. hc- 
KyccTBeHHLiii, artificial; fl,%AajBnu% made; 3ac,iyjKeHH&iii 5 



consonants. 



Orthography. — division of words into syllables. 163 

merited. These participles must not be confounded with the 
qualifying and possessive adjectives; as: yqeHBiH, learned; 
3acfly5KeHbiH, emerited; KOJKaHBiii, of skin; cepe6paHbin ; of 
silver, which are written with a single h. — 2) In such words 
as are formed with a preposition, where the initial consonant 
of the primitive is the same as the final consonant of the pre- 
position; e. g. 6e33y6tiH 5 toothless; bbo/uitb, to introduce; 
noflflaHHBifi, subject; ccBMKa, exile. — 3) In the preterit of 
the pronominal verbs, when the verb ends in the consonant c; 
as: pa3Hecca, it has spread itself; cnaeca, he has saved him- 
self. — 4") When by the change of a commulable letter two 
consonants come together, as in the verb ?Kry, / bum, which, 
by the change of z into aw, is in the second person mmemb, 
and in the passive participle JKJKeHHBin; andinBOH^a, arein; 
BOJKJKaTB, to bridle, from bo#htb, to lead, by the change of 
d into aw. — 5) Lastly consonants are doubled in some fo- 
reign words; e. g. a66a r r r B, an abbot; cy666Ta, Saturday; 
aKKyjia, a shark; iuacci>, a class; ko-aoccb, a colossus; koji- 
yieria, a college; Hcra-Mi,, a metal, etc. 

90. — The capital letters (nponncHBia 6yKBBi) are em- Capital letters, 
ployed, generally speaking, in Russian as in English. Thus a 

capital letter is placed at the beginning of every sentence, of 
every line of poetry, of all the proper names of men, places, 
nations, rivers, mountains and winds, as also of all those of 
a science, an art or a profession, if taken in an individual 
sense which distinguishes the particular science, art or pro- 
fession from every other. All titles and ranks joined to a 
proper name must also be distinguished by an initial capital, 
and the same is the case with the appellative names of tribu- 
nals, companies and corporate bodies. 

DIVISION OF WORDS INTO SYLLABLES. 

91. — The division of words into syllables, when one part 
has to be carried on from one line to another, is marked 
by the hyphen, and is performed according to the following 
rules which are based on the etymology of the words: 



164 RUSSIAN GRAMMAR. 

1. Monosyllables, as: CTpacTB, passion; 3ApaBi>, in health; 
HyBCTB'B, of the senses (gen. plj, cannot be divided. 

2. Prepositions and every other affix, whether initial or final, 
may be separated from the rest of the word; e. g. OT-pa/ja, 
mitigation^ o-TpaBa, poison; 6e3-KOHeH-HMii > infinite; boc- 
tokt., the East; mca-b-bab, a bear; pa3-yMx, reason; cboh- 
ctbo, property; AM-ruHRi,, a postilion; 3eM-CKiu, terrestrial; 
ApyJK-6a, friendship; Hapt-rpaA'B, Constantinople, etc. 

3. The compound consonants owd, cm, as also kc, K3, nc 
and Owe in foreign words, cannot be divided; e. g. Me-jK/jy, 
between; Tpn-da, three hundred; A.ie-KcaHAP'B, Alexander; 
3-K3aMeHi», examination; lue-ncHApa, a clepsydra; P6- 
AHcep'L, Roger. 

4. The final vowels, as: cboh, his; KpyToe, steep; as well 
as the terminations of the verbs, as: noiOTi,, they sing; 
ctpoht'l, they build; aca^eTX, he regrets, cannot be sepa- 
rated from the rest of the word. 

ORTHOGRAPHY OF ISOLATED WORDS. 

Russian words. 92. — Every Russian word is written as a single word, if 
by the loss of one of its component parts the sense would be 
changed 3 e. g. coy^acTHHK'L, an accomplice; H36paimBiH, 
elected; OTHeTt, an account; upii6huh,again; MopexoACTBo, 
the navigation; BOAonpoBOAt, an aqueduct, etc. On this sub- 
ject the following rules must be observed: 

1. The prepositions which are employed both conjointly and 
separately (§7(3), are written conjointly: aj Before the verbs 
and words derived from them; e. g. npiraocHTL, to bring; 
npHHOCL, a gift; npimouieHie, the offering; npimocHTejiL, a 
bearer, etc. b) Before such other parts of speech as are not 
used without the preposition; as: HaBtiKx, thehabit; H3BicT- 
hbih, known; BCTapt, anciently; HaB3HirHL, backwards; 03eML, 
on the ground, cj Before nouns, adjectives, pronouns and 
adverbs as form with the preposition an adverb or a conjunc- 
tion; e. g. bctsl^rej ) formerly; h3bhi>, from without; cHa^a^ia, 
in the first place; bc/i-ea^, in the foot-steps; noTOMy, hence. 
If the noun from which the adverb is formed, is determined 
by another word, the preposition is written separately; e. g. 



Orthography. - orthography of insolated words. 165 

Co HaHdja B-BKa, at the beginning of the century; no momy 
cayman), on this occasion. The adverbs BO-nepBLiXT,, firstly; 
Bo-BTopfcixt, secondly; no-pyccKH, in Russian; no-co^aT- 
ckh, like soldiers, and others similar, as also the compound 
prepositions H3T>-3a, from behind, and H3T.-noA r B, from under. 
are written with the hyphen (§ 94. 2). 

2. The prefix particle hw is always written conjointly with 
the pronoun or the adverb following; as: h-beto, some one; 
HiKOToptift, some; niKOiyia, once. 

3. The particle m is written conjointly in the words hhkto, 
nobody; hhhto, nothing; Hur^i, HHKyM, nowhere; Hmcoraa, 
never; HiiKaKL, not at all. and separately in all other words; 
as: mi KOToptifi, none; hh 3epHa, not a grain. 

4. The negative ue is written separately before verbs and 
the circumstantial adverbs: as: He cm-bio, I dare not; He 3^-bcl. 
not here, with the exception of verbs whose proper meaning 
is changed by the negative He, or which are not used without 
the negative; as: He/jocTaBaTt, to be wanting; HeHaBii^'BTL, 
to hate; HeAOBspaTt, to distrust. It is written conjointly 
with nouns, qualifying adjectives and adverbs, when the ne- 
gation refers to the object or to the quality, and not to the 
verb; e. g. Hepdeencmeo HpaBOBi. 6fciBae r n> npnHiraoio cno- 
Pobt., dissimilarity of character is the cause of the quarrels; 
HecHocuaR CKyica yfinBaeT'L MeHa, an unbearable ennui is 
killing me; a ryjiam Heoxomuo, I walk against my will; and 
also when the noun has no meaning without the negation; 
e. g. HeTontipt, a bat: Hero^afl; a good-for-nothing; He^yrt, 
a disease. With the participles the negative He is written con- 
jointly when, like the adjectives, they serve to determine the 
nouns; and separately when, like the verbs, they have a com- 
plement; e. g. He3HdwaJLU iejioBiK r f>, an ignorant man; ^e- 
.iob'bk'b, He 3Hdjoiu,iu CBOiixx o6a3aHHOCTeil the man who is 
ignorant of his duties. 

5. The particle 6bi or os is written conjointly only in the 
conjunctions htoGm (or utoo-l) and #a6fc'i, that; everywhere 
else it is written separately. It is necessary to distinguish the 
conjunction vmoobi from the pronoun nmo with 6bi; e. g. ace- 
jiaio, nmoobi oht, &aAT> tg6% 9Ty KBHry, / wish him to give 



166 RUSSIAN GRAMMAR. 

you this book; nmo 6u wat* a 3a 3Ty Kimry, what would I 
have given for this book! In the latter case 6bi is written 
separately. 

6. The conjunction owe or own is conjointly written in the 
words y5Ke or vhcl, already; /jaace, even; hhjkc, not even, 
and separately in the other words; as: ni ?Ke, or even; oa- 
HaKO JKe, however; totx me, the same. It is also written 
conjointly in the copulative conjunction TaKJKe, and the adverb 
Tome, too; but it is written separately in the comparative con- 
junction TaKx JKe, as well, and in the pronoun to 5Ke, the same; 
e.g. oht. mam owe xoporao nnuieT'L, Kara* HHTaeTi., he writes 
as well as he speaks; oht. mduowe abophhhhi., he is also 
gentleman; a Govern, u oht. moowe, I am sick and he too; a 
roBopio mo owe, hto h bbi ; / say the same thing as you. 
Foreign words. 93. — Foreign words are written with those* letters of the 
Russian alphabet, which give as closely as possible the pro- 
nunciation of these words in the language from which they 
are borrowed : the rule is the base of the orthography of for- 
eign words. Such are for instance the words: enapxia, a 
diocese; Kaee/jpa, the pulpit (Gr. Inaqxla, nad-edga) ; ceHa- 
Topi> ; a senator; KopoHa, a crown (Lat. senator, corona); 
a»rio ; the agio; KapeTa, a carriage (Ital. agio, car r eta); *yTT>, 
a foot; cir/Hrnx, the spleen (from the English'); aKTep'L, an 
actor; Me/jajiL 7 a medal (Fr. acteur, medaille); 6pycTBepT» ; 
the parapet; Kynepi., a coachman (Germ. 23rufttt>efjr, $utf$er) ; 
BaTepnacL, a level; <s>apBaTepT>, the channel (Dutch : waterpas, 
vaarwater); BeH3e^iL, a cipher; TpaKTHpi,, an eating-house 
keeper (Pol. wezel, traktyerj. Some of these words on pas- 
sing into the Russian language have taken terminations pecu- 
liar to it, while others have undergone an alteration both in 
their pronunciation and orthography; such are: *hthjb, a match; 
soHapB, a lanthorn (mod. Gr.cpvi;lli,cpavaQiov); a-iTapB, an 
altar; MpaMopi>, marble (Lat. altar e, mar mor J; &XTdL,ayacht; 
MHMMaHt, a midshipman (from the English) ; mnara, a sword 
(Ital. spada); ca^eTKa, a napkin; TaGaKepna, a snuff-box 
(Fr. serviette, tabatiere); 6np5Ka, the exchange; Tape^iKa, a 
plate (Germ.2Sbxfe,XeUex) ; niKHnepx, master of a merchant- 
ship; ui^H)3 r L ; a sluice (Dutch; schipper, sluis), etc. 



Orthography. — orthography of isolated words. 167 

The same thing takes place in the Greek and Latin proper 
names; as: A^eKcaH/ipt, Alexander; HnKCuaH, Nicholas; 3>h- 
•flnniTL, Philipp; IIaBe./n>, Paul; E-ieHa, Helen; A'BrycTt, Au- 
gustus; Kt'jiiii, Julius; HaT£Uia, Nataly. Some follow the 
pronunciation of both Greek and Latin; as: OMnpt and roiviep r L, 
Homer; AjiK\mm/\T> and A.auHGiaA'B, Alcibiades; <£hbt> and 
<J>eBT>, Phoebus ; Bioiia and Eeonja, Beotia. Others are for- 
med from the Greek or Latine genitive; as: BiaHT^, Bias; 
D.HiiepoH'L, Cicero; ApTeMH/i,a ; Artemis; H^ia^a, the Iliad; 
Benepa, Venus, IJepepa, Ceres. 

The proper names of lands, countries, rivers, towns and 
other names of modern geography, some retain their Latin 
denomination; as: repviama, Germany; A'BCTpia, Austria; 
Cnuioia, Sicily; Heauo./n>, Naples; <E>.flopeHu.ia, Florence; 
Be3yBifi, Vesuvius, etc. Others are written as they are pro- 
nounced in the language to which they belong; as: Amj\owh 
London; ^le^tcn, Chelsea; Tphhumt., Greenwich; Mio-HxeHT> 
Munich; Mannar, Mayence; LpmccejiB, Brussels; Maaci, the 
Meuse; IHe,iL£a, the Scheldt; Penm., the Rhine; KopAOBa 
Cordova; Xepecx, Xeres; oaAaxocx, Badajoz; CxeBeHMHreHt 
Schevening; KeJitHt, Cologne; Perenc6ypr r b, Ratisbon; Aiw- 
thxx, Liege; A'xenT>,Aix-la-Chapelle; Kap^cpya, Carfon/Ae 
Ilia^eHna, Piacenza; ./Ihbopho, Leghorn; Bop/jo, Bordeaux; 
M^ce Ah, Marseille] yloapa, the Loire, etc. Some of these names 
have passed into the Russian through another language; such 
are: napHJKt, Paris (from the Italian Parigi)\ Phmt., Rome 
(from the Polish Rzynf); KoneHrarem., Copenhagen (from 
the German ^openjjagen, instead of the Danish Kiobenhavn). 
Some German names of countries and towns inhabited by Sla- 
vonian tribes have been replaced by Slavonic names ; as: BiHa, 
Vienna; Epec/iaB./iB, Breslau; TopyHt, Thorn; ^bbobt., Lem- 
berg; BeHrpia, Hungary, and some others. 

The proper names of historical persons and others in mo- 
dern languages are written in Russian according to the pro- 
nunciation of the language to which the belong; such are the 
English names: IHeKcniip'B, Shakespeare; BefipoH'L, Byron; 
K)mt>, Hume; /(jkohcoht,, Johnson; Hbwtohx, Newton; the 
French names: Pnme./ibe, Richelieu; 4 aB Y> Davoust; Pycco, 



168 RUSSIAN GRAMMAR. 

Rousseau; YoAAQWh,Rollin; Aejiiuib, Delille; the German names : 
BAWxc^Ty^Blucher; BAAm/i,^, Wieland; TeTG y Gothe; raft/tHi,, 
Haydn; the Italian names: XepytaH, Cherubim; iInMapo3a, 
Cimarosa; the Polish names : ^apTopwcKiH, Czartoryski; IHh- 
MaHOBCKaa, Szymanowska; H^MJieBHH'B, Niemcewicz, etc. 

We may here remark that the proper names of the Russian language, 
the alphabet of which differs from that of the other European tongues, 
ought to be written in each foreign language in such a manner as to 
give as closely as possible the Russian pronunciation. Thus the Russian 
proper names : KapaM3riHi>, IlyiuKMUT., /\epm.diBimb, IHnniK6BT>, .tfxyKOBCKift, 
MeinepcKiu, tfuqepHHt, Ka3aHb, Ra3tMa, Fjkcb'l, ^KnTOMiipi), are written 
in English: Karamzin, Pushkin, Derzhavin, Shishkof, Zhukovski, Mes- 
tcherski, Tchitcherin, Kazan, Viazma, Rzhef, Zhitomir, in French : Kara- 
mezine, Pouchekine, Derjavine, Chichekof, Joukovski, Mestcherski, Tchi- 
tcherine, Kazan, Viazma, Rjef, Jitomir : in German: $aramftn, ^Jufcfyftn, 
£>erff)atturt, ©#ifc&fot>, ©fcuforosft, $?ef$tf$ergft, £f#ttfc&crin, Safan, 
Sjafma or 2Bafma, TOe», ©jitomir, and the same in other languages. 
Exceptions will be found to this rule in certain proper names which 
have been adopted long ago; as: MocKBa, CaHKTneTep6ypri>, BapmaBa, 
MnTaBa, and some others; in English: Moscow, Saint-Petersburg, War- 
saw, Miltau; in French: Moscou, Saint-Petersbourg, Varsovie, Mittau; 
in German: 2fto3fau, ©t. Petersburg, Sarfcfcau, Wlitau. See the par- 
ticular Vocabularies of the Parallel Dictionaries of the Russian, French, 
German and English languages. 

ORTHOGRAPHIC SIGNS. 

94. — The orthographic signs (3HaKH npaBonHcama) of 
the Russian language are: the accent (yAapeme), the hyphen 
(eAHHHTe^BHBiH 3HaKi, or nepTOHKa), the sign of brevity 
(KpaTKaa) and the dimresis (HaACTp6<moe ABoeTO^ie). 

1. The accent (') serves to distinguish the homonyms or words 
which through written alike have a different meaning, as also 
the similar inflections of the words; as: saMOK-B, a castle, and 
3aMOKi», a lock; no^aTB, the tax, andnoAaTB, to give; ctoht'b, 
it costs, and ctoht^, he is up; bbixo/ihtb, to obtain, andBBi- 
xoahtb ; to go out; caobsl, of the word (gen. sing.). andcioBa, 
the words (nom. plurj. The accent is further placed on the 
relative pronoun mto, to be distinguished from the conjunction 
hto ; e. g. 3HaeniB ak umo Te6i no^HO, dost thou know 
what is useful to thee? and 3HaeniB ah, umo TeGi no^e3HO 
yHeme ; dost thou know that study is useful to thee? 



Orthography. — marks of punctuation. 169 

2. The hyphen (-) is use d t0 mar k the connection between 
two or more words; e. g. A^eKcaHApo-HeBCKaa vlaBpa, the 
monastery of St- Alexander Nev sky; reHepa^x-Maiopi), major 
general; uiTao'i.-o^niiepT,, field officier; IlBaHx-Aa-MapLH, 
cow-wheat. The hyphen is also used with the adverbs formed 
from the prepositions so and no, with the compound prepositions 
(§ 92. 1), and with the particle mo; as: Kain>-TO, such as; 
Tro-TO, something. It is also used at the end of aline, when 
a part of a word has to be carried on to the line following. 

3. The sign of brevity (~) is placed over the vowel u (if), 
converting it into a semi-vowel, which joined with the pre- 
ceding vowel forms only a syllable; as: moh, my; ceil, this; 
HeiiAeT'L, he does not go; HafiTM, to find. This mark is also 
used in prosody to indicate the short syllables, as whe shall 
see when speaking of Russian versification. 

4. The diaeresis ( • • ) is a double dot which is placed over 
the vowel e (e), when it has the sound of iooro; e.g. c/ie3bi, 
the tears; jKe.iTLifi, yellow. The letter e is also used as the 
equivalent of the French eu and the German o, as in the words 
MoHTecKBe, Montesquieu; aKTep-L, player (Fr. acteurj, Fere, 
Goethe {Germ. @otj?e). 

MARKS OF PUXCTU.VTKhY. 

95. — The marks of punctuation (3BaKH npeniiHama) are 
the same in Russian as in English, viz: the comma (3anaTaa,), 
the semicolon (TOHKa ct> 3anflTOK);), the colon QftBoeTome :), 
the full stop or period (TOHKa .), the note of interrogation 
(3Haia> BonpociiTe.flBHLiri?3, the note of exclamation (snaKT. 
BocK^nuaTe^BHBiH !j, the points of suspension (3HaKT> npecs- 

KaTe.iBHBiH ), the dash (sHaiCB Mbic^eoT/i.'B./riiTe.iBHLiH 

or Tnpe — ), the parenthesis (BMscTiiTe^BHtifi 3naK r B or 
ckookii () ), the inverted commas or quotation (bhochbih 3HaKT> 
or KaBW^KH,,") and the paragraph (KpacHaa CTpoKa). The 
use of these marks of punctuation is nearly the same in all 
languages. 



Heiff Russian Grammar. 15 



170 RUSSIAN GRAMMAR. 

PROSODY. 

Division of 96. — Prosody consists of two parts: 1) orthoepy Ccao- 

prosody. , . >. ,. , . v 

roy/iapeme), or the measured pronunciation of syllables and 
words, and 2) versification (cTnxoc/ioiKeHie), which teaches 
the laws of writing poetry correctly. 

ORTHOEPY. 

Prosodicai or 97. _ in the pronunciation of words attention must be paid 

tome accent. r 

not only to the particular articulation of each of the letters of 
which the may be composed, but also and especially to the 
accented syllable. The prosodicai or tonic accent (j/japeuie, 
§ 12) is a stress of the voice which is heard in one of the 
syllables of a polysyllabic word, so that this syllable shall 
strike the ear more forcibly than the others and appear to pre- 
dominate over them. Thus in the words BO^a, water; ne6o, 
the sky; CBo66#a, liberty; npeBocxo4HTe./iBCTBO, excellency, 
the voice is raised in the syllables da, ue, 60, da. The accented 
syllable is, in prosody, called strong or long, and the unac- 
cented syllables weak or short. 
Place of the 98. — The accent, in polysyllabic words, is found: 1) on 
the radical syllable: Bi/jaTB, to know; b£aomoctl, information; 
neBimecTBO, ignorance; ncnoBiAaTB, to confess; yBi^OMHTL, 
to inform; H3BicTie, news; 2) on the termination: B'E/i.yH'L, 
a sorcerer; bbctoboh, orderly; h3bscthtb, to notify; 3ano- 
B'EAHoii, interdicted; 3~) on the preposition: BBiBEAaTB, to ex- 
plore; sanoB^B, commandment; noBtCTB, a tale; cob^ctb, 
conscience; 4) on the prefix in compound words: (5./iaroB'£- 
cthtb, to ring to church. 

These examples show that the accentuation of words in Rus- 
sian is very variable; and pratice and the dictionary can alone 
enable us to place the accent correctly, as no fixed rules on 
the subject have hitherto been discovered. We may however 
remark that a word, when standing alone, may be accented 
differently to what it is, when joined to other words; thus the 



Prosody. — versification. 171 

pronouns at times lose their accent; again, the nouns and the 
numerals which have the moveable accent, in the other cases 
often transfer it to the preposition; in like manner the apoco- 
pated adjectives and the verbs transfer it to the negative ; e. g. 
mth OTU,a TBoero h MaTepL tboio, honour thy father and thy 
mother; Apy3Ba moh, my friends; no 6epery, along the shore; 
3a MopeM-B, beyond the sea; oht. He Bece./i'B, he is not gay; 
a He 6pa^ r B, I have not taken. We may here repeat, what 
we have already indicated in the declensions and conjugations, 
that, in the change of inflections, the accent is often transferred 
from one syllable to another. 

VERSIFICATION. 

99. — The Russian versification, which, like that of England Tonic versifi- 



, ,,111^11, 



cation. 



and Germany, is based on the prosodical accent, is termed 
tonic versification ; while that of French language and various 
other modern tongues, depending on the number of syllables 
employed, is called syllabic, and thai of the Greeks and Ro- 
mans, which is based on quantity or the length and brevity of 
the syllables, is termed metrical. 

J 00. — In the tonic versification the verses are also mea- Foot or metre, 
sured by feet, as in Greek and Latin. The foot (cTOnaJ or 
metre (pa3M-Ep r B), in Russian poetry, is formed by the union 
of two or three syllables, one of which has the prosodical ac- 
cent. The feet employed in the structure of Russian verse are 
six in number, viz: 

1. The iambus (hm6t>), composed of two syllables with the 
prosodical accent on the last, u-: 3HMa, BecHa. 

2. The choreus (xopei) or trochee (Tpoxefi), consisting of 
two syllables with the accent on the first, -u: jisto, oceHB. 

3. The^i/rrA/c(nnppnxiH), formed of two unaccented syllab- 
les, u u: such are the two first syllables of 6e3no^e3HBii1. The 
pyrrhic in the middle of a line is used instead of an iambus 
or a trochee. 

4. The dactyl (aekthjil), formed of three syllables with the 
accent on the first, -uu: na.mna, pa/jocTHBifi. 

5. The amphibrach (aM*n6paxin), formed of three syllables 
with the accent on the second, u-u: npnHHna, UBJiyio. 



of the verses. 



172 RUSSIAN GRAMMAR. 

6. The anapaest (ananecTx), formed of three syllables with 
the accent on the last, w-: ^ejioBiKx, BpeMeHa. 
Denomination 101. — The verse or line of poetry takes its name from the 
nature of the feet of which it is composed. There are verses 
of six, five, four, three, two feet, and even of one, which are 
termed iambic, chorale, dactylic, amphibrachic, anapaestic, dac- 
tylo-choraic, anapcesto-iambic, according as they may be for- 
med of a single one of these metres or of a combination of 
several. The lines which have not the same number of feet 
are termed free verses (Bo^tHBie cthxh). 

The verses most commonly employed in modern Russian 
poetry are the following: 

1. The hexameters or the dactylo-choraic verses of six feet, 
of which the four first are dactyls or trochees, the fifth a dactyl, 
and the sixth a trochee. This line is an imitation of the Greek 
and Latin hexameter, from which it differs only in the employ- 
ment of trochees instead of spondees, which do not exist in 
Russian. It is used in epic poems, especially in such as are 
translations from the ancient languages. Ex. 



FeKTopt repofl ct> KOJecmiubi ct opyadeMT> cnpaHy.a'b Ha 3eM.«o; 
O'cipbia KonbH KOAe6An, noTeKt no pa/taMi. ono^qeHM, 
Bt> 6ofi pacna.iaa TpoanT>; ii Bosmen* jKecTOKyio CBiy: 
Bct» oopaTi'uiicb ott> dirciBa h ct£Mh bt> .<inue ApniBanaMB. 

rnibduw. 

2. The iambic verses of six feet, or alexandrine (a^eKcau- 
4piucKie), are used in great compositions, such as epic and 
didactic poems, tragedies, comedies, satires, epistles, elegies, 
idyls, etc.; e. g. 



y?Ke 6\n4HieTi> Jieub, CKpbraaacb 3a ropoio; 
IlIyMamia da4a To.inarca Ha,zn> p-BKoii. 

MyKoetKiu. 

3. The iambic verses of five feet, but seldom used; e. g. 
Tbi roBopi'mib, hto Myiycb na^ craxoM'b, 
^to He nHUiy ero, a coMHHaio. 

Knfl3b BA3€MCKlu. 



Prosody. — versification. 



173 



The iambic verse of five feet is sometimes used alternately 
with that of six. Ex. 

Kanoe TopjnecTBo roToisurb ApeBiiiil Pmvn>? 
Ky4a TenyTL napo4a iiiyMHbi bo^hbi? 

Edmroiuh'065, 

4. The iambic verses of four feet are used in odes and other 
lyrical poems: and those of three, two and even a single foot, 
in songs and other light compositions ; e. g. 

O Tbi, hto bt> ropecTH Hanpacno 

Ha Bora ponmeiub, ne^oBiKb! 

BHHMafi, KO.Ib B'b peBHOCTH YJKaCHO 
OhT> KT> I'OBy Ii3T> TJHII peKi.. 



y?Ke co tmoh) iiomii 
ripocTep.iacb THinHHa; 
BbixoAHTT. ii3T.-3a poimi 
JHeikAbmn Ayui. 

Hrpafi, AaeJit, 
He 3Hafi neiajn! 
Xapihbi, AeAh 
Teoa B-BiHa.in, 
II Ko.ibi6e^ib 
Tbow Kana^H. 



JOMOHOCOGZ. 



Kanuucmz. 



Aa. IlyiuKum. 



Dry n aft, 
C 3 bib a ft 
Ct> j-bcobi 
BcbxTj ncoBX 
Ha KpaS 
Aft, aii! 

Aepoicdeum. 

5. The free iambic verses are employed in fables, tales, 
epigrams, epitaphs, inscriptions, etc. 3 e. g. 
B'b npnxotfveii 11a nojy, 
B'b yr.iy, 

IlyCTOll M-BUIOK-b mAHAca. 

y caMbixi> hhskhxtj ciyrt 

Out, na ofiTi'ipKy non> Hepwo noMbina^ca; 

Ram BApyrb 

M'bujoK'b Haiin, BT. necTb nona^ca, 

H Becb lepBOHuaMn Ha6iirb: 

B'b oKOBaHHOM'b japui B'b coxpanHocTH Aem'm>. 

h'poiAoez. 
15. 



m 



RUSSIAN GRAMMAR. 



6. The chorale or trochaic verses of six, five, four, three and 
two feet, sometimes of the same length and sometimes of a 
different length, are used in various poems. The choraics of 
four feet are chiefly used in songs; e. g. 



H-fiTt no4pyrn hiukhoh, hstt. npe^iecTHofi Ai\A\>\\ 

Bee ocnpoTi^o! 
rUa%, Aio6oBb h /J,pyjK6a! iwaHb, THMeirL yHbMbift! 

CiacTbe jAeThAol 



EdmwiuKoeo. 
C/iaBbca, A^eKcan/ipT,, E^ncaBeTa, 
4o Be4epHeft thxhxt* Auen 3ap«; 
H ciame bt> CTpaHy noJicBiia 
Ct BLicoTb'i npecTo.ia pacnpodpii. 

CTOHeTi. CR3tifi ro.flydo'leK'b, 

OoHeTb OHT> H AGUb H HOIbJ 

MiueiibKift ero /ipy^eieK^ 
OweTi^cb HaAo^ro npoqb. 

BCBXT, UB-BTOHKOB-b dO-flf 

P63y a Aio6iiAiy] 

E'tO TOJbKO BT> nO.l'B 

B3opT> moh BeceAiiAT*. 

Mbi cepARaMH 

H c*e3aMH 

M6^hmt> Bacb, 

Born rHEBa 

H 3peBa, 

B'b CTpaniHbiH iacb. 

KapaM3um. 

7. The dactylic verses, composed of dactyls alone, are only 
used with two, three or four feel, when longer they become 
fatiguing to the ear; e. g. 



Bo6pd65. 



/iMilmpieez. 



/%Mumpie65. 



Eoflte! LJapa xpanii! 
ClMbHblH, 4ep)KaBHbift, 
IlapcTByft Ha caaBy HaMi; 
UapcTByH na cipaxi. BparaM-b 
Hapb npaBOMaBHbiH. 
Eoate! ti,apa xpaHHj 



fflyKoecKiu. 



Prosody. — versification. 175 

flOMOBHTaa JacToiKa! 
Ma\iem>Ka, citeeuBKa nnhKa! 
TpyAb Kpacno6'B.ia, KocaTO^Ka, 
Aimnn toctlh, imriiKa! 

AepoicdeuHZ. 

Po3a jb, tbi p63o<wa, po3a 4yimicTaa, 
Bcbmb Tbi KpacaBima, po3a hb-btokt., 
Befica, n^ieTiica ct> jimeeu h .iaH4BiuieM , B, 
Beflca, n.ieTiica bt> Moil nBimnBifl bbhok-b. 

Bapom JleJibem'b. 

8. The dactylo-choraic verses of four, three and two feet, 
are more commonly met with than the pure dactylics, and are 
used in songs, odes and other lyric poems; e. g. 

— i — i — i - 1 

Ya% tbi, npenpacHaa, r/in oGiiTaeuiB? 
Tai\n> au, ta% nicHri noe'Tt ^iwoMwa, 
KpoTnaa hoiu n-BBiiua, 

C»4H Ha MIipTOBOH BSTBD? 

KapaM3um. 
nie'^Ka 3^iaTaa, 

*ItO TBI ^yffiJKIIIHB ? 

Bee BKpyrB ^eTaa, 
ripoHB He jeTiimB. 

Aepoicdeum. 

9. The amphibrachic verses of six and five feet are employed 
in idyls, epistles, elegies; and those of four, three and two feet 
in various lyrical compositions; e. g. 



Bt> nacBi nupoBaHBfl, npo cMaocthom-b nimu CTpym. OHUiB./ieHHBix'B, 
YHBiHie MpaiHO Ha Mnn> He ocTaBiuo Mii.iaro tocth. 
CHB/jaioma ropecTB .lexurn. oyGono bt> ero cep/UTB! 
yMo.iKHHTe, nicim! Aa iHCTyw pa/iocTB pasA^iflTB cor^acHO. 

Mep3AHK065. 

B.ia^BiKa MopBeHBi 
}KiwT> bt> a"BAObckomt> 3aMK"B MoryHifi 0p4a\n>. 

Ha^i. 63epoMT. ct-bhbi 
3y6qaTBia 3aMOKi» ci xo^Ma B03BBiina.n». 



fflyicdecKiu. 

Bt. to BpeMH ct> BecHoio 
^Ik)66bb Haci. awa.ia: 
Bt> to BpeMa . . . . co mhobo 
Ilo4pyra rcn.ia. 

Mux. /ZMumpieez. 



176 RUSSIAN GRAMMAR. 

10. The anapcestic verses from one to four feet are used in 
odes and also in fables. Ex. 



rioCMOTpil, 

M 4epjKii tli bt. yMi, 
HecB MyHvHKi. ny^a Tpii 
Ha npo4an{y CBimuy bt> nefio.iBuiOH kotomb. 

CyMapoKoez. 

The anapaestic line is sometimes used alternately with the 
amphibrachic; e. g. 

He CTpeMi'ict 4o6po4BTe.flB Hanpacno 

AiQjyw otb HenpaB4w yHHTb. 
Bt> hhxb nopoKii n^ioAaTca Bce4acHo: 

HejlB3fl HXT> hhtbmt, ncnpaB./iaTB. 

EoddaHdeuiz. 

11. The anapcesto-iambic verses are oftener employed than 
the above mentioned; e. g. 



Th 6-Bni, 6BrH, Haun> 3^04118 otb HacB; 
He 4a4HMT> Te6i nopyraTBca HaMi>. 
Tbi B3r^aHH, B3r^aHi'i Ha co.i4aTT> cbohx'b 
Me?K4y pe6epB hx"b ymit TpaBa pacTeTT>. 

lUyjieiwuKoez. 

caesura. 102. — The ccesura (npecT^emeJ is a rest which divides 

the line of poetry into two parts, each of which is called a 
hemistich or half verse. This rest, which is only found in the 
iambic verses of six and of five feet, and in the trochaic verses 
of six feet, requires the word to be finished after the third 
foot in lines of six feet, and after the second in lines of five. 
Ex. 

H3B MpaHHBlXT. HB4P"B 3eMHBlXB | HCX04HTT> 6ypilblft IL/iaMeHB; 
KyCTapHHKH 4pOJKaT'B ; I KaMeHB 6BeTCfl KaMeHB. 

XepdcKoed. 

H mHTB h MeTB I CpocaiorB ct, 3HaMeHaMH; 
Be34'S nyni | noKpuTbi hx'b koctamh. 

JfCyfcdech'iu. 

34^CB THMeH'B npHKOBaHB, J ClBAHblft h 6e3r,iacHbiH, 
racnTT> y rpoSniiubi | cboii cbbtimbhhkb acHbifi. 

EdmfowKoez, 



Prosody. — versification. 177 

Though it is not absolutely necessary that the caesura should be al- 
ways marked so distinctly, still the syllable terminating the first, hemi- 
stich can never be united with that commencing the second; thus the 
caesura can never come between a preposition and its complement. 

103. — The syllable terminating a line of poetry may be Termination 
either strong or accented, or it may be weak or unaccented. ofthe verses " 
In the former case the termination is masculine, and in the 
latter feminine; e. g. 

Aw6.m, .ucoYiTb BB'EKt 6yjy! fern. term. • 
K.iam'iTe CTpacTb moi'o, masc. term. 

Ee3H{a.iocTHbiH 4yinu, fern. term. 

yKecTOKia cepana masc. term. 

KapaM3ibid. 

From this double termination it results that lines of the same metre 
have 'not always the same number of syllables. Iambic verses of six 
feet have twelve syllables with the masculine termination, and thirteen 
with the feminine ; those of four feet have eight syllables with the mas- 
culine and nine with the feminine. Choraic verses of four feet have 
seven syllables with the masculine termination, and eight with the fe- 
minine. The same rule applies equally to the other verses. 

104. — The uniformity of sound in the words terminating Rhyme. 
lines of poetry forms rhyme (pi'ieMa), which is also mascu- 
line or feminine, according to the termination ofthe verse; e.g. 

Kto 6y4eTT> npniuiviaTb moh neue.n, orb nocTpa? , 

Kto ope™ 6e3b Te6a, o Miuan cecTpa, j masc r ' n J me - 

3a rpofioM-b ciiionaTb bt> oaeaub norpe6a.ibHou, | 

II aivpo u3.iuBaTb uaj/b ypHoro ne.mbHoil? ^ fern, rhyme. 

Edmmuh'065. 

Rhymes were introduced into the poetry of such modern tongues as 
could not imitate the Greek and Latin versification, because, the lan- 
guage of poetry differing in them but little from pro«e, something was 
requisite to please the ear; in Russian however, Avhere the accent is 
strongly marked and supplies the place of quantify, rhyme is not ab- 
solutely necessary; the same is the ca^e in English and German, while 
in French rhyme is indispensable. Poetry without rhyme is called blank 
verses (6i.ibie ctiixu). Verses which in Russian poetry are always 
written without rhyme, are the hexameters and those imitating metres 
of the ancient languages. 

105. — According to the various combinations of the mas- stanza or 
culine and feminine rhymes, they are divided into consecutive strophe - 
(uapHbie CTuxii), alternate [nepecTfnubie^ and mixed (ci\ii- 



p^ 



178 RUSSIAN GRAMMAR. 

iuaHHBie). This combination of rhymes is used chiefly in 
stanzas. A stanza or strophe consists of a number of verses 
expressing a complete idea. It varies in length from four to 
fourteen lines. We here give an example of the strophe of four 
lines, in alternate rhymes, and another of the strophe of four- 
teen lines, in mixed rhymes and choraic metre. 
Bee BOKpyrt yhkmo! ^yTt 3e*iipT> BeceHHifi 

IlaMHTHHio. .flo63aen>; 
3/ttcb bt> jkhjIhir'B iuaia, Tiixifi cMepTH reHiw 
Po3y o6pbiBaeTi). 

EdmwiuKoez. 

Pa3T. Bt KpemeHCKiS BenepoKt 

4"BByuiKH ra^ajin: 
3a Bopoia GauiMaHoin., 

Chhbt> cb Horn, 6poca4ii; 
Cnnn. noAOAii; 11041. OKtioMt 

CUyuia.iH; KopMtun 
Cne'THBiMT. Kypniry 3epHOMT>; 

il'pKiH BOCKT, TOnHJIH; 

Bt naiiiy cb ihctok) B040H 
Kjia^iH nepcTem. 30JOT68, 

CeptrH H3yjipy4HH; 
l J a3CTHJiajiH 6i^LiS iLiaTi., 
H Ha^i. Haineft uiMi bt. ^aAi» 

IlllCeHKH nOA6^K)4HLI. 

fflyKOGCKW. 

Poetic licenses. 106. — In following the above rules of versification the poet 
is at time compelled to sacrifice some of the minor principles 
of grammar, to syncopate terminations, and to place words in 
an inverted order. These sacrifices to number, harmony, rhyme 
and elegance are termed poetic licenses (cTHxoTBop^ecKia 
bo^ilhocth). 



END OF THE GRAMMAR. 



CORRECT CONSTRUCTION 

OF THE 

EXERCISES. 



We started for Potsdam on horseback yesterday at six o'clock in the Reading-Exer- 
morning. Nothing can be duller than this route; there is nothing but Cise -P- 13 - 
deep sand everywhere and not a single object of interest meets the eye. 
The view of Potsdam however, and particularly that of Sans-Souci is 
very fine. We stopped at an hotel, before arriving to the gates of the 
town. After resting ourselves and ordering our dinner, we entered the 
town. At the gate our names were written down. On the parade 
square, opposite the palace, which is adorned with Roman colonnades, 
the guards were exercising: the men are superb, and the uniforms 
splendid. The view of the palace from the garden is very fine. The 
town is generally speaking well built; in the principal street there are 
several magnificent houses constructed on the plan of the largest palaces 
of Rome at the expense of the late king: he gave them to any one he 
chose. At present these vast edifices are empty or only occupied by 
soldiers. — At Potsdam there is a Russian church under the care of 
a Russian soldier, who has lived there from the time of the Empress 
Anne. We had some difficulty in finding him. The decrepit old man 
was seated in a large arm-chair, and having heard that we are Rus- 
sians, he extended his hands towards us and exclaimed with a trembling 
voice: „Glory to God! Glory to God!" He tried at first to speak with 
us in Russian; but we had difficulty in understanding each other. We 
were obliged to repeat almost every word. „Let us go into the temple 
of God, said he, and let us pray together, though there is no church 
festival to-day." My heart was filled with devotion, when I saw the 
door of this church opened, where solemn silence has reigned so long, 
scarcely broken by the low sighs and the feeble voice of the old man 
in prayer, who comes every Sunday to read in this spot the holiest of 
books, which prepares him for a happy eternity. In the church every 
thing is neat and clean. The books and the church ornaments are kept 
in a trunk. The old man arranges them from time to time reverently 
praying. „It often grieves me to the heart, said he, to think that after 
my death, which cannot be far distant, no one will take care of this 
church." We remained half an hour in this holy spot; then bidding the 
venerable old man adieu, we wished him a peaceful death. 

Karamzin. 



180 RUSSIAN GRAMMAR. 

Exercises on the Xo3aHHT> Ca^a H X03aTlKa 40Ma. Ca4T> X03aiJHa H AOM-h X03HI1KIJ. 
declension of -n . . ■ ■ . . . - 

substantives. PblKame ^BOB'b; nume coJOBba; MfciMamo 6tiKa, BOja h KopoBbi; pjKanie 
p. 44. jioma^ett; ^aft codaKii; BopKOBaHbe ro./iy6a; KapnaHbe BopoHOB-b; KBa- 
KaHte Jiaryiueicb; boh Bo^Ka; jKVJKJKaiiie niejn, xcyKonrnMyxi; 6j)eanie 
dapaiiOBT. ii oBeub. KaMi'mi 6e3T>orHa; OKua 6e3i> CTe'Ko^b; Kama 6e3T> 
Macaa; CB4-ia 6e3T> CTpeMein.; 3apa4T> 6e3-b nyj«; ocxpoBa n ./iyra 6e3i> 
4epeBbeBi>; noi,apa. Kyqepa 11 pa6oTiniKii 6e3'b paOoTbi; 4Btii 6e3i> Ma- 
Tepn; co^4'iTbi 6e3i> py?Keil; pyniba de3T> KpeMneii; CTaTya 6e3i> pyicb 
h 6e3i> ymeii; Me4BB?KaTa n jbBetiKH 6e3T> mepcTn; Kopa6.-iii 6e3T>KoeKi>- 
cy4a 6e3i> Bece^n.; iafi 6e3b caxapa h 6e3i> wobokt>. riyKT> nepbeBT>- 
4WJKHHa HameKT>, Tape^on r b h CTaKaHOBi>; coTiia *ope^eft; 4eca r roK'b 4biHb • 
MHOJKecTBO rycefi, )tokt> h .ledeAefi; cia4a CKOTa; Tadyiibi ^ouia4eil. 
MyjKii 4peBiiocTH, h My;Kba mein>. U,BBTbi ca40Bi> } n UBBTa pa4ynt. 
jIhctw 6yiviani, n .niCTba 4epeBi>. 3y6bi bo pxy, h 3y6ba y rpedHa. 
Ko./i'BHa H3paiLibTaHTj, ko.ibhii y Me^oBBKa, 11 Ko.iiiJba pacreiiia. Aobt> 
ce^b4efl y deperoBi, AMepiiKH dbui, oneub Bb'iro4eHb 4.1a AHivni^aHb 
IllBe40BT>, ro.uaH4ueBi> n 4>paHuy30B't. 

Cobbtt> 4py3baMT>. CaaBa Bory. Tope Bparaivn.. npnKa3i BoficKy. 
rioBHiiOBenie 3aK6naivn>. 4an i>CTb rycaMi>, KypaMb ; ro./iydaM'b h HieH- 
Kafrb. llodynaTb cooTBiTCTBeHHO npaBiuaarb ^ecTii. ^KiiTb ripiuiWiio 
cocToawifo. 3aKOHT>, 4anHbrii Kain> 4BopaHaivi'b, TaKi> h MBiuaHaarb. flpo- 
TiiBiiTbca JKe-flaHiaiM-b 4^168, h bo^-b po4UTe.*eft. Khuth, nepba h Te- 
Tpa4H npima4^e>KaT'b yHentiKaivrb, a He yyi'iTe^aMi. Uojia h .iyra npn- 
na4Jiea{aT r b omy 11 MaTepn, a ca/ud, KaKi, 11 .iBca, CbiHOBbaM-b h 4one- 
paMT>. HpaBiiTbca MyaraHHaMi, h He HpaBUTbca ;KeHuiHHajvn>. 3e^eHb 
HpaBiiTCa oa3a]vrb. KapTiiiibi HpaBaTca cec-TpaMt, a uB'ETbi 6paTbaMT>. 
Ilojie3HbiH OTeMecTBy; npiaTHbin Bory h jk)4bmt>; BBpHbiil I'ocy4apio; 
Aio6e3Hbm 4py3basiT); Mi'ubifl 4-btbmt>. ye^OBiKT> no3HaeTca no ^nuy, 
no rojiocy, no poCTy, no noxo4K-B h no TB^io4BiiH(eHiaMT,. TypiicTbi 
nyTeiuecTByioT'b no UlBefiuapin, ^panuin, MTa.dn, TepMaHiii, AMepuKB 
n En'inTy. 

BpaTba Kyniun 40Ma, ca4b'i, 4epeBHio 11 no.'ia, a np64a.n1 dbiKOB'bj 
KopoBii, jioi.ua4eli 11 KapeTy. 4iiTa r fb 6acHio ; pucoBaTb KapTtmy, nncaTb 
niicbMa, nrpaTb nicHK), HimiiTb nepba. HocbinaTb 6paTbeBi> h cecTep r b, 
Maiepeii h Aoiepeft, oTne'B'b h cbiHOBF>eBT>. KymiTb ni^iany n nianny, 
nepiaTKii h 6aniMaKH, ny.iKH 11 no4Ba3Kii. 3aBoeBaTeJib no6B4ioT. Boiicna, 
11 noKopujn Hapo4T>. IleTpT> pa3611.iT> UlBe40B'b, 3aBoeBa.^ 3cT^iaH4iio 
h jIii*^iaH4iio ) ocHOBa^T> ropo4'b CaHKTneTep6ypri>, n npocBUTHJn> Poccih). 
Poccfane n06-BHt4a.n1 TaTap-b, TypoKT> ? IllBe40B^, ^paHaysoB-b h Iiep- 
ciaHi>. 4°^^" ocBBJKaiorb 3eMJiio, a xo.io4a ncTpe6.iaiOTx capaniy. 

4iith, 6y4bTe npn^ieJKHbi! HBaH"b, npiii4H ct04a ! Bohhw, cpaffianTecb 
xpa6po! B6?Ke, cnacii IJ,apa! F6cno4H ; noMiuyii MeHa! 

yHeHHKii niimyTT> rpii^e.ieMi. iuii nepoMi h lepmijaMH. HBaHi. 
HrpaeTT> ct> AjieKCBeM-b n ct> Bacu^ieMi, a Mapba iirpaeTi. ci, C6*beK) 
h ct. ^IrodoBbio. IlHpor^ ct, MHiuajieM-b; ropuioKt cb uBtTaMii; Ka4Ka 



CORRECT CONSTRUCTION OF THE EXERCISES. 181 

Cb BO.JOK) ; Me^OBiKi, Cb vmomi b ct> remeivrb; ra.iepea ct KapTiinaMii. 
Fopo^a cb KpeaueMt n raBaiibio; 4epeBBH c r b JiicTbHMn, HB'BTaMii h hjo- 
flaMH; KiiBepa cb cy.iTaHaMii; KOMHaia Cb 4BepaMii; xj$6t> ct> co.ibio: 
Boj,a cb biihomt. ; bhho ct> B04610 ; npo#eocopa ct. yqeHiiKaMn ; iiucbmo 
ct> /TeKbraMii. PncoBaTb KapaH4ame'M'b, niicarb kiictbk) h KpacKaMii. 
Kyneui) TopryeTi. cLiowb, Mbuowb, mojiok6mt>, myrow, Kpynow, BiiiiaMn, 
hhbomt., cyKHaMH, no.ioTHaMii 11 KpyKeBaMii, a COCB411 Kynna Topryrorb 
Bo.iaMii, 6apanaMH h ,ioina4bMii. 4Bopuu ct> GauiHaMii; uepKBii ct> ko- 
jmjkojbhhmh; 40Ma cb oKHaMH ; 34ania cb rajepeaMii; no.iKii cb 3iiaMe- 
HaMn. Topbi n3o6n.iyiOTT> 36^otomt>, cepe6poMT>, m'b.abio, Hieji30Mi. ; 

pTyTBH) II CBIIlIUeMT>. 

Bacmi 6bikb 11 6apaH-B, o6t> ocii 11 co-iobbs; o Ky3HeaiiK-B n my- 
paBbi; 4y6"E n tpocthhrb; o .inci'm'B n Bopon-B, o bo.ik-e h ariie'iurE. 
CKa3Kii odi> aHre.i'fi-xpaHiiTe.a'fc, odb IlBanx n Mapb-B; noBtcrii o Ceprin 
nycTbiisiiriK-B, o repo-E h remii. ToBopiiTb 06'b nrpax-b, 06'b yponax-b, 
BpeMeim, rtbctb, 06'b o6cToaTe^bCTBaxb. Bt> co^imeum roBopan> 
MHoro iecTH 11 6e3iecTin, o 4o6po4"BTewiti n nopOR'B, o xpadpocru u 
Ma^04ymin. Bt> bo4"B miByT'b pbi6bi, ^aryinKH n c.ii'j3hu, a bt> j-scy jkh- 
Byrb .ibBbij MeABi4H, jiiici'mbi u 3aiinbi. 

Khi'hh yiemiKa HpaBflTca yiiiTe.no. Cbst-b co.wua 03apaeix 3eM.iw 
jyqaiviii. I^BSTa po3bi npiaTHbi rjasaMi. AyyzbA He.iOBinecTBa Aijarorb 
4o6po .no4aMT>. Bt> ca4y HBtTyT-b po3bi cb uninaMii; iido hbtt> po3bi 
6e3i> munoB'b. /J-btii yMbiBawTca B040W p^Rii. OaKairb ct> B04610 
ctoiittj na CTO-zii KOMpaTW. C.ie3bi pa40crn 6AecrArb bt> r.ia3axi> Ma- 
Tepn. C.iaBa 3^04"BeBT> Henp040.iHiiiTe.ibHa; ho iiMena 6jaro4iTe. i ieu 
ciaioTb bt> btWhocth. CiacTie 11a 3eM.n1 coctohtI) bt> cnoKoficTBiii 4yxa 
11 bt> iiiCTOTi cobsctii. IO'hoihii .ho6htt> niHie co.iOBba, Ha fiepery 
pyiba, cpu cb^t-b jyHb'i. ToBopi'iTb npaB4y ecTb aoati, 4 r BTeil. ^Iio6iiTb 
Bora cep4UeM , b 11 4yui6io. MypaBbii 11 6o6pb'i M6ryn» c^yauiTb npiiMB- 
pOMT> ne.iOBiKy. Il0'B34Ka bt. MocKBy 11 bt» Kl'eBT). Bx04"b bt> 6ii6.ii6- 
Teny 4.1a MTenia. IIo4aH yqiiTe.no TeTpa4b co CTiixaMu Ha aiyqail npa3- 
4HiiKa. Ha4o6no BCTaBaTb yTpoMi> ; paSoTaTb AHeMi, 0T4bixaTb BeyepoMT> 
h cnaTb Hoabio. rpo»iT» nyuieKi) 11 3boht> ko.iokojob-b bo3B"£ctii.iii rpa- 
;K4anaMT. npn6bmu no6i4[iTe.ia BparoBi, OTenecTBa. 

llyCTOH KapiViairb; KapMani nyCTT.. KpinKlH 3aMOKT>; 3aMOKT> Kpi- Exerciser on 

noKT>. BipHbift c.iyra; c.iyra 6bi.n> BspeHi>. Marbiii BOCKb; bockt> mA- 
roKij. GnoKonHbiii coht>; coht. cnoboeHX. 4 OCT ofiHbiii cmhi.; cbiHt 
40ct6oht>. 11'CTHHHbiii 4pyn>; 4pyn> HCTiiHeHT>. CoBepmeHHbiil noKoii; 
noKoft 6y4eTT, coBepineHT.. IIpo3paiHoe CTeK.16; creK.io npo3pa4Ho. 
/(peBiiee npe4ame; npe4ame 6b'uo 4peBiie. Ten.ioe a±w ; jbto 6y4eTT> 
Tento Tynoenepo; nepoTyno. BeTxaaxibKima; xiiJKHiia BeTxa. Cimaa 
6yaiara; 6yMara CHHa. HoBbie 40Ma; 40Ma hobbi. BoraTbia ceMbi'i; 
ceMbi'i 6b'uH ooraTbi. KpacHbia 3HaaieHa; 3HaMeHa 6y4yrb KpacHbi. 

Ei.iaa 6yMara; 6^ifiujaa 6yMara; caMaa 6i^iaa 6yaiara. HeBa 6bi- 
CTpa 7 a Bo.ira dbicTpie. Mo.iok6 hci'iako, aB04aHtii»ie. r.iy6oKia pyieii; 



the adjectives, 
p. 64. 



182 RUSSIAN GRAMMAR. 

i\fly6oiafiuiafl p-bKa. /J°Ma bbicokh, a daimm Bb'iuie. XopomiS qaft ; 
^yquiifi Haft; caMtift Jiyqmifi Haft. CodaKH Ma^bi; kohjkh Menbine; ho 
Mt'iuiH MajiiiiniH. OTeivb mo^oa^; Maib MOJioJKe; ho cecipa caMaa mo- 
JOAaa. CiHo Aoporo, a cojioMa Aop6)Ke. Mo^oko ciaAKo: caxap-b 
ciame; ho Me'AT> caMbifi caaAKiii. 

B'B^OBaTaa 6yMara; GypoBaTbia ^epHtua; lepnoBaTaa BOAa; npacKa 
CHiieBaTa. EypeHbKaa KopoBKa; MoeubKaa .flomaAKa; nireHbHaa ao- 
ma4Ka; 6iAHeHbKaa AiBOina; CTapnieKT> CTapeneicb; dapyuiKa Ao6peHbKa. 
IlpeSijiaa 6yMara; GyMara 6-bviexOHbKa ; npecyxia ApoBa; ApoBa cyxo- 

HieHBKH. 

XosaHH-L o6iUHpHLixi> caAOB-b, h xo3aima HoBaro AoMa. OraKaub 
xopoineii boab'i h KpacHaro bhh&; ui-ibie ropujKri CBHuaro ca.>ra h ejoBoii 

CMCMM. AiAail A06p6 6iAHblMT> A'BTHMT. H ApaXJIblMT. CTapHKaMl., H He 

xoa» no ivhu'imt. no^aMT>. Bott. aomt> Kmi3a /[o^ropyKaro ; bott. abo- 
peuT> rpa*HHH Tojictoh, a bott> o6imipHbie caAti MO.iOAbixT> Tpa^oBt 
SaBaAOBCKHXT.. H AHBiwca npiaraoMy nimio npouuoroAHaro co-ioBba. 
^ItiHUTb Ae6eAHHoe nepo Tynb'iM-b h6jkhkomt>. Bott. rycnubia nepba, 
KpaCHbie KapaHAauiH, TOJicraa TeTpaAH, AyGoBbia AuniMu h do^buiie 
HiipnyjiH, a bott. cyKomibie Ka*Tanbi, Ta^TaHbie n.iaTKH, uie^KOBbie qyjKii, 
nyxoBbia HManbi, TOHKia no^oTHa h TOHHafimia KpyateBa. Am6ii Heno- 
poHHbie HpaBbi; mwhii no^e3Hbia KHwni; ith CTapbixT> JHOAefi; xBaM 
Aodpbia A'bJia; 6eperti lecTHaro h Bipnaro cflyry. IIoAapH hobvio Km'iry 
caMOMy npH^eJKHOMy yienHKy. Tbi xBajiraib Becenmoio noroAy, hchoctb 
jiiTHHX'b HoneH, ocenHwio npox^aAy h 3iiMHie xojioAa. H yBa/Kaio c.iaB- 
HbIXT> MyJKeft H 3HaMeiIHTbIXT> nojKOBOAueB-b ApeBHax-b BpeMeHi). Eojb- 
inie ManeBpbi Hb'm'bmHaro roAa 6yAyTi> B*b KpacHOMi. Ceai h na /Jy- 
Aepro*CKoft Topi. 

Oht, Bbitxa^^ H3T. omeBa AOMa, h A^aerb Ao6p6 cecTpniiofi Ao^epn. 
Oht. npoAa^i. ^eHHHo HMime dpaTHimy cb'my. ITocBmaTb TocnoAHH 
xpaMbi h Boffiin uepKBH. IIoBHHOBaTbca TocnoAHeil boa%, h no3iiaBaTb 
Be^i'necTBO Eoaria hmchh. IlepBaa PyccKaa TpaMMaTiiKa 6bua HanncaHa 
6e3CMepTHbiM^ ./IoMOH6coBbiMT), h PocciftcKaa HcTopia HHKOjaeMT> Mn- 
xaiuoBHHeMi> KapaM3HHbiMT>. Cpa^ema ct> 4>paHUY3aMH npoHcxoAi^n 
HOAT. BopOAHHbIMT> H nOAT> BopiICOBblMl. fl a(HBajn> BT. HoB'bropoA'B H 

bt. B'bJi'bosep'B. /^speBHH KHanhiH Ga^TbiKOBofi JiejKaTb noAT> ropoAOMii 
KaiuiiHbiMT.. 

Bott> -iiicba my6a, co66^ba uianna, nTihbe imsAo, 3aanbH Mtxa h 
MOHOBbH 3y6bi. IlyAi. o^eHbaro Maca, apinimi, Bo.i6Bbeft ko^h, h *yHTi> 
TeJiaHbHxT> M03roBT>. He xoah no BOJiibHM'b catAaMi., h He bxoah bx 
MeABijKbK) 6ep^i6ry. Pa3cyH(AeHie o le^oBinbeM'b rja3"B h o pbi6beft 
ro^oBi. Oht. Topryerb pbidbBM-b K^eeM^, dbnaibHMi. ca^oarb, K03bHMH 
HJKypaMH h n^TyuibBMH rpe6HaMH. 

XBacTyHT> nox6a(T> Ha cobo, yKpameHiiyio naB^i'mbiiMH nepbHMH. Co- 
ciAOBi> 6paTi> npiixa^b h3t> Aa^ibHaro ropoAa, a cecrpa h3T> Aa^ibHefi 
AepeBnH. HBaHOBo nAaTbe y3Ko, ho IleTpoBo eme y^e. 4°6peHbKaa 



CORRECT CONSTRUCTION OF THE EXERCISES. 183 

crapyiiiKa mmerb bt, cbipoMT, 40MU, .lewameivn, no4T> IJapi'mbiiibiMT, 
ce.ioM'b. H Kyni'ui, Me4BiJKbK) uiy6y ct, 6o6poBbiMT> BopoTmiKOivn,, h 
6o6poByio uiaQKy ct, iu(mkoboh) aqutow. Bott, npei<pacnaa KHi'ira bt> 
6oraTOMi. ca4>bnHHoan> nepeiuerB. Yak HaiUe'MT, mli npiiMipT, hhc- 
rBiiuiaro caMOOTBepjKenia, Bb'icmeii jihj6bu kt, oxeiecTBy. 

Y qe^OBiKa 04UHT, a3bIKT,, 04HHI HOCT>, 4Ba oa3a, ABa yxa, 4BU Exercises on 

the numerals. 

menu, 4B-B pyKii, 4bh Horn, 4ecaTb najbueBb Ha pyKB u 4ecaTb na.Abn.eBi p 74 
Ha Hori, Tp«4uaTb 4Ba 3y6a, h ceMb no3BOHKOBT>. Bt, bhcokochomt, ro4y 
lerape BpeMeHH, 4B-£Ha4naTb MicaneBT,, naTb4ecarb 4BU ne4iuH h 4Ba 
411a, imi'i xpiicTa iuecTb4ecaTi. mecTb 4Hen, hjh BoceMb Tb'icaiT, ceMbcoTT, 
BoceMb4ecaTT> neTbipe Haca, iui'i naTbcoTT, 4Ba4uaTb ceivib Tb'icaHT, h copoKT, 
MHiiyrb. Bt, KHi'ir-B cto .hictobt, 6e3i> o4Horo. 0'6a 6paTa n 66% cecTpu. 
IlojiTopa naca, n no^Topb'i MimyTbi. 4Ba py6jia ct, no^OBiiHoro 11 Tpn 
KoniflKii ct. noJOBHHOW. Bt, 6epK0Bn.ii 4ecaTb ny40BT>; bt> nydi copoKT, 
*yHTOBi>; bt> oyiiT'B Tpii4uaTb 4Ba JioTa; bt, aot% Tpii 30^0THHKa; bt, 

OyHTt 4eBaH0CT0 UieCTb 30-/10THHK6B'b. 

4bh nyxoBbia in.ianbi, Tpn uie.iKOBbie n^aTKa, qeTb'ipe nepoiiinHbie 
Hoata, naTb *ap#6poBbixT» HanieKT, h uiecTb npenpacubixT, KapTiiin,. Ciu 
4Ba qepHbie BopoHa, t-b Tpn Ci.ibia nepa, moii leTbipe noBbia KHi'irn; 
3tii naTb pi3BbixT, 4BTei1. 0'6a 6i4Hbie cnpoTbi h 66% Hecqamibia 
cupoTbi. 4Boe ciyr-b, Tpoe MacrepoBbixb, ieTBepo 4BTefl, uiecTepo 
coJAarb, 4boh lacbi, Tpon oikh, naTepbi nowHiinbi. IlepBbie no.iTopa 
qaca. IlepBbie copoKT, 4Hen; BTopoe cto c^i'imkobt,, h nocii4Haa tm- 
caia ry.ib4enoBT>. 

H Kynii.ii 04Horo 6bina n 04Hy .ioina4b, 04iim> cto.it, ii 04H0 3ep- 
Ka.io /!,Ba4naTb oaiiht, py6.ib, naTb4ecarb 0411a KoniiiKa. Tbicaia n 
0411a H04b. M0.104611 le^oBim, Tpii4uaTii 04Horo ro4a de3T, 4Ba4naTii 
04Horo 411a. He cy4u mciob-bk-b no 04H0My npocTynny n no 04H011 
oiinifiKB. 0<t>uuepT> ct, 4Ba4uaTbib 04Hiimt, co.uaTOMT,. lleTpT, IlepBbiH n 
EnaTepi'iHa BTopaa napcTBOBa.ui bt> ocbMiiaAuaTOMT, b%k%. IlfBe4bi VBa- 
jKaioTT, Kap.ia 4Bii}ia4HaTaro, a 4>paHuy3bi nocTaBiun naMaTHiiKT, TeH- 
pnxy ^eTBepTOMy. CTaTba 6huk nncaHa naTna4U3Taro 'mcia HHBapa 
Miicaua Tb'icaqa BoceMbcorx 4Ba4uaTb TpeTbaro ro4a, 11 npoii3uiecTBie 
OTiiociiToa kt, mecTOMy B'BKy, a iiMeHuo kt, naTbcoTT. ceMb4ecaTi, Tpe- 
TbeMy ro4y. 

IIlKam, ct, 4H)H{iihok) *ap*6poBbixT, Tape.iOKT,, n.ni ct, 4B"BHa4uaTbH) 
*ap*6poBbiMii Tape^KaMn. /Jp^kii, 3anpaaieHHbia napoio BopoiibixT, ao- 
maAeii, iuii AvyuA BopoHb'iMii.iouia4bM['i; unapeTa, 3anpaJKennaa uiecTbro 
pbiHdiMH .iouia4bMii, iuii mecTepKOH) pbDKiix'b jomaAeft. T6po4^ AexiiTb 
0TCR)4a bt, Tbica^B Bepcn,, ce^o bo CTa BepcTaxT,, a 4epeBHa bt, coponi 
BepcTaxT). Bt, Mockbti 6b'uo Tbicaia uiecTbcoTT, nepKBefi, iuii copoKT, 
copoKOBT, uepKBen. ft 40BO.ibCTByiocb ocbMi'uecaTbio pyS.iaMH (ii.ni 4ByMa 
copoKaMii py6.ieii) bt, iwicanT,, to ecTb 4eBaTbib CTaMii uiecTi'wecaTbH) 
PY6jamh bt, ro4T>. Onb He AommeTb 40 copoba jIUtt,; h OHa yaiep.^a 
copoha TpexT, ^i*tt,. Ona 40BO.ibHa copona KonifiKaMii, n ona y4HBii- 



184 RUSSIAN GRAMMAR. 

.wcb da KapTHHaMH. Oht> He Mo^eTi, npoauiTB MeH-Be da TBica*n> 
pyd-iefi bt, ro4i>. rdpo4T> ct, abjmA dauiHaMn; komoat. ct, mecTBw 
amoKaMii; 40MT, ct, copona OKHaMH; KpinocTL co CTanyniKaMii; nepKOBB 
o naTii i\iaBaxT>; 40MT, o Tpe'xB apycaxT,; AepeBHa ct, neTBipBMa BBTpa- 
hbimh Me^iLHimaMH. H Am6m paBno oddnxT, CLiHOBea n oObhxt, 40iepen. 
Out, iimbott, leTBepo weft, a 0Ha ocTaBiLia mrrepo cripon,. Moft 
dparB He mofb cmaiitb ct. stiimii 4ByMa ynpaMBiMn joinaa&MH. Out 

JKILIT, AOATO CT, CBOHMH naTLIO 4B0K)p04HLIMH dpaTBHMH. Kt, 3T0My 
MH.OiOHY CTaptlXT. IIpyCCKIIXT. e^IiMKOBT. Ha406H0 npn6aBHTB TBICaiy 

tbxb hobbixb pyd-iefi. 

KaauoMy no CTy pyfijefi h no copoKy KonieKT,. Bt, hbkotopbixt, 
MBcanaxi. no TpnanaTii 4nen, a bt, 4pynixT> no Tpn4naTn 04H0My 41110. 
Bt, Ka.Kn.owb capau 6buo no 4bb KapeTBi, a bt, Kaa^oii KapeTB no Tpn 
MyxtiuHti ii no HeTtipe aeenmnHBi. Ka)K40My no CTy no 4eBaH0CTy py- 
d.ieS n no copony no nani Koniein,. y HacT, no 4Ba4uaTii no ceMii 
o*ik6bt>. Khmxdz iacTB coiimeHia npo4aeica no no^yTopy pyd.ien 
cepedpoMT,. 

no yTpy He aoakeo cjw'itb o no^y4Hii. Bb nepBBie no^Ha out, He 
3iiajn> ito 4B^iaTB. Bt. ^eTBipe iaca no no-iyHoan ; iuf'i bt> naTB lacoBT, 
no noJiy4HH. 3'to cjyii'Mocb bt> nooii4Hie no.iro4a TBicaqa BoceMBcdn, 
copoKT. HeTBepraro ro4a. IlepBBie no.iiaca nponi^ii cnoKofiHO. Bt. npo- 
AOAmeme nepBBixB no-iyiaca. 3a mhoio 6bmo no.iTopacTa tbichit, py- 
6^iefi ro40Baro 40x64a. 
Exercises on fl aw6aw Teda, a tbi MeHa odimaeuiB. Mbi yBamaeMT, ero, a ee mbi 
the pronouns. J106HM1. AyiueBHO. y MeHa Miioro 4enen> ; a y Teda hbtt, hh kohbhkh. 
3acTyniiCB 3a Hero, 11 noHa4Biica Ha nee. IIocimh comhohd, h npuxo4ri 
ct> hhmt,. CKaM en, Trodx 0Ha npum^a ko mhb. Ee3T, Hero, de3T, 
Heft h desT, BacT, ;kh3hb mh-b CKy<ma. ft He Bibny iixt., a a C4B.iaio Bee 
4^a hhxt,. Mbi yBaacaeMT, BacT>, a bbi 3a6Bun HacT>. By4B bo mhb 
yBipeHT.: a noroBopw Ted'B. Mhb npiaTHo 6bitb ct> neio. $1 He 40- 
BBpaio cedi, a tbi 40Bo^eHT> co66bo. Mbi depeace'MT. ceda, a ohh ce6B 
Bpe4aTT>. 

Moil dpaTT., TBoa cecTpa n ero cbiht. bmbcth yqi'iMCB. H CTapaiocB 
yro4iiTB BaineMy y^iiTe^iio n HanieMy cMOTpiiTe^io. Mon 40MT. Kpaci'iBBe 
TBoero, a tboh codaKa MeHBuie Moeii. H miiBy de3T> hhxt., h Mory 
odonTiicB de3T> hxt. noMoinn. He xBajnicB cboiimh r rpy4aMH, a no4yMan 
CBoiixT. A-hThxT,. IIo4on4i'i kt. MoeMy ciojiy, n no4apii 4eHerT. CBoen 
cecxpB. Mbi roBopiiMT. cboiixt, 4B.iaxT., a bbi 3aHnMaeTecB cboi'imb 
ypoKOMT.. Yieme ropBKO ; ho n^04Bi ero caslaku. Tboii ca4BinpeKpacHBi; 
a y4HB.iaiocB iixt, KpacoTaMT,. 

Bu4nniB ah 3Ty codany n 3Toro KOTa, 3thxt. aiowe n tbxt. 4epeBBeBT>? 
Bt. sthxt. 3eM^axT, hbtt. 30J(OTa, h bt> tbxt. hbtt. cepedpa. H ciBinia.iT, 
3to on, Bamero dpaia, 110 a 3TOMy He BBpio. H xBa^bb Bame HaMB- 
penie; 4aBiio a npe4BiJ4'B^T, onoe. 4 3 bho ^h tbi HdiBeuiB bt. ceMT. ro- 
po4B? H yAHB^awcB 3TOMy ca4y, a tott, ^yiine. 3'th nepBa TynBi; 



CORRECT CONSTRUCTION OF THE EXERCISES. 185 

ciii 40Ma KaMeimtie; tu yjinnw ysKii. Tanie r./ia3a npoiiHuaTe.JbHbi; 
Tania 4tMa ne npiinocarb MecTii. TanoBLi jiwau. 

l Ie^OBiKT, 3 KOToparo Bbi BiUine, o^eiiB piera. Kmira, KOTopyro bli 
iiiTacre, o^eHb npiaTna. fl 3naK) 4^0, o kotopomt. bli roBopi'iTe. 
Bo4a, KOToporo a moiocb, onenb xo^OAHa. Bepen'icb Toro, kto .ibctiitt. 
Te6i. TotT), y noro Mnoro a^-m, He 4yMaeTT> o 3a6aBax-b. yqirrecb 
tomv, nero bh lie 3HaeTe. Bott, Tanoe cyKHo, Kanoe a Kynri.n>. Ka- 
k6bt> 6bui> Boena4a^bHiiKT>, TawoBbi n bohhli. Bott> 4pyn>, bi> qbiixi. 
pynaxi. moh cy4b6a. C.iyujaFica Toro, bt» qbeivrb 40Mi> Tbi muAb. Borb 
KHiira, Kaniixi) Ma^o, u cjyqail, KaKOBbie pi4Kii. 

KoTopbiS qacb, h bt> KOTopoMb qacy npiiueiub? Kani'iMii KHiiraniH 
3aHiiMaeuibca, h KaKie amah 34"bCb miiByrb? IloA'b KOTopbiM'b uaqa.ib- 

IIIIK0MT> Tbi CJyJKUUIb, H KaKOMy H3bIKy Tbi yqiHHbCR ? l lbll 3T1I 40Ma ? 

Ct. qbero no3BO^eHia tli BbiiHe.n> co 4Bopa! H He Bu4a.IT>, qbro 
in.iany GpociMii Ha no.n>. fl ne 3naio, ct> qbiJMii 4"£TbMii out. ry- 
jiaerb. qearb tm 3a66Tiinibca, 11 temt. a 3acaystH.n, tboi'o 4pyw6y? 
Ct> MUM'b mojkho no34paBHTb Te6a, u ott> qero tw no.iyqii.n> 6th 4eHbni? 

ClvO^bKO BOpCTT. OTT> 3T01'0 ropOAa 40 T0F0? H3T> CKO.lbKIIXT. TOMOB'b 

cocToi'iTb cie coHHHenie? IIo CKOJbKy py6.ieit 40CTaHeTca Baaib 1131. 
6toB npn6bUH? 

Tbi caM'b corjacriuibca co mhoio: caMbiil 3ByKT> ero ro.ioca npiaTeirb. 
fl iiaHiiMaio ciw KBapTiipy y caMoro xo3>inna. GaMwe nopoKii Haxo4arb 
y Baci> nsBiiHeHie. OHb Bceraa roBopiirb ceoE caMOMt. Bbi ne40- 
Bo^bHbi C06610 caMiiMH. Mli biU'B.iu ee caMoe. CaMaa civiepTb He 
CTpauina. Mbi bcb 40Bo^ibCTByeMca 04humt> stadOBaHieMfc. Tarn. 4y- 
Mawrb 04Hi HceHuuiHu. Mbi 66a xoti'jmt* cjyxciiTb e4iiH0My Bory. Bi» 
Ka?K40Mb co6paniH 6b'un rpaa(4aHe o66ero no.ia. Omi pa3CEHHbi no 
BceMy CBiTy. Ha4o6no npiiBbmaTb ko Bcanon" numu. 

H-bti. HHKoro 34"BCb: He npocii noMoinn hii y noro. Tli He -Buib 
HH^ero, h 3to ne ro4»Tca mi kt> MeMy. Yqucb ieMy nn6y4b ; 11 CKaJKii 
3to KOMy Hn6y4B. fl He npo4aMb CBoero 40Ma hh 3a ito, 11 bli np64a.1i! 
CBofi 3a nuTro. H3i> minero He c4"B^aeujb Hii^ero. Bt> Teneme iiicKo^b- 
KHXb MicaueB'b oht. e;Ke4neBH0 noKyna^i. no HicKo^ibKy coti> 4ynn>. 

0'6n cecTpu 4ypH0 roBopa r n> 4pyn> 4pyni. Anr.iiiqaiie 11 4>paH- 
Hy3bi HeHaBU4flTi> 4pyn> 4pyra. Mm xo4nxMT> ry^aTb 4pyrT) cb 4pyroivrb. 
Cin 40Ma ^ejKaTi. 04HHb 3a apyniMi. 4 0CKH nadpocanbi 04Ha ct. 
4pyr6io. 

fl Ai^aio 4o6po, CKO.ibKo a meAaio. Tw me.ihewb yqiiTbca. Oht> Exercises on the 
4yMaeTT>, hto 3HaeTi, bcu HayKii, 11 XBacTaerb cboi'imh ycnixaMH. Mbi ^[25 
He 4ep3aeM r b Bipirrb BamiiMT. aioBaMi>, xoTa bw roBopiiTe npaB4y. Moii 
coci^H nHTaHDTca oahiim'b x^idoMi., 11 ynoBawrb Ha npoBi^BHie. Bbi 
TopryeTe cyKnoisii., 11 bh TpedyeTe amoraro. To^iydb BopKyen; rop- 
jima CTOneT-b; cofiana ^aeTi>; menKii CpeuiyTi,; ^aryuiKH KBaKaiorb; 
BopoHbi rpanaioTi.; BopoiiLiKapKawTi,; JLBi.ipLiKaioTi.; o-ieHLTOKyerb; Kypbi 
Ky4axiyTi>; Kouina MaynnTi,; 6hkh MbinaTi; nne^a H(y}KH;i'iTi>; 3Mtia uih- 

Reiff Russian Grammar. 1 O 



186 RUSSIAN GRAMMAR. 

imtl; op.ib'i Tpy6fh"j>; co-iobbm medeayTT,; obum n aniaTa 6jeibTo; cbuhlii 
xpi'oKaroTT* ; jmc&ua. bh3jkhto; oceA'b peBerb; Ka-iKyin, KJoxqen; ne- 
pene'.iKa BaBanaerb; rifcTyxi KynypeKaerb; copona CKpeKoien; nonyrafi 
6o.iTaeTT,. TpoMt rpeMiirb; B04a khiihtt,; ABepii CKpunArb; pyibii 
mymmiTb ; oroHb TpeinnTT, ; 3Bi34bi CBepKawrb ; cojHije cb^tiitt. ; meAH 
poaTca; a^Ma3Li 6.iecTaTT. ; cyxie ^nicTta xpymarb; BiVrepb CBHCTaeTt; 
CHBn> Taero. Co.iHue 03apaeri> 3eM.no cbohmh jyiaMH, rpien. h jkh- 
bhtt, ee. 3eM^a odpamaeTca BOKpyra co.iHua. Bbi Hanpacno ropwexe. 

ft ry.ia.ii> Biepa no depery p^Kii, Kor^a co.raue cawAOCb. Moa 
cedpa cnA'B.ia no4i> AepeBOMi., KOTopoe Kaia-iocb BiTpoivrb. Biepa mm 
MHoro paSoTa.in, HiiTa.iu, nrica.m n piicoBa.in. Obum Mpyn> ott> CTyatH. 
Ero MaTb 4anH0 yMep^a. HenpiaTe^in 3anep.iii ero bt> KpinocTii. B'tott. 
He^oBiKT> ocAim> } u ero JKeHd or.10x.1a. Moii 4epeBba Bb'icox^ii h moii 
HBUTb'i 3aBa^n. 

MoCKBa 40.iro GyAerb KpacoBaTbca bo iMaBi ropo40BT> PycatHxt. 
Tbi 6y4euib nrpaTb, h a 6\Ay uncaib. PoccitiCKoe rocy4apCTBO Open. 
6e3npepb'iBHo B03BbiuiaTbca ; h Bcer4a npioSpuTen, 66.n>e ciubi h ciaBbi. 
BejiiKifi rocy^apb HiiKor4a He yMpert. 

/{iAaft, hto TeSi roBopan., h He 4yMafi ynpaMHTbca. He TepaTi na- 
4e»4bi, h ynoBaft Ha Bora. C/rynafiTe 40M08, h He TO^iKyftTe CTO-ibKO. 
He TpaTb BpeMeHH, h ne MYHb jkhbothbixt,. FoBopiiTe Bcer4a npaB4y, 
h ne cnopbTe o nycTanax-b. 

Co^oBeil noeTT>; .iouia4b pace'T^; bojikt, Boerb. EdbSB-BpH, KOTopbie 
cnaTT> bck> 3»My. Tbi 6epeuib MHoro Ha ceoa, h a He 6epycb 3a 3to 
4T>.io. SaiiM'b bu MHeTe 3Ty KHiiry? Oht, muBeTb bt. Mockb-b, ii 3Jibi- 
BeT"b 6oraTbiMi> ne.ioB'EKOM'b. IlacTyxi. CTpnace'T-b OBeui.; KpedbaHe 
npa4yTi> jem h TKyrb xo-icrb. Oht> x6ie r n» cnaTb, h bbi xoTHTe nrpaTb. 
Moh C0CB4T. 6epen> Mena ; KaKi. po4Haro Cb'iHa, h He Mon> co mhow 
pa3daTbca. HeiipiaTe^iH cokvau MHorie ropo4a; ohi'i yB.ieK.mcb 3a66oio 
h MmeHieMT>. IlacTyxT. nacb oBeu'b na ^yry. H noiu.iib 3a ^iKapeMT> 7 
h Tbi npnuMeuib mh"B 4eHen>. 3'tott> ropo4 r b UB-ETerb, h oht, 4o^iro 
6y4eTT> ubuctii ci'uoio 11 6orarCTBOM'b. H 4aMT> Te6i KHiiry, a hto Tbi 
4auib mhu? Tbi He Moaceuib roBopiiTb: ito oht> 4acTi> Mim 3a sto? 
He depii na ce6a Toro, nero Tbi He MOJKemb Hcno.iHHTb. ftim, jkiibhtc 
Miipiio, lie KJflHiiTecb, HHKor4a He jn'iTe ; 11 Be4UTe ce6a xopomeHbKO. 

3Bipn xo4aTT> h 6iraH)TT>, nTi'mbi 11 Myxa .ieTaK)TT> ; pbidbi njiaBaiOTT>, 

H ^epBH n6^3aK)TT>. HoCMOTpt't, CK)4a H4eTT> CO^aTT.; 3a HHMT. 6liffiHTT, 

co6aKa. Biunuib, KaKi. db'icTpo ^eTiiTi. 3Ta ^acTowa; ohij Bcer4a TaKi 
jeTatOTi.. Cefl Mopan-b 40Jiro njaBa.n, no ^e'pnoMy Mopro. Mto Taivn, 
iMHBeTi Ha B04i? >KeHbi C^aBani. hocimh B04y h Tacna^iH 4poBa. ^Ito 

Tbi HeCeiHb BT> 3TOMT. MtlUKl? CMOTpi'l, KaKyK) B83aHKy 4pOBT> 3T0TT, 

neJioBiiKi. TamuTi. Bii4ii^H Tor4a, iero He bha&jh 40T6-1U. 

HenpiaTe^ib piiHy^ica bt> r6po4T» a Kiiuy^ca 11a Kopb'iCTb. Mo.mia 
3acBepKoa. Mo^Hia CKBepny^a, rpaHyjrb chjbhlih rpoM^, 3eM^a 4por- 
Hy^ia, uepKOBb 3aTpawacb. BpaTi, Mofi Jen, h 3axpanijn,; oht, rp6MKO 



CORRECT CONSTRUCTION OF THE EXERCISES. 187 

xpanny.ii> h npocny.ica. Mory An Ha4'fiaTbca, <rro .iripa Moa TpoHerh 
eme Bame x.iaAHoe cep4ue? C6.Mue 3a6.1ncTa.10, ho ire iia4o.iro: 6.iec- 
Hyjo h CKptuocb. Mli Bb'i6poca,in 3a okho Becb copi.; bt> copy mli 
Bbi6pocn.ni ii BaHuiyio 6yMary. 

Ilpouwaro roAa a xajKnBa.iT> bt> r6poAT>. CoKpaTt roBapiiBaAT>. 
HiMHH H34aBHa auiBa.iH bt> HoBtropo4^. ^KiiByw bt> Mockbtj, a i>3;Ka.n> 
bt> TpoiiHKyio ,/IaBpy. Bt> M0.i04bia A-hTa. a aaiBa.n> bt> 4epeBM>. 

E'oin 6bi KaMHii roBopnTb Mor.iri, oini naymMi 6bi Te6a ocTopoat- 
hoctii. E'oin 6bi kto uu6vAb BOine.iT. kt> HaMT> bt> 3Ty MimyTy, oht> 
yBii4*JT> 6bi Haci> bt> OTqaanin, h yoibnna.n. 6bi Hauin CTeHama n naiuii 
B34oxn. Ectl Ma.io npeAMeTOBT* bt. cbt>tt>, Ha KOTopbie a He o6pauta\n> 
6bi BHiiMania. He 6buo Tandro KaMeimaro cep4na, KOTopoe He n3.ni- 
Ba.ioci> 6hi bt> c.ie3axT>. 

Co^aTt 3tott, ciy^u'i-it 40-iro, n BLicjiyjKiUT> nenciio. He BcaKiH 
BbioiymuTT. ee ct> TaKiiMi OT.nWieMT.. Oht> 6biBa.n> bo mhohixt. cpa- 
JKeHiaxi., n Be34"B 0T.w1a.1ca 6.niCTaTe.ibHoio xpa6pocTbio. OcoCeHiio 
OT.1n111.1ca oht> npn BsaTin 04H01I nenpiaTOibCKoft 6arrapeH. Oht> nepBbift 
B3o6pa^ca Ha dpycTBept, y6ri.iT> HenpiaTe.ibCKaro co-iAaTa n B3a.n> nynjKy. 
3a 3to ero Harpa4i'un 6pAenoMT>. IIotomt. Harpam4a.n1 ero h 4pyn'iMii 
oTJiWiflMH. Tenepb oTiipaBiiTca oht> bt> po4nHy, nocoiiiTca bt> CBoefl 
ceMbi, 11 oyaerb pa3CKa3WRaTb cboiixt> noxo4axT>, KaK'b xaauiBa.it na 
TypoKT> 11 4>paHuy30BT>, k3kt> 6iiBa.n> BparoBT>, k3kt> TepnB.n. r6.io4T>, 
CTpa4a.1T> orb pam>, n yrEina-ica Mb'ic.iiio, hto oiymnrb CBoeMy Pocy- 
4apro cep4ueMT> ii 4yiuoio. YnoBaii Ha Mena. 

ye.iOBiKT,, jiro6flnUfi npaB4y, HenaBriAHTT> .io>Kb. Kynaiomeeca 4nTa; Exercises on the 
co6ana, Cpocawmaaca Ha npoxoranxT.. Kynenr>, no.iyiaBinin TOBapbi ii3T> participles. 
./ToH40iia, np04aBa.1T> hxt> BbiroAHo. Kynem>, no-iyniBiuift TOBapbi H3T> 
.floHAOHa, np64a.iT> tixt> Bbiro4HO. CTpajK4yniifi 6o.ii3Hiio, iihictt. o6.ier- 
ieiiia. 3a}Kni noTyxmyro CBtHy, 11 bwtph 3aMp'p3uiee ctck.io. C^aBa 
repoio, cnacmeiviy CBoe oTeiecTBo. PbiKaromiS .ieBT>, Mbiiamift 6biK^, 
jiatomaa codana, nowmiii niiTyxt, BopKyiomifi ro.iy6b, BbipajKaH)TT> cboh 
HyBCTBa 11 JKCiama. 

Mope, Bo.iHyeivioe niTpaMH, ycTpauiaeTT. n.iOBu.e'BT>. 4ohb, ^K)6iiMaa 
OTueMT., CTapaeTca 3ac.iytfaiBaTb ero jho66bb. 46.ukho noMoraTb He- 
caacTHOMy, roHiiMOMy cy4b66io h npeoiivryeMOMy Hey4aiaMH. 3'to cua- 
Toe mo.iok6, 11 bott> TepTbift Ta6aKT>. 3'to 3apa?KeHHoe pyjKbe. Ha 
pbiHKii npo4aibTca 6iiTbie ryca, CMO.ie'Hbia Bepe'BKii, OTKopM.ieiiHbia no- 

pOCHTa H CTpiIH(eHHbia obhh. 

Poccia o6iiTaeMa mhotiimh Hapo4aMH. /(66pbie rocy4apn .iioSiimm 
cboiimh H644aiiHbiMii, n yBa?KaeMbi C0CB4HMH. TaTapbi 6bun no6t>JK4eHbi 
h pa36nTbi Ha KyjniKOBOMT> no.11>. Tpy4bi tboii 6y4yTT> yBiH^aHbi ycni- 
xomt>. HMeHa 6biBaK)TT> CK^iOHaeMbi, a rviaro.ibi cnparaeaibi. Cefl Be- 
.iriKifi no.iKOBo4euT> 6y4eTT> hthmt> bt> noTOMCTBU. MocKBa dw^a pa3o- 
peHa h cojKJKena BparaiviH. 3'to py^be 3apa»eH6. 3'Ta KHiira npe- 
KpacHO nepen^eTeHa. 



188 RUSSIAN GRAMMAR. 

Exercises on the JIOAt'l CIOAa, Il6o a 34^CB JKHBy. T&% BaUTB 6paTT>? Er6 HUTT, a6m&. 

adverbs and the rr . , « „ , , 

gerunds. K ^ a 0H,fc no-Bxa.it Biepa BeiepoMT.? Tbi cy^iiuiB ymho, a 6parB tboO 
p. 136. cyAiirB yMHBe. ft xowy niiifiKO, a tbi xoAtiuib uni6*ie. Bbi roBopi'iTe 
no-pyccKH hiicto, a cccTptina Bama eine Hnnie. 3aBTpa noi4eMi> mbi 
Aa^eKO, a ipe3i> ro4i> eme 4ajBine. Tbi noeniB xopouio, no otia noerB 
Jiyquie. ft npouiy Baci y6u4iiTe.iBHBHuie. ft 6.iaro4apib Baci> nonop- 
HBMuie. 

Fyjiaa Ha Gepery p-BKt'i, a HaciajiuaiocB npoxJia40K) Benepa. 3K r dJiin 
o Heciac.THBixT>, CTapaiiTecB noMor&TB hmt>. ft BacT> y*iy, }Ke.flaa BaMt 
4o6pa, li HaAiacB, hto bbi ycnieie bt> Haynaxi.. He yMia cAi.iaTB 
iero Hii6y4B, npocri coBiVra, lie Kpacn-Ba. /Jijaft Ao6po, lie 6oacb hh- 
Koro. He aqamko -bctb .leaca. CiyM OTe^ecTBy n yMrrpaa 3a nero, 
mbi ncno.iHfieMT> cboh aoayt>. Ho-iyHUBT. nucBMo Bame, n y3iiaBT>, ^ero 
bbi jKe.iaeie, a iieMe^eimo otb-bmIi-b. OTo6'B4aBuiH, ocTaHBca 40Ma. 
HanncaBiuii nucBMo, nojoauiBmn bt> KyBeprB n 3ane<iaTaBuiii, OTAaii ero 
ira no4Ty. npniue4uiH 40moh, a cbji-b nucaTB. }KeniiBiuHCB, oiit> no- 
ixa.n> bt> 4epeBHio. npoctuBBum iacB y nero ; a nome./n> aomoh; pa3- 
4-bbiiiiicb ii ^ermii ; a cnopo ycnyxB. 

Exercises on the Ee3T> Ha4e?K4BI He^B3a ?KIITB BT> CBirB. Ott> pUKU 40 .1UCY ABfc 

prepositions. Be pcTBi. HeMi> bbi roBoptiTe? Mbi Tpy4i'iMca 4^a 66maro d.iara. 
Me^uy 4omomt> h ca40Mi> npocTpaHiiBift 4Bopi> ct. KOHibiiiHaMii. Bora 
pa4" He yHBiBatt. Aw6oBb ki> rocy4apio h OTe^ecTBy. Oht> Mmerb y 
CBoero 4H4ii. Co-wtt. bbickoiiwb ii3t-3a Kycia. Jyn» co^He4HBift 
npoHHKaen. ckbo3b B04y. 3'tott. hc.iob'bk'b npH CMepiH. nTi'nia Jie- 
TaeTij no4'i> o6.iaKaMii. ft no.ioauijn. KHiiry no4T> CTo./n>. Ca4HTecb 3a 

CTO./l'B, H CH4lITe 3a CTO-IOM-B. BpaTT> MOH 'hABT'b BT> MocKBy, nOTOMy 

hto ero ^ena aaiBerB bt. MocKBi. Ope.iT) chautt. Ha 4epeBB. 3'ia 
pibMKa pa36i'uacB Ha Me^nia nacTH. ft 40ca4yiocB Ha 6paTa Moero 3a 
ero jmiociB. He 3a66TBca lyiKiix-B 4'B-iax'B. Moh 4pyri» yuni6ca 
o6t> yro^i> CTO^a. Bo4a TeieTT> cb KpoB./m Bott> 4epeBBa ct> AucThRMu, 
ho (5e3T> ub-btobt>. 3 r Ta co6aKa 6y4en. ct. KopoBy. Aim (5iraK)TT> no 
4Bopy h no ca4y. Mbi pa6oTa^n oti> nepBaro no naioe ihc^o A'b- 
rycTa. Oh-b hocht'b Tpaypi> no CBoe'Mi> 6paTB. 

Exercises on the Mofi 434a p04H^ICa II HCHJIT> BT> MoCKBi, a He BT> TBepiI. SHaeUIB Ali, 

conjunctions. q T0 Haull> yq H Te^B He34opoBi>. E'meAu bbi He npi^eTe, to a ocepwycB. 

Cnpocn y Hero, xo<ieTT> ah ou-b -BxaTB, n.ni HaMBpeBaeTca ocTaTbca 

40Ma. Oht> 3a6oTiiTca 66^-Be o 6paT-B uemeAii o cecrpi. npiaTHte 

4i^aTB 4o6po ApyniM-B, h-bmt. caMOMy no^ynaTB 6jiaroTBopeHia. nycTb 

oht, npiHAeTt; nycKaii ohh yiAyn.. 4a coymne Baci> He 3acTaHeTi, Ha 

^ohcb. 4 a 34.paBCTByeTT> U,apB. Mbmi, npn.ieJBH'Be tbi 6y4euiB yqimca, 

tumi. ^erqe 6y4eTi> 4^ia-Te6a yieHBe. 

Exercises on the 3iiMa npiaTHa. ^Iib4n cyTB CMepTHBi. H6Bropo4t 6bu r b 6oraTi». Poccia 

concord of G ctb o6unipHaa HMnepia. B6wira ecTB napnna pbkt> Fyccnnxi.. npiaTe.ib 

Z°ul. M °ff> BbI 6y4eTe 4ob6^bhbi. y HacB ecTB 6o.iBmie 3anacBi. y MeHa 

3aBTpa 6y4yTi> 4eHBrn. Ea Be.iiWecTBO (IlAinepampma) BBiiixaja, Ero 



CORRECT CONSTRUCTION OF THE EXERCISES. 189 

npeBocxoAiiTdbCTBO (TeneydJiz') yixa.n>. Ero ItaepaTopcKoe Btico- 
iecTuo (BeAUfiiii KffH3b) 6bWb 40B0.iein>. Teorpa^ia n HcTOpia cyTb 
BecbMa no./ie3HLia SHama. Mo.iiaTb Tpy4iio. CKO.ibKO 6bi.io Taivrb A^Teft? 
MocKBa siiaareHHTa; ropoAT> MocKBa 3HaMenrirb. Kht&B MiiorojiOAeirb; 
rocy4apcTBO KiiTafi MiiorojiibAiio. Y nero ecTb TpnAuaTb oah& ^omaAb. 
Kmira, KOTopyro bh iirraeTe, oieiib 3a6aBHa. Botb 4e.ioBiKT», hbhmh 
Tpy^aMii no^3yeMca. 

B04d eCTL CTHXlfl. A.ieKCaHApi MaKe46HCKift 6bUT> BCHIKin IIOJKO- Exercises on the 

BOAeirb. TaTapbi Ghah CBupinu. Mofi a-bat> 6bUT> o*nnepv, moB auat» depe A "o r e d S ce ° f 
6bui> Tor4a o*HuepoMT>. roBoparb, ito komctli 6m.ih hah eme 6y4yTT> p . 150. 
n.ianeTaMe. 

4ojK4b ocB-B^aeTTj seM.iro. 3^04in HeHaBi'uarb qecTiibix'b .iKueB. 
Eypa, onycTomiinmaa Hainn no.ia, pa3opri.ia mhohixt. noce.iaH-b. ToBopii 
Bcer4a npaB4y. Moft 6pan> 6bWb 66.ieirb bcio 3»My. ft -Bxa.n. ui.iyio 
BepcTy BepxoMT>. Te6a XBa.iarb 3a npiuemanie. Oht> y4apn.ica 061. 

CTSHy. Mbl CHAIIM'b RT> B04B IIO UieiO. CbIHT> p6CTOMT> CT, OTU.1, H 404b 
nOHTII CT> MaTb. 

CKyneui npe4noHHTaerb 4eiibrii ciaB-B, a bohhi ciaBy 4eHbraMi.. 
Mo.iHia npeAiuecTByerb rpoMy. /(HB.iwcb Bauieswy TepniniK). HpaBaTca 
m\ BaMT> 3th KapTiiHbi. He mcth TBoeMy HenpiaTeJio, 11 4"b\iau 4o6po 
o6ii4'EBmeMy Te6a. BbiTb iy4y. .IriTbca roproinMi. CAe3ai\rb. Pe6e'HKy 
xo^eTca niiTb. Cu.ibHOMy He.ioBi>Ky He npiMiiano o6n?KaTb c.iafiaro. 
no4pajKanie Incycy Xpncry. Aw66nb kt> 4o6po4'BTe.iH h HenaBiicTb kt> 
nopoKy. 

Biixcy r.ia3aMii, oca3aro pynaMH, cJb'nny yinaiviH, o6oHaio hocomt., 

BKyiliaH) a3blK0MT>. M3MaH.1T> 6bI.1T. B33TT> CyBOpOBblMT., II OiaKOBT. TIo- 

TeMKHHbiMT). 3'thxt> osimepoB-b bcb Ha3biBaK)TT> repoaMH. Bo.ibiiofi 
e4Ba uieBeJUTi. ry6bi {uau ry6aMii). THyiiiaiocb o6Manoivn> n aojkmo. 
34"BCb 4b'iuiaTT> ii'iCTbiM-b b634Yxomt>. nowepTBOBanie auteHiK) 3a Tocy- 
4apa h o-Te^ecTBO. Oht> 4o6p-b cep4ueMT>, ho c.ia6T> ro.iOBoro. y'TpoMT> 
Ha4o6no BCTaBaTb, 4He'Mb pa66TaTb, BeiepoMT. 0T4bixaTb, h Hoibro cnaTb. 
rioMnpii Moero 4pyra ct, ero 4a4ero. Ilo34paB.WBD Bacb ct. BauinMH 
ycnixaMH. 

Cbim. jvioero HCKpeHHaro 4pyra Bnepa yixa.n>. /JiTii do^buiaro yMa 
Hepi4K0 6biBaiOTT> xiuw. CocTaB^eHi> cniicoKT> o^nuepaMi. Hamefl 4H- 
B»3in. Ile^eiiie x^i6a. H Kyniut 4>yHTi> laio h cameHb 4poBT>. Ctojbko 
Tpy40BT> u 3a6oT r b npona.io no-nycTOMy. Pyccnie B3a.iH napiiffii, ocbm- 
Ha4uaTaro MapTa Tb'icaia BoceMbcoTT. HeTbipHa4uaTaro ro4a. H He 
•bmt> x.ii6a, ho nbK) B04y. H "Bmt> x^ , e6t., ho ne nbw boam. H He no- 
jyMa^i. hh nncbMa, hh nocb'uKii. Bi> 3tomt> nucbMi n%rb hii 04hoh 
ouii'iOKii. 4^cTaHb mh-b 4eHen>. Bohhh JKCiarorb 6i'iTBbi h iimyTi. c^aBbi. 
C.iaB0.iK)6eirb mamAerb noiecTeft. Tbi xo'ieuib 6oraTCTBa, h ooiiuibca 
Tpy4a. Bbana no.iHa brhI 4o6pbiii He^OBim. ^^41. 3^i60bi h 3aBHCTH. 
36^oto 4opo;Ke cepe6pa; CBHHeu'b Taace^iie ^e^isa. Oht> npociiT-b 



190 RUSSIAN GRAMMAR. 

M'uoctbihh pa^Pi XpiicTa. O'tabtxx npiaTem. nocAU patfoTbT. B4o.flb 
3Toro 6epera TaneTca nunb ropt. Bojkh 6po4aTT> okojio 4epeBnn. 

Moft 6paTi> xpaHiiTi. npncyTCTBie 4yxa npn bcuxt. HenpiaTHOCTaxi, 
bt» h(h3hh. Cefl ropo^T. nocTpoem. Ha KpyT6MT. 6epery owcTpofi p-BKri. 
I^epKOBB o naTii oaBaxT.. Ohi> n^aqerb no CBoeMt OTui. 



Bo.iraKBHHqA. 

Oahei BAOBa HMi-ia 4ByxT. 40iepefi: cTapmaa (5bua noxona Ha cbohd 
MaTb h .flnueMt h upaBOMT., to ecTt, OHa 6bua Tarn, me 4ypHa n Tain. 
me 3.1a, Kant ea MaTB. Htikto He AK>6uA-b iixt.; bcb ott. huxb Cirajin. 
MeHBinaa me 6buk npenpacHa h 4o6po4yniHa. Bcb ee jho6i'mh. Ho 
3 jaa MaTb n 3^aa cecTpa ee HeHaBiiA'&.ui ; 6e3npecTanH0 GpaiiH.in ; oahei 
OHa AQJimm 6buk pa(5oTaTb bt> 40mh, tohhtl nenb, MecTn ropunubT, 
CTpanaTb bt> KyxHU. Eu4Ha;KKa iuaicajia ct> yTpa 40 Be^epa, ho He 
.i-BHtuacb pa66TaTb; 6biJia nociyuiua, Tepn-EJiHBa, h Bee to 6b'uo Ha- 
npacHO, 1160 hhtbmT) He Mor.ia yro4iiTb Ha 3.iyro MaTb h Ha 3^yio ce- 

CTpy CBOK). 

EjKe4HeBH0 3Ta 6iAHaa 4-BBymKa AOJUKna 6biJia, ct. 6o-ibuiHMT> KyB- 

IJIUHOMT., X04I1TB 3a B040K) BT> 6MMHIOK) pOUTy, BT> KOTOpOH HaX04H-lCa 

HiicTbiH hctohhttkt.. Q4HaJK4bi noui.ia OHa, no ofibWHOBeniro, kt» 3TOMy 

HCTOIHRKy. 4^Hb 6bWb OieHb HCap'OKl. HanOJIHIIBT. KyBIHliHT. B040K), 

OHa B03Bpama.iac& 40MOH. B4pyn> biUiott, nepe4T» co66k> CTapynray. 
„4nTa Moe!" — CKa3a.ia en cTapyuina: — „4aft mh-b HamiTbca. H 
ycToa* mh-b JKapKO." — „Ct» oxotoio, 6a6yuiKa! u cKa3a.ia A^ByuiKa: 
r BOTT>! Hanefica!" H ona no4a.ia CTapyraKH KyBHiuHT.. 

CTapyimca ott> c.ia6ocTH ciua Ha TpaBy, a M0.i04aa KpacaBHiia CTa^a 
nepe4T> Hero Ha ko^*bhh, h octopojkho no44ep)KHBa^a KyBimiHT>, nona 
OHa nn^a B04y. — „Bjiaro4apK) Te6a, Miijiaa!" CKa3a.ia CTpyuma, Ha- 
ni'iBuincb: „B [I}K y, Xi ' ro ™ Ao6poe ; ^acKOBoe 4«Ta, h xony Te6a Harpa- 
41'iTb 3a tbok) yc^yjK.iriBOCTb. 3Han me, a BO-flineGmma, n Hapo^HO B3ajia 
Ha ce6a bh4t> CTapyuiKH, hto6m Te6a ncnbiTaTb. Pa4yrocb, hto th Tanaa 
466paa, n Borb, hto a xoiy 4^a Te6a C4i-iaTb: BcaKift pa3T», Kor4a Tbi 
CKaacemb c.iobo, i'i30 pTa y Te6a Bb'ina4erb hjh npeKpacHbift ub-btoki., 
hjh 4parouiHHbifi KaMenb, n^n 6o.ibmaa »eMiy)KHHa. IlpocTH, 4py«6Ki!" 
H B0.9me6iiima H3He3Jia. 

IlpeKpacHaa 4"BByuiKa B03BpaTtuacb 40moh. ,,rA"B tm TaK'b 40Jiro 
6bua? a cnpoctua y Hea ct> cep4neMT» MaTb. — „*Ito th TaKi> 4o.iro 
4i^ajia bt. p6m"B?" 3aKpnHa^a 3jaa cecTpa. — „BnHOBaTa, 3aM-BuiKa^acb! a 
OTB'BHa^a 6"B4Ha?KKa, h bt. Ty caMyro MirayTy ct. npeKpaciibixt ry6i ea 
CKaTiijJHCb 4B-B po3bJ, 4B"B HteMHyHtHHM h 4Ba 6oJbuiie H3yMpy4a. — 
„ 1 Ito a Bi'iaty?" BocKJiiKHyjia y4nB^eHHaa MaTb! ,,3'to kh-btbi! 3'to 
AparouiHHbie KaMHn! 1 Ito ct. to66h) cA^JiaAocb I" — KpacaBnua npo- 
CT04yuiH0 pa3CKa3a.ia eft CBoeft bctp^hb ct, BOJine6Hiiqero, a Me*4y 
tbwl UBBTbi, a4Ma3bi h ^eMiyrT. TaKT. h cb'ma^ncb ct. ry6T» ea. — 



CORRECT CONSTRUCTION OF THE EXERCISES. 191 

„Xopoui6 JKe! u npoBop^a^ia MaTb: „3aBTpa nouiAib bt> pomy CTapmyro 
mow AOHb, ri ct> Hew to me dvAerb." 

H na Apyroe yTpo, ona Cha3a^a CBoeft A04epu: ,,HbiHb4e noftAeuib 

3a BOAOIO Tti: B03LMH KyBUIl'lHT. ; 110 CMOTpiI me, eCAll BCTpiTIIIUb y 

HCToiiniKa CTapyuiKy, /xaft eft iianiiTbca h npiuacnaiica kt> neft xopo- 
meHbKO." 3.iaa A"£B40HKa naxMypiuacb, ct> AOcaAoro B3a.ia KYBiuuH'b; 
HexoTa nouua bt> pdmy, h bo bcw Aopdry Bop4a.ia. CTapyuiKa ciiA^-ia 
yace y iiCToquiiKa. „3a4epnnii mii-b boam, Moa Mri.iaa! - ' cna3a^a oh& 
AiBo^KB: „?KapKO, X04y nani'iTbca" — ,,Kah"b 6m He Tam>! ft ne 3a 
rBMT> npnui^a CH)Aa, iTOdb'i ya/iyauiBaTb CTapbiMT> dpoAaraMT>. Hanbeuibca 
h Ce3T> MeHa!" — „KaKaa me tw rpydaaT' CKa3a.ia eft CTapyiLKa: ,,H 
nanaJKy Teda. Ct> 3thxt> nopT>, npn KaaiAOM-b ciob-b TBoeMTb, dyAerb 
Bb'maAaTb y Te6a 1130 pTa luii sm'&A hah .aaryiHKa." Una ii34e3.ia, a 
3.iaa ABBHOHKa nodbata^a aomoh, pasGiiBinn Cb AocaAbi KyBim'iirb CBoft. 
,, 1 Ito CKajneuib, Mi'uaa A04Ka!'' cnpocii.ia MaTb, yBiiA'BB'b ee H3Aa^ieKa. ~ 
„Heiero cnasaTb!' oTB^a^a A04b, u B4pyn> bucko4iuu i'i3o pTa ea ab'B 
sm-bh h ab'B axadbi! — ,,^0 a Biiwy! naKoft cTpax't!" 3aKpii4ajia MaTb. 
„Ho bo BceM'b 3tomt> BiiHOBaTa TBoa cecTpa! ii AaMi> eft 3HaTb." H 
ohb dpocjuiicb diiTb MeHbuiyw A04b. 

OHa, licnyraBuiiicb yrpo3T>, CKpb'uacb bt> pomy, aoato 6-zmdAa, He 
CMia or^anyTbca, sadsjKa.ia Aa^eno, 11 naKoneu.'b noTepa.ia Aopdry. Ho 
3to db'uo Kb ea C4acTiro. l|apchift cbiiib, KO'iopbift TyTi> 3aoaB.ja.1ca 
oxotow, HaxoAiMCa bt. lito Bpena bt> pours; oht> yBiJA'B.i'b KpacaBimy, 
KOTopaa, ciUa Ha TpaBfc, ropbKo luaKa.ia. — „ 1 Ito ct> Toddro CA'SJaAOCb? 
o MeM'b Tbi n^euib, Mi'uaa?" cnpociui oht>, B3aBi> ee .lacKoao 3a pyny. — 
„E6;Ke Moft! KaKT> mm* He n-ianaTb! MaTywba Bbinia^a MeHa H3b AOMy." 
Una roBopiua, a UB'bTb'i h AparouinHbie KaMim cbina.nicb ct> ea po3o- 
Bbixb rydij, ii c^e3bi odpama^ncb bt> HveMHyauuibi? — ; , 1 1to 3to 3iia- 
ihtt>?" cupoci'Li-b uapcKift CbiR-b : „oti nero 3tu HBiiTbi, xceMHyni h 
naMiiH?" B-EAHaatKa pa3CKa3a.ia napCKOMy Cb'my o tomt>, hto ct> Hero 
ciyniLiocb. — OHb no.iiodn.i'b ee, h no^iio6iLrb eme do^ite 3a to, hto 
ona dbua Taicb Aodpa h Miua, Hea{e.i» 3a ea uB^Tbi ii AparuuiHHbie 
KaMHH. Oht> B3a.i r b ee ct> coddro, npeACTaBiui. ee D,apro, o'my cBoeMy, 
KOTdpoMy OHa TaK?Ke nonpaBii.iacb, ii l],apb no3BO.nub Cb'iiiy na Heft 
atenuTbca. TaKiiMi 6dpa30M'b OHa CAi^a.iacb D,apeBiioio, a no caiepTH 
D,apa, KorAa ea My?K r b B3ouiewH> na oTHOBcnift npecTdyn>, U,apunero, ii 
dbua U,api'iHeio Addpoio. A 3^aa cecTpa ea? 4to CAi^a^iocb Cb Hero? — 
Ona aia.iocTHbiJvrb 6dpa30jyi-b K0H4iua cboh) a(ii3Hb. MaTb, KO'fdpyro ona 
de3npecraHHo cepAiMa h orop4ajia, npnnyavAeHa dbua ee BbirHaTb H3i> 
Aomy ; hhkto lie xoTixb eft AaTb npncraHiiiHa, h ona CKpb'uacb bt> .i-bcb, 
tab CKopo yiviep.-ia Cb AOCaAbi h rd^OAa. 



EXD OF THE SOLUTION OF THE EXERCISES. 



ERRATA, 



„ 87, , 


, 16, 


,. 126, , 


, 8, 


„ ib. , 


, 34, 


» 127, , 


, 32, 


„ 128; , 


, 26, 


„ 129, , 


, 18, 


ii 158, , 


, 36, 



1 of: piace, 


read; JKHJKe. 


„ nonaAeTbCA, 


„ nonaAe'Tca. 


„ nanyraft, 


„ nonyraft. 


„ H(enmnHa, 


,, 3tcH3. 


„ pacTaTLca. 


„ pa3CTaTbca. 


„ BA3aHKa, 


„ Ba3aiiKa. 


,, TpofluKiil, 


„ Tpoimtcift. 


„ ©goffer, 


„ ©c&Ioffer. 



